Home

Yokogawa DL7100 Manual

1. IM 701410 01E 3 6 Setting the Date and Time Function Date YY MM DD The last two digits of the year are used to set the year YY Time HH MM SS The 24 hour clock is used Note The date and time are backed up by the built in lithium battery e Leap years are taken into account Operating Procedure Displaying the System Configuration Menu 1 Press the MISC key 2 Pressthe System Config soft key to display the system configuration menu 3 Pressthe Date Time soft key to display the date and time display setting menu Turning ON OFF the date and time display 4 Select ON or OFF using the SELECT key Setting the Date and Time 5 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Year Press the SELECT key to display the Year input box Set the year using the jog shuttle In a similar fashion set the Month Day Hour Minute and Second Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Set and press the SELECT key to confirm the settings 0 0 n0 1999 67 63 10 12 39 j fio Normal MISC Stopped 55 iMS s ins System Conf ig K EETUETR eni 0 0 V Message Calibration ENG g Date Tine Click Sound Communication Display OFF pry sacl Date Year M SCSI ID Date Time Month Day Graphic Color Hour Minute Offset Cancel S
2. Hysteresis Line El z i X T A 2 000 V B B Hold OFF F D Hold OFF CHL 10 1 CHZ 10 1 Edge CHi j Hold OFF 20 0 Udiv 0 500 U diu Single N 9 08us 9 0Bus DC Full DC Full 7 2 V 9 08us Setting the trigger level 4 Ifthe jog shuttle control is not set to Level press the Level soft key 5 Tur the jog shuttle to set the trigger level You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits In addition pressing the RESET key sets the trigger level to 0 V Setting the trigger slope 6 Pressthe Edge soft key to select F amp or Fy Setting the probe attenuation 7 Press the Probe soft key to select 1 1 or 10 1 Setting the hold off 8 Setthe hold off time according to the procedures given in 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time IM 701410 01E 6 9 HunebbuL H 6 7 Generating Triggers on the Power Signal SIMPLE Function Operating Procedure SIMPLE Source 1 2 3 JE L L Setting the trigger source Press the SIMPLE key Press the Source soft key to display the trigger source menu Press the Line soft key L 4 Hold OFF 6 08us Setting the hold off Set the hold off time according to the procedures given in 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time 1999 07 05
3. 25k 50 k 10k 20k 5k 10k 2 5k 5k 1k 2k 500 250 100 ke For the setting enclosed by the bold line repetitive sampling is active IM 701410 01E App 5 E xipueddy Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length Record length 500 k words DL7100 When Mode other than Envelope Mode is Active Rep Repetitive sampling mode When Envelope Mode is Active Interleave mode OFF Interleave Mode ON Rep OFF Rep ON Rep OFF Rep ON Interleave mode OFF Interleave Mode ON Sample Displayed Sample record len rate gth word S s Displayed record len gth word Sample Displayed rate record len S s gth word Sample rate S s Displayed record len gth word Sample rate S s Displayed record len gth word Sample rate S s 500k 1k 500k 1k 500k 1k 500k 400M 500k 800M 400 k 2k 400 k 2k 400 k 2k 400 k 400M 400 k 800M 500k 5k 500k 5k 500k 5k 500k 400M 500k 800M 500k 10k 500k 10k 500k 10k 500k 400M 500k 800M 400 k 20k 400 k 20k 400 k 20k 400 k 400 M 400 k 800 M 500 k 50 k 500 k 50 k 500 k 50 k 500 k 400 M 500 k 800 M Roll mode display 500 k 100
4. Selecting the source medium directory 5 Select the directory according to steps 13 to 17 on page 11 15 Selecting the file to be loaded 6 Turn the jog shuttle to select a file Loading the file 7 Press the Load Exec soft key to load the file from the directory indicated in Path ___ The name of the Load Exec soft key changes to Abort Canceling the loading operation 8 Press the Abort soft key to cancel the loading operation The name of the Abort soft key changes to Load Exec Specifying the file to be displayed in the File List dialog box viewing the properties The procedures are the same as steps 21 to 24 on this page IM 701410 01E 11 21 uinipojy Buip1o28H oui speo pue saAes ejeq E 11 8 Saving Snap Shot Waveforms Function CAUTION Never remove the medium disk or turn OFF the power while the access indicator or the floppy disk icon is blinking This can damage the medium or destroy the data on the medium You can take snap shots of the waveform and save the image to the file You can also load the snap shot waveform Data size Approx 40 K Bytes File name extension The file name extension is SNP The selection of the medium and directory file name comments auto naming function specification of the files to be displayed in the File List dialog box and properties are the same as those
5. The menu varies depending on the cursor type IM 701410 01E sisAjeuy u1J0JOAEAA ol 9 2 Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 20 gt Function This function allows automated measurement of various parameters of the data stored in the acquisition memory Up to 2400 data points of the result of the automated measurement can also be saved to a file See section 11 9 Saving the Results of the Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters Restrictions Automated measurement of waveform parameters cannot be performed on the following waveforms Snapshot waveforms Accumulated waveforms other than the newest waveform Logic input waveforms Auto measurement mode ON Measures the specified item Statistics Performs statistical computation on the measured result of the specified item See section 9 3 Statistical Processing Selecting the High Low method High Low Mode High and Low correspond to the 100 level and the 0 level respectively that are used to measure rise and fall times and other parameters Select one of the two methods used to set the High and Low levels Auto Based on the frequency of voltage levels of the waveform within the measurement range the higher amplitude level is set to High and the lower amplitude level is set to Low taking into account the occurrences of ringing and spikes This meth
6. 0 10 V IM 701410 01E s s jeuy u1J0JOAEAA ol 9 1 Measuring Waveforms Using Cursors Moving the cursor 6 Pressthe Cursor1 Cursor2 soft key to set the jog shuttle control to Cursor1 7 Turn the jog shuttle to move Cursor1 8 Move Cursor2 in a similar fashion If the jog shuttle control is set to both Cursor1 and Cursor2 both cursors are moved 2000 06 23 14 11 00z fio Normal Stopped 1929 200kS s 5msAl CURSOR g Type Horizontal l Trace L CH1 IB Cursori 3 00d iv Cursor2 3 00diu L L 15 0000V p Y2 45 000o 30 0000V L 5 00 Urdiv DC Full L For V Vertical Cursors when the X Y waveform is not displayed Selecting the Waveform to be Measured Refer to steps 1 3 to set the Type to Vertical 4 Press the Trace soft key to display the waveform selection menu 5 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired waveform to select it If you select PodA amp PodB PodA and PodB data will be combined and displayed If you select PodA PodB or PodA amp PodB proceed to step 6 Otherwise skip to step 12 6 Pressthe Logic Setup soft key to display the settings dialog box for logic waveforms ick Normal 200kS s SMSi CURSOR Ty
7. Higher frequency A red 28 or more red 896 or more pink 24 to 27 pink 768 to 895 orange 20 to 23 lorange 640 to 767 yellow 16 to 19 yellow 512 to 639 white 12 to 15 white 384 to 511 cyan 8to11 cyan 256 to 383 green 4to7 green 128 to 255 blue 1103 blue 1 to 127 black 0 black 0 When grade width 4 When grade width 128 For example a dot which has appeared on the screen 100 times is displayed in red if the grade width is 4 or in blue if the grade width is 128 Points for attention Automatic measurement of waveform parameters and GO NO GO judgment are performed on the latest waveform When displaying all waveforms in the history memory during accumulation the historical waveforms are displayed using the specified accumulation mode However the waveform display becomes slow When printing accumulated waveforms using the optional built in printer they are printed using two tones Only the latest waveform can be output to an external printer fthe waveform acquisition is forcibly stopped by pressing the START STOP key the accumulation is temporarily suspended When the acquisition is restarted the display is cleared and accumulation continues IM 701410 01E 8 6 Accumulated Waveform Display Operating Procedure Selecting averaging mode 1 Pressthe DISPLAY key 2 Press the Accumulate soft key to display the accumulate mode menu 3 Press the corres
8. L Executing the key test 7 After step 3 press the Test Item soft key to display the test item menu 8 Press the soft key corresponding to the key board to be test 9 Pressing the Test Exec soft key executes the key test 10 Press all the keys To terminate the key test press the ESC key twice 15 8 IM 701410 01E 15 3 Self Diagnostic Test Self Test Testing the soft keys 11 Pressing the Soft Key soft key displays a keyboard 12 Using the jog shuttle and the SELECT key check that the characters on the keyboard can be entered correctly Pressing the ESC key twice clears the keyboard 1999 67 10 10 52 50 jj io Normal Stopped 6 500kS s Zmsu Self Test F Test Item Key Board Soft Key COPYTEST Test Exec CHE 10 1 CHZ 10 1 i Edge CHI 20 0 Wdiv 5 00 Uzdi v Auto DC Full DC Full 0 0 U Executing the printer test 13 After step 3 press the Test Item soft key to display the test item menu 14 Press the soft key corresponding to the printer to be test 15 Press the Test Exec soft key to execute the printer test 1993 07 10 duros fi ick Normal Stopped 500kS s Zmsu Self Test B Test Tten Printer Test Exec CHi 10 1 CHZ 10 1 Edge CHI 20 0 Wdiv 5 00 Uzdiv Auto DC Full DC Full 0 0 v
9. 5 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired measurement source channel to select it 6 Using the jog shuttle move the cursor to the item that you wish to set to ON If you select All Clear all items are turned OFF If you select Copy to All Trace you can copy the current settings to all the traces 7 Press the SELECT key to turn ON an item 8 Repeat steps 5 7 as many times as necessary Press ESC to return to the automatic measurement mode selection menu 9 Pressthe Cycle Trace soft key to display the period waveform selection menu 10 Press the soft key corresponding to the source channel for the period If Dwn is selected each waveform s own period is used for its statistical processing The other settings are the same as for normal automatic measurement please see page 9 11 to 9 13 IM 701410 01E 9 19 sisAjeuy u1J0JOAEAA H 9 3 Statistical Processing 11 12 Press the Measure Exec soft key to perform the statistical processing Press the key again to stop statistical processing Press the Show Results soft key to display a list of the statistical processing results Use the arrow keys to scroll the list horizontally and the jog shuttle to scroll vertically 2000 03 03 16 33 49 iex Normal Measure Parameter List 00005 20 4162U 10 208030 10 2083V 8 22834mU 00006 20 4167U 10 208030 190 2083U 5 33280nU P P C1 Max
10. A TAXITAITAITAITAITAITAITAITAITAITAITAITAITAITAITAITAITAITMA ITA IX AITAITAITAIT IT IT IT IT IA IT IT IT IT IT IT IT IT IT IT IT IT IR A TAITMAITAIT AITAIT AIT AIT AIT AITAIT NIT NITAITANITAITAIT AITNITAITANITA ITI Changes to normal mode even when envelope mode has been set AITXITAITMAITAITAITAIT ITA ITA OO DO DD OD a a a a a a a ea E Ea For the setting enclosed by the bold line repetitive sampling is active IM 701410 01E App 1 EH xipueddy Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length Record length 10 k words DL7100 When Mode other than Envelope Mode is Active Rep Repetitive sampling mode When Envelope Mode is Active Setting Interleave mode OFF Interleave Mode ON Rep OFF Rep ON Rep OFF Rep ON Interleave mode OFF Interleave Mode ON Sample rate S s Displayed record len gth word Sample rate S s Displayed Sample record len rate gth word S s Displayed record len gth word Sample rate S s Displayed record len gth word Sample rate S s Displayed record len gth word Sample rate S s Displayed record len gth word 20 10k 20 10k 20 10k 20 10k 400 M 10k 800 M 10k 50 10k 50 10k 50 10k 50 10k 400 M 10k 800 M 10k 10k 10k 10k
11. clc SCSl Connector etie epic 2 1 preset sid innere naim marea nene SCSI ID Number seen PRESET key Search and Zoom Function Printer Roll Chait 4 inet teintes 10 1 Search condition sess Probe pere tmt cc leet cambr tene AUI 3 7 SearchiDataes si ct ee tete te denne eet oen dt Probe Attenuation sessseeenen 1 3 search for a waveform sssssseeenene probe compensation signal eseeeeeesese 3 10 Searchilogiek4 acrior teet eet tee dre dns proximal Search parameters AE PULSE m Searching SPI Signals sess Pulse Time SELECT Ky retirer pce eese e co eps Pulse Time Send Mail iieis rero ette Pulse interpolation nre nenne 1 17 Sending Data to a Network Printer sssse 13 9 Pulse Width recte eed ee reto 8 14 Sequential Store eee tees 7 5 Pulse Width search ees 1 25 serial No ve i Pulse Width Trigger een 1 8 Serial pattern wise cta eee 8 14 Serial pattern search ee eceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 1 24 Q Serial DOM m M 2 1 T N 84 SeUHeset aan aaah eee E E 11 28 SHIFT K y c ie nene ries 2 3 R Show Map 7 13 SIMPEE Gy tiene A ENDE 2 2 p Simple trigger 35
12. SELECT key If you selected CH1 to CH4 go to step 7 If you selected None go to step 10 Setting the Level 7 Turn the jog shuttle to set the level and press the SELECT key You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits Pressing RESET key resets the level to 0 V Setting the Polarity 8 Press the SELECT key to select f or t Setting the hysteresis 9 Tur the jog shuttle to set the hysteresis and press the SELECT key You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits Pressing RESET key resets the hysteresis to 0 3 div Setting the interval 10 Turn the jog shuttle to set the interval at which to check the pattern and press the SELECT key You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits Pressing RESET key resets the interval to the default value Setting the Source 11 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the channel to be searched and press the SELECT key 8 21 IM 701410 01E 8 9 Search Data Using Search and Zoom Function Setthe Thr Upper 12 Turn the jog shuttle to set the level used to determine Low and press the SELECT key You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits Pressing RESET key resets the level to 0 V Setthe Thr Lower 13 Turn the jog shuttle to set the level used to determine High and press the SELECT key You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits Pressing RE
13. ssseeeeeneenene mee 15 13 Chapter 16 Specification 16 1 16 2 16 3 16 4 16 5 16 6 16 7 16 8 16 9 16 10 16 11 16 12 16 13 16 14 16 15 16 16 Input Section nnnes eed tei Hes 16 1 Trigger SectlOm ie RR RR T OR GA UNAM seadasadeesicesesnane 16 2 TitfiG AXIS ied eene ra Hed dde ER C dais 16 4 DiSplay 3 itr t hl cb e t ien e t ete et de ec adt 16 4 FunctioriS 5 nete mette pido de a iet ine ene It itio et tre di 16 4 Rear Panel Input OUtpUt dirus cue c c rte rr cm rete cerato capta 16 7 GP IB Interface cis coetu tides d pr dett tmo tue 16 8 Serial RS 232 Interface esses eene nnne nnnm enne rnnt nnns 16 8 Gentronics Interface ii eee e xD e e debe Dee ect 16 8 SGSlInterface Le eR Eie e ge ot ow 16 8 Built in Printer Optional esses nennen nnne nennen nnne tni 16 9 Built in Floppy Disk Drive 2 2 net rr Lernen tette ee corte de a eoe ihres 16 9 PC Card Interface Optional neret 16 9 Ethernet Communications Specifications Optional seeee 16 9 General e ace et e e e ug i o n cesis 16 10 External Diri nsioris i deo rt ie ERR cash ie HERRERA EE ORE ERES ERE 16 13 xii IM 701410 01E Contents Appendix Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length App 1 Appendix 2 How to Calculate the Area of a Waveform ssesssseeeeee App 22
14. sesseeeeenn 13 7 Sending Screen Image Data to a Network Printer sse 13 9 Using the Mail Function Fixed Interval 13 11 Using the Mail Function Action Mail Function 13 13 Accessing DL7100 DL7200 Drives from a Personal computer or Workstation 13 15 Viewing the Ether Option and MAC Address sene 13 17 Other Settings 2 meant d ie pie LR RC URGED OM EG EAE 13 18 Chapter 14 Other Operations 14 1 14 2 14 8 14 4 14 5 Setting the Screen Color and Brightness sssenee 14 1 Changing the Message Language and Click Sound ssesss 14 4 Turning OFF the Backlight and Setting the Brightness of the Backlight 14 5 Setting the Trigger Gate ssesssssssssseeseseeeneeeeenee nnne nre nnnn nnne 14 6 Ganceling the OffSet 2 5 2 nii iiti ec t te o T a hen ede Ede poete elke 14 7 Chapter 15 Troubleshooting Maintenance and Inspection 15 1 15 2 15 3 15 4 AN 15 5 15 6 Troubleshooting 09 3 eemper a ae Ber tegat on e gei ned 15 1 Messages and Corrective Actions ssssssseeeeeeeennen ener eene 15 2 Self Diagnostic Test Self Test essesssssseseseeeeeeeee enne 15 7 Checking the System Condition sess 15 11 Replacing the Power Fuse esses nennen enne a rine 15 12 Recommended Replacement Parts
15. Z L Ls o00ns 2 000 V H H d 5 CHI 10 1 CHZ 10 1 Edge CHI 20 0 Urdiv 6 506 Urdiu SingletN DC Full DC Full 7 24u L IM 701410 01E 6 3 Setting the Trigger Position Function lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 12 gt Trigger positon The trigger position is the waveform position that results when the trigger delay is added to the trigger point If the trigger delay is O s therefore the trigger position is equivalent to the trigger point You can select the location of the trigger position on the screen nisu position Delay time t _in_ Trigger point Setting range for trigger position 0 to 100 of record length in 1 steps Position marker A position marker 44 marker appears above the bar at the top of the screen The marker indicates the trigger position with respect to the total record length You can shift the trigger position to the right or left on the screen 0 100 t 0 N Trigger position Points for attention f you change the trigger position while waveform acquisition is suspended the new setting will not become effective until acquisition is resumed and the waveform is updated Note that cursor time measurements are with respect to the trigger position Changing the trigger position therefore changes the measurement values except during roll mode display When you ch
16. Interpolate OFF Sine Line Pulse IM 701410 01E 8 2 Setting the Interpolation Method Operating Procedure Set the interpolation method 1 Pressthe DISPLAY key 2 Pressthe Interpolate soft key displays the interpolation method menu 3 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired interpolation method 1999 07 66 11 19 15 j tk Nornal Stopped cH 50kS s 2nsAli DISPLAY S Format Dual l Interpolation Sine y Graticule El Scale Ualue OFF DW Trace Label or DW Accumulate EE DFF L Lin tons 2 000 V H d H 10 00ns CHI 10 1 CHZ 10 1 Edge CHI 20 0 Urdiv 6 506 U div SingletN DC Full DC Full 10 2 V L 8 4 IM 701410 01E 8 3 Changing the Graticule lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 16 gt Function The graticule type can be selected from the following 3 types mao Ctt cl cR U MS Sons i RTF Format Singie Ce sine V uude E DH AT or Bf peer ore ROAWUSUE orr pecu rage tht to Next ED v 4993 90 6 maga AE E epit d 2KS 5_ 50S Single Tnterporation sine A Graticule Boge cate Vale wr m Trace Tater ar N ccunuTate OFF ae Tijg CHT gt auto Next
17. M Others d Others CH 19 1 Edge CHI Connect 5 00 U div Connect Log List DC Full z Log List Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Timeout then press the SELECT key to set the timeout time Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Connect then press the SELECT key to make the connection If the connection was made successfully the a icon appears in the upper right of the screen Press the SHIFT key to set the keys in the shifted condition Functions marked in purple on the panel become active Press the COPY key then press the Copy to soft key Press the FILE soft key to select File Press the File List soft key to display the File List and select NDO Net Drive Zero IM 701410 01E 13 7 jeuond o suoneoiunuuuio 19uJ9u13 H 13 4 Saving Screen Image Data to a Network Drive 2000 07 06 12 06 32 j fio Normal COPY Stopped 642 1 Z00kS s 5msHdi COPY Copy to oe en lt lt Mainz lok gt gt ie Copy to f w ES ll File File File List Fornat Path FiO Format TENTO e Espace 1340528 byte TIFF File Name Size Date Rttr TIFF E B eee Color FDO J Color
18. L Setting comments 7 Press the Comment soft key to display a keyboard 8 Enter comments according to the procedures described in page 4 2 Setting the magnification ratio when the output format is set to Long 9 If you selected Long in step 5 set the magnification ratio using the jog shuttle Press the Mag soft key to set the jog shuttle control to Mag 10 Turn the jog shuttle to set the magnification ratio The number of output pages is displayed according to the ratio 1999 67 67 10 00 16 j gtk Nornal Stopped 50kS s 2ns li COPY cnr x Copy to GA Printer Format lorna 1 Information ON eal 4 Comment C7 Mag x2 4 gPage Time Rangel 5 000d iv 4 Time Range2 Dns 20 00 V tooms 5 000div CHI 18 1 CHZ 10 1 Edge CH 4 20 0 Urdiv 5 00 U div Auto Preview DC Full DC Full Tee M ES Setting the output range when the output format is set to Long 11 If you selected Long in step 5 set the output range Press the Time Range1 Time Range2 soft key to set the jog shuttle control to Time Range1 12 Turn the jog shuttle to set the start point of the output range 13 Ina similar fashion set the end point of the output range in Time Range2 10 4 IM 701410 01E 10 2 Outputting to the Built in Printer Optional Previewing long cop
19. Fornat L Information pm o a Comment HE L L L Selecting the type 5 Press the Format soft key to display the output command type menu 6 Press the soft key corresponding to the type of command to be selected Setting the color for TIFF and BMP 7 Press the Color soft key to select ON ON Revers ON Gray or OFF Applicable to DL7100 with software ROM version 1 11 or later See section 15 4 Checking the System Condition Setting comments 8 Press the Comment soft key to display a keyboard 9 Enter comments according to the procedures described in page 4 2 Setting the compression for TIFF and BMP color is ON 10 Press the Compression soft key select ON or OFF When Compression is ON you cannot output to Network Drive 1999 07 67 10 00 16 tk Nornal 4 Stopped y SOkS s ZnsAli COPY car 88 0 V lain Copy to File Format BMP ON q Comment Compression ON File List Lin tons 20 00 V 10 0 ns CHI 10 1 CHZ 10 1 Edge CHI F M File Nane 20 0 Urdiv 5 00 Urdiv futo DC Full DC Full 7 2 U CHAPTS 10 10 IM 701410 01E 10 4 Storing Screen Image to the Recording Storage Medium Setting the output destination 11 Press the Fi
20. OFF Hysteresis is zm Hold OFF a 2 000 V H H CHI 10 1 CHZ 10 1 Edge CHI 20 0 Urdiv 6 506 Urdiu SingletN DC Full DC Full EM 0 08us Setting the trigger level 4 Ifthe jog shuttle control is not set to Level press the Level soft key 5 Turn the jog shuttle to set the trigger level You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits In addition pressing the RESET key resets the trigger level to the current offset voltage value Note The trigger level setting applies to simple trigger and enhanced trigger Setting the trigger slope 6 Press the Slope soft key to select p amp or 54 Setting the trigger coupling 7 Press the Coupling soft key to select DC or AC Note The trigger coupling setting applies to simple trigger and enhanced trigger Setting the HF rejection 8 Press the HF Reject soft key to display an HF rejection menu 9 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired frequency to select HF rejection Setting the hysteresis 10 Press the Hysteresis soft key to select AZ or A7 Setting the hold off 11 Setthe hold off time according to the procedures given in 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time IM 701410 01E HunebbuL o 6 6 Setting the External Trigger SIMPLE Function The external signal that is input through the EXT TRIG IN terminal
21. 6 00d iv Fit Measure pon 21822 ade bape fae d EE to zl AAR E BS ts 2 300 65 Bid J 7 Edge CH1 20 0 Urdiv 5 00 U diu Auto Fit Measure o Ma ind21 amp 2Z2z DC Full DC Full 7 2 V Range to Z2 Selecting the display format of zoomed waveforms 4 Pressing the Format soft key displays the format menu 5 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired format Selecting the zoomed trace 6 Pressing the Allocation soft key displays the zoomed trace setting menu 7 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the desired trace 8 Pressthe SELECT key to select the trace Selecting All ON selects all traces that are currently displayed Setting the zoom rate 9 Press the Z1 Mag Z2 Mag soft key Turn the jog shuttle to set the zoom rate of Z1 zoom box 10 Ina similar fashion press the Z2 Mag soft key to set the zoom rate of Z2 zoom box Selecting the zoom position 11 Press the Z1Position Z2Position soft key Turn the jog shuttle to set the zoom position of Z1 zoom box 12 Ina similar fashion press the Z2Position soft key to set the zoom position of Z2 zoom box By setting the jog shuttle control to both Z1Position and Z2Position the zoom positions of both Z1 and Z2 can be moved simultaneously Changing the range of the automated measurement of wave
22. All Set EE Property Filter SET fe Attr Dest Dir E 1999 07 67 20 53 50 j Stopped r q lt lt Maint Ik gt gt ik Nornal 50kS s 2nsA Utility LIRE Function m File List Path FDO Path FDO Space 1375232 h Space 1336320 byte File Name ize File Name FD 1 CHAPTOO1 TIF CHAPTO86 TIF IFDO 1 CHAPTOO2 TIF CHAPTOO1 TIF CHAPTO66 TIF 38574 1999 07 07 22 04 RW 38574 1999707707 22 03 RW 38574 1999 07 67 22 02 RW Lin tons Attr Copy 00 V CHI 10 1 CHZ 10 1 20 0 Udiy 5 60 U diu DC Full DC Full 10 Copy Exec IM 701410 01E 11 33 uinipojy Buip1o28H oui speo pue saAes ejeq E 11 13 Changing the Recording Medium Directory Function Name and File Name and Creating a Directory CAUTION Never remove the medium disk or turn OFF the power while the access indicator or the floppy disk icon is blinking This can damage the medium or destroy the data on the medium Selecting the medium and directory The recording media that can be used to save and load waveform data are displayed in the File List dialog box Display example of recording media FDO Floppy disk SC5 SCSI device with an ID number of 5 SC5 1 Partitio
23. IM 701410 01E 8 17 8 9 Search Data Using Search and Zoom Function Defermination During a Parallel Pattern Search The hysteresis points are normally evaluated as true conforming to the specified status High Level Hysteresis A B Always determined as true Display Position for Pulse Width Searches The position of the waveform displayed in the zoom screen will change in the following manner depending on the Type setting mg Pulse gt T ly uela Pulse T i vi PELE iT1 T1 Pulse lt T2 E l I l hui Time out i i i iv V Zoom screen center position v Starting point for the next search Auto Scrool Set the scroll speed choosing from one of 7 steps The higher the number the faster the scrolling You cannot set any settings other then Direction speed while auto scrolling IM 701410 01E 8 9 Search Data Using Search and Zoom Function Operating Procedure When searching using the edge 1 Press the SHIFT key to set the keys in the shifted condition Functions marked in purple on the panel become active 2 Pressthe ZOOM key Selecting the search method Type 3 Pressing the Type soft key displays the search method menu 4 Press the soft key corresponding to Edge to select the sea
24. When Mode is set to Degree and the reference waveform is Trig the measured values are displayed as Setting Proximal Mesial and Distal Dist Prox Mode Unit According to Dist Prox Mode setting Proximal range 0 to 100 resolution 1 or voltage corresponding to 8 div resolution V div x 1 100 Mesial range O to 100 resolution 1 or voltage corresponding to 8 div resolution V div x 1 100 Distal range O to 100 resolution 1 or voltage corresponding to 8 div resolution V div x 1 100 Notes when making automated measurement of waveform parameters The measured value will be displayed as if the measurement is not possible Ifthe waveform is of small amplitude measurements may not produce correct results If there are two or more cycles of a waveform in the measurement range the measurement is made on the first waveform Automated measurements cannot be made on logic waveforms All measured values will be displayed as in this case 1 cycle mode This mode is used to compute items related to the voltage axis or the area over one cycle after determining the cycle This is suited to items such as Rms and Avg that produce errors depending on the measurement range This does not affect the items related to the time axis or the area of the X Y waveforms sisAjeuy u1J0JOAE AA H 9 2 Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters Operating Procedure 1 Press the MEA
25. 1 HOffset IM 701410 01E App 27 E xipueddy Appendix 4 List of Defaults Menu key soft key Default setting Menu key soft key Default setting CH1 to 4 MEASURE Display ON Mode OFF Position 0 00 div Item Setup St m MQ Source CH1 robe i Offset oV 5 Setu OFF Band Width Full s YOUR eii Variable 50 V omes Linear Scale OFF Mode OFF Label CH CH4 1 cycle mode OFF Time Range 1 5 000 div Vidiv Time Range 2 5 000 div 50 V div Trace CH1 T div Distal 9096 1 Ms s Mesial 5096 Proximal 1096 PRESET High Low Mode AUTO E ia CURSOR ype Type OFF Prove 10 1 MATH ACQ Math 1 Display OFF Record Length 10k Math 1 Setup C1 C2 Mode Normal Math 1 Label Math1 Count Infinite Math 2 Display OFF Interleave OFF Math 2 Setup C3 C4 Repetitive OFF Math 2 Label Math2 Time Base Int DISPLAY Format Quad TRIGGER SIMPLE Interpolation Sin Source CH1 Graticule Grid Level 0 0 V Scale Value OFF Slope Rise Trace Label OFF Coupling DC Accumulate OFF HF Rejection OFF Translucent OFF Histeresis A Mapping Ane Hold Off 0 08 us ZOOM Mode Main ETREX POSITON DELAY lect R Select Herald Position 50 0 Display Mode One Start Record 0 DELAY Dei M End Record latest ane DURS Show Map No 1 GO NO GO Search Mode OFF Mode OFF FILE ia Type CAN Bus File Item Set up Z1 Mag x2 File Name Z position 0 000 div Auto Naming ON ACTION COPY MENU Buzzer OFF Copy to Printer Save to File OFF Format Norma
26. 2 20 va Ae dsiq Operating Procedure 1 Press the DISPLAY key 2 Pressthe Graticule soft key to select one of the three graticule types 1999 07 66 11 19 15 j gtk Nornal Stopped 48 q 50kS s 2msflis DISPLAY cr 82 0 V SC Mainz Ik gt gt i Format Dual Interpolation Sine Ay Graticule El Scale Ualue OFF qw Trace Label or hy Accumulate OFF 2 000 V i 10 00ns CHI 10 1 CHZ 10 1 Edge CHI 20 0 Udiy 6 506 Urdiu SingletN 10 2 V DC Full DC Full IM 701410 01E 8 5 8 4 Turning Display of the Scaling Value ON OFF lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 16 gt Function You can display the upper and lower limits of the vertical and horizontal axes of each channel Operating Procedure Turning ON OFF the scale values 1 Pressthe DISPLAY key 2 Press the Scale Value soft key to select ON or OFF 1999 67 66 11 19 15 j tk Nornal 48 Stopped q 50kS s 2ns li DISPLAY HT 82 0 V lt lt Mainz Ik gt gt d Format l Dual Interpolation L Sine y Graticule Scale Value FF N Trace Label or DW Accumulate L L OFF Lin tons 2 000 V d B d 10 00ns CHI 10 1 CHZ 10 1 Edge CHI 20 0 Urdiv 6 506 Urdiu SingletN DC Full DC Full 1
27. Acquisition can be restarted while the history memory menu is displayed However it is not possible to change history memory settings such as Selected Record No while acquisition is in progress Settings are restricted by the following formula End Record No x Selected Record No x Start Record No f you load a waveform record from floppy disk or external storage device the loaded waveform becomes Record 0 In the case of multiple records sequential store the records will be loaded sequentially with the latest record as 0 Computation and automatic measurement of waveform parameters are always performed on the currently displayed waveform i e the waveform identified by the record number designated for Selected Record No Analysis of old data is possible as long as the history memory content remains unchanged after acquisition is restarted Inroll mode only the record most recently acquired when acquisition was stopped will be loaded into record No 0 The trigger time is displayed in the Show Map Turning OFF the power will delete the entire contents of the history memory IM 701410 01E Aejdsig pue uonisinboy 7 7 Using the History Memory Operating Procedure Recalling data from the history memory 1 Pressthe HISTORY key 2 Pressthe Select Record soft key 3 Turn the jog shuttle to set the record number that you wish to recall Specify a record number in the range Start Record t
28. 0024 21 16 13 65 L 9 Turn the jog shuttle to select the waveform to be displayed and press the SELECT key 7 14 IM 701410 01E 7 8 Searching the Historical Data Using Zone History Search Function lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 24 gt Function You can search for a waveform that matches the specified conditions from the past waveforms in the acquisition memory and display it Search parameters Four types of search parameters can be registered in Zone1 to Zone4 You can change the channel that is to be searched the search condition and the search range for each search zone Search condition Condition IN Searches for waveforms that pass through the specified search window OUT Searches for waveforms that do not pass through the specified window OFF Do not search for waveforms Source channel Source Search is carried out on the channel that is specified as the Source Waveforms of other channels are also displayed The vertical range of the search window Upper Lower The range is 4 div The resolution is 0 01 div Upper must always be greater than or equal to Lower The horizontal range of the search window Left Right The range is 5 div The resolution is 10 div displayed record length Right must always be greater than or equal to left Search range The search range is between the Start Record and the End record Search l
29. Functions marked in purple on the panel become active 2 Pressthe ZOOM key SEARCH Type l Edge Setup aE L x 10 Z1 Position Parallel 0 0001div Pattern L Searched Pattern No Match 3 Press the Type soft key to display the search method selection menu 4 Press the soft key corresponding to SPI Bus to select the search method Note The item to be analyzed is the history data of CH2 and CH3 L L IM 701410 01E 8 33 8 10 Analyzing and Searching SPI Signals Performing the Analysis 5 2001 05 29 14 14 41z Stopp Press the Analyze Setup soft key to display a dialog box for setting the analysis conditions Turn the jog shuttle to select the item Press the SELECT key to display a menu used to set the item or change the selected item 100 Normal fmalyze Setup SEARCH Clock CH1 cs Type SPI Bus Level 2 59 V 93H CEH fe Hysteresis Polarity Analyze Setup Analyze Exec Detail all Thr Upper Thr Lower p 1 500 V 1 700 V 1 500 U Data Datai CH2 Dataz CH3 1 700 V L CH 89 CH4 Level 9 000 V Pod A s BO c B1 s B2 v B3 c B4 s BS s B6 s B7 c Enable State Data Search Reference Point Trigger Position 5 Manual 8 0000d iv SB
30. When V div is switched from 1 V div to 0 50 V div E esa idiv 1V Note 11 div 0 50 V Vertical sensitivity and measurement resolution To get precise readings it is recommended that you set the vertical sensitivity so that the waveform s maximum and minimum amplitudes are close to the top and bottom of the screen Note that the instrument uses 8 bit A D converters Incoming signals are sampled at a resolution of 255 levels LSB or 32 levels per division Effective data range The instrument uses 8 bit A D converters Assuming that output values range from 0 to 255 the vertical center line of the display corresponds to a value of 128 Because the A D converter reaches full range at 255 screen level 256 is not used Note also that the insturment treats an A D output value of 0 as if it were a 1 The screen s effective display range extends approximately 5 29 divisions in each direction from the screen s center line However if the vertical axis position is moved while the data acquisition is stopped the effective data range also moves by the same amount IM 701410 01E 1 3 suonoung 1 2 Setting the Vertical and Horizontal Axes Vertical Position Section 5 2 Since a total of eight input waveforms can be displayed they may overlap each other making observation difficult In t
31. p Coupling H E i Level B nc D Coupling i HF Reject E ld count OFF 1 Hysteresis n ep P ens beeeebeees A x dssdo ORTA H 5 Dine ENTIA Edge CHi 4 ij Hold Off Edge CHI Hold OFF Sing len Sing le tN TENY 0 08us ZREN 0 08us Note The hold off time setting applies to simple trigger and enhanced trigger IM 701410 01E 6 5 HunebbuL H 6 5 Setting the Edge Trigger SIMPLE Function lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 7 gt An edge trigger is generated when the trigger source signal crosses a specified level Selecting the trigger source Select from the following list of choices CH1to CH4 Ext EXT TRIG IN terminal on the rear panel see section 6 6 Setting the External Trigger SIMPLE Line power signal see section 6 7 Generating a Trigger Using the Power Signal SIMPLE Setting the trigger level Range 8 div within the screen Resolution 0 01 div For example the resolution is 0 02 mV when the V DIV setting is 2 mV div You can also reset the trigger level to the current offset voltage with one key operation Setting the trigger slope Select the trigger activation method relative to changes in trigger source level from the following three choices Activated when the trigger source changes from below the trigger level to above the trigger level rising Y Activated when the trigger source changes from above the trigger level to below the tr
32. 100k 800M 100k 100k 100k 100k 400M 100k 800M 100k 100k 100k 100k 400M 100k 800M 100k 100k 100k 100k 400M 100k 800M 100k 100k 100k 100k 400M 100k 800M 100k 100k 100k 100k 400M 100k 800M 100k 100k 100 k 100 k 400 M 100 k 800 M 100 k 100 k 100 k 100 k 400 M 100 k 800 M 100 k 100 k 100 k 100 k 400 M 100 k 800 M 100 k 100 k 100 k 100 k 400 M 100 k 800 M 100 k 100 k 100 k 100 k 400 M 100 k 800 M 100 k 100 k 100 k 100 k 400 M 100 k 800 M 100 k 100 k 100 k 100 k 400 M 100 k 800 M 100 k 50 k 100 k 100 k 100 k 100 k 25k 50k 100 k 10k 20k 5k 10k 2 5 k 5k 1k 2k 500 1k 250 500 100 200 ke For the setting enclosed by the bold line repetitive sampling is active 1G Changes to normal mode even when envelope mode has been set App 4 IM 701410 01E Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length Record length 250 k words DL7100 Rep Repetitive sampling mode When Mode other than Envelope Mode is Active When Envelope Mode is Active Setting Interleave mode OFF Interleave Mode
33. 2 00 Udiy nc Full id Edge CHi F Auto 2Z 20 V Jump Exec IM 701410 01E sisAjeuy WAOJOAR ol 9 1 Measuring Waveforms Using Cursors For marker cursors when the X Y waveform is not displayed Selecting the marker Follow steps 1 3 to set the Type to Marker 4 Press the Select soft key to select a marker from M1 to M4 1999 07 66 17 13 19 j Stopped 203032 E T Nornal CURSOR 50kS s Zns i Hl Cur KCWumiko Type Marker Select secessu M2 M3 Trace Er aes CHL Ig Position x 3 00diu Cursor Junp to Z1 10 00ms 2BMfB v s 12 900ns 10 00ns CHi 10 1 CHZ 10 1 Edge CHi 20 0 Urdiv 5 00 U diu Auto Jump Exec DC Full DC Full 7 2 U JL SEE L a Selecting the waveform to be measured 5 Pressing the Trace soft key displays the waveform menu 6 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired waveform Moving the cursor 7 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor As the cursor is moved the displayed value of Position changes For Marker Cursors when the X Y waveform is displayed Selecting the marker Refer to steps 1 3 to set the Type to Marker Selecting the waveform to be measured 4 Press the Trace soft key to select the waveform to be measured Moving the cursor 5 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor
34. 603 Filed2 i fo nf f nha nh nh gh ft af 5H 34H b ing s insi er IM 701410 01E 6 29 HunebbuL H 6 14 Setting the TV Trigger ENHANCED Selecting the Polarity Polarity Pos Polarity Neg Trigger point Y Y Trigger level NTSC PAL 99 F Trigger level e DOUES Synchronization pulse A Trigger point A Deel bs point Trigger level Kpag In Fl Trigger level FETA ES A ay Trigger point HDTV Setting the trigger level Level Set the difference between the beginning of the synchronization pulse and the level at which the trigger level is judged The setting range is from 0 1 div to 2 0 div The setting resolution is 0 1 div The default setting is 0 1 div Setting frame skip Frame This is a function for skipping frames when the color burst is inverted on every frame You can select how many frames to skip from the following choices Frame1 Trigger every frame at the specified field Frame2 Trigger every two frames at the specified field Frame4 Trigger every four frames at the specified field Frame8 Trigger every eight frames at the specified field Other settings Refer to sections 6 1 and 6 6 for details about how to set the trigger mode and the holdoff time 6 30 IM 701410 01E 6 14 Setting the TV Trigger ENHANCED Operating Procedure Inputting the video signal Connect the probe cable
35. HELP key Section 4 7 Turns the help window ON or OFF 2 4 IM 701410 01E 2 3 Screens Cc D EFG H A 1999707702 wal fick CAMS s C1nsidio B Stopped 12 ZMS s 500HusAiw DISPLAY 7 z cr 88 0 V lt lt Maine LOK gt gt Format e Dual 3 Interpolation o o Sine Ay 5 Qa Graticule c BI o Scale Value M o OFF N m Trace Label to or m S Accumulate U OFF 2 CHI 10 1 CHZ 10 1 Edge CHI L 20 0 Udiy 6 506 U diu Auto Next 50 0 Urdiv DC Full 0 0 V 12 N A Date and time M N For the procedures used to set the date and time see section 3 6 Setting the Date and Time Operation state Displays Running when data acquisition is in progress and Stopped when it is stopped Waveform acquisition state and the number of acquisitions Waiting for Trigger trigger wait state Pre pre trigger Post post trigger Value the number of waveforms acquired Display position Zoom position Record length I I L I i 1 Or I I iU if I NENNEN I i 2 Display record length Display record length lt Normal waveform gt lt Zooming waveform gt Record length Sample rate Sampling mode Varies depending on the T div and record length settings Normal Env Avg BoxAvg Realtime sampling mode Norm Rep Repetitive sampling mode Avg Rep Repetitive sampling mode in the av
36. ICAO J OFF ral ND61 OFF 123002 38574 2000 02 06 19 05 123001 38574 2000 07 06 19 01 R ETTR Connent ll 123000 380574 2000 07 06 19 00 Comment st ll Compression Soo Compress ion St pm m A pm wm dil A K e File List ES Iv File List EM K File Nane CH 10 1 i Edge CHT 4 amp File Nane 5 00 Urdiv Auto e 123 DC Full 0 10 V 123 15 For the remaining procedures please refer to sections 11 7 Saving Loading Setup Data through 11 12 Changing the Recording Medium Directory File Name and Creating a Directory Note You must run FTP server software on PCs and workstations that will be connected to the network Also please note the following regarding the server software Use UNIX format for list output character strings returned by dir Make the home directory and its subdirectories writable You can t change to a higher directory than the home directory The newest file is not necessarily displayed at the top of the file list You cannot access files or directories having names longer than nine or more characters Depending on the server the lt gt notation for the top directory may not be displayed Inthe following cases the time information in a file list will not be displayed accurately When Windows NT uses an AM or PM timestamp When using a server that returns kanji or other non ASCII character strings in a list The following are not poss
37. L Data search across two CS intervals cannot be performed Therefore search is not possible by setting Data Byte to 4 or 5 When analysis is performed without specifying the CS channel Independent of the chip select interval Search can be performed by setting Data Byte to 4or 5 Data 8 bit 8bit 8 bit 8 bit 8 bit CS Executing the search Next Previous Press the execution key corresponding to the direction in which the search is to be performed from the current selected byte Next Searches for data after the selected byte Previous Searches for data before the selected byte Note The contents of the detailed analysis list can be output to a file in ASCII format See section 11 10 Outputting the detailed Analysis List of the SPI Signal 8 32 IM 701410 01E 8 10 Analyzing and Searching SPI Signals Displaying the Search Result Displays the searched waveform in the Zoom window When searching indefinite data The Zoom Position moves to the head of the indefinite data When searching patterns The Zoom Position moves to the head of the byte that matched the specified pattern At the same time the highlighting in the list of analysis results at the bottom of the Screen moves to the byte corresponding to the Zoom Position Operating Procedure Showing the SPI Bus Signal Analysis Function Screen 1 Press the SHIFT key to set the keys in the shifted condition
38. Mail Mil Setup L Net Drive Setup Net Drive I Setup EN Net Print Setup Net Print Setup Others Others l CHI 10 1 Edge CHI 5 00 U div Connect DC Full g Log List Connect Log List J JE l Nole s The DL7100 DL7200 can only support one client When the DL7100 DL7200 is being accessed from a PC or workstation i e when it s logged on la is displayed in the upper right part of the screen This function can not be used in conjunction with FTP client function LPR client function or File operation The floppy disk is displayed as FDO in the root directory Other devices connected via SCSI are displayed as SCn where n is the SCSI ID number The log is cleared when the power is turned OFF Before accessing a drive refer to 13 2 Configuring the Ethernet Interface TCP IP and enter the TCP IP settings You must restart the DL7100 DL7200 for the settings to take effect The Ethernet communication function and the GP IB function cannot be used simultaneously The FTP function cannot be used between two YOKOGAWA digital oscilloscopes For example using one DL7200 as an FTP server and another DL7200 as an FTP client is not possible nthe case below the waveform data and the menu display may differ When loading waveform data from
39. Setting the hold off 15 Setthe hold off time according to the procedures given in 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time Note 0 The trigger level hysteresis trigger coupling and HF rejection settings apply to simple trigger and enhanced trigger When activating the trigger in sync with the clock channel CH1 to CH4 allow a setup time that is greater than or equal to 20 ns and a hold time that is greater than or equal to 14 ns for the logic pattern with respect to the clock Value at the tip of the of the logic probe with respect to the input BNC of CH1 to CH4 6 34 IM 701410 01E 6 16 Setting the Action On Trigger lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 11 gt Function Operation to perform when the trigger is activated The specified operation from the following list is performed every time a trigger is activated Hard Copy Outputs the screen image data to the destination printer Centronics file or Net Print Ethernet PC Card interface optional that was specified in Copy to of the Copy setting menu Save to File Saves the waveform data to the recording medium FD or SCSI and so on specified in the File menu Buzzer Sounds an alarm Send Mail Sends a mail Ethernet PC Card Interface optional For details see section 13 7 Using the Mail Function Action Mail Function Note When the action on trigger is started the specified operation is performed when the trigger is
40. Single mode When a trigger is activated displayed waveforms are updated only once then acquisition stops This mode is useful when you are observing a single shot signal IM 701410 01E 1 3 Setting a Trigger Single N mode This mode is useful when using the sequential store function refer to page 7 5 Waveforms are acquired and stored in different memory areas each time a trigger is activated then acquisition stops and the waveforms are displayed Acquisition is performed the specified number of times Acquired waveforms can be displayed together or they can be displayed individually This mode is useful when you want to detect a sudden abnormality in a waveform suonoung 1st acquisition 2nd acquisition Nth acquisition Action On Trigger lt Section 6 1 gt The displayed waveform can be output to the optional built in printer buzzer or saved to a floppy disk each time a trigger is activated Also sends a mail Ethernet Communications PC card Interface Optional Trigger Coupling lt Sections 6 5 and 6 8 to 6 13 gt Input coupling can also be switched for trigger sources as it is for input signals Select the type of input coupling which is most suitable for the trigger source signal The following two types of input coupling are available for trigger source signals DC The trigger source signal is used as the trigger source without any processing AC The t
41. The backlight automatically turns OFF if there is no key operation for the specified time Brightness of the backlight Brightness You can also change the brightness of the backlight The lifetime of the backlight can be prolonged by dimming the backlight or turning OFF the backlight when it is not necessary Operating Procedure 1 Pressthe MISC key 2 Pressthe Next1 2 soft key 3 Pressthe LCD soft key to display the backlight ON OFF menu in Nornal NISC ZO0MS s 5nsA LCD LCD OFF Exec fito OFF OFF pry pauto OFF Tim Calibration JL JL Communication l SCSI ID Self Test l l Graphic Color L a Imin M System Conf iy E Brightness Overview L l Edge CHI Next Auto 172 0 0 U Gate amp ctiue Setting auto off 4 Press the Auto OFF soft key to select either ON or OFF 5 If Auto OFF is turned ON press the Auto OFF Time soft key Using the jog shuttle set the time at which the backlight will automatically turn OFF Setting the brightness of the backlight 6 Using the jog shuttle adjust the brightness of the backlight Turning OFF the backlight 7 Press the LCD OFF Exec soft key to turn OFF the backlight Press any key to return t
42. 1 1 1 r 0 13f 0 5f f Frequency Operating Procedure Turning ON OFF the display 1 Pressthe MATH key 2 Pressthe Math1 Display soft key and select ON to display Math1 and OFF to not display Math1 Setting the operator 3 Pressthe Math1 Setup soft key to display the computation dialog box To smooth the measured data set Operation to Through Note If an operator other than Through is selected the computation is performed on the smoothed value Smoothing 4 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Smoothing 5 Pressthe SELECT key to select ON 2000 06 19 02 40 00 fio Normal Stopped 1936 5HS s 200usAiw MATH En Hathi Setup Mathi Display l m o Operation Pass Thru__ M Mathi Setup Source CH1 Invert C1 L Scale Lauto Manual Mathi Label Upper Mathi Lower _ 2 0000E 61 unit L 3 Smoothing PrF N Math2 Display DFF UN M Math Setup l 4 C3 C4 Edge CHI MathZ Label 5 00 Urdiv Auto DC Full 0 00 U Hathz LL 9 32 IM 701410 01E 9 10 Phase Shifted Display Function For a discription of this function refer to page 1 22 gt The phase of CH1 to CH4 waveforms is shifted and the result is displayed Computation can also be carried out on phase shifted waveforms Allowable shift range The p
43. 1 23 IM 701410 01E suonoung 1 5 Analyzing the Waveform Data Search History Search Function lt Sections 7 8 and 7 9 gt This feature can be used to search waveforms that match the specified conditions from the acquired measurement data History memory search using zone Section 7 8 Searches waveforms that did or did not pass the specified area from the history memory Waveform that was saved using the history memory function r Specified area n Detects waveforms that did or did not pass the specified area Selected Record No 25 History memory search using Waveform Parameters Section 7 9 Searches waveforms that did or did not satisfy the specified condition from the history memory Applicable to DL7100 with software ROM version 1 21 or later See section 15 4 Checking the System Condition Data Search Search and Zoom Function lt Section 8 9 and 8 10 gt Edge search Searches for a particular section of the current displayed waveform by counting the number of times the value went above rising or below falling the specified level from the start point of the search The section of the waveform that is found to meet this condition is displayed in the zoom window using the zoom rate Start point of the search Y T V a Specifiaed level Detected positio The section that is detected is expanded and displayed in the zoom window When the edge is set to rising and the co
44. 1 to 16 32 1 to 32 64 1 to 8 16 100 kWord 1 to 16 32 1 to 8 16 1 to 16 32 1 to 4 8 250 kWord 1 to 8 16 1 to 4 8 1 to 8 16 1 to 2 4 500 kWord 1 to 4 8 1 to 2 4 1 to 4 8 1 2 1 MWord 1 to 2 4 1 2 1 to 2 4 1 2 MWord 1 2 1 1 2 4 MWord 8 MWord This setting available only when interleave mode is ON p Aejdsig pue uonisinboy DL7200 Normal mode Box average mode Record length 16 MW CH model 4 MW CH model 16 MW CH model 4 MW CH model 1 kWord 1 to 2048 4096 1 to 1024 2048 1 to 2048 4096 1 to 512 1024 10 kWord 1 to 256 512 1 to 128 256 1 to 256 512 1 to 64 128 50 kWord 1 to 64 128 1 to 32 64 1 to 64 128 1 to 16 32 100 kWord 1 to 32 64 1 to 16 32 1 to 32 64 1 to 8 16 250 kWord 1 to 16 32 1 to 8 16 1 to 16 32 1 to 4 8 500 kWord 1 to 8 16 1 to 4 8 1 to 8 16 1 to 2 4 1 MWord 1 to 4 8 1 to 2 4 1 to 4 8 1 2 2 MWord 1 to 2 4 1 2 1 to 2 4 1 4 MWord 1 2 1 1 2 8 MWord 1 1 1 16 MWord 1 This setting available only when interleave mode is ON Waveform display method You can recall waveforms from memory in the same way as you do when working with the history function For details refer to Section 7 7 Using the History Memory Restrictions and precautions You can not use this mode together with repetitive sampling or roll mode f y
45. 10k 10k 10k 10k 800 M 10k 800 M 10k 10k 10k 10k 10k 800 M 10k 800 M 10k 10k 10k 10k 10k 800 M 10k 800 M 10k 10k 10k 10k 10k 800 M 10k 800 M 10k 10k 10k 10k 10k 800 M 10k 800 M 10k 10k 10k 10k 10k 800 M 10k 800 M 10k 10k 10k 10k 10k 800 M 10k 800 M 10k 10k 10k 10k 10k 800 M 10k 800 M 10k 10k 10k 10k 10k 800 M 10k 800 M 10k 10k 10k 10k 10k 800 M 10k 800 M 10k 10k 10k 10k 10k 800 M 10k 800 M 10k 10k 10k 10k 10k 1G 10k 1G 10k 10k 5k 10k 10k 10k 10k 2k 4k 10k 1k 2k 500 1k 200 400 100 200 For the setting enclosed by the bold line repetitive sampling is active Changes to normal mode even when envelope mode has been set App 12 IM 701410 01E Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length Record length 50 k words DL7200 Rep Repetitive sampling mode When Mode other than Envelope Mode is Active When Envelope Mode is Active Setting Interleave mode OFF Interleave Mode ON Interleave mode Interleave Mode Rep OFF Rep ON Rep OFF Rep ON OFF Sample Displayed Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample rate record le
46. 1G Roll mode display Changes to normal mode even when envelope mode has been set 1 Forthe setting enclosed by the bold line repetitive sampling is active 2 Because acquisition size is 4 MWords the waveform is displayed over 8 divisions of the time axis only Note that the trigger position setting percentage in this case with respect to the 8 division length 100 8 divisions 3 4 MWord model Box average cannot be specified 4 4MWord model Record length cannot be set to 4 MWord when interleave mode is OFF IM 701410 01E App 19 E xipueddy Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length Record length 8 M words DL7200 When Mode other than Envelope Mode is Active Rep Repetitive sampling mode When Envelope Mode is Active Setting Interleave mode OFF 3 Interleave Mode ON Rep OFF Rep ON Rep OFF Rep ON Interleave mode OFF Interleave Mode Sample rate S s Displayed Sample Displayed record len rate record len gth word S s gth word Sample rate S s Displayed record len gth word Sample rate S s Displayed record len gth word Sample rate S s Displayed record len gth word Sample rate S s 20k 10M 20k 10 M2 20k 10
47. 20 00 V L Specifying the file to be displayed in the File List dialog box and viewing its properties 30 Inthe File List dialog box press the Filter soft key to select extension or uk kos 31 Inthe File List dialog box turn the jog shuttle to select the desired file 32 Press the Property soft key to display the properties of the selected file 33 Press the ESC key to close the window displaying the properties 19933707707 14 39 23 j Stopped 4 E fico Normal iU 5HS eT SoU lt lt Maine 100k gt gt S s 2mssil Save Pam ou d File List Path FDO 4 Space 831488 byte File Name Size CHAPTS File Nane JL FD 1 CHAPTO14 TIF 1999 07 07 14 47 CHAPTO13 TIF 1999 67 07 14 46 CHAPTO12 TIF 1999707707 14 45 CHAPTO11 TIF 1999 07 07 14 46 L M CHAPTO10 TIF 1999 07 07 14 39 Property CHAPTOO9 TIF 1999 07 07 14 39 CHAPTOOS TIF 1999 67 67 11 35 CHAPT G TIF 1999707707 11 34 Filter CHAPTOO6 TIF 1999 07 07 11 29 CHAPTOOS TIF 1999 67 07 11 28 AUF ES L CHAPTO04 TIF 1999 07 07 11 19 CHAPTO03 TIF 1999 67 07 11 18 L 10080 dus 20 00 v CHI 10 1 CHZ 10 1 d E i 10000 ou 20 0 Urdiv 5 00 U div Save Exec DC Full DC Full s Binary L 11 16 IM 701410 01E 11 6 Saving Loading Waveform Data Loading the wavefo
48. 2000 06 19 02 45 20z 36 ice Normal Stopped 49 5MS s 2OOnsAlin MATH Mathi Setup Mathi Display m o Operation Invert Mathi Setup Source CH1 C1 C2 l alk Scale muto Manual Mathi Label Upper Mathi Lower _ 2 0000E 61 unit L 3 Smoothing PrF N Math2 Display E oN M Math Setup aE ae C3 C4 L Edge CHI Math2 Label Auto DC Full 9 00 V 5 00 Urdiv 4 Mathz 4 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Operation 5 Pressing the SELECT key displays the operator setting menu 6 Turn the jog shuttle to select Invert and press the SELECT key 9 26 IM 701410 01E 9 6 Inverting the Waveform Display Selecting the waveform to be inverted 7 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Source 8 Pressing the SELECT key displays the channel setting menu 9 Turn the jog shuttle to select the channel on which to perform computation and press the SELECT key Scaling 10 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Scale 11 Press the SELECT key to select Auto or Manual 12 f you selected Manual turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Upper 13 Pressing the SELECT key displays a menu used to display the upper limit of the waveform 14 Turn the jog shuttle to select the upper limit and press the SELECT key 15 S
49. 5k 2k 1k 1 Forthe setting enclosed by the bold line repetitive sampling is active 2 Because acquisition size is 2 MWords the waveform is displayed over 8 divisions of the time axis only Note that the trigger position setting percentage in this case with respect to the 8 division length 100 8 divisions 3 4 MWord model Box average cannot be specified Changes to normal mode even when envelope mode has been set App 18 IM 701410 01E Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length Record length 4 M words DL7200 Rep Repetitive sampling mode When Mode other than Envelope Mode is Active When Envelope Mode is Active Setting Interleave mode OFF Interleave Mode ON Interleave mode Interleave Mode Rep OFF Rep ON Rep OFF Rep ON OFF ON Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed rate record len rate record len rate record len rate record len rate record len rate S s gth word S s gth word S s gth word S s gth word S s gth word S s 10k 5M 10k 5M 10k 5M 10k 5M 800M 5M 800M 20k 4M 20k 4M 20k 4M 20k 4M 800M 4M 800M 50k 5M 50k 5M 50k 5M 50k 5M 800M 5M 800M 800M 5M 800M 800M 4M 800M 800M 5M 800M 800M 5M 800M 800M 4M 800M 800M 5M 800M 800M 5M 800M 800M 4M 800M 800M 5M 800M 800M 5M 800M 800M 4M 800M 1G 5M
50. B OFF pry L DpCiMo 1 0000E 00 B 0 0000E 00 Unit Band Width L Full LS 000s 2 000 V d d 5 000ms CHi 10 1 CHZ 10 1 Edge CHI 20 0 Uvdiv 0 500 U div Auto DC Full DC Full EEY L Note Linear scaling is not available for the following waveforms Snapshot waveforms Accumulated waveforms except for newest waveform Youcan set linear scaling separately for each channel The A and B values remain in memory after you switch the linear scaling function OFF and are restored if you switch the function back on Mathematical computations operate with respect to the scaling results IM 701410 01E 5 11 Sexy JE UOZHOH pue e2I49A 5 10 Turning ON OFF the Logic Input and Setting the Threshold Level Function Turns ON OFF the optional logic input bits and sets the threshold level Turning ON OFF the logic input When the logic input is turned ON a window for the logic waveforms opens Selecting the bits to display You can set which bits to display for each pod When all the bits on either POD A or POD B are turned OFF the vertical display range of the other pod widens Threshold level Select the threshold level of the input signal for each pod from the following three types TTL 14V ECL 13V User Arbitrary in 0 1 V steps 10 V Defining the waveform label T
51. C1 Min C1 fug C1 00001 26 4167 16 2683U 1T 10 2083U 5 93691nu i00002 20 4167U 10 2083U 10 2003U 8 95 44nU 00003 20 4167U 10 2083U 10 2083U 3 853278nU 00004 20 4167U 10 2083U 10 2083U 11 6822nU 20 4167U 10 2083U 10 2003U 10 0407nU 20 41674 10 2083U 10 2083U 14 1236nU T 26 6250U 18 4162U 10 2083U 6 39519nU 20 41674 10 Z083V 10 2683U 3 4 882muU 20 4167U 10 208030 190 2083U 15 8526nU 20 41674 10 20834 10 2003U 10 3983nU 20 41674 10 2083V 10 2083U 2 79139nU 20 4167U 10 2083U 10 2083U 9 33240nU 20 41674 10 2083U 10 2683U 16 3323mU 20 4167U 10 208030 190 2083U 8 66580nU 20 41674 10 20834 10 2003U 10 7698nU 20 41674 10 2083V 10 2083U 8 02003nU 20 4167U 10 2083U 10 2083U 9 24908nU 26 4167 16 2683 10 2083V 9 81993nU 20 4167U 10 208030 190 2083U 1 39569nU 20 41674 10 20834 10 2003U 12 5821nU 20 4167U 10 2083U 10 2083U 12 4154nU 20 4167U 10 2083U 10 2083U 3 72879nU 20 41674 10 Z083V 10 2083V 54091nU Press the Max Min Item1 Max Min Item4 soft keys to move the cursor to the maximum and minimum values From the left of the displayed parameters are Item1 Item2 Item3 and Item4 You can change the order to ascending or descending with the Sort soft key Statistical Processing with History Data Applicable to DL7100 with software ROM version 1 21 or later See section 15 4 Checking the
52. File Nane CHAPTS 1 K File List Lin tons 20 00 V 16 0 ns CHI 10 1 CHZ 10 1 Edge CHI F M File Nane 20 0 Urdiv 5 00 U div Auto DC Full DC Full ME CHAPTS 15 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Auto Naming 16 Press the SELECT key to select ON or OFF 17 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to File Name 18 Pressing the SELECT key displays a keyboard Enter the file name using up to eight characters according to the procedures given on page 4 2 If you turned ON the auto naming function the first five characters are valid Executing the output 19 Pressing the COPY key outputs a hard copy of the screen Pressing the COPY key aborts the output IM 701410 01E 10 11 ejeq u 1 S jo 1ndino H Chapter 11 Data Saves and Loads the Recording Medium 11 1 Floppy Disks Floppy Disks that can be Used The following types of 3 5 inch floppy disk can be used Floppy disks can be formatted on this instrument 2HD 1 2 MB or 1 44 MB MS DOS format 2DD 640 KB or 720 KB MS DOS format Inserting a floppy disk into the drive Hold the floppy disk with the label facing up and insert it with the shutter section facing the drive Insert the floppy disk until the eject button pops out Removing the floppy disk from the drive Check that the access indicator is not lit then press the eject button Access indicator E
53. HE I GP IB CH4 o To lt E 28 Data M amp 9 8 lt processing SCSI LOGIC 1 o 4 Buffer 1 icit Serial Y RS 232 LOGIC 2 o 4 Butter t CPU ke Y gt Centronics Trigger 7 i E circuit Time base 3 FDD 4 External clock input gt PC Card optional External trigger input g gt Ethernet tional Gate trigger input e POETE o Trigger output Signal flow The signals to be measured enter at the input terminals and pass first to the attenuator ATT and preamplifier Adjusted vertical axis characteristics voltage and amplitude in accordance with the settings for input coupling probe attenuation V div and offset value are passed to the multiplexer The multiplexer outputs each signal to the corresponding A D converter in accordance with the time axis settings The A D converter converts the voltages into digital values The Primary Processing Circuit then writes converted values into the primary memory at the appropriate sampling rate as determined by the time axis setting The secondary processing circuit performs averaging and other types of processing on the data in the primary memory and writes the resultant data to the acquisition memory The data written to the acquisition memory is then converted to waveform display data by the secondary processing circuit and transferred to the waveform processing circuit by which the data are stored in the display memory Waveforms are displayed on the screen base
54. If a key is pressed or the jog shuttle is turned while a help window is displayed the help window relating to the displayed soft key menu or the jog shuttle menu will appear Clearing the help window Pressing the HELP key again while a help window is displayed will clear the help window Operating Procedure 1 Press the HELP key 2 Press the function key or soft key corresponding to the function for which you want help Clearing the help window 3 Press the HELP key again to close the window IM 701410 01E suonejedo UoWwWO0y gt Chapter 5 Vertical and Horizontal Axes 5 1 Turning Channels ON OFF Function Channels CH1 to CH4 can be displayed simultaneously When turned ON the indicators to the left of the channel keys light Note The screen can be split into up to six display areas Refer to page 8 1 A scaling value and waveform label name for each display area refer to page 8 6 8 7 can also be displayed If a waveform or waveforms are loaded from history memory store memory or floppy disk the input waveform cannot be displayed To compare waveforms use the snapshot function When the logic input is turned ON a window for the logic waveforms opens Operating Procedure 1 Press one of the CH1 to CH4 keys or LOGIC key to select the desired channel 2 Pressthe Display for CH1 CH4 or Mode for LOGIC soft key to select ON or OFF The CH1 to CH4 or LOGIC k
55. If you press the RESET key the setting will be restored to 5 div 14 Press the ESC key to close the dialog box Setting the Display Position for the Search Results When Zoom Mode is Z1 amp Z2 or Main amp Z1 amp Z2 15 Press the Results Window soft key to select Z1 or Z2 Executing the Search 16 Press the Exec soft key to perform the search The results are displayed in the zoom waveform display position selected in step 15 You can perform a search using the same search criteria 1000 times Displaying Previous Search Results 17 Press the Searched Pattern soft key to highlight the jog shuttle icon 18 Turn the jog shuttle to select the number of the search results to be displayed The most recent search has the highest number Changing the Zooming Factor and Position 19 As you did with the zoomed waveform press the Z1 Mag Z2 Mag soft key then turn the jog shuttle to change the zooming factor of Z1 and Z2 20 As you did with the zoomed waveform press the Z1 Position Z2 Position soft key then turn the jog shuttle to change the position of the zoom box for Z1 and Z2 8 24 IM 701410 01E 8 9 Search Data Using Search and Zoom Function When Performing a Pulse Width Search 1 Press the SHIFT key to activate shift mode The functions printed in purple letters on the front panel become activated 2 Press the ZOOM key Selecting the Search Method 3 Press the Type soft key to
56. Items to be set FTP Passive LPR Timeout SMTP Timeout Operating Procedure Press the MISC key Press the Network soft key to display the Network menu Press the Others soft key to display the Others settings menu Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to FTP passive then press the SELECT key to select ON or OFF 5 Next move the cursor with the jog shuttle to LPR Timeout or SMTP Timeout and press the SELECT key to display the settings menu for that setting item 6 Use the jog shuttle to enter the time The server will be automatically disconnected from the network if there is no response from it within the time specified in these settings PMNs 13 18 IM 701410 01E Chapter 14 Other Operations 14 1 Setting the Screen Color and Brightness Function Screen Color You can set arbitrary colors for the following items The colors are set using R red G green and B blue ratios from 0 to 15 Menu screen Fore Back Focus Select Dialog Shadow Line Waveform CH1 to Pod B Back Others Snap Snap1 to 4 Grid Cursor Maker Brightness You can set the brightness for the following items from 1 to 15 steps Menu screen Menu Waveform Snap Grid Cursor Selected menu item Background Selected cursor Selected menu Dialog box Background color of the selected menu Lines on the menu screen Waveform Background color of the waveform display are
57. LL e Show Map Search Mode OFF all zi f L l E HISTORY select Recor 0 Display Mode Dn All o start Record I End Record o ick Normal 5kS s_200NSAi HISTORY J5 L zone Myselect Record a Display Mode ALL Start Record a End Record Li Search Mode Parameter f Search Setup Edge CHi 4 Single Search Exec 9 00 U l Parameter Select the Search Criteria Select Param 4 Press the Search Setup soft key to display the Search Criteria Setting menu 2000 03 02 21 04 32 Nornal Stopped y 5kS s 200ns4 Search Setup Select Param Parani Condition IN OUT 4 Item Setup CHi P P I Time Rangel 5 000d iu Time Range2 5 000div CHI 10 1 Edge CHI 5 00 U div Single Search Exec DC Full 90 00 V 5 Pressthe Select Param soft key to display the search criteria selection menu 6 Press one of the soft keys for Param1 Param4 to select the search criterion Setting the Condition 7 Press the Condition soft key repeatedly to select OFF ON or OUT Setting the Parameter Item Setup 8 Pressthe Item Setup soft key to display the parameter selection menu 9 Press the soft key corresponding to the channe
58. OOCO00 15 11 D Sub 15 pin receptacle Pin No Signal Specification 1 Red 0 7 Vp p 2 Green 0 7 Vp p 3 Blue 0 7 Vp p 4 E 5 paum 6 GND 7 GND 8 GND 9 S 10 GND 11 12 13 Horizontal synchronous signal Approx 31 3 kHz TTL negative logic 14 Vertical synchronous signal Approx 60 Hz TTL negative logic 15 Connecting the monitor 1 Turn OFF the DL7100 and the monitor 2 Connect the monitor to the DL7100 using an analog RGB cable 3 Turn ON the DL7100 and the monitor The instrument s screen is displayed on the monitor Note The RGB VIDEO OUT terminal outputs RGB video signal at all times The picture on the monitor may flicker if the DL7100 or another instrument is brought too close to the monitor The ends of the screen may be cut off on some monitors 12 4 IM 701410 01E Chapter 13 Ethernet Communications Optional 13 1 Connecting the DL7100 DL7200 to a Personal Computer lt For a description of this function refter to page 1 28 gt Connection Method Connection to a Network The DL7100 DL7200 uses a 10BASE T type Ethernet connector Use an adapter such as a hub shown below to connect to the network If you have a different connector type use the appropriate adapter for that connector type 10BASE T compatible adapter h
59. Part No B9850NX Specification Thermo sensible 30 m Minimum quantity 5 rolls Handling the Roll Chart Thermosensible roll charts produce color using a thermal reaction therefore the following precautions must be taken Storage precautions The roll chart begins to develop color at approximately 70 C It is very sensitive to heat damp light and chemicals both before and after use Keep roll charts in a dry cool and dark place Once the package is opened use the roll chart as soon as possible Ifthe roll chart is left in contact with plastic films containing plasticizer for instance vinyl chloride film cellophane tape etc for a long period of time discoloration will occur on the recording area of the chart due to the plasticizer If you are going to keep the roll chart in a holder for instance use a polypropylene holder When you use adhesive on the roll chart never use adhesive which contains an organic solvent such as alcohol or ether otherwise color may develop on the chart When you are going to store recorded roll charts for a long period of time we suggest you make a copy of the charts since discoloration may occur Usage precautions Use only YOKOGAWA s genuine roll charts Donottouch the roll chart with sweaty hands otherwise it may become stained with your fingerprints and information may be lost Donotrub the surface of the roll chart strongly with a firm object color development may o
60. Record length setting limit DL7100 If 8 MW CH model Not above 2 MWord 4 MWord with interleave ON If 2 MW CH model Not above 500 kWord 1 MWord with interleave ON DL7200 If 16 MW CH model 4 MWord or less not above 8 MWord with interleave ON If 4 MW CH model 1 MWord or less not above 2 MWord with interleave ON Sampling rate setting limit Not above 200 MS s for the DL7100 or 500 MS s with interleave ON and not above 500 MS s for the DL7200 with interleave ON or OFF If the sample rate exceeds 200 MS s fot the DL7100 500 MS s when interleave is ON or 500 MS s for the DL7200 with interleave ON or OFF the mode is set to normal mode even if box average is specified IM 701410 01E 7 7 7 4 Box Average Mode Operating Procedure 1 Press the ACQ key 2 Press the Mode soft key to display the acquisition mode menu 3 Press the soft key corresponding to Box Average to select it 1999 67 05 21 07 00 jj tk Nornal Stopped 1 1 100kS s INSA CHT 62 0 V lt lt Mainzlk gt gt gt p H Mode I Box Average L Inter leave L L 2 000 V B s 5 008 CHI 10 1 CHZ 10 1 Edge CHI 20 0 Udiy 6 506 Urdiu SingletN DC Full DC Full 10 2 V L Ext 7 8 IM 701410 01E 7 5 Using Interleave Mode lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 13 gt Function This mode doubles the amount of m
61. S Sdeu 5 Width Int2XY High Duty fc Lou Bursti l 4 Shot s Burst2 fc OShot c Pulse 4 All Clear_ Copy To AlI Trace Lio tons 20 00 V CHI 10 1 CHZ 10 1 Edge CH1 20 0 Ur div 5 00 U div Auto DC Full DC Full vehe M L 5 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired measurement channel 6 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the parameter you wish to turn ON You can turn OFF all parameters at once by selecting All Clear You can copy the current parameter settings to all traces by selecting Copy to All Trace 7 Press the SELECT key to turn ON the parameter 8 Repeat steps 5 to 7 as necessary 9 14 IM 701410 01E 9 2 Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters Setting the delay Delay Setup 9 Pressthe Delay Setup soft key to display the delay setting menu and the measurement channel dialog box 2000 06 19 03 32 56 fio Normal Stopped 1936 5HS s 200usAi Source m B CHL a 1 t Delay Setup Mode Measure Polarity L Edge Count Reference Trace Polarity 5 00 Urdiv DC Full 10 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired measurement channel 11 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Mode 12 Press
62. SELECT key to select ON or OFF If OFF is selected Param1 will be excluded from the determination criteria Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Trace Press the SELECT key to display the channel menu Turn the jog shuttle to select the channel and press the SELECT key Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Item Press the SELECT key to display the automated measurement item menu Turn the jog shuttle to select the item and press the SELECT key Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Upper Press the SELECT key to display the upper limit setting menu Turn the jog shuttle to select the upper limit and press the SELECT key Set the lower limit in a similar fashion Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Condition Press the SELECT key to select IN or OUT Set Param2 to Param4 as necessary 5 00d iv 9 36 IM 701410 01E 9 11 GO NO GO Operation Using the Measurement of Waveform Parameters Setting the Logic 20 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Logic 21 Press the SELECT key to select AND or OR Setting the Sequence 22 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Sequence 23 Press the SELECT key to select Single or Continue Setting the ACQ Count 24 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to ACQ Count 25 Press the SELEC
63. Single Set the X axis trace of XY1 and XY2 common Dual Setthe X axis trace individually for XY1 and XY2 Assigning X horizontal and Y vertical axes The channels that can be assigned to the X axis and Y axis depending on the X axis mode as follows X axis mode X Y X axis Y axis Single XY1 CH1 to CH4 Math1 Math2 CH1 CH2 Math 1 XY2 CH1 to CH4 Math1 Math2 CH3 CH4 Math 2 Dual XY1 CH1 CH2 Math1 CH1 CH2 Math 1 XY2 CH3 CH4 Math2 CH3 CH4 Math 2 Number of X Y waveforms that can be displayed The number of X Y waveforms that can be displayed is two XY1 XY2 The display of each X Y waveform can be turned ON OFF Selecting the display format Mode You can choose from the following three display formats T Y amp X Y The top window displays normal T Y waveforms The bottom window displays X Y waveforms X Y Displays only X Y waveforms T Y Displays only T Y waveforms Selecting the X Y waveform display range Start Point End Point The X Y display shows the range selected on the T Y waveform You can set the start fine dashed line and end coarse dashed line positions in the range 5 to 5 div from the center of the waveform display frame The start and end positions are not displayed on the X Y waveform The resolution is as follows Resolution T div x 10 displayed record length Precautions to be taken when displaying X Y waveforms The divided windows of the T Y waveform display when usi
64. To prevent the possibility of electric shock and accidents when making measurements connect the ground of the probe and input connector to the earth ground potential of the item to be measured p I UUU u l aU MULL vi IM 701410 01E How to Use this Manual Structure of the Manual This User s Manual consists of 16 chapters an Appendix and an Index as described below Chapter Title Content 1 Functions Introduces the unit s features functions and operating principles Please read this information to familiarize yourself with the unit s capabilities This chapter does not present operational details 2 Name and Use of Briefly explains the significance and use of the unit s Each Part controls connectors and screen displays Includes page references to help you find detailed information quickly 3 Before Starting Presents safety precautions and explains how to install Observation and connect up and switch on the unit Also explains how to Measurement of connect the probes and how to set the Waveforms date 4 Common Operations Explains basic operations including acquisition start Stop automatic setup parameter reset snapshots trace clearing and calibration 5 Vertical and Horizontal Explains settings related to vertical voltage and Axes horizontal time axes Vertical axis settings include channel on off input coupling probe attenuation an
65. When Zoom Mode is Z1 amp Z2 or Main amp Z1 amp Z2 14 Press the Result Window soft key to select Z1 or Z2 Executing the Search 15 Press the Exec soft key to perform the search The search results are displayed in the zoom waveform display position selected in step 14 Displaying Previous Search Results 16 Press the Searched Pattern soft key to highlight the jog shuttle icon 17 Turn the jog shuttle to select one of the displayed search results numbers The higher the number the more recent the search result 8 26 IM 701410 01E 8 9 Search Data Using Search and Zoom Function When Performing an Auto Scroll Search 1 Pressthe Shift key to activate the shift mode 2 Press the Zoom key Selecting the Search Method Type 3 Press the Type soft key to display the search method selection menu 4 Press the Auto Scroll soft key to select the search method 2000 03 62 19 52 03zqj jio Normal Stopped E SkS s 200nsAi SEARCH Type Auto Scroll Direction lt THESE 2i Mag xz Z1 Position 6 000div D Speed 4 Edge CHI F 5 00 U div Single Exec DC Full 0 00 U Selecting the Scroll Direction 5 Pressthe Direction soft key to set the scrolling direction Setting the Search Results Display Position When Zoom Mode is Z1 amp Z2 or Main amp Z1 amp Z2 6 Press the Results Window soft ke
66. futo Level Normal Single Singlet 2 000 v a 3 i S CHI 10 1 CHZ 10 1 Edge CHI Singiedo 20 0 Udiy 6 506 U diu SinglecN Count DC Full DC Full EN 4 IM 701410 01E 6 1 HunebbuL o 6 2 Setting the Trigger Delay lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 12 gt Function Although the display usually shows the waveform before and after the trigger point using the delay function it is possible to display the acquired waveform after a fixed time period elapses Setting range for trigger delay 0 to 4 s Resolution is 1 sample rate T trigger position Delay time ka a Ld Trigger point Points for attention When T div is changed the trigger delay remains unchanged However its position in relation to the overall record length changes If the timebase is provided by an external clock the trigger delay is fixed at Os no delay Operating Procedure 1 Pressthe SHIFT key to set the keys in the shifted condition Functions marked in purple on the panel become active 2 Pressthe POSITION key 3 Turn the jog shuttle to set the trigger delay You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits In addition pressing the RESET key resets the delay to 0 s 1999 07 65 08 54 11 jt fio Normal Stopped er iMS s insAli DELAY e Delay 9 01 GAN L L
67. gt notation for the top directory may not be displayed nthe following cases the time information in a file list will not be displayed accurately When Windows NT uses an AM or PM timestamp When using a server that returns kanji or other non ASCII character strings in a list The following are not possible Turning file protect ON and OFF on saved files Formatting a network drive Copying between network drives Renaming a file on the network This function can not be used in conjunction with FTP server function Before saving data to a network drive you must configure TCP IP see 13 2 Configuring the Ethernet Interface TCP IP When connected to the network you must disconnect then reconnect for settings to take effect When you are disconnected by the server when using the FTP client you will be automatically reconnected if you perform a file operation save load etc This is the same if NDO is selected for Save to File when using an action trigger or GO NO GO The Ethernet communication function and the GP IB function cannot be used simultaneously The FTP function cannot be used between two YOKOGAWA digital oscilloscopes For example using one DL7200 as an FTP server and another DL7200 as an FTP client is not possible 13 6 IM 701410 01E 13 4 Saving Screen Image Data to a Network Drive Function lt For a description of this function refter to page 1 28 gt You can
68. gth word Sample rate S s Displayed record len gth word Sample Displayed rate record len S s gth word Sample rate S s Displayed record len gth word Sample rate S s Displayed 50k 25M 100k 20 M 200 k 20 M 500k 25M 1M 20 M Roll mode display Record length cannot be set to 16 Mword when interleave mode is OFF 2M 20 M 5M 25M 10M 20 M 20M 20 M 50M 25M 100 M 20 M 200 M 20 M 500M 25M 1G 20 M 2G 20 M 2G 10M 2G 4M 2G 2M 2G 1M 2G 400 k 2G 200k 2G 100k 2G 40k 2G 20k 2G 10k 2G 4k 2G 2k 2G 1k 2G 2G Repetitive sampling mode cannot be ON when record length is set to 16 Mword Record length cannot be set to 16 Mword when interleave mode is OFF 800M 800M 800M 800M 800M 800M 800M 800M 800M 800M 800M 800M 1G Changes to normal mode even when envelope mode has been set 1 Forthe setting enclosed by the bold line repetitive sampling is active 2 Because acquisition size is 16 MWords When the display record length is 20 MWord the waveform is displayed over 8 divisions of the time axis only when the displ
69. 000 V 3 d 5 CHI 10 1 CHZ 10 1 Edge Ext 20 0 Urdiv 6 506 Urdiu DC Full DC Full L Note If you make an incorrect change with the jog shuttle you can undo the change by pressing the RESET key IM 701410 01E 4 1 suonejedo uouiuio5 B 4 1 Entering Values and Character Strings Entering a Character String Date time file name and comment can be entered using the keyboard displayed on the screen Operate the keyboard using the jog shuttle SELECT key and arrow key to enter a character string as follows Keyboard operation 1 e 2000 08 03 15 et e Stopped CH 10 1 5 00 U div DC Full 1999 67 63 10 30 37 j Stopped eH Turn the jog shuttle and move the cursor to the character you wish to enter On DL7200 and DL7100 with firmware version 2 01 or later the A and W soft keys can be used to move the cursor up and down If a character string is already entered use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the position at which you wish to enter the character Press the SELECT key to confirm the character entry Repeat steps 1 and 2 to enter all the characters After selecting ENT on the keyboard and pressing the SELECT key the character string is confirmed and the keyboard disappears On DL7200 and DL7100 with firmware version 2 01 or later the ENT soft key can be used to confirm the string and hide the keyboard At thi
70. 1 Cursor 2 PodA A4 PodB B3 When the arrangement is AO A7 BO B7 Binary Y1 01 01 101 11 01 Y2 10 10 100 00 01 Hexa Y1 2DD Y2 541 When the arrangement is B7 BO A7 A0 Binary Y1 10 11 101 10 10 Y2 10 00 001 01 01 Hexa Y1 5DA Y2 415 Cursor Jump only when the X Y waveform is not displayed You can make Marker cursors V cursors and angle cursors jump to the center of the zoom window The cursors can be jumped in the following manner For marker cursors to Z1 Make the selected marker jump to the Z1 window to Z2 Make the selected marker jump to the Z2 window V cursor and angle cursor Cursor1 to Z1 Make Cursor1 jump to the Z1 window Cursor1 to Z2 Make Cursor1 jump to the Z2 window Cursor2 to Z1 Make Cursor2 jump to the Z1 window Cursor2 to Z2 Make Cursor2 jump to the Z2 window Notes when making cursor measurements The time axis values are measured from the trigger position The measured value will be displayed as if the measurement is not possible Logic waveforms optional cannot be measured using marker cursors and H cursors Operating Procedure Selecting the cursor type 1 Press the CURSOR key 2 Pr
71. 10 RH Internal condensation may occur if the instrument is moved to another place where both the ambient temperature and humidity are higher or if the temperature changes rapidly In such cases allow the instrument to acclimatize to its new environment for at least one hour before starting operation Never install the instrument in the following places In direct sunlight or near heat sources Where an excessive amount of soot steam dust or corrosive gases are present Near magnetic field sources Near high voltage equipment or power lines Where the level of mechanical vibration is high In an unstable place Installation Position Place the instrument in a horizontal position or tilted using the stand as shown below When you use the stand pull it forwards until it locks To return the stand to its original position push it backwards Rubber feet When using the instrument in the tilted position attach two rubber stoppers to the rear feet to prevent the instrument from sliding 3 4 IM 701410 01E 3 3 Connecting the Power Cord Before Connecting the Power Make sure that you observe the following points before connecting the power Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the instrument A WARNING Connect the power cord after confirming that the voltage of the power supply complies to the rated electric power voltage for the instrument Connect the power cord after confirming that the instrument powe
72. 10k 400 M 10k 800 M 10k 10k 10k 10k 10k 400 M 10k 800 M 10k 10k 10k 10k 10k 400 M 10k 800 M 10k 10k 10k 10k 10k 400 M 10k 800 M 10k 10k 10k 10k 10k 400 M 10k 800 M 10k Roll mode display 10k 10k 10k 10k 400 M 10k 800 M 10k 10k 10k 10k 10k 400 M 10k 800 M 10k 10k 10k 10k 10k 400 M 10k 800 M 10k 10k 10k 10k 10k 400 M 10k 800 M 10k 10k 10k 10k 10k 400 M 10k 800 M 10k 10k 10k 10k 10k 400 M 10k 800 M 10k 10k 10k 10k 10k 400 M 10k 800 M 10k 10k 10k 10k 10k 400 M 10k 800 M 10k 10k 10k 10k 10k 400 M 10k 800 M 10k 10k 10k 10k 10k 400 M 10k 800 M 10k 10k 10k 10k 10k 400 M 10k 800 M 10k 10k 10k 10k 10k 400 M 10k 800 M 10k 10k 10k 10k 10k 400 M 10k 800 M 10k 10k 10k 10k 10k 400 M 10k 800 M 10k 10k 10k 10k 10k 400 M 10k 800 M 10k 10k 5k 10k 10k 10k 10k 2 5k 5k 10k 1k 2k 500 1k 250 500 100 200 ka For the setting enclosed by the bold line repetitive sampling is active OG 10k Changes to normal mode even when envelope mode has been set App 2 IM
73. 14 53 R U a CHAPTOO1 TIF 38574 19997 07707 14 52 R U CHAPT G6 TIF 38574 1999 07 07 14 50 R U Pi Il CHAPTOO0 HDR 2924 1999 07 07 13 19 R U Property n CHAPTOO0 UUF 1208849 1999 07 07 13 19 R U Filter ir so SET Re im i a I 0000 ous 20 00 v Jo o 1000 04 M CH 10 1 CHZ 10 1 Edge CHI Save Exec 20 0 Wdiv 5 00 Uzdiv Auto Save Exec Setup nc Full nc Full Z Setup 5 Press the File List soft key to display the file list dialog box Turn the jog shuttle to select the save destination medium displayed with parentheses 7 Press the SELECT key to confirm the selection Selecting the destination directory Use this only when there are directories on the medium 8 9 Turn the jog shuttle to select the save destination directory displayed with lt gt Press the SELECT key to confirm the selection The Path ___ box on the top left corner of the File List dialog box displays the selected medium directory Selecting moves to a higher level directory Setting the file name comment 10 Press the File Name soft key to display the file name setting menu 19939370770 14 39 23 j fico Normal Stopped 4 q SMSvs 2ZnsA Save cnr Sw SC Main 100k gt gt B 2 CH 20 nc Pam File List Pat
74. 16 10 SCSI Interface Item Specifications Standard SCSI Small Computer System Interface ANSI X3 131 1986 Connector Half pitch 50 pin Connector pin assignments Unbalanced single end 16 8 IM 701410 01E 16 11 Built in Printer Optional Item Specifications Printing system Thermal line dot method Dot density 6 dots mm Paper width 112 mm 16 12 Built in Floppy Disk Drive Item Specifications No of drives 1 Drive size 3 5 inch Capacity 640 KB 720 KB 1 2 MB 1 44 MB 16 13 PC Card Interface Optional Item Specifications No of slots 1 Supported card Flash ATA card PC card TYPE II 16 14 Ethernet Communications Specifications Optional Item Specifications Communication Port 1 Electrical Mechanical IEEE 802 3 standards Specifications Transmission Method Ethernet 10BASE T Transmission Rate 10 Mbps Communication Protocol TCP IP Supported Services FTP server FTP client network drive LPR client network printer SMTP client mail transmission DHCP DNS Connector Type RJ 4S connector IM 701410 01E 16 9 E suoneoyioodg 16 15 General Item Specifications Standard operating conditions Ambient temperature 23 2 C Ambient humidity 55 10 RH Power voltage and frequency Less than 1 of the rated voltage frequency fluctuation Warm up time 30 min or more S
75. 2 V Binary 19 Turn the jog shuttle to select Auto Naming 20 Press the SELECT key to select ON or OFF 21 Turn the jog shuttle to select File Name 22 Press the SELECT key to display a keyboard IM 701410 01E 11 15 uinipojy Buip1o28H oui speo pue saAes ejeq E 11 6 Saving Loading Waveform Data 23 Enter the file name according to the procedures given in page 4 2 24 Turn the jog shuttle to select Comment 25 Press the SELECT key to display a keyboard 26 Enter the file comment according to the procedures given in page 4 2 27 Press the ESC key to close the file name setting dialog box Saving the file 28 Press the Save Exec soft key to save the file to the directory indicated in Path2 The name of the Save Exec soft key changes to Abort 199393707707 14 39 23 j 10o Normal Stopped 4 q SMSvs ZnsA Save CHT EINE lt lt Maint 100k 22 k H 4 File List M File Nane L CHAPTS Trace ALL L Range Main History DH Compression cae ON d i i 10000 ou CHI 10 1 CHZ 10 1 Edge CH1 20 0 Urdiv 5 00 U div Auto Save Exec DC Full DC Full 7 2 V Binary Canceling the saving operation 29 Press the Abort soft key to cancel the save operation The name of the Abort soft key changes to Save Exec L L 10080 dus
76. 200kS s 5msAj Network kl TCP IP Setup TCP IP mce P Setup IP Address User Net Mask E55 E53 Account L Gate Way up dene mail s Setup Domain Nane L Net Drive DNS Serveri EA Setup 3 INS Seruer2 Net Print Domain Suff ixi Setup Domain Suff ix2 ig L Others CHI Tord Edge CHI 5 00 Urdiv Auto Connect DC Full 7 50 V Log List 14 Move the cursor to Domain Name by turning the jog shuttle 15 Press the SELECT key to display the keyboard 16 Follow the procedure on page 4 2 of the user s manual and input the domain name 17 Move the cursor with the jog shuttle to the DNS Server 1 field and press the SELECT key to display the setting menu 18 Setthe primary DNS server values from 0 to 255 using the jog shuttle 19 In the same manner set the secondary DNS server in the DNS Server 2 field 20 Move the cursor to Domain Suffix1 by turning the jog shuttle 21 Press the SELECT key to display the keyboard 22 Follow the procedure on page 4 2 of the user s manual and input the primary domain suffix 23 Inthe same manner set the secondary domain suffix in the domain suffix 2 field L L Turning the Power ON OFF 24 You must restart the DL7100 DL7200 for the settings to take affect After all the settings are complete tur
77. 3 Press the soft key corresponding to the action you wish to enable and select ON Selecting the number of waveform acquisitions 4 Turn the jog shuttle to set the waveform acquisition count You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits In addition pressing the RESET key sets the count to Infinite Executing the action on trigger 5 Pressing the Exec soft key starts the waveform acquisition and executes the action on trigger Aborting the action on trigger 6 Pressing the Abort soft key or the START STOP key to stops the waveform acquisition and aborts the action on trigger 6 36 IM 701410 01E Chapter 7 Acquisition and Display 7 1 Function Setting the Record Length lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 13 gt The record length sets the amount of data to be written into the acquisition memory The maximum length depends upon the machine model Available length settings are as follows DL7100 8 M CH model 1 k 10 k 50 k 100 k 250 k 500k 1M 2M 4 M 8 M 2 M CH model 1 k 10 k 50 k 100 k 250 k 500 k 1 M 2 M DL7200 16 M CH model 1 k 10 k 50 k 100 k 250 k 500 k 1 M 2M 4M 8M 16 M 4 M CH model 1 k 10 k 50k 100 k 250 k 500 k 1 M 2 M 4 M Value in parenthesis is available only if interleave mode is ON Setting precautions Sampling rate and displayed record length vary according to the T div setting For details se
78. 6 5 7 5 8 5 9 5 10 5 11 5 12 Turning Channels ON OFF essen nennen nnne nente nnne rennen 5 1 Setting the Vertical Position of a Waveform sese 5 2 Selecting Input Coupling cic a cod doit recte nde acetone 5 3 Selecting Probe Attenuation esessssssessseseeseeeeeennnee nennen nnne 5 4 Setting the Offset Voltage sesesssesseseseseseseeeene nenne nennen nnne nnne nns nnn nnne 5 5 The PresetFtncllOr 5 iuo eode ict ret ee edes e dence digs sedeo tos 5 6 Setting the Bandwidth 2 a pe ah ERR Ie ict E EP wa 5 8 rupes E 5 9 Using the Linear Scaling Function eene 5 11 Turning ON OFF the Logic Input and Setting the Threshold Level 5 12 Selecting the Timebase ssssssssssseseeeeeeeee nennen enne nnne nennen 5 14 Setting T dlV nde c e ee c e ee Ue E ped e tue 5 16 Chapter6 Triggering 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6 6 7 6 8 6 9 6 10 6 11 6 12 6 13 6 14 6 15 6 16 Setting the Trigger Mode 3 deum iv UE e 6 1 Setting the Trigger Delay 5 nh p e eH P EORR 6 2 Setting the Trigger Position sadna eea a aiaa a nnne nnne nnne 6 3 Setting the Hold Off Time 25 3 t ene n eR RD HERI ER i aeina ia 6 4 Setting the Edge Trigger SIMPLE eecceeeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseaeeeaeeseeeeeeeteaten 6 6 Setting the External Trigger SIMPLE ssssseeeeeneeeeeenn
79. 701410 01E Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length Record length 50 k words DL7100 Rep Repetitive sampling mode When Mode other than Envelope Mode is Active When Envelope Mode is Active Setting Interleave mode OFF Interleave Mode ON Interleave mode Interleave Mode Rep OFF Rep ON Rep OFF Rep ON OFF Sample Displayed Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample rate record len record len rate record len rate record len rate record len rate S s gth word gth word S s gth word S s gth word S s gth word S s 100 50k 50k 100 50 k 100 50k 400 M 50 k 800 M 200 40k 40k 200 40 k 200 40k 400M 40k 800M 500 50k 50k 500 50k 500 50k 400M 50k 800M 1k 50k 50k 1k 50 k 1k 50k 400 M 50 k 800 M 2k 40k 40k 40k 40k 400 M 40k 800M 5k 50k 50k 50 k 50k 400 M 50 k 800 M 50k 50k 50 k 50k 400 M 50 k 800 M 40k 40k 40k 40k 400M 40k 800M 50k 50k 50 k 50k 400 M 50 k 800 M 50k 50k 50 k 50k 400 M 50 k 800 M 40k 40k 40k 40k 400M 40k 800M 50k 50k 50 k 50k 400 M 50 k 800 M 50k 50k 50 k 50 k 400 M 50k 800M 40k 40k 40k 40k 400M 40k 800M 50k 50k 50 k 50k 400 M 50 k 800 M 50k 50 k 50 k 50k 400 M 50 k 800 M 40k 40k 40k 40k 400 M 40k 800M 50k 50k 50 k 50 k 400 M 50k 800M 50k 50k 50 k 50 k 400 M 50k 800M 40k 40k 40k 40k 400M 40k 800M 50k 50k 50 k 50 k 1G 25k 50 k 50 k 10k 20k 5k 10k 2 5k 5k 1k 2k 500 1k 250 500 100 200 Roll
80. As the cursor is moved the displayed value of Position changes 2001 05 24 12 12 28 im Normal Stopped 48193 1575s Ansiti CURSOR g Type Marker Trace xyz Marker cursor fosition 60 060div X To 0 0000908 x 125 326nl s Y 6 000000 CH1 100 1 CHZ 10 1 CH3 10 1 CH4 10 1 Edge CH1 F 5 00 Urdiv 6 506 Urdiv 0 500 Urediv 6 566 Udiv futo nc Full nc Full DC Full DC Full 2 10 U For angle cursors Degree The angle cursors can be set only when the X Y waveform is not displayed Selecting the waveform to be measured Follow steps 1 3 to set the Type to Degree 4 Pressing the Trace soft key displays the waveform menu 9 8 IM 701410 01E 9 1 Measuring Waveforms Using Cursors 1999 07 06 18 52 46 j gtk Normal 4337 Stopped 1 50kS s 2ns li CURSOR ICHT Type d T 80 00 1 WCWu miko Degree Trace Cursori 4 00div Cursorz 4 00div j i T j i i i i i CH1 i B i j Refi Z 00div Ref2 2 00d iv Ref Value 90 i S Cursor Junp 745 6000 dr 01435 0000 DY ee Cursori to 21 WDY i 105 83U linoms 5 Lio ns 20 CHI 10 1 Edge CHI 20 0 Udiy 5 60 U diu Auto Jump Exec DC Full DC Full TEN Press the soft key corresponding to the desired waveform Moving the cursor 6 7 8 Press the Cursor1 Cursor2 soft key to set the jog shuttle
81. Conditions History Memory Section 7 7 The oscilloscope automatically retains the last N waveforms recorded The value of N varies in the range 2 to 2048 for the DL7100 and 2 to 4096 for the DL7200 depending on the record length and interleave mode The oscilloscope retains all waveforms for the first N triggers then for each subsequent trigger the oscilloscope overwrites the oldest stored waveform You are free to switch the display from the current newest waveform to any of other N 1 waveforms in the history The illustration below shows how data can be displayed assuming N 1024 Saved waveform data of previous 1024 triggers I Current waveform display Select Record 0 1 M Selected Record No 0 Any former waveform display Select Record is selectable in the range 0 to 1023 Selected Record No 25 In addition a particular waveform can be found from the past waveforms that are held Display Settings Chapter 8 gt Display format Section 8 1 You can display waveforms from different channels in different windows You can choose to use 1 window Single 2 windows Dual 3 windows Triad 4 windows Quad or 6 windows Hexa You can select either of the following two methods for assigning channels to windows Auto Channels that are set to ON are displayed in order of channel number with the lowest channel displayed in the top window Fixed Channels are displayed in ord
82. Count 35 Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to ACQ Count 36 Press the SELECT key to display the waveform acquisition count setting menu 37 Use the jog shuttle to set the waveform acquisition count then press the SELECT key Selecting the Action for Condition Not Met 38 Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Action 39 Press the SELECT key to turn action ON or OFF 9 42 IM 701410 01E 9 12 GO NO GO Determination Using Zones Setting the Determination Range 40 Press the Time Range1 Time Range soft key to highlight the TimeRange1 jog shuttle icon 41 Use the jog shuttle to set the head of the determination range 42 Inthe same manner set the tail of the range to Time Range2 Executing Determination 43 Press the Exec soft key to execute the determination The Exec key changes to the Abort soft key When the determination is completed acquisition automatically stops You can force a stop by pressing the START STOP key or the Abort soft key IM 701410 01E 9 43 sis euy u1J0JOAEAA jo Chapter 10 Output of Screen Data 10 1 Loading Paper Roll in Built in Printer Optional Printer Roll Chart Use only YOKOGAWA s roll charts When you are using the printer for the first time use the roll chart supplied with the instrument When your roll charts have run out purchase more from your dealer or YOKOGAWA sales offices listed on the back cover of this manual
83. DC Note The auto setup function may not operate properly in some cases such as when the waveform contains a large DC offset or high frequency components The auto set up function cannot be used on input waveforms IM 701410 01E 4 5 suonejJedo uouiuio5 B 4 3 Performing Auto Setup Settings made by auto set up Waveform acquisition and display Acquisition mode Normal Acquisition count Infinite Record length 10k Interleave mode OFF Timebase Int Accumulation mode OFF Zoomed waveforms Traces set ON for display Vertical axis settings V div Set to a value so that the absolute value of the input waveform is between 1 6 div to 4 div approximately Offset voltage 0 V If Adjust Mode is 0 V Coupling Other than DC 50 Q DC 1 MQ DC 50 Q DC 50 Q DC 1 MQ on DL7100 prior to firmware version 2 01 Bandwidth FULL Display ON OFF Turns ON the channels of which the absolute value of the amplitude is at least 20 mV 1 1 Position 0 div Horizontal axis settings T div Set so that screen displays 1 6 to 4 periods of the auto setup waveform with the shortest period Trigger settings Trigger mode Auto Trigger type Simple Trigger source Channel with the longest period and an amplitude of at least 1 div Trigger level and slope Level is 1 2 the trigger source amplitude Slope is rising Trigger coupling The center level of the maximum and minimum values rising HF rejection OF
84. DC Full DC Full Deleting the files Edge Auto Tk CHI Y Delete Exec JL z 2E 4 L 12 Press the Delete Exec soft key All files with the marks are deleted Specifying the file to be displayed in the File List dialog box viewing the properties The procedures are the same as steps 30 to 33 in section 11 6 Saving Loading Waveform Data 1999 07 67 14 39 23 j om Normal ans Utility q 50kS s XCMumiko 1 B z Space 1064448 byte File List Function Delete File Nane Size IFDO 1 CHAPTOOG TIF CHAPTO05 TIF CHAPTOO SNP CHAPTOO4 TIF CHAPTGG1 BMP x CHAPTGGG BMP CHAPTO03 TIF CHAPTOOZ TIF CHAPTOO1 TIF CHAPTOOO TIF 1999707707 21 42 1999707707 21 36 1999707707 21 35 1999 67 07 21 34 R 1999707707 21 33 1999707707 21 27 1999707707 20 54 1999 07 07 20 53 1999707707 20 52 1999707707 20 51 Set Reset fill Reset Property Filter SNP E Attr Lin oons 20 00 V CHi 10 1 CHZ 10 1 20 0 Urdiv 5 00 U div DC Full DC Full Delete Exec L SEE L 4 11 30 IM 701410 01E 11 12 Copying Files Function CAUTION Never remove the medium disk or turn OFF the power while the access indicator or the floppy disk icon is blinking This can damage the medium or destroy the data
85. Data2 value Dt2 E4 3D Enable state of the chip select signal CS L H Setting the bit order Select MSB or LSB according to the data flowing through the bus MSBFirst Select this when the data input output signal is flowing through the bus MSB first LSBFirst Select this when the data input output signal is flowing through the bus LSB first When set to MSBFirst E831 When set to LSBFirst 71C8 8 30 IM 701410 01E 8 10 Analyzing and Searching SPI Signals Displaying the Analysis Result When analysis is performed the analysis results are displayed at the bottom of the waveform screen L enable List of analysis results The following four items are listed at the bottom of the screen No Up to 40000 numbers can be displayed Depending on whether the chip select signal is set the position of the 0 byte varies as follows When the chip select signal is not set The first detected byte after the reference point When the chip select signal is set Byte containing the reference point However if the reference point is located between two bytes the first detected byte after the reference point Clock cs 7 No 0 n No 0 m Reference point Reference point Dt1 Dt2 The data of Data1 and Data2 is displayed using hexadecimal notation However if a byte of data is less than 8 bits the data is not displayed If indefinite data exists is displayed Indefinite data is considered
86. Envelope Mode is Active Rep Repetitive sampling mode When Envelope Mode is Active Interleave mode OFF Interleave Mode ON Rep OFF Rep ON Rep OFF Rep ON Interleave mode Interleave Mode OFF ON Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample record len rate record len rate record len rate gth word S s gth word S s gth word S s Displayed record len gth word Sample Displayed Sample rate record len rate S s gth word S s 100k 200 100 k 200 100 k 200 100 k 800 M 100 k 800 M 100 k 500 100 k 500 100 k 500 100 k 800 M 100 k 800 M 100 k 1k 100 k 1k 100 k 1k 100 k 800 M 100 k 800 M 100 k 100 k 100 k 2k 100 k 800 M 100 k 800 M 100 k 100 k 100 k 5k 100 k 800 M 100 k 800 M 100 k 100 k 100 k 100 k 800 M 100 k 800 M Roll mode display 100 k 100 k 100 k 100 k 800 M 100 k 800 M 100 k 100 k 100 k 100 k 800 M 100 k 800 M 100 k 100 k 100 k 100 k 800 M 100 k 800 M 100 k 100 k 100 k 100 k 800 M 100 k 800 M 100 k 100 k 100 k 100 k 800 M 100 k 800 M 100 k 100 k 100 k 100 k 800 M 100 k 800 M 100 k 100 k 100 k 100 k 800 M 100 k 800 M 100 k 100 k 100 k 100 k 800 M 100 k 800 M 100 k 100 k 100 k 100 k 800 M 100 k 800 M 100 k 100 k 100 k 100 k 800 M 100 k 800 M 10
87. First LSB First L L Bit Order L Setting the clock 6 T 10 11 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Level and press the SELECT key Turn the jog shuttle to set the level You can move between the digits using the arrow keys Pressing the RESET key resets the level to 0 00 V Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Hysteresis and press the SELECT key Turn the jog shuttle to set the hysteresis You can move between the digits using the arrow keys Pressing the RESET key resets the hysteresis to 0 3div Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Polarity Press the SELECT key to select f or t Setting the data 12 13 14 15 16 Note As necessary turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Data1 CH2 and turn it ON Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Thr Upper or Thr Lower of Data1 and press the SELECT key Turn the jog shuttle to set the level used to determine high or low You can move between the digits using the arrow keys Pressing the RESET key resets the level to 0 000 V As necessary turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Data2 CH3 and turn it ON Carry out steps 13 and 14 in a similar fashion Data1 CH2 cannot be set when interleave mode is ON 8 34 IM 701410 01E 8 10 Analyzing and Searching SPI Signals Setting the CS
88. IM 701410 01E 15 9 E uonoedsu pue eoueuojure y Punoouso qnou J 15 3 Self Diagnostic Test Self Test Testing the FDD SCSI PC Card optional or Accuracy 16 After step 3 press the Test Item soft key to display the test item menu 17 Press the soft key corresponding to the FDD SCSI PC Card or Accuracy to be test 18 Press the Test Exec soft key to execute the floppy disk drive test SCSI test or Accuracy test ick Normal 500kS s Zmsu Self Test Y Test Tten 1999 67 10 10 52 50 j Stopped 62 l FDD L L L Test Exec L CHi 10 1 CHZ 10 1 Edge CHI 20 0 Wdiv 5 00 U diu Auto DC Full DC Ful 0 0 U L Note Insert a floppy disk befor executing FDD test Please note the following when performing the SCSI self test Only test unpartitioned SCSI devices Set the SCSI ID to 5 The PC Card self test cannot be performed on a PC Card that has partitions 15 10 IM 701410 01E 15 4 Checking the System Condition This function allows you to check the ROM version model and installed options The screen is shown in the procedure 1 Press the MISC key 2 Pressthe Overview soft key to display the overview screen Pressing any key clears the overview screen 2000 08 03 17 16 28 10k Normal Model Record Length Option Printer Logic PC CARD IVF Ether Default L
89. M2 2M 10 M2 10 M2 5M 10 M2 10 M2 10M 10 M2 10 M2 20M 10 M2 10 M2 50M 10M 10 M 2 100 M 10 M2 10 M2 200 M 10 M2 10 M2 500 M 10 M2 10 M2 1G 10 M2 1G 5M 10 M2 1G 2M 1G 1M 1G 500 k 1G 200 k 1G 100 k 1G 50 k 1G 20k 1G 10k 1G 5k 1G 2k 1G 1k 1G 1G For the setting enclosed by the bold line repetitive sampling is active Because acquisition size is 8 MWords the waveform is displayed over 8 divisions of the time axis only Note that the trigger position setting percentage in this case with respect to the 8 division length 100 8 divisions Box average linear average or computation cannot be specified 2 MWord model Record length cannot be set to 8 MWord when interleave mode is OFF This record length cannot be used when interleave is ON 800M 10 M2 800 M 10 M2 800 M 10 M2 800 M 10 M2 800 M 10 M2 800 M 10 M2 800 M 10 M2 800 M 10 M2 800 M 10 M2 800 M 10 M2 800 M 10 M2 800 M 10 M2 800 M 10 M2 800 M 10 M2 1G 10 M2 Changes to normal mode even when envelope mode has been set App 10 IM 701410 01E Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length Record length 1 k
90. ON Interleave mode Interleave Mode Rep OFF Rep ON Rep OFF Rep ON OFF ON Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed rate record len rate record len rate record len rate record len rate record len rate S s gth word S s gth word S s gth word S s gth word S s gth word S s 500 250k 500 250k 500 250k 500 250k 400M 250k 800M 1k 200k 1k 200 k 1k 200 k 1k 200 k 400 M 200 k 800 M 2k 200 k 2k 200 k 2k 200 k 2k 200 k 400 M 200 k 800 M 5k 250 k 5k 250 k 5k 250 k 5k 250 k 400 M 250 k 800 M 10k 200 k 10k 200 k 10k 200 k 10k 200 k 400 M 200 k 800 M 20k 200 k 20k 200 k 20k 200 k 20k 200 k 400 M 200 k 800 M 50 k 250 k 50 k 250 k 50k 250k 50k 250k 400M 250k 800M 100 k 200k 100 k 200 k 100 k 200 k 100 k 200 k 400 M 200 k 800 M 200 k 200 k 200 k 200 k 200 k 200 k 200 k 200 k 400 M 200 k 800 M 500 k 250 k 250 k 250 k 250 k 400 M 250 k 800 M 1M 200 k 200 k 200 k 200 k 400 M 200 k 800 M 2M 200 k 200 k 200 k 200 k 400 M 200 k 800 M 5M 250 k 250 k 250 k 250 k 400 M 250 k 800 M 200 k 200 k 200 k 200 k 400 M 200 k 800 M 200 k 200 k 200 k 200 k 400 M 200 k 800 M 250 k 250 k 250 k 250 k 400 M 250 k 800 M 200 k 200 k 200 k 200 k 400 M 200 k 800 M 200 k 200 k 200 k 200 k 400 M 200 k 800 M 250 k 250 k 250 k 250 k 1G 100 k 200 k 200 k 50k 100 k Changes to normal mode even when envelope mode has been set Roll mode display
91. RESET key resets the level to 0 V Setting the Polarity 8 Pressthe SELECT key to select or t IM 701410 01E 8 19 8 9 Search Data Using Search and Zoom Function Setting the hysteresis 9 Turn the jog shuttle to set the hysteresis and press the SELECT key You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits Pressing RESET key resets the hysteresis to 0 3 div Setting the Count 10 Turn the jog shuttle to set the count and press the SELECT key You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits Pressing RESET key resets the count to 0 Setting the Start Point 11 Turn the jog shuttle to set the start position of the search Press the SELECT key You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits Pressing RESET key sets the position to 5 div 12 Press ESC key close the search condition setting dialog box Setting the display position of the search results 13 Press the Result Window soft key to select Z1 or Z2 Executing the search 14 Pressing the Exec soft key starts the search The search results are displayed in the zoomed waveform display position selected in step 12 You can search 1000 times using the same conditions Displaying the previous search results 15 Press the Searched Pattern soft key 16 Turn the jog shuttle to select the number of the search result to be displayed Newer search results are displayed with higher
92. Rangel 5 000d iu c Store Exec Time Range2 L 5 000d iv Edge CHi F Exec To Top enu Single Quit amp 6 00 y To TopHenu Editing All Zones 7 When Edit is set to something other than Whole press the Edit key and select Whole 2000 03 02 17 02 54 Nornal Stopped y SkS s 200nsAi GO NO GO lt lt Main 10k gt gt Edit prole Part Upper 6 60diu Louer 9 90diu Left 6 600div Right 5 Ld om P 9 00diu Store as Zonei Store Exec CHI 10 1 Edge CHI 5 00 Uzdiv Single Quit amp DC Full 0 00 U To TopMenu 9 40 IM 701410 01E 9 12 GO NO GO Determination Using Zones 8 Press the Upper Lower or Left Right soft keys to select the zone setting direction 9 Turn the jog shuttle to create a zone 10 Repeat steps 8 and 9 to edit the zones 2000 03 02 17 03 30 j Nornal Stopped y SkS s 200nsAi G NU GU i prole Part Upper 6 60diu 0 00diu Store as Zonei Store Exec CHI 10 1 Edge CHI 5 00 Uzdiv Single Quit amp DC Full 0 00 V To TopMenu 11 Press the Store As soft key to open the store as setting menu for the edited zone 12 Press the soft key corresponding to a storage location from Zone1 to Zone6 to select it 13 Press the Store Exec soft key to save the zone Proceed to step 14 to e
93. Search for a waveform extending outside the specified range of the specified parameter OFF Do not search for a waveform Item Setup Assign search parameters to each source channel Choose only one of the automated waveform measurement parameters Condition Range Upper Lower Set the range that defines the specified parameter s condition Logic Search AND Search for waveforms fulfilling all of the search criterion in Param1 Param4 OR Search for waveforms fulfilling at least one of the search criterion in Param1 Param4 Parameter Measuring Range T Range 1 T Range 2 Set the measuring range of the specified parameter This is the portion of the waveform used to determine the values of the parameter Search Range The search range extends from the Start Record to the End Record see page 7 15 Search Method Search in order starting with the newest waveform Show Map Timestamp List Only searched waveforms are displayed in Show Map When Search Mode is OFF all waveforms are displayed 7 18 IM 701410 01E 7 9 Searching the Historical Data Using Parameter History Search Function Operating Procedure Select the Search Mode 1 Press the History key 2 Pressthe Search Mode soft key to display the search mode selection menu 3 Press the soft key corresponding to the parameter you wish to select HISTORY Select Recor Display Mode all start Record 8 End Record
94. Selecting the format mode When formatting a medium in an external SCSI device the following format modes are available Normal Executes physical format and logical format Quick Executes only the logical format Selecting the number of partitions You can set partitions on the external SCSI device or PC Card optional except for removable disk The number of partitions can be selected from the range 1 to 5 11 4 IM 701410 01E 11 4 Formatting the Recording Medium Information about the medium The following information is listed for the selected medium Media Name Name of the medium Media Size Total capacity Used Space Used space Vacant Space Free space Partition Size Number of partitions Note Formatting a medium containing data erases the data completely The time it takes to format a floppy disk is approximately one and a half minutes A floppy disk cannot be formatted if it is write protected Never format when the instrument is connected to a PC via a SCSI cable Floppy disks having a format other than the ones listed in this section cannot be used If an error message appears after the format operation the floppy disk may be damaged Disks formatted to MS DOS format on a PC can also be used The Quick logical format only clears initializes the directory entry and FAT information If you need to check for bad sectors do a physical format Normal When data are written to an external SCSI device t
95. TIF f History CHAPTOO TIF e CHAPTO06 TIF Ene All CHAPTOOS TIF SS CHAPTOO4 TIF St Compression CHAPTOO3 TIF LY pr ow 10000 nus 20 00 V CHI 10 1 CHZ 10 1 Save Exec 20 0 U div 5 60 U div Binary DC Full DC Full e Selecting the destination directory Use this only when there are directories on the medium 16 17 10000 ou Save Exec Binary Press the P P Comp soft key to select ON compress and save or OFF do Turn the jog shuttle to select the save destination directory displayed with lt gt Press the SELECT key to confirm the selection The Path ___ box on the top left corner of the File List dialog box displays the selected medium directory Selecting moves to a higher level directory 18 1999 07 67 14 39 23 j 1 00k Stopped CT Setting the file name comment Pressing the File Name soft key displays the file name setting menu Nornal Save q SoU lt lt Main 100K gt gt File Name amp Connent 5HS s 2nsA d File List File Nane CHAPTS Auto Naming File Nane Trace ALL Comment 10080 dus 20 00 V 10000 ou Range Main History De au Compression ON CHI 10 1 CHZ 10 1 20 0 Udiy 5 60 U diu DC Full DC Full Edge CHI Auto Save Exec 7
96. The time from the trigger point at the cursor X The X axis value of the cursor Y The Y axis value of the cursor Movement range of the cursors When the X Y waveform is displayed H Cursors can be moved in the range from 4 to 4 div from the center of the screen The resolution is 0 01 V div V Cursors marker cursors and angle cursors can be moved in the range from 5 to 5 div from the center of the screen The resolution is as follows Resolution T div x 10 displayed record length When the X Y waveform is displayed The H and V cursors can be set in the range of 4 to 4 divisions with the center of the waveform display frame at 0 division The resolution is 0 01 V div The marker cursor can be set in the range of 5 to 5 divisions with the center of the waveform display frame at 0 division The resolution is T div x 10 displayed record length Cursor Display Method V Cursor Format Measurement values can be displayed in base 2 or base 16 Binary Base 2 Hexadecimal Base 16 Applicable to DL7100 with software ROM version 1 11 or later See section 15 4 Checking the System Condition Arrangement of the Cursor Data V Cursor Order Select the order of each bit Choose either PodA bitO bit7 PodB bitO 7 or PodA bit7 bitO PodB bit7 bitO Applicable to DL7100 with software ROM version 1 11 or later See section 15 4 Checking the System Condition Combining Cursor Data V Cursor You can c
97. Window C3 C4 Math2 Label 5 00 Urdiv DC Full 4 Mathz 4 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Operation 5 Pressthe SELECT key to display the operator setting menu 6 Turn the jog shuttle to select PS and press the SELECT key 9 30 IM 701410 01E 9 8 Displaying the Power Spectrum Selecting the channel on which to perform computation 7 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Source 8 Pressthe SELECT key to display the channel setting menu 9 Turn the jog shuttle to select the channel on which to perform computation and press the SELECT key Scaling 10 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Scale 11 Press the SELECT key to select Auto or Manual 12 f you select Manual turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Upper 13 Pressing the SELECT key displays a menu used to set the upper limit of the waveform display 14 Turn the jog shuttle to select the upper limit and press the SELECT key 15 Setthe lower limit in a similar fashion Setting the unit 16 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Unit 17 Using the keyboard that appears when the SELECT key is pressed enter the unit using four characters or less Setting the start point 18 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Start Point 19 Pressing the SELECT key displays a menu used to set the FFT start point 20 Turn the jog s
98. Z1 amp Z2 Displays the zoomed waveform of zoom box 1 in the top window and the zoomed waveform of zoom box 2 in the bottom window Main amp Z1 amp Z2 Displays the main waveform in the top window the zoomed waveform of zoom box 1 in the lower left window and the zoomed waveform of zoom box 2 in the lower right window Selecting the zoomed trace Allocation The traces CH1 to CH4 Math1 Math2 POD A POD B whose Allocation is turned ON are zoomed If the allocation is OFF the trace is not zoomed You cannot allocate channels whose display is turned OFF Display format of zoomed waveforms Similar to the main waveform six types of display formats are available You cannot set different formats for Z1 and Z2 Main Single Dual Triad Quad Hexa Selecting Main results in the same format as when Format is specified for DISPLAY Zoom rate The maximum zoom rate varies depending on the displayed record length Maximum zoom rate displayed record length 50 or 40 Note that the displayed record length is not necessarily the same as the record length of the acquisition memory For details regarding the displayed record length see appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record length You can change the zoom rate for Z1 and Z2 zoomed waveforms of two locations Zoom position Z1 Position and Z2 Position The zoom position can be set by specifying the zoom center position center
99. active IM 701410 01E App 11 E xipueddy Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length Record length 10 k words DL7200 Setting When Mode other than Envelope Mode is Active Rep Repetitive sampling mode When Envelope Mode is Active Interleave mode OFF Interleave Mode ON Rep OFF Rep ON Rep OFF Rep ON Interleave mode OFF Interleave Mode ON Sample rate S s Displayed record len gth word Sample rate S s Displayed Sample record len rate gth word S s Displayed record len gth word Sample rate S s Displayed record len gth word Sample rate S s Displayed record len gth word Sample rate S s Displayed record len gth word 20 10k 20 10k 20 10k 20 10k 800 M 10k 800 M 10k 50 10k 50 10k 50 10k 50 10k 800 M 10k 800 M 10k 10k 10k 10k 10k 800 M 10k 800 M 10k 10k 10k 10k 10k 800 M 10k 800 M 10k 10k 10k 10k 10k 800 M 10k 800 M 10k 10k 10k 10k 10k 800 M 10k 800 M 10k 10k 10k 10k 10k 800 M 10k 800 M 10k Roll mode display 10k 10k 10k 10k 800 M 10k 800 M 10k 10k 10k 10k 10k 800 M 10k 800 M 10k 10k 10k 10k 10k 800 M 10k 800 M 10k 10k 10k 10k 10k 800 M 10k 800 M 10k
100. ambient temperature of 23 C When the battery voltage drops below the specified level a message will appear on the screen In this case the battery needs to be replaced immediately The battery cannot be replaced by the user so contact the nearest YOKOGAWA representative listed on the back cover of this manual 3 6 IM 701410 01E 3 4 Connecting a Probe Input Terminals AN A probe or an input cable such as a BNC cable must be connected to one of the input terminals CH1 to CH4 located on the lower section of the front panel The input impedance is 1 MQ 1 0 and approximately 20 pF or 50 Q 1 0 The number of input terminals varies according to machine model CAUTION The maximum allowable input voltage is 400 V DC AC peak or 282 Vrms when the frequency is 1 kHz or less Never input a voltage exceeding this level as it could damage the input section of the instrument If the frequency exceeds 1 kHz the input section may be damaged even when the voltage is below 400 V The maximum allowable input voltage is 5 Vrms or 10 Vpeak when using 50 O input Never input voltage exceeding this level as it could damage the input section of this instrument o be 1 MQ 20 pF 3 400 Vpk CAT 5005 5 Vrms 10 vPK Points to Note when Connecting a Probe Probe When connecting a probe to the instrument for the first time perform phase correction of the probe as described in the next section on pag
101. cannot be changed If a file with the same name exists in the same directory renaming is not allowed If a directory with the same name exists in the same directory the directory cannot be created This function can not be used in conjunction with FTP server function FTP client function or LPR client function Press the FILE key Press the Utility soft key to display the utility setting menu and the file list dialog box Press the Function soft key to display the file function menu Press the soft key corresponding to Rename Nornal 506kS s 1933 07 0 20 53 50 Jj gtk Stopped 49 q cH SoU lt e Maint Ik gt gt 2ms j Utility FILE Function File Item Rename Setup om Path FDO Space 1297468 byte File Nane File List File Nane Size F 1 CHAPTOO3 TIF CHAPTO82 TIF CHAPT G1 TIF CHAPTOG6 TIF 1999 07 67 22 05 R U 1999 67 07 22 64 Rel 1999707707 22 03 R U 1999 07 07 22 62 R U Save Property Filter SET ka Load 20 00 V CHI 10 1 CHZ 10 1 20 0 Wdiv 5 00 U diu DC Full nc Utilit 4 Full Changing the recording medium directory file name Selecting the medium directory 5 The procedures are the same as steps 13 to 17 in section 11 6 Saving Loading Waveform Data Changing the file attributes 6 The proced
102. channel to all the waveforms and perform statistical processing Own Use each individual waveform s own period for its statistical processing Statistical processing is performed on old data that has been divided up by period You cannot perform this operation in conjunction with 1 cycle mode Also you cannot measure the following parameters Waveform for Period Search Avg Freq Avg Period PISN pulse count k Int1 XY area Int2XY area Delay Other Waveforms Int1XY area Int2XY area Delay Statistical Processing of History Data Applicable to DL7100 with software ROM version 1 21 or later See section 15 4 Checking the System Condition Perform statistical processing on each waveform read in using the history memory function Statistical processing is done starting from the oldest data The range for statistical processing is the waveform displayed in ShowMap You can combine this function with Delay and 1 cycle mode Waveform CH1 to CH4 Math1 Math2 Measurement parameters The parameters given on page 9 11 and 9 12 Up to two parameters can be computed Statistics Displays the following statistics on the selected measurement parameters Maximum value Minimum value Average value Standard deviation Number of samples e e e e Max Min Avg Sdv Cnt IM 701410 01E sisAjeuy WAOJOAR ol 9 3 Statistical Processing Statistical range Same as t
103. chip select signal is not selected All data input output signals are analyzed The data input output signal that is delimited byte wise is analyzed from the reference point described in the next section Priority exists in the chip select signals When multiple chip select signals are enabled simultaneously the data input output signal of the slave corresponding to the chip select signal of the highest priority is analyzed The priority is CH4 Bit 0 Bit 1 and Bit 7 of PodA from the highest priority Setting the reference point Select the reference point used to start the analysis from the following Trigger Position Set the reference point to the trigger position Manual Set the reference point in the range of 5 to 5 divisions IM 701410 01E 8 29 8 10 Analyzing and Searching SPI Signals Analysis Example of Signals by Enable States Reference point Clock T LILI UUUUUUULU Daa cr Lll a NT Data2 OL CS iN When the clock is set to risingf edge and CS is set to L Byte number No 0 0 e Datai value Dt1 08 08 e Data2 value Dt2 E4 E4 Enable state of the chip select signal CS L When the clock is set to risingf edge and CS is set to H Byte number No 0 Data value Dt1 D8 Data2 value Dt2 3D Enable state of the chip select signal CS H When the clock is set to risingf edge and CS is set to X Byte number No 0 1 Data1 value Dt1 08 D8
104. connectors of the logic probe to the logic connector on the rear panel 4 Turn ON the instrument Note The input signal is at L level when the logic probe is not connected to the instrument IM 701410 01E esp Buung suonneoaJqd B Chapter 4 Common Operations 4 1 Entering Values and Character Strings Entering a Value Direct entry using the special knob The following knobs can be used to enter values directly simply by turning them V DIV and TIME DIV knobs C VERTICAL c HORIZONTAL lt v C TRIGGER 2 SEARCH BTRIG D 3 en ACTION n TIME DIV Note When setting the voltage sensitivity before turning the V DIV knob the channel for which you are going to use the knob must be selected using one of the keys CH1 to CH4 Entry using the jog shuttle Before using the jog shuttle to enter a value you must select the desired parameter by pressing the corresponding soft key The shuttle ring the outer ring of the shuttle allows you to enter values in larger steps than the jog dial The size of the step depends on the angle by which the shuttle ring is turned For some parameters you can use the arrow keys below the jog shuttle to shift from one digit to the next 1999 07 63 10 29 56 Nornal iMS s insdi POSITION z B Position lllll 50 07 LIAE Set to 10 Set to 50 Set to 907 L L 5 080ms 2
105. corresponding to Save See steps 13 to 33 in section 11 6 Saving Loading Waveform Data c9 ov IM 701410 01E 11 27 uinipojy Buip1o28H oui speo pue saAes ejeq E 11 11 Changing the File Attributes Deleting Files Function CAUTION Never remove the medium disk or turn OFF the power while the access indicator or the floppy disk icon is blinking This can damage the medium or destroy the data on the medium Selecting the medium and directory The recording media that can be used to save and load waveform data are displayed in the File List dialog box Display example of recording media FDO Floppy disk SC5 SCSI device with an ID number of 5 SC5 1 Partition 1 of the SCSI device with an ID number of 5 CAO PC Card CAO 1 Partition 1 of PC Card Selecting the file attributes excepting Net Drive Select the attributes for each file from the following choices R W Read and write possible R Read only Cannot write to the file or delete the file Selecting the files to be deleted You can delete all files that have a mark to the left of the file name There are two methods available to select the files that are to be deleted Selecting the files one at a time Place marks to the left of the file names one at a time using the Set Reset soft key Selecting all files at once Selecting a file or directory and pressing the All Set key places the directory containi
106. cursor to the Hysteresis of the channel set as the clock channel Press the SELECT key use the jog shuttle to set the hysteresis then press the SELECT key again Use the arrow keys to move between the digits If you press the RESET key the setting will be restored to 0 3 div Setting the Pattern for Each Channel 10 Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the Pattern of the channel you wish to set or the bits of PODA and PODB Press the SELECT key to select H L or X Setting the Level for Each Channel 11 Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the Level of the channel you wish to set Press the SELECT key then use the jog shuttle to set the Level and press the SELECT key again Use the arrow keys to move between the digits If you press the RESET key the setting will be restored to O V Setting the Hysteresis for Each Channel 12 Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the Hysteresis of the channel you wish to set Press the SELECT key then use the jog shuttle to set the hysteresis and press the SELECT key again Use the arrow keys to move between the digits If you press the RESET key the setting will be restored to 0 3 div Setting the Start Point 13 Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the start point then press the SELECT key Use the jog shuttle to select the start point then press the SELECT key again Use the arrow keys to move between the digits
107. ec ee ee enim 1 7 R W Since n cL SEE 8 3 Real time sampling mode sss 1 6 Sine interpolation eiis ennari 1 17 Recommended Replacement Parts 15 13 Single usi perta tit etc b te tet 8 1 8 10 Record E ngthi iae ente eee 1 13 Single N mode tne 1 11 6 1 Single Mode 22 orn tient iecore et Dated 6 1 Single mode 5 22 rao itte tette 1 10 Rectangular window esses 1 23 Smoothing tette 9 32 Repetitive Sampling Mode eee 7 10 SNAP SHOT Key 2 4 Repetitive sampling mode 1 6 Snapshot entente tentent tenente ttenntn 1 26 4 8 RESET key sss 24 So rce channel 2 5 rH IER HRS 7 15 Response at Power ON sss 3 6 Spare Parts eee Udine ERU a UR iv RGB VIDEO OUT terminal eee 12 4 S ee ne On eI E IN TEC roll mode erre ttr teet nee 1 6 5 16 Standard Accessories RS 232 ieaiaia i p Het gc ie eo te 2 1 START STOP key Statistic eese eene S Statistical processing ss Sampling Modenese t cet citet 1 15 Storing Screen Image sssee Sambplingiriode acte bate ten bn pee wanes 2 5 Subnet Mask ssssseseeeeeeeeneeeneneeeennnn Save 11 10 11 11 11 12 11 13 11 14 11 15 11 16 11 17 subtraction 11 18 11 19 11 20 11 21 System Configuration sse 1 1 Save to File Saving Data to a Network
108. function The Network item has been added to the menu on page 1 2 for the DL7200 and the DL7100 firmware version 2 01 and later Therefore the Graphic Color item that appeared on page 1 2 of the DL7100 prior to firmware version 2 01 is now displayed on page 2 2 FILE key Chapter 11 Displays a menu that you use to save to load from or execute file operations on floppy disk MO disk or external SCSI device SHIFT COPY key Chapter 10 Used for printing out a hard copy of the screen data If you press SHIFT COPY the screen displays a menu that you can use to print or save the screen image For the save location you can select any of the following internal printer optional centronics or floppy disk MEASURE key Section 9 2 and 9 3 Displays the menu for performing automatic measurement of waveform parameters CURSOR key Section 9 1 Displays the menu for cursor measurement SHIFT MATH key Section 9 4 to 9 10 Displays the menu for waveform computation Pressing the MATH key after pressing the SHIFT key displays a menu used to shift the phase GO NO GO key Section 9 11 and 9 12 Displays a menu related to GO NO GO AUTO SETUP key Section 4 3 Displays the auto setup menu used to configure the instrument according to the input signal value INITIALIZE key Section 4 2 Displays the initialization menu which can be used to reset the key settings to their factory setting values SHIFT key Used to make the fu
109. group Number of blocks in the group Name of each waveform Data size of each block of waveform Resolution coefficient of Y axis conversion equation for each waveform Offset coefficient of Y axis conversion equation for each waveform Type of binary file waveform data for each waveform 9 Units used for Y axis of each waveform no effect on data Data error occurs when binary data for a waveform exceeds this value Data error occurs when binary data for a waveform is below this value Maximum value of binary data for each waveform Minimum value of binary data for each waveform Resolution coefficient of X axis conversion equation for each waveform Offset coefficient of X axis conversion equation for each waveform Units used for X axis for each waveform no effect on data Date when waveform acquisition was completed Time when waveform acquisition was completed For 1 to 7 refer to the next page e Privateinfo information indigenous to model ModelVersion MathBlockNo FormMath1 FormMath2 DisplayBlockSize DisplayPointNo PhaseShift Version No of the model Block No of block to be computed Waveform for Math1 and its contents Waveform for Math2 and its contents Length of the data displayed on the screen display record length Value which indicates which point of the memory is the left end of the display record length display offset is 1 when record length display record length Phase informat
110. in the File List dialog box viewing the properties The procedures are the same as steps 30 and 31 on page 11 16 Unloading waveforms 6 Continuing from step 5 in Saving the waveform data press the Unload soft key to display the Unload menu 7 Pressing the Trace soft key displays a menu used to select the channels to be unloaded 8 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired channel to select the channel If All is selected all channels are unloaded 9 Press the Unload Exec soft key to display a confirming message 10 Select OK using the jog shuttle and press the SELECT key to execute the unload operation The display does not change However when data acquisition is started the waveform is updated IM 701410 01E 11 17 uinipojy Buip1o28H oui speo pue saAes ejeq E 11 7 Saving Loading Setup Data Function CAUTION Never remove the medium disk or turn OFF the power while the access indicator or the floppy disk icon is blinking This can damage the medium or destroy the data on the medium Setup data that are saved The setup data of each key existing at the time of the saving operation are saved However date and time communication parameters and SCSI ID numbers are not saved Number of bytes necessary in saving the setup data Approx 13 Kbytes Selecting the medium and directory The recording media that can be used to save and load waveform data are displayed in the
111. interleave mode is ON or 2 GS s or above on the DL7200 5 GS s or above when the interleave mode is ON If repetitive sampling mode is OFF the maximum available sampling rate is 500 MS s for the DL7100 or 1 GS s with interleave ON or 1 GS s for the DL7200 2 GS s with interleave ON and the instrument will add interpolation to the displayed waveform if the number of display points is less than 500 However even if the repetitive sampling is turned OFF the mode is set to repetitive sampling depending on the time axis setting T div for repetitive sampling If repetitive mode is ON the sampling mode is switched to the repetitive sampling for T div settings as follows Available T div setting varies according to the record length or the machine model DL7100 Record length T div 1 kWord 1 ns div to 100 ns div 1 ns div to 50 ns div 10 kWord 1 ns div to 1 us div 1 ns div to 500 ns div 50 kWord 1 ns div to 5 us div 1 ns div to 2 us div 100 kWord 1 ns div to 10 us div 1 ns div to 5 us div 250 kWord 1 ns div to 20 us div 1 ns div to 10 ps div 500 kWord 1 ns div to 50 us div 1 ns div to 20 us div 1 MWord 1 ns div to 100 us div 1 ns div to 50 us div 2 MWord 1 ns div to 200 us div 1 ns div to 100 ps div 4 MWord 1 ns div to 500 us div 1 ns div to 200 us div 8 MWord 1 ns div to 500 us div With 2 MW CH model You cannot use repetitive sampling if the record length is set 1 MWord or above Values in p
112. interval 8 14 IM 701410 01E 8 9 Search Data Using Search and Zoom Function When CH1 to CH4 is set as the clock channel Level Set the level used to determine the rising or falling edge The range is 8 div within the screen The resolution is 0 01 div Polarity Select the polarity from the following list 4 Check the pattern when the waveform changes from below the specified level to above the specified level 3 Check the pattern when the waveform changes from above the specified level to below the specified level Hys Set the hysteresis The range is 0 3 div to 4 div When None is set as the clock channel Interval Set the interval at which to check the pattern Source Select the channel to be searched You can also select Math1 and Math2 For logic input select the bit to use as the source Thr Upper Set the level used to determine Low L Thr Lower Set the level used to determine High H Pattern Four different types of patterns can be registered Set the pattern with 64 bits of H L X Don t care symbols H When the value is greater than or equal to Thr Lower 1 for logic input L When the value is less than or equal to Thr Upper 0 for logic input X Do not determine Start Point Set the start position of the search The range is from 5 to 5 div When the Type is Parallel Pattern Clock CH Select a clock channel from CH1 CH4 that will provide the standard timing for checking t
113. jog shuttle to move the cursor to NDO Net Drive Zero 2000 07 05 16 50 07 j fio Normal FILE Stopped 640 1 200kS s 5nsu Utility File Item OWISISGLI Function EATA ll Setup Delete File List Path FDO 1 BE space 1063836 byte Set Reset File Name Size Date Attr LEE zi Ld LL ii llll H 2000 06 30 10 12 R U 2600 06 30 10 11 R U UM ere Save 2000 06 30 10 09 RA Property es ll DL Filter EAT All Mi tit dil S i CH 10 1 Edge CHI 7 Utility 5 00 Urdiv auto Delete Exec x DC Full 13 For the remaining procedures please refer to 11 7 Saving Loading Setup Data through 11 12 Changing the Recording Medium Directory File Name and Creating a Directory Note You must run FTP server software on PCs and workstations that will be connected to the network Also please note the following regarding the server software Use UNIX format for list output character strings returned by dir Make the home directory and its subdirectories writable You can t change to a higher directory than the home directory The newest file is not necessarily displayed at the top of the file list You cannot access files or directories having names longer than nine or more characters Depending on the server the lt
114. jog shuttle to move the cursor to Scale 11 Press the SELECT key to select Auto or Manual 12 f you selected Manual turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Upper 13 Press the SELECT key to display a menu used to set the upper limit of the waveform 14 Turn the jog shuttle to select the upper limit and press the SELECT key 15 Setthe lower limit in a similar fashion Setting the unit 16 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Unit 17 Using the keyboard that appears when the SELECT key is pressed enter the unit using four characters or less Smoothing 18 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Smoothing 19 Press the SELECT key to select ON or OFF Note For details regarding smoothing see section 9 9 Smoothing Entering Labels Applicable to DL7100 with software ROM version 1 11 or later See section 15 4 Checking the System Condition 20 Press the Math1 Label soft key to display the keyboard See section 8 5 Setting the Waveform Labels for information about displaying labels Set Math2 in a similar manner as necessary IM 701410 01E 9 29 sisAjeuy u1J0J9AEAA jo 9 8 Displaying the Power Spectrum For a description of this function refer to page 1 23 gt Function This function displays the power spectrum of CH1 to CH4 and Math1 waveforms Number of computing points Point Select 1000 or 10000 Using the number of computing poi
115. k 800 M 250 k 800 M 10k 200 k 10k 200 k 10k 200 k 10k 200 k 800 M 200 k 800 M 20k 200 k 20k 200 k 20k 200 k 20k 200k 800M 200k 800M 50k 250k 50k 250k 50k 250k 50k 250k 800M 250k 800M 100 k 200k 100 k 200 k 100 k 200 k 100 k 200 k 800 M 200 k 800 M 200 k 200 k 200 k 200 k 200 k 200 k 200 k 200 k 800 M 200 k 800 M 500 k 250 k 250 k 250 k 500 k 250 k 800 M 250 k 800 M 1M 200 k 200 k 200 k 1M 200 k 800 M 200 k 800 M 2M 200 k 200 k 200 k 200 k 800 M 200 k 800 M 5M 250 k 250 k 250 k 250 k 800 M 250 k 800 M 200 k 200 k 200 k 200 k 800 M 200 k 800 M 200 k 200 k 200 k 200 k 800 M 200 k 800 M 250 k 250 k 250 k 250 k 800 M 250 k 800 M 200 k 200 k 200 k 200 k 800 M 200 k 800 M 200 k 200 k 200 k 200 k 800 M 200 k 800 M 250 k 250 k 250 k 250 k 1G 250 k 1G 200 k 200 k 200 k 200 k 100k 200 k 200 k Changes to normal mode even when envelope mode has been set 50 k 100 k 20k 40k 10k 20k 5k 10k 2k 4k 1k 2k 500 1k 200 400 100 200 Roll mode display ke For the setting enclosed by the bold line repetitive sampling is active IM 701410 01E App 15 EH xipueddy Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length Record length 500 k words DL7200 When Mode other than Envelope Mode is Active Rep Repetitive sampling mode When Envelope Mode is Active Interle
116. kHz or 20 MHz when you wish to use a signal source that is obtained by removing the high frequency components frequency components greater than or equal to approximately 15 kHz or 20 MHz from the trigger signal as the trigger source Setting the hold off See section 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time Note 22 LLL f you wish to use only one pattern condition to activate the trigger use the pattern trigger If the status for condition A and condition B are set to Xs Don t care the trigger will not be activated 6 14 IM 701410 01E 6 9 Setting the A Delay B Trigger ENHANCED Operating Procedure Setting the trigger type 1 Press the ENHANCED key 2 Pressing the Type soft key to display the trigger type menu 3 Pressthe A Delay B soft key 1999 07 05 08 54 11 jr fio Normal Stopped 1MS s insAli ENHANCED eH B Type GAN Delay B M Set Pattern H Levels Coupling ld Delay 0 00lus ATTE a E H H CHI 10 1 CHZ 10 1 Edge CHI Hold Off 20 0 Urdiv 6 506 Urdiu SingletN DC Full DC Full EM 0 08us Setting the status and condition for conditions A and B 4 Pressing the Set Pattern soft key displays a menu used to set the status and condition for conditions A and B Set Pattern LEX Condition 5 Setcondition A Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the channel to which the statu
117. lt PinNo KO OOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOO 252423 16 15 14 Pin No Signalname Input Output Property Pin No Signal name Inpul Output Property 1 STROBE Output Negative _14 AFDXT Auto feed transfer Output Negative 2 DATAO Print data bit Output LSB 15 ERROR Input Negative i i 16 INIT Initializing of printer Output Negative 9 DATA7 Print data bit7 Output MSB 17 SLCTIN Select in Output Negative 10 ACK Acknowledge Input Negative 18 GND TI BUSY Input Positive l 12 PE Paper empty Input Positive 25 GND 13 SLCT Select Input Positive Format Select the output command format used in the communication with the external printer from the following list of choices e ESC P e PCL5 LIPS3 BJ Can be used on printers that support the BJC 35V native commands ESC P2 Can be used on printers that support ESC P raster commands Printing resolution when using the BJ format Select 180 dpi 300 dpi or 360 dpi About 300 dpi applicable to DL7100 with software ROM version 1 21 or later See section 15 4 Checking the System Condition Resolution when Outputting to a BJ Printer You can set the resolution when printing screen image data on a centronics corupatible BJ printer Continuing with step 9 on page 10 7 press the Resolution soft key to open the resolution settings menu Set the resolution by pressing the 180 dpi 300 dpi or 360 dpi soft key C
118. measurements cannot be made on the following waveforms Snapshot waveforms Accumulated waveforms other than the newest waveform Cursor types and measurement items Type When the X Y waveform is not displayed Marker cursors Move the cursor on the waveform data and measure the waveform data values M1 Marker 1 to M4 Marker 4 can be set on different waveforms Y1to YA The Y axis values of M1 to M4 DY2 The difference between the Y axis values of M1 and M2 DY3 The difference between the Y axis values of M1 and M3 DY4 The difference between the Y axis values of M1 and M4 X1to X4 The X axis values of M1 to M4 DX2 The difference between the X axis values of M1 and M2 DX3 The difference between the X axis values of M1 and M3 DX4 The difference between the X axis values of M1 and M4 H Horizontal cursor Measures the Y axis value at the cursor Y1 The Y axis value at Cursor1 Y2 The Y axis value at Cursor2 DY The difference between the Y axis values at Cursor1 and Cursor2 V Vertical cursor Measures the X axis value at the cursor When measuring the logic waveform with the V Coursor select a binary or 16 base measurement value Also choose the order of the data x1 The X axis value at Cursor1 X2 The X axis value at Cursor2 DX The difference between the Y axis values at Cursor1 and Cursor2 1 DX The inverse or the difference between the Y axis values at Cursor1 and Cursor2 Y1 The Y axis val
119. mode display Changes to normal mode even when envelope mode has been set For the setting enclosed by the bold line repetitive sampling is active IM 701410 01E App 3 E xipueddy Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length Record length 100 k words DL7100 When Mode other than Envelope Mode is Active Rep Repetitive sampling mode When Envelope Mode is Active Interleave mode OFF Interleave Mode ON Rep OFF Rep ON Rep OFF Rep ON Interleave mode OFF Interleave Mode ON Sample Displayed Sample record len rate gth word S s Displayed record len gth word Sample rate S s record len rate gth word S s Displayed Sample Displayed record len gth word Sample rate S s Displayed record len gth word Sample rate S s 100 k 200 100 k 200 100 k 200 100 k 400 M 100 k 800 M 100 k 500 100 k 500 100 k 500 100 k 400 M 100 k 800 M 100k 1k 100k 1k 100k 1k 100k 400M 100k 800M 100k 100k 100k 100k 400M 100k 800M 100k 100k 100k 100k 400M 100k 800M 100k 100k 100k 100k 400M 100k 800M Roll mode display 100k 100k 100k 100k 400M
120. nee rne eminus Binary Computation Block Di amp grairi i errem terere eere BOX AVeragBe cce i e xen een iain B x aver ge 1 eee eene ete bete tare A Ue eR E DLE E dna re BoxAv rage ceeae in ie ertet te raa n ee Er da deeds Brightness sinesine iiei err irent Brightness of the Backlight seeseessess 14 5 Built in printer citri trente 2 1 BUZZOT vate a e a a iaa aa 6 35 9 34 9 38 C Canceling the Offset sse 14 7 Genter oe aeu ideni ins 6 27 COntrOhiCs 222254 doa ica et eniin iet iana 10 6 Centronics connector CHT to CH4 keys iein akire eiaa aeina heas ene 2 2 Changing Directory seses 11 34 11 35 11 36 Changing File Name 11 34 11 35 11 36 Changing the Recording Medium 11 34 11 35 11 36 Clear Trace Clear trace CLEAR TRAGE Key e202 nette cep dtp tette nd 2 4 Glick Sound ee eec ae podes 14 4 ClOCK GH m 6 17 JP ssa EN 8 8 Combmunicalions c netter Entire 1 29 GOMP o tpul nnnc beide 2 1 Compensating the Probe sseeeeeee 3 10 Configuring the Ethernet Interface 13 2 Connecting the Power Cord see 3 5 Connection to a Network COPY key AEE AEE E E E Copying Files eese Creating a directory sse CSV formal iter ea
121. not possible Operating Procedure Selecting the printer 1 Press the SHIFT key to set the keys in the shifted condition Functions marked in purple on the panel become active 2 Pressthe COPY key 3 The Copy to soft key displays the output medium menu Net Print is displayed for DL7200 and DL7100 with Ethernet PC Card interface optional 4 Press the soft key corresponding to Printer OFF gtk Normal 56kS s nsi COPY t Copy to all l Printer Format Normal Long L Information BFF ON l Comment all Net Print Comment File List File Mane CHAPTS N H i10 0 es Edge CHI 4 Auto 7 2U E NER File List L IM 701410 01E 10 3 ejeq u 1 S jo 1ndino H 10 2 Outputting to the Built in Printer Optional Setting the output format 5 Press the Format soft key to select Normal or Long 6 Pressthe Information soft key to select ON or OFF 1392 07707 10 00 16 jj gtk Normal 94 Stopped 50kS s 2ns li COPY n BUY B Copy to Printer Format JL Information ON J Comment L L Lio 00s 20 00 V 2 H d 10 00ns CHI 10 1 CHZ 10 1 Edge CHI 20 0 U div 5 60 U div Auto DC Full DC Full 7 2 V
122. ns When Pulse Time Out CH1 H and Time 400 ns Pulse Time setup example 300 ns CH1 one A Trigger cH L H L H cH L H L H L 300 ns 500 ns gt e gt je Pulse lt Time Condition CH1 H CH2 H Time 400 ns Conditions of each channel When the window trigger turned OFF the conditions become the same as the A gt B n trigger See page 6 11 When the window is ON IN OUT X they become the same as the window trigger For details regarding the window trigger see section 6 13 Setting the Window Trigger Pulse width instois Precautions to be taken when setting the Pulse gt Time or Pulse Time Out trigger The trigger may not operate properly if the time between two pulses is less than 2 ns or if the pulse width is less than 2 ns The time accuracy of the pulse width in the standard operating condition after calibration is 0 5 of the setting 1 ns When set to T1 lt Pulse lt T2 the value of T2 IM 701410 01E 6 21 6 11 Setting the Width Pulse Time Pulse gt Time T1 lt Pulse lt T2 Time Out Trigger ENHANCED Correlation with the window trigger When the Window is turned ON a trigger is activated based on the time period during which the parallel pattern of the window condition of each channel is met or not met Setting the trigger level Range 8 div within the screen Resolution 0 01 div For example the resolution is 0 02 mV when the V DIV settin
123. of the measurement range 29 Press the Time Range1 Time Range soft key to set the jog shuttle control to Time Range2 30 Turn the jog shuttle to set the end of the measurement range IM 701410 01E sisAjeuy u1J0JOAE AA ol 9 2 Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters Selecting the target waveform for distal mesial and proximal points 31 Press the Next 1 2 soft key to display the Next 2 2 menu 1999 07 06 18 53 42 j Nornal Stopped 14337 Jl S0kS s ZnsAli MEASURE feHT 80 0 V E 3 Trace MEASURE Mode ON CH1 4 g H B 3 Pist Prox Mode mnie Item Setup ES Unit H 2 p d Ig Distal Delay Setup 3 i 30 5 iCycie Mode pm o Mesial 4 507 Proximal 10 I Tine Rangel Tes 1 E 3 High Lou Mode 1 88div 3 PES p Lupe Time Range2 H H H uto MAX MIN Ls 2 13div 10 00m 20 00 V 10 00ns CHI 10 1 CHZ 10 1 Edge CHi F Next 20 0 Urdiv 5 00 U diu Auto Next 12 DC Full DC Full JSE 7 2 U 272 32 Press the Trace soft key to display the measured waveform menu 33 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired waveform Setting the distal mesial and proximal unit Dist Prox Mode 34 Press the Next 1 2 soft key to display the Next 2 2 menu 35 Press the Dist Prox Mode soft key to select the distal mesial proximal unit
124. of the zoom box in the range 5 to 5 div with the center of the waveform display frame set to 0 div When the record length of the DL7200 is 16 Mwords the zoom position can be set only in the range in which the edge of the waveform matches the edge of the window The selectable steps are as follows Zoom position resolution T div x 10 display record length The zoom box enclosed by solid lines is Z1 and the one enclosed by dashed lines is Z2 Since each box is independent you can set the position separately Changing the range of the automated measurement of waveform parameters Sets the range of the automated measurement of waveform parameters to the zoom range of Z1 or Z2 This is valid even if the automated measurement of waveform parameters is turned OFF 8 12 IM 701410 01E 8 8 Zooming the Waveform Operating Procedure Selecting the display mode 1 Press the ZOOM key 2 Pressing the Mode soft key displays the display format menu 3 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired display format 1999 07 06 11 19 43 Nornal Stopped ZkS s 50nsAis 200M ZooM i ZOOM cnt SETS ry Hode Mode F ll Main ARCH HH ERHEBEN EB E UE MAin8Z18Z2 Main ioi D Format ql dh Hn 21 Only gt T it Main I Allocation 22 Only 3 21 Mag xz ll Hain amp Zi E d z2 Mag x2 Z1 Position J Ah eie oei cV 8 00d iu RN Main amp Z2 E F Z2 Position
125. offset voltage is added Set the offset voltage to zero 5 2 Other causes Perform calibration If the measured 4 9 values are still odd servicing is required Cannot output to the printer The printer head is damaged or Servicing is required worn Out Cannot save to the medium The medium has not been Format the medium 11 4 formatted The medium is write protected Remove the write protection from the medium Insufficient space on the medium Delete unnecessary files or use a new 11 27 medium The instrument cannot be configured or controlled via the communication interface The address used in the program is different from the actual address The GP IB interface is not being used according to the electrical and mechanical specifications Use the same address in the program and the instrument Comply with the specifications Communication Interface User s Manual IM701410 11E IM 701410 01E 15 1 E uonoedsu pue eoueuojure y Punoouso qnou 15 2 Messages and Corrective Actions Error Messages If an error occurs during operation an error code may appear on the screen This section describes the meanings of the error messages and the corrective actions which they require The messages can be displayed either in English or Japanese see page 14 4 If the corrective action requires servicing contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer as listed on the back cover of this manual for repairs In a
126. on CH1 to CH4 and Math1 Differentiation and Integration Section 9 7 Differentiates or integrates the waveform on the specified channel This operation can be performed on CH1 to CH4 and Math1 Scaling of Math1 and Math2 waveforms Sections 9 4 to 9 8 The instrument normally auto scales when displaying the computed waveform but manual scaling can also be selected If you select auto scaling the most suitable upper and lower limits that are best suited for displaying the waveforms are determined from the voltage axis the offset voltage the type of computation and other factors of the waveform being computed If you select manual scaling then the upper and lower limits of the computed waveform display can be set to any desired values Phase shifted addition subtraction and multiplication Section 9 10 Displays the phase shifted waveforms of CH1 to CH4 or performs a computation using the phase shifted waveforms 1 22 IM 701410 01E 1 5 Analyzing the Waveform Power Spectrum Display Section 9 8 gt FFT Fast Fourier Transform computation can be performed on the input signal to display its power spectrum This is useful when you want to check the frequency distribution of the input signal Te Fein 3k T Y 9 1 9 E 00 N 3 Power spectrum ve pe eee waveform Three time windows are available a Rectangular window a Hanning window and a Flattop window The rectangular
127. on the rear panel of this instrument can be used to generate triggers Note For details related to the specifications of the EXT TRIG IN terminal see page 12 1 Selecting the trigger source Select Ext Setting the trigger level Range 2 V Resolution 5 mV Setting the trigger slope Select the trigger activation method relative to changes in trigger source level from the following three choices 4 Activated when the trigger source changes from below the trigger level to above the trigger level rising 3 Activated when the trigger source changes from above the trigger level to below the trigger level falling fx Activated on either a rising edge or falling edge Setting the probe attenuation When applying a trigger input signal to the EXT TRIG IN terminal via a probe select an attenuation that matches the probe attenuation 1 1 10 1 Setting the hold off See section 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time 6 8 IM 701410 01E 6 6 Setting the External Trigger SIMPLE Operating Procedure Setting the trigger source 1 Press the SIMPLE key 2 Pressing the Source soft key to display the trigger source menu 3 Pressthe Ext soft key 1999 07 05 08 54 11 j io Normal AMS s insi SIMPLE E Source SIMPLE Stopped Source ent GAN Il CH2 CH3 ll cHa Coupling ac OFF
128. record length DL7100 2 MWord 4 MWord interleave mode ON DL7200 4 MWord 8 MWord interleave mode ON Operating Procedure Turning ON OFF the display 1 Pressthe MATH key 2 Pressthe Math1 Display soft key and select ON to display Math1 and OFF to not display Math1 Setting the operator 3 Pressthe Math1 Setup soft key to display the computation dialog box 2000 06 19 09 46 2124 fio Normal Stopped 1936 5HS s 200HsAiw MATH Mathi Setup Mathi Display DFF oN Operation M Mathi Setup Source CHL Invert C1 EE Scale Auto Manual Mathi Label Upper C 2 0000E 61_ Mathi Louer Jf wi L Smoothing PFF Math2 Display ON M MathZ Setup 4 L 4 C3 C4 Math2 Label 5 00 Urdiv DC Full B Mathz 4 4 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Operation 5 Pressthe SELECT key to display the operator setting menu 6 Turn the jog shuttle to select Diff differentiation or Integ integration and press the SELECT key 9 28 IM 701410 01E 9 7 Differentiating and Integrating Waveforms Setting the channel on which to perform computation 7 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Source 8 Pressing the SELECT key displays the channel setting menu 9 Turn the jog shuttle to select the channel on which to perform computation and press the SELECT key Scaling 10 Turn the
129. reduction of the vertical axis linear scaling and waveform labels In addition by pressing this key before operating the V DIV knob the channel that is to be controlled by the V DIV knob can be selected LOGIC key Section 5 10 Displays a menu which is used to turn the display ON OFF and set the threshold level and waveform label for the optional logic input PRESET key Section 5 6 Displays the preset menu that sets the V div input coupling probe attenuation and trigger level to the optimum TTL or ECL level or preset level automatically This preset menu allows you to set all channels at once V DIV knob Section 5 8 Turning this knob during acquisition i e while the START indicator is lit sets the voltage axis sensitivity Before turning this knob be sure to select the channel you want to adjust by pressing the corresponding channel key CH1 to CH4 HORIZONTAL Group TIME DIV knob Section 5 12 SEARCH TRIGGER Group ACTION o D SIMPLE eua DELAY Use this knob to set the time scale If you change the scale while acquisition is suspended the new value becomes effective when acquisition resumes SHIFT ZOOM key Section 8 8 to 8 10 Displays a menu related to the waveform zoom display Pressing the ZOOM key after pressing the SHIFT key displays a menu related to data searching Search and Zoom Function SHIFT MODE key Section 6 1 and 6 16 Displays a menu used to select t
130. save a screen image to a network drive via Ethernet just as you would to a floppy disk or PC Card optional Operating Procedure Queruieu 6 sBE L L 10 11 12 13 Press the MISC key Press the Network soft key and press the Net Drive Setup soft key to display the settings menu Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to FTP Server then press the SELECT key to display the keyboard Follow the procedure on page 4 2 to enter the FTP server address If you are using DNS you can specify it by name Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Login Name then press the SELECT key to display the keyboard Follow the procedures on page 4 2 to enter a login name of 15 characters or less Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Password then press the SELECT key to display the keyboard Follow the procedure on page 4 2 to enter the password of 15 characters or less for the login name 2000 07 13 18 22 30 j fio Normal Network Stopped 118 200kS s 5msA Network K TCP IP TCP IP Setup Setup User 3 H User Account EN N Account Net Trive Setup Mail Mail Setup FTP Server 155 8 222 111 Setup 7 7 Login Name yokogaua Net Driue Net Drive Setup Password OX ICKOO ODE Setup 4 Time Dut sec 15 M Net Print Net Print Setup Commect Disconnect Setup
131. setting menu 13 Turn the jog shuttle to set the level You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits In addition pressing the RESET key sets the trigger level to 0 V 6 12 IM 701410 01E 6 8 Setting the A B n Trigger ENHANCED Setting the hysteresis 14 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the channel on which hysteresis is to be set 15 Press the SELECT key to select A or AZ Setting the trigger coupling 16 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the channel on which the coupling is to be set 17 Press the SELECT key to select DC or AC Setting the HF rejection 18 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the channel on which the HF rejection HF Rej is to be set 19 Press the SELECT key to select OFF 20 MHz or 15 kHz Setting the number of times condition B is to be met 20 Ifthe jog shuttle control is not set to Count press the Count soft key 21 Turn the jog shuttle to set the count You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits Pressing the RESET key resets the value to 1 Setting the hold off 22 Setthe hold off time according to the procedures given in 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time Note The status setting of conditions A and B applies to all trigger types The trigger level hysteresis trigger coupling and HF rejection settings apply to simple trigger and enhanced trigger IM 701410 01E Hun
132. setting resolution is 20 ns Points for attention Updating of the waveform may be slow in repetitive sampling mode In this case set the hold off time to a smaller value f holdoff time is set to 100 ms or above the trigger mode should be set to normal When used with the AB n or A Delay B trigger the holdoff time operates with respect to condition A only IM 701410 01E 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time Operating Procedure During simple trigger 1 Pressthe SIMPLE key 2 Ifthe jog shuttle control is not set to Hold Off press the Hold Off soft key 3 Turn the jog shuttle to set the hold off period You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits In addition pressing the RESET key resets the value to 0 08 us 0 08 us During enhanced trigger 1 Press the ENHANCED key 2 Ifthe jog shuttle control is not set to Hold Off press the Hold Off soft key 3 Turn the jog shuttle to set the hold off period You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits In addition pressing the RESET key resets the value to 0 08 us 0 08 us Simple trigger Enhanced trigger ick Normal io Normal 1HS s insi ENHANCED 1MS s insAli SIMPLE LE Source Qo Type cu i A gt BON Level a2 Ope M E H Set Pattern 2 E ft
133. the SELECT key to select ON 13 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Polarity under Measure 14 Press the SELECT key to select whether to measure the rising edge or the falling edge 4 15 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Edge Count under Measure 16 Press the SELECT key and turn the jog shuttle to select on which rising or falling edge to make measurements 17 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Reference 18 Press the SELECT key to select whether the trace or the trigger is to be the reference 19 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Trace 20 Pressing the SELECT key displays the reference waveform menu 21 Turn the jog shuttle to select the reference waveform then press the SELECT key 22 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Polarity under Reference 23 Press the SELECT key to select whether to make the rising f or the falling 4 edge the reference 24 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Edge Count under Reference 25 Press the SELECT key to select which rising or falling edge to make the reference Setting the 1 cycle mode 26 Press the 1 Cycle Mode soft key to select ON or OFF Setting the measurement range 27 Press the Time Range1 Time Range2 soft key to set the jog shuttle control to Time Range1 28 Turn the jog shuttle to set the start
134. the trigger signal as the trigger source Setting the hold off See section 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time Correlation with the window trigger If the window is turned ON the trigger is activated when either the OR trigger or the window trigger becomes true For details related to window trigger see section 6 13 Setting the Window Trigger IM 701410 01E 6 25 HunebbuL o 6 12 Setting the OR Trigger Operating Procedure Setting the trigger type 1 Press the ENHANCED key 2 Press the Type soft key to display the trigger type menu 3 Press the OR soft key 1999 07 05 13 06 00 fio Normal Stopped iMS s insAli ENHANCED n H Type 3 8 l OR L K Set Pattern L H Levels Coupling an Window m o CHi 10 1 CHZ 10 1 Edge CHI Hold Off 20 0 Urdiv 6 506 U diu SinglecN DC Full DC Full aey 0 08us LL J Setting the edge trigger of each channel 4 Press the Set Pattern soft key to display the trigger setting menu Set Pattern 5 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the channel to be set 6 Press the SELECT key several times to select 7 or when the Window is ON IN OUT or sy Setting the level hysteresis trigger coupling and HF rejection 7 Pressing the Level Coupling soft key displays a menu used to set the level
135. used to input the video signal to the CH1 input terminal Selecting the TV trigger 1 Press the ENHANCED key 2 Pressing the Type soft key displays the trigger type menu 3 Pressthe TV soft key 1999 07 05 13 06 00 j fio Normal iMS s insAi ENHANCED Stopped CT Type T GAN TV Type NTSC Polarity Pos Ig Level 0 5div Field g 2 x 5 a 2 000 V CHI 10 1 CHZ 10 1 Edge CHI Frame Skip 20 0 Udiy 0 500 Urdiu SingletN DC Full DC Full 7 2U g 24 8 Selecting the broadcasting system of the video signal to be monitored 4 Press the TV Type soft key to display a menu used to select the broadcasting system 5 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired broadcasting system to select NTSC PAL HDTV Selecting the polarity 6 Press the Polarity soft key to select the polarity Setting the trigger level 7 Ifthe jog shuttle control is not set to Level press the Level soft key 8 Turn the jog shuttle to set the trigger level You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits Pressing the RESET key sets the trigger level to 0 5 div Selecting the field number 9 Pressthe Field soft key several times to select the number Selecting the line number 10 If the jog shuttle control is not set to Line press the Line soft key 11 Turn the jog shut
136. used to set the level coupling hysteresis and HF rejection The setting also applies to the AB N trigger See page 6 13 Setting the hold off 15 Setthe hold off time according to the procedures given in 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time Note The trigger level hysteresis trigger coupling and HF rejection settings apply to simple trigger and enhanced trigger 6 20 IM 701410 01E 6 11 Function Setting the Width Pulse lt Time Pulse gt Time T1 lt Pulse lt T2 Time Out Trigger ENHANCED lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 8 gt Pulse gt Time When the time during which the status pattern is met is longer than the specified pulse width the trigger is activated when the condition changes Pulse lt Time When the time during which the status pattern is met is shorter than the specified pulse width the trigger is activated T1 lt Pulse lt T2 When the time during which the status pattern is met is in between the two specified pulse widths the trigger is activated Time Out The trigger is activated when the time during which the status pattern is met becomes longer than the specified pulse width The point at which the trigger is activated differs between Pulse Time and Time Out as indicated in the figure below EM 400 ns 500 500 ns Frail 100 ns RE DSL gt 100 ns S l l l l CH1 CH1 e 3 Trigger Trigger e When Pulse Time CH1 H and Time 400
137. want to compare waveforms The following operations are not available for snapshot waveforms Cursor measurements and automatic measurements Zoom and math operations The snapshot waveforms can be saved or loaded in bitmap format For details see Section 11 8 Saving Snap Shot Waveforms Clear trace This function clears every waveform currently displayed on the screen If the trace is cleared while waveform acquisition is in progress it is restarted from the first trace The loaded waveform is not cleared To cleare the loaded waveform perform the unload operation The SNAP SHOT key and CLEAR TRACE key are not operative in the following cases The instrument is in remote state controlled via the communication interface The instrument is in operation for example it is in the process of printing out or performing auto set up determining GO NO GO performing action on trigger or searching data Operating Procedure Snapshot Press the SNAP SHOT key The snap shot process will start Clear trace Press the CLEAR TRACE key The clear trace process will start Averaging and measurement will also be started from the scratch The count is reset to 0 IM 701410 01E 4 6 Calibration Function Calibration The following parameters can be calibrated Perform calibration when highly accurate measurements are required Ground level offset A D converter gain Trigger threshold Time axis for r
138. waveform menu Press the soft key corresponding to the channel you wish to save Pressing the soft key corresponding to Next displays the selections on the next page 1999 07 67 14 39 23 j fico Normal Stopped 4 q SMSvs 2ZnsA Save cnr BROW lt lt Maine 100k gt gt 7 E FTLE File Item ul File List Waveform Data Type File Nane Binary L CHAPTS Trace l ALL Range Save ME l Main History all P P Comp ON Load l Unload L 10080 due 20 00 V d B d 10000 ou CHI 10 1 CHZ 10 1 Edge CH1 20 0 U div 5 00 U div Auto Save Exec DC Full DC Full Shey Binary Utility L Selecting the range of the waveform to be saved 9 10 11 Press the Range soft key to display the save range selection menu Press one of the Main to Z1 amp Z2 soft keys to select the range of waveforms to be saved Data saved by specifying Main are only the data that can be loaded as described later in this chapter After searching data in the history memory selecting All stores only the waveforms that are found Press the History soft key to select whether to save all the data in the history memory All or only the currently displayed waveform One 11 14 IM 701410 01E 11 6 Saving Loading Waveform Data FTLE File I
139. words DL7200 Rep Repetitive sampling mode When Mode other than Envelope Mode is Active When Envelope Mode is Active Interleave mode OFF Interleave Mode ON Interleave mode Interleave Mode Rep OFF Rep ON Rep OFF Rep ON OFF Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample rate record len rate record len rate record len rate record len rate record len rate S s gth word S s gth word S s gth word S s gth word S s gth word S s It is not possible to set these T div 20 50 20 1k 800M 50 1k 800M 1k 800M 1k 800M 1k 800M 1k 800M 1k 800M 1k 800M 1k 800M 1k 800M 1k 800M 1k 800M 1k 800M 1k 800M 1k 800M 1k 800M 1k 800M 1k 800M 1k 800M 1k 800M 1k 800M 1k 800M 1k 1G 1k 1k Changes to normal mode even when envelope mode has been set 800M 800M 800M 800M 800M 800M 800M 800M 800M 800M 800M 800M 800M 800M 800M 800M 800M 800M 800M 800M 800M 800M 1G Roll mode display AITMXITMAITMAITAITAITAITAITAITAITMAITAITMAITAITAITAITAITAITAITMAITA ITA IX AITMAITAITAITAIT IT AIT IT IT IT IT IT IT IT ITIT IT IT IT II IT IR AI CITITVITAITAITAITAITAITAIT AIT AIT AITAIT AITAITAITAITAITAITA ITA ITA ITI For the setting enclosed by the bold line repetitive sampling is
140. you to use the keyboard displayed on the Screen to enter and display a comment If you enter a comment which indicates the contents of the displayed waveforms before printing a hard copy it will help you to distinguish between different print outs Recording Medium saves and loads Chapter 11 gt The instrument standard configuration includes a built in floppy drive and SCSI conector and the optional configuration includes PC Card Interface and Ethernet connector You can also choose to install an optional MO drive It is also possible to save data to an external SCSI device PC Card or Network Drive You can save data in any of the following formats HP GL command format Postscript TIFF and BMP This means that you can easily insert the saved images into documents produced by conventional DTP software packages Personal Computer O CGO O2O2O2C OOoO0 IM 701410 01E 1 27 suonoung 1 6 Other Useful Functions Ethernet Communications Optional Chapter 13 gt Saving to a network drive FTP client function You can save delete and copy waveform data and setting information onto the hard drives of devices on the network such as PCs and workstations just as you would onto internal floppy disks and hard disks You can also save screen image data Since the DL is running the client in this situa
141. zoomed waveform you can move the section that is being zoomed by pressing the Z1 Position Z2 Position soft key and turning the jog shuttle 8 22 IM 701410 01E 8 9 Search Data Using Search and Zoom Function When Performing a Parallel Pattern Search 1 Pressthe Shift key to activate shift mode The functions printed in purple letters on the front panel become activated 2 Pressthe Zoom key Selecting the Search Method Type 3 Press the Type soft key to display the search method selection menu 4 Press the soft key corresponding to Parallel Pattern to select the search method i Normal SEARCH 5kSz s 200nsAi it SEARCH SEARCH Type Type Edge Edge Parallel q Pattern Setup SerialPattern Width le zi Mag Parallel x2 Pattern Z1 Position mous f 21 Position 1 560div 0 000diu Searched Pattern No Hatch No Hatch Fas Tj Setting the Search Criteria 5 Pressthe Setup soft key to display the search criteria settings dialog box Turn the jog shuttle to select the setting item When you press the SELECT key the settings menu for the selected item is displayed or the selected value is changed Searched Pattern Searched Pattern No Hatch Edge CHI F Single Exec 0 00 V 2000 03 02 20 06 5
142. 0 10 U Note The email destination is the Mail Address set in Misc Network MailSetup The message To and From will be the same This function can be used in conjunction with 13 6 Using the Mail Function Fixed Interval Turn the Mail Interval OFF only when using the action mail function Before working with this function enter the TCP IP settings as described in Configuring the Ethernet Interface The Ethernet communication function and the GP IB function cannot be used simultaneously The mail function is an SMTP client function Mail can be sent or forwarded but not received 13 14 IM 701410 01E 13 8 Accessing DL7100 DL7200 Drives from a Personal computer or Workstation lt For a description of this function refter to page 1 28 gt Function You can access the DL7100 DL7200 s internal hard drive floppy drive PC Card or SCSI devices from a personal computer or workstation via Ethernet In order to access these devices you must be running FTP client software Please see 13 11 Approved Software for a compatible FTP client Roading time from Network drive UNIX work station OS Solaris 2 6 not corresponding to seek command Waveform 500 kW 1 MByte 11 90 s Waveform 8 MW 16 MByte 410 20 s Tiny FTPD 0 52a corresponding to seek comma
143. 0 2 V L Changing how the dialog box is displayed 3 Press the NEXT soft key 4 Press the Translucent soft key to select ON or OFF If ON is selected the dialog box is dislayed semi transparent showing the display underneath When Translucent is OFF When Translucent is ON 2001 06 05 10 37 5021 10ok_Norna1 2001 06 08 09 27 122 ee Norna DISPLAY Stopped 1 Search Setup Stopped 1 Search I Trans lucent fal Aenean Ina aaaea cun Il Type Frane Pattern Indefinite State Fran i OFF p EE m m Message Format Std Ext Te T d i Mapping x i 4ll Pattern Fornat pex Bin 1 a Hes User e Identifier z K 4 8 o al Set Mapping GJ c8 Ie S RTR gm ll S Data Field DLC 8 Da e u D 4 XIX REE HET RIX D z 7 P J 4 y SRNL a En ci Error CE oe T EER SI 100 1 Edge CHI F EI wi Edge CHi 7 Next A 5 00 Urdiv Auto 5 00 U div Auto 22 DC Full 9 20 U DC Full 0 20 V 8 6 IM 701410 01E 8 5 Setting the Waveform Labels lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 16 gt Function Label display ON OFF Trace Label Use this parameter to select whether or not to include waveform labels channel identification labels on the display E
144. 0 k 100 k 100 k 100 k 800 M 100 k 800 M 100 k 100 k 100 k 100 k 800 M 100 k 800 M 100 k 100 k 100 k 100 k 800 M 100 k 800 M 100 k 100 k 100 k 100 k 1G 100 k 1G 100 k 100 k 100 k 50 k 100 k 100 k 25k 40k 100k 10k 20k 5k 10k 2k 4k 1k 2k 500 1k 200 400 100 200 For the setting enclosed by the bold line repetitive sampling is active Changes to normal mode even when envelope mode has been set App 14 IM 701410 01E Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length Record length 250 k words DL7200 Rep Repetitive sampling mode When Mode other than Envelope Mode is Active When Envelope Mode is Active Setting Interleave mode OFF Interleave Mode ON Interleave mode Interleave Mode Rep OFF Rep ON Rep OFF Rep ON OFF ON Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed rate record len rate record len rate record len rate record len rate record len rate S s gth word S s gth word S s gth word S s gth word S s gth word S s 500 250k 500 250k 500 250k 500 250k 800M 250k 800M 1k 200k 1k 200 k 1k 200 k 1k 200 k 800 M 200 k 800 M 2k 200 k 2k 200 k 2k 200 k 2k 200 k 800 M 200 k 800 M 5k 250 k 5k 250 k 5k 250 k 5k 250
145. 00 1 or 1000 1 Setting the probe attenuation Follow the operating procedure given in Section 5 4 Selecting Probe Attenuation page 5 4 so that the probe s attenuation matches the one displayed under Probe in the soft key menu If they do not match measured values cannot be read correctly When using the FET probe 700939 the current probe 700937 or 701930 or the differential probe 701920 When using YOKOGAWA s FET probe 700939 current probe 700937 or 701930 or differential probe 701920 use the power supply for the probe provided on the rear panel of the instrument N CAUTION Use the power connectors for the probes on the rear panel only for powering probes 700939 700937 701930 or 701920 Using the power connectors for any other purpose can damage DL7100 DL7200 or the device that is connected Do not use a current outside the range that this instrument can supply Such act can cause damage to the instrument Precautions to be taken when using the FET probe 700939 current probe 700937 or 701930 or differintial probe 701920 When connecting the FET probe 700939 or the current probe 700937 or 701930 to the probe power supply terminal on the rear panel make sure that the current does not exceed the range shown below Given terminals A through D Current consumption of A Current consumption of B x 400 mA Current consumption of C Current consumption of D x 400 mA To
146. 00 MS s with the DL7200 interleave mode ON or OFF It then writes these values into acquisition memory and generates an envelope waveform showing max min levels for each point Setting restriction This mode can be selected in normal mode when the time axis is 200 MS s or lower for the DL7100 500 MS s for the interleave mode or 500 MS s or lower for the DL7200 interleave mode ON or OFF For all other cases the acquisition mode is Set to normal even if envelope is specified Average The instrument calculates average values and writes these into the acquisition memory If the acquisition count is set to Infinite the instrument uses exponential averaging and you are required to set a Weight value If the count is set to a numerical value from 2 to 65536 the instrument calculates simple averages using the specified number of readings Exponential averaging count Infinite Linear averaging count 2 to 65536 N x Xn An N 1 An 1 Xn An N N An Value obtained after nth averaging Xn nth measured value Xn nth measured value N Number of averaging times N Attenuation constant Acquisition count 2 to 256 in steps of 2 in steps of 2 Exponential averaging cannot be used when trigger mode is single or single N Simple averaging cannot be used with repetitive sampling Maximum record length is 2 M 4 M Word for the DL7100 or 4 M 8 M Word for the DL7200 during simple averaging Value in parenthesis is av
147. 00ns Edge CHi SinglecN 10 2 V Time Base mt Ext IM 701410 01E Aejdsig pue uonisinboy 7 7 Using the History Memory Function For a description of this function refer to page 1 16 gt The acquisition memory retains waveform records generated by the most recent triggers If a trigger is activated beyond the number of triggers that can be held the oldest waveform data are cleared Once the history becomes full each new trigger causes loss of the oldest waveform record in the memory Selected Record Number You can display any waveform from the history by entering its record number The newest current waveform is Record 0 the immediately previous waveform is Record 1 and so on The range for the selected record number is therefore 0 to retained waveforms 1 The number of retained waveforms triggers depends on the record length as follows DL7100 Record length Count 8 MW CH model Count 2 MW CH model 1 kWord 1 to 1024 2048 1 to 1024 2048 10 kWord 1 to 128 256 1 to 128 256 50 kWord 1 to 32 64 1 to 32 64 100 kWord 1 to 16 32 1 to 16 32 250 kWord 1 to 8 16 1 to 8 16 500 kWord 1 to 4 8 1 to 4 8 1 MWord 1 to 2 4 1 to 2 4 2 MWord 1 2 2 4 MWord 1 1 8 MWord 1 For each count of the trigger only the displayed waveform is preserved past waveform data is not preserred The se
148. 01410 01E 16 7 E suoneoyioodg 16 7 GP IB Interface Item Specifications Electrical and mechanical specifications Conforms to IEEE St d 488 1978 JIS C 1901 1987 Interface functions SH1 AH1 T5 L4 SR1 RL1 PPO DC1 DTO CO Protocol Conforms to IEEE St d 488 2 1992 Code ISO ASCII code Mode Addressable Talk only mode Address setting Listener and talker addresses 0 to 30 are settable Remote mode clear Remote mode can be cleared by pressing the SHIFT CLEAR key except when local lockout has been set For details refer to the Communication Interface User s Manual IM701410 11E 16 8 Serial RS 232 Interface Item Specifications Connector type Half pitch interface cable D Sub 9 pin plug Electrical specifications Conforms to EIA 574 Standard EIA 232 RS 232 Standard for 9 pin Connection format point to point Communication format full duplex Synchronizing format Start stop asynchronous transmission Baud rate 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 For details refer to the Communication Interface User s manual IM0701410 11E 16 9 Centronics Interface Item Specifications Connector type Centronics interface connector DSUB 25 pin recectacle IBM PC compatible Electrical specifications Conforms to Centronics specifications Printers which support ESC P PCL5 ESC P raster LIPS3 BJ
149. 01E 8 10 Analyzing and Searching SPI Signals Performing Pattern Searches 36 Press the Data Search soft key followed by the Search Setup soft key to display a dialog box used to set the search conditions Turn the jog shuttle to select the item Press the SELECT key to display a menu used to set the item or change the selected item SEARCH Type SPI Bus Analyze Setup Analyze Exec Detail L 2001 06 15 11 02 49z1 Stopped 111 ook Normal 20 000 20 00 20 00 V 2 0d V Search Setup Data Search K Type pata Pattern Indefinite State Pattern Format Search Setup 20 00 V ERTE 20 00 V S000 dus 20 00 V Source pata pataz Next Data Byte 8 bute Data Pattern L ERTE 20 00 V Data Search EI ES 20 00 V ENTE 20 00 V Easvtus 720 00 0 H Sus No 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 idi 12 13 14 Dti D8 18 21 F8 31 DG 18 21 F8 39 DB 18 21 18 21 Dt2 D8 18 00 18 00 DG 18 00 18 00 DG 18 00 18 60 cs H H H H H H H H H H H H H H HK l Setting the type 37 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Type 38 Press the SELECT key to select Data Pattern or Indefinite State If you selected Indefinite State proceed step 47 Setting the pattern format 39 Turn the jog shuttle to mo
150. 01E suonejJedo uouiuio5 B 4 6 Calibration Operating Procedure Performing calibration 1 Pressthe MISC key The MISC menu will appear Press the Calibration soft key Press the AUTO Cal soft key to select either ON or OFF Press the Deskew soft key to select either ON or OFF If ON is selected in step 4 select the desired channel Pressing the Target CH soft key displays a menu used to select the channel Press the soft key corresponding to the desired channel to select the channel Turn the jog shuttle to set the Deskew Time 8 Pressthe Cal Exec soft key to start calibration gr 0 N Oo jok Normal 1HS s insi NISC ick Normal iMS s insd Calibration DS Tak gt gt Calibration Cal Exec Communication fito Cal SCSI 10 fee ll f o i7 Graphic Color FE ll d M E E Teskeu EET IA System Conf iq Il l on H Overview n z a Il 5 00 E 5 00 Edge CHi F Edge CHi Auto Next Auto e 7 2 U ize 2U 4 10 IM 701410 01E 4 7 Using the Help Function Function Displaying a help window Pressing the HELP key displays the soft key menu which was in effect before the HELP key was pressed or displays a help window which contains information related to jog shuttle menu settings
151. 08 54 11 j fio Normal Stop 1 4MS s Imsi en ezo lt lt Maint LOk gt gt 2 Triggers can be generated on the rising edge of the power signal that is being supplied to the instrument Waveforms can be observed in sync with the commercial power supply frequency 50 Hz or 60 Hz SIMPLE Source L Line L 5 000s 2 000 V CHI 10 1 CHZ 10 1 20 0 Urdiv 0 500 Urdiu DC Full DC Full H 5 000m Edge CHi SinglecN 7 2 M P Hold OFF BEE 0 08us 6 10 IM 701410 01E 6 8 Setting the A B n Trigger ENHANCED lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 7 gt Function This function activates a trigger on the nth time condition B becomes true after condition A becomes true Setting Conditions A and B Channel status Select the status of the channel from the following three choices H Above the specified trigger level L Below the specified trigger level X Don tcare Condition Select from the following two conditions Enter Trigger is activated when all channels meet the specified status Exit Trigger is activated when at least one channel no longer meets the specified status The number of times pattern B is to be met 1 to 10 times Setting the trigger level Range 8 div within the screen Resolution 0 01 div For example the resolution is 0 02 mV when the
152. 1 Partition 1 of the SCSI device with an ID number of 5 CAO PC Card CAO 1 Partition 1 of PC Card File name and comments You must specify a file name Comments can be omitted You cannot save to a file name that is already in use in the same directory no overwriting Number and types of characters that can be used Item Number of characters Characters that can be used File name 1 to 8 chars 0 to 9 Ato Z o parenthesis minus sign Comment 0 to 25 chars All characters including spaces IM 701410 01E 11 11 uinipojy Buip1o28H oui speo pue saAes epad E 11 6 Saving Loading Waveform Data Auto naming function When Auto Naming is turned ON files with three digit numbers from 000 to 999 are automatically created Specify the common name maximum of five characters specify at the Filename item that is placed before the three digit number Specifying the files to display in the File List dialog box You can specify the type of files to display e WVF CSV or FLD Displays only the files that have the same file format as the file being saved e Displays all files on the medium Properties Lists the file name extension file size the date it was saved the attributes and the comment for the selected file Unload If the loaded waveform is being displayed newly acquired waveform is not displayed even if the data acquisition is started In order to dis
153. 10 01E 11 25 uinipojy Buip1o28H oui speo pue saAes ejeq E 11 9 Saving the Results of the Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters Note This function can not be used in conjunction with FTP server function FTP client function or LPR client function Operating Procedure 1 Pressthe FILE key 2 Pressthe File Item soft key to display the file item setting menu 3 Press the soft key corresponding to Measure FILE File Iten Setup FILE i Setup Waveform o Normal FILE SHS s ZMS li File Item Measure L Snap VA 5 Save Measure L Load Inage E 10000 tus Edge CHI F M Auto UEM Utility Utility Utility Selecting the destination medium directory The procedures are the same as steps 13 to 17 in section 11 6 Saving Loading Waveform Data Setting the file name comment The procedures are the same as steps 18 to 27 in section 11 6 Saving Loading Waveform Data 4 Press the Save Exec soft key to save the file to the directory indicated in Path ___ The name of the Save Exec soft key changes to Abort Canceling the saving operation 5 Press the Abort soft key to cancel the saving operation The name of the Abort soft key changes to S
154. 16 8 5 DY era TRUE r Er C 9 1 Ground Connector sssnneen 2 1 az PST FEY 9 1 Ground level DY r A 9 1 H E laelem C i Rai 1 20 zo M P Hanning Edoo soe cre uec et MeL I NL Hanning window esee 1 23 Edge search H td GOpy 8e Edge Trigger citri e e edes Hard COPY A edge trigger sssssettttttet ttt I PAPAE TEE ENHANCED key eettt ttt ICID irs ctae dette ecd rs cr urs Enhanced trigger 5 reme HELP Key isssssssseeeeeeeneneeeneeneenn nennen Entering a Character String HOX PET Entering a Value rete et de RH HF Rejection seeseeeeenennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn HE rejection eerte neni nn ines HISTORY Key cente crecen tee tete History Memory History memory search sese 1 24 History Search Function 1 24 7 15 7 18 Fold Off Time aieo or een eee reae e 6 4 Holdzoff rtr hier Horizontal RJUEICHULME 6 6 Index 2 1M701410 01E Initializatlon iter netten INITIALIZE Key it aren ate ettet Input coupling 2 eren nnne Input Terminals Input terminals eene Installation Conditions ssseeeee 3 3 lap 5 14 Integrating sissi e d rer troi eere eU 9 28 IntegratiOn 2er tnter teet terere 1 22 Interleave vnica ete tto rec orn e ets t n ae 7 9 Interleave mode oon cett er
155. 17 Turn the jog shuttle to select from CH Pod A CH4 BO B1 B2 B3 B4 B05 B6 and B7 and turn it ON If you turned CH4 ON proceed to step 18 If you selected Pod A proceed step 20 Note The Pod A channel is selectable only on models with logic input option Data1 CH2 cannot be set when interleave mode is ON 18 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Level and press the SELECT key 19 Turn the jog shuttle to set the level You can move between the digits using the arrow keys Pressing the RESET key resets the level to 0 000 V 20 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Enable State 21 Press the SELECT key to select H L or X If the channel was not turned ON in the CS setting is displayed Setting the reference point 22 Turn the jog shuttle and turn ON Trigger Position or Manual If you turned ON Trigger Position proceed to step 25 23 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Manual and press the SELECT key 24 Turn the jog shuttle to set the reference point You can move between the digits using the arrow keys Pressing the RESET key resets the level to 0 0000div Setting the bit order 25 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Bit Order 26 Press the SELECT key to select MSBFirst or LSBFirst 27 Press the ESC key to close the d
156. 20 0 Udiy 6 506 Urdiu SingletN nt Ext DC Full DC Full 18 2 V Int Ext Setting the attenuation when the acquisition mode is Average and the count is set to Infinite 6 Press the Weight soft key 7 Turn the jog shuttle to set the attenuation 1999 07 05 21 07 00 jj gtk Boxfug B Stopped q 100kS s insAis cnr ZOU lt lt Mainzik gt gt z l Mode zs Average fal Count L Infinite Weight Inter leave L L LS Oms 2 000 V s i H 5 00ns CHI 10 1 CHZ 10 1 Edge CHI 20 0 Urdiv 0 500 U div Auto DC Full DC Full 10 2 V I Ext L 7 4 IM 701410 01E 7 3 Using Sequential Store Function lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 15 gt Function By setting the trigger mode to Single N the sequential store function can be used Acquisition count Available numerical settings are as follows The setting range varies according to the record length DL7100 Normal mode Box average mode Record length 8 MW CH model 2 MW CH model 8 MW CH model 2 MW CH model 1 kWord 1 to 1024 2048 1 to 512 1024 1 to 1024 2048 1 to 256 512 10 kWord 1 to 128 256 1 to 64 128 1 to 128 256 1 to 32 64 50 kWord 1 to 32 64
157. 3 f you selected Manual turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Upper 14 Pressing the SELECT key displays a menu used to set the upper limit of the waveform display 15 Turn the jog shuttle to set the upper limit and press the SELECT key 16 Setthe lower limit in a similar fashion Note If Upper or Lower is set after selecting Auto scaling is automatically changed to Manual Setting the units 17 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Unit 18 Using the keyboard that appears when the SELECT key is pressed enter the unit using four characters or less Smoothing 19 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Smoothing 20 Press the SELECT key to select ON or OFF Note For details regarding smoothing see section 9 9 Smoothing Entering Labels 21 Press the Math1 Label soft key to display the keyboard then enter a label See 8 5 Setting the Waveform Labels for information about displaying labels Applicable to DL7100 with software ROM version 1 11 or later See section 15 4 Checking the System Condition Set Math2 in a similar manner as necessary IM 701410 01E 9 23 sisAjeuy u1J0J9AEAA ol 9 5 Binary Computation lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 22 gt Function This function converts CH1 to CH4 or Math1 waveform to a digital signal 1 s and O s according to the specified threshold level Unit U
158. 32767 32768 5 0000000E 09 2 5000000E 06 S CH3 1002 1 5625000E 00 0 0000000E 00 IS2 A 32768 32769 32769 32767 32768 5 0000000E 09 2 5000000E 06 S 2000 07 25 01 45 00 00 CH4 1002 1 5625000E 00 0 0000000E 00 IS2 V 32768 32769 32769 32767 32768 5 0000000E 09 2 5000000E 06 S 2000 07 25 01 45 00 00 App 24 IM 701410 01E Appendix 3 ASCII Header File Format Date 2000 07 25 2000 07 25 Time 01 45 00 00 01 45 00 00 Privatelnfo ModelVersion 1 20 DisplayBlockSize 10020 10020 10020 10020 DisplayPointNo 1 1 1 1 PhaseShift 0 0 0 0 Note The same header file format is used by all YOKOGAWA measuring instruments so it may contain some data which is not necessary for the instrument Publicinfo common information FormatVersion Version No of header file format Model Model name Endian Endian mode Big Ltl DataFormat Storage format Trace Block of binary file waveform data GroupNumber Number of the Group TraceTotalNumber Total number of selected waveforms DataOffset Start position of binary file waveform data IM 701410 01E App 25 E xipueddy Appendix 3 ASCII Header File Format Group1 group information TraceNumber BlockNumber TraceName BlockSize VResolution VOffset VDataType VUnit VPlusOverData VMinusOverData VMaxData VMinData HResolution HOffset HUnit Date Time Number of waveforms in the
159. 5 3 Self Diagnostic Test Self Test Function Memory test This test checks the internal ROM The ROM is functioning correctly if Pass is displayed If Failed is displayed contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer as listed on the back cover of this manual Key test Tests whether or not the front panel keys are operating correctly If the name of the key that is pressed is highlighted then it is operation correctly If it does not contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer as listed on the back cover of this manual Floppy disk drive test This test checks the floppy disk drive If Failed is displayed contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer as listed on the back cover of this manual SCSI test This test checks SCSI If Failed is displayed contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer as listed on the back cover of this manual Accuracy test This test checks A D accuracy If Failed is displayed contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer as listed on the back cover of this manual Printer test This test checks the optional built in printer The printer is functioning correctly if gray shading is printed properly If it is not contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer as listed on the back cover of this manual PC Card test Test whether the PC card is in normal condition If Failed is displayed after completing the test please contact the Yokogawa Engineering Service center printed on the back of this manual IM 701410 01E 15 7 E uo
160. 5 iex Normal Stopped setup SEARCH Type Parallel Pattern Level Hysteresis Pattern K HL 6 680 U 3div F__ 9 008 U 4 Odiv XL 9 000 U 3div L 6 000 U 9 3div Clock CH CH2 x Mathi XL EE T 9 3div Mathz X 0 00div 6 3div Pod A XXXXXXXX 1 500div Z1 Position Pod B XXXXXXXX Searched Pattern Start Point L 5 688diu No Match 5 00 U div Single DC Full 90 00 V Setting the Clock CH 6 Move the cursor over to the clock channel with the jog shuttle then press the SELECT key When selecting CH1 CH4 proceed to step 7 If you select None skip to step 10 Setting the Clock Channel Pattern 7 Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the Pattern of the channel set as the clock channel Press the SELECT key to select rising or falling Setting the Clock CH Level 8 Usethe jog shuttle to move the cursor to the Level of the channel set as the clock channel Press the SELECT key then use the jog shuttle to set the level and press the SELECT key again Use the arrow keys to move between the digits If you press the RESET key the setting will be restored to O V IM 701410 01E 8 23 8 9 Search Data Using Search and Zoom Function Setting the Hysteresis of the Clock Channel 9 Usethe jog shuttle to move the
161. 701410 01E 5 6 The Preset Function Selecting the preset type 4 Press the Type soft key to display the preset type selection menu 5 Setthe type by pressing the soft key corresponding to TTL ECL User Current 700937 or Current 7001930 2000 03 02 17 00 10 j fio Normal Stopped Jl 5kS s 200nsAis PRESET B Select PRESET Select l ME Current 700937 sexy Je1uozuoH pue e2rnJeA Current 701930 CH 10 1 i Edge CHT F Exec 5 00 Urdiv Single Exec DC Full 0 00 V Selecting the probe attenuation for TTL ECL or User Preset 6 Pressthe Probe soft key to display a menu used to select the attenuation 7 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired attenuation l i L Setting the V div offset voltage and trigger level when the preset type is User 8 Press the Type soft key to display the preset type selection menu Press the soft key corresponding to User 9 Pressthe soft key cornesponding to V div to highlight the jog shuttle icon 2000 06 22 sel ick C2NS s SOOHs Hiv Stopped 18i 200kS s 5msAli PRESET B Select User Probe 18 1 TUER l vaw 50 0 U Offset 0 0 y Trig Level S E S 0e 0u a Edge CHI F 5 00 U div Auto Exec 50 0 U diu 0 10 V 10 Turn the jog shuttle to s
162. 8 54 11 jt Stopped cT ick Normal AMS s insAli ENHANCED g Type GA l A gt BN L Set Pattern L H Levels Coupling B Count L 1 L 5 080ms 2 000 V H H i 5 000 CHI 10 1 CHZ 10 1 Edge CHI Hold Off 20 0 Udiy 6 506 Urdiu SingletN DC Full DC Full REN amp 0 08us Setting the status and condition for conditions A and B 4 Pressing the Set Pattern soft key displays a menu used to set the status and condition for conditions A and B Set Pattern Condition 5 Setcondition A Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the channel to which the status of condition A will be set 6 Pressthe SELECT key several times to select H L or X 7 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the Condition position of condition A 8 Pressthe SELECT key several times to select Enter or Exit 9 In a similar fashion set condition B Setting the level 10 Pressing the Level Coupling soft key displays a menu used to set the level coupling hysteresis and HF rejection Leuel Hys Coupling HF Rej cu 7 2 VI L3 p r cz 0 520 UT IC OFF cus _ 0 208 U Lic p r cha C 6 208 UT Lc T Wr 1 11 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the channel on which the level is to be set 12 Press the SELECT key to display the level
163. 930A YOKOGAWA A1190MN on each end IM 701410 01E 16 11 E suoneoyioodg 16 15 General Item Specifications Immunity 1 Complying standard EN61326 apply for 701410 701420 701430 701440 700988 700939 700985 Influence in the immunity environment performance criteria A Test condition Cable requirement Noise increase lt 80 mV when using 700988 lt 400 mV when using 700939 No influence when using 700985 When using 700988 500 MS s 701410 701420 or 1 GS s 701430 701440 20 mV div PeakDetect Envelope Mode 20 MHz BWL input 1 MO Probe facter 10 1 When using 700939 500 MS s 701410 701420 or 1 GS s 701430 701440 50 mV div PeakDetect Envelope Mode 20 MHz BWL input 50 O Probe facter 10 1 When using 700985 500 MS s 701410 701420 or 1 GS s 701430 701440 PeakDetect Envelope Mode The same as those for the emission cable 1 Overvoltage category Installation category describes a number which defines a transient overvoltage condition It implies the regulation for impulse withstand voltage II applies to electrical equipment which is supplied from the fixed installation like distribution board 2 Pollution degree describes the degree to which a solid liquid or gas which deteriorates dielectric strength or surface resistivity is adhering 2 applies to normal indoor atmosphere Normally only non conductive pollution occurs 3 The cable length is less t
164. 99 07 66 11 19 43 j Nornal Stopped 48 q 50kS s Zns i DISPLAY DISPLAY TITER eut 62 00 lt lt Manele gt gt E Format Br E Single Dual IEEE 3 E 3 am Tnterpalation i or Sine y Graticule Triad Scale Value ll OFF N X IDITES Trace Label Hexa m OFF mE di m Accumulate 77 Accumulate paki OFF 10 00ms 2 000 Y i d 10 00ms CHi 10 1 CHZ 10 1 Edge CHI 20 0 Urdiv 6 500 U diu SingletN E Next DC Full DC Full 10 2 U 12 4 Press the Next 1 2 soft key to display the Next 2 2 menu Press the Mapping soft key to select Auto Fixed or User Normal 18 2 U 272 DISPLAY i DISPLAY 5OkS s Znsu DISPLAY Format Trans lucent Trans lucent Trans lucent Dual DEF ON prr ON Interpolation Mapping Mapping Sine y Auto User Graticule Set Mapping Set Mapping Scale Value OFF pn Trace Label arm OFF pn Accumulate i asin OFF 10 00s DU Edge CHI ae Next Single N 5 Pressing the Set Mapping soft key displays a menu used to assign the waveforms 6 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the desired chann
165. Appendix 3 ASCII Header File Format ssseeeeeenneneen nennen App 24 Appendix 4 List of Defaults 1 toic cet tree eter tet App 28 Index IM 701410 01E xiii Chapter 1 Functions 1 1 Block Diagram System Configuration External SCSI device Built in printer SCSI Interface Save load data Trigger out CE FA lem Centronics Ethernet interface GP IB RS 232 Ethernet interface OL lt Sele External trigger inpu Trigger gate input Logic input optional measured Data saved to floppy disk H Block Diagram Object to be Signal input Y RGB video output Remote Control Monitor printer suonoung Screen data Waveform data Personal Computer Set up data Screen data i s Waveform data Set up data I 1 Screen data Printer Primary Acquisition VGA video output i memo Multiplex Dy memory e ATT Pre Amp circuit A D i LCD display Display CH1 o 1 lt 7 processing Y i circuit Printer optional CH2 o gt lt J og z Y ag se CH3 o es 9 gt ean gt Keyboard t 2
166. B 5 0000 CHI 10 1 CHZ 10 1 Edge CH1 20 0 Urdiv 0 500 U diu Auto Next DC Full DC Full EN 12 L l 5 4 IM 701410 01E 5 5 Setting the Offset Voltage Function Operating Procedure lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 2 gt The offset voltage setting applies to all input couplings AC 1 MO DC 1 MQ DC 50 Q and GND couplings Offset voltage setting range Sensitivity Range Probe 21 1 Offset Voltage Setting Range 2 mV div to 50 mV div 1 0 V to 1 0 V 0 1 V div to 0 5 V div 10 0 V to 10 0 V 1 V div to 10 V div 100 0 V to 100 0 V DC 50 Q 1 V div only The setting resolution is 0 01 div If the voltage scale is 2 mV div for example the setting resolution will be 0 2 mV Canceling the offset voltage You can return the offset to OV by pressing the RESET key Points for attention e Setting the offset voltage while acquisition is stopped will change the display position only The newly set offset voltage will come into effect when acquisition is restarted You can select whether or not the offset voltage is reflected in the results of cursor measurements automatic measurements or math computations If you change the probe attenuation the offset changes proportionally to reflect the new attenuation rate Changing the voltage sensitivity does usually not affect the offset value Only if the change would cause
167. Character string At this point the confirmed string is temporarily stored Keys other than characters DEL Deletes the character at the cursor INS Switches between insert and overwrite modes The indicator will be lit during insert mode CLR Deletes all displayed characters SPACE Enters a space ENT Confirms the displayed characters CAPS Toggles upper case and lower case characters Number of characters and types available Number of characters Available characters 0to9 0to9 AtoZ _ All characters including space All characters including space All characters including space Date time Specified number File name 1108 Display image comment 0 to 20 File comment 0 to 25 Mail address 0 to 40 Note Comments and file names can both contain both upper and lower case letters However file names are NOT case sensitive The following five file names are not allowed due to MS DOS restrictions AUX CON PRN NUL and CLOCK You cannot enter two or more atmarks in succession IM 701410 01E 4 3 suonejedo uoWwWO0y gt 4 2 Initializing Settings Function The initialization function allows you to reset parameter values which have been set using panel keys to the default factory settings This is very convenient when you have to cancel the previous settings or when you have to restart measurement from the beginning Initialization Initializati
168. DL7100 DL7200 Digital Oscilloscope USER S MANUAL YOKOGAWA 4 Yokogawa Electric Corporation IM 701410 01E 3rd Edition Product Registration Thank you for purchasing YOKOGAWA products YOKOGAWA provides registered users with a variety of information and services Please allow us to serve you best by completing the product registration form accessible from our homepage http www yokogawa com tm PIM 103 01E Foreword Notes Trademarks Revisions Disk No DL28 3rd Edition July 2001 YK Thank you for purchasing the YOKOGAWA DL7100 DL7200 Digital Oscilloscope This User s Manual contains useful information about the instruments functions and operating procedures as well as precautions that should be observed during use To ensure proper use of the instrument please read this manual thoroughly before operating it Keep the manual in a safe place for quick reference whenever a question arises Three manuals are provided with the instrument including this User s Manual Manual Name Manual No Description DL7100 DL7200 User s Manual IM 701410 01E Describes all functions except for the communications function and their operation procedures for the instrument DL7100 DL7200 Communication IM 701410 11E Describes the functions for User s Manual the communication interface DL7100 DL7200 Operation Guide IM 701410 02bE Describes basic operations only The contents of this manual are subject t
169. Drive sesssssss 13 7 T Saving Snap Shot Waveforms 11 22 11 23 11 24 Saving Waveform to a Network Drive 13 5 Scale values eunte 1 16 Scaling Screen Colors sis rm eee des 14 1 S6SlEcei ie Lacoste catt dt tionis 11 3 Index 4 1M701410 01E Index I QU eo eRe ee 10 9 X Time AXIS air reser nen rre teen eee 1 4 Time Out Tim Range irainen eneidiaa idistran nnne 9 10 Tifrie WIFIdOW 2 eee oett reni eee epu de E 9 30 TIME DIV knob sssssseeeneeeennnenennenennennennennnnnn 2 2 TIMED ASC M MM A E E AE E 1 4 TRG D indicator 24 Y WAG irit reset Het sre eee a dT dea 8 1 MERERI DERE EETAS EREET IENEN E ADRESEI T EEEE 9 1 TRIG GATE IN Terminal eee 14 6 TRIG OUT Terminal recorte 12 2 Z Trigger Coupling rre 1 11 trigger co plirig 2 2 1 teet eene 6 6 AV ONIY isiishie aeia ii Med kde Trigger Dela trigger delay Trigger Gale 5 e de decer 14 6 M M E n Trigger Hysteresis sse 1 11 ZODIFLPOSIHOLT eisai ose and ene eae 8 12 Trigger level Zoom ralek deren RIO aa AA des 8 12 Trigger Mode Zooming msamaa ea ee a locates aa naan 8 12 Trigger output terminal esee 2 1 Trigger POSION sk encore eet re o RR sets 1 12 trigger position nieis ieiti ainiin brsa nitre nei Dindaia aaaeei iaaa 6 3 trigger SlODO 5 teer eir HERREN AREER AENG E 6 6 Tr
170. ECT key to display the keyboard 8 Follow the procedure on page 4 2 to enter a password of 15 characters or Isee for the login name If the login name is anonymous you don t need to enter a password 2000 07 13 18 22 30 p Normal 8 ZO0kS s 5nsA Network Netuork Stopped 11i TCP IP Setup User User Account Account Net Drive Setup L Mail Setup FTP Server 155 0 222 111 Setup z Login Name ukoa a ZA Net Driue Net Driue Setup _ Passuora ARERR Setup ane i n Tine Out sec 15 Net Print Net Print Setup tomect_ Lnisconnect Setup Others Others CH 19 1 Edge CHi Connect 5 00 U div Auto Connect DC Full 7 50 U Log List L i 5 a E A 4 IM 701410 01E 13 5 jeuond o suonesiunwwos 19uJ89u13 Ey 13 3 Saving Waveform and Setting Data to a Network Drive 9 Usethe jog shuttle to move the cursor to Timeout Press the SELECT key to set the timeout time 10 Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Connect then press the SELECT key to make the connection If the connection has been made successfully the an icon appears in the upper right part of the screen 11 Press the FILE key and press the Utility soft key to display the File List 12 Use the
171. F Hysteresis Holdoff time 80 ns Trigger position 50 Trigger delay Os Trigger gate OFF Math setting scalling OFF Automatic setup affects only the settings listed above All other settings remain unchanged Operating Procedure Selecting the center position and channels performing auto setup 1 Press the AUTO SETUP key 2 Press the Auto Setup soft key to perform auto setup When auto set up is executed waveform acquisition starts automatically 1999 67 63 10 30 41 jt Nornal Stopped 55 iMS s insfliv__AUTO SETUP cnt 88 0 V futo Setup JL L L LS 000s 2 000 V s i i 5 000m CHI 10 1 CHZ 10 1 Edge Ext 20 0 Urdiv 0 500 U div Auto DC Full DC Full 0 000 U RE Canceling auto setup 3 Press the Undo soft key to restore the settings that existed immediately before auto setup 4 6 IM 701410 01E 4 4 Starting Stopping Waveform Acquisition Function The START STOP key is pressed when starting or stopping waveform acquisition When the indicator to the upper right of the START STOP key is ON waveform acquisition is started When the indicator to the upper right of the START STOP key is OFF waveform acquisition is stopped Stopped is displayed on the upper left corner of the screen Operation when the acquisition mode is set to averaging mode When the waveform acquisition is stopped the averaging
172. F7 E2 E3 Built in printer Logic input for 701410 Logic input for 701420 Logic input for 701430 Logic input for 701440 PC Card interface Ethernet PC Card interface CAN Bus signal analysis function Two passive probes Two FET probes 1 1 printer roll B9850NX included 2 Logic probe 700985 is not included The number of logic probes for acquiring the waveform data depends on the model 3 You can select option C9 or C10 4 Option available only on the 701430 and 701440 For details on the operating procedures handling precautions and other information see the DL7200 CAN Bus Analysis Function User s Manual IM701430 51E Example UL CSA standard power cord and full options gt 701410 D B5 N1 E2 E3 IM 701410 01E Checking the Contents of the Package No Instrument No When contacting the dealer from which you purchased your instrument please quote the instrument No Standard Accessories The following standard accessories are supplied with the instrument Make sure that all items are present and undamaged Power cord one of the following power cords is supplied according to the instrument s suffix codes UL CSA standard VDE standard BS standard SAA standard 400MHz passive Soft Case A1006WD A1009WD A1054WD A1024WD probe x2 x1 700988 B9969ET Front panel protection Printer roll Fuse Rubber feet User s manual x1 cover Opaque chart in fuse holder x4 Commun
173. File List dialog box Display example of recording media FDO Floppy disk SC5 SCSI device with an ID number of 5 SC5 1 Partition 1 of the SCSI device with an ID number of 5 CAO PC Card CAO 1 Partition 1 of the PC Card File name and comments You must specify a file name Comments can be omitted You cannot save to a file name that is already in use in the same directory no overwriting Number and types of characters that can be used Item Number of chars Characters that can be used File name 1 to 8 chars 0 to 9 Ato Z _ parenthesis minus sign Comment 0 to 25 chars All characters including spaces Notes when saving setup data You cannot save while the data acquisition is in progress Press the START STOP key to stop the acquisition The maximum number of files that can saved to one directory is 1000 File name extension The File name extension set is automatically appended to the file Auto naming function When Auto Naming is turned ON files with three digit numbers from 000 to 999 are automatically created Specify the common name maximum of five characters specify at the Filename item that is placed before the three digit number 11 18 IM 701410 01E 11 7 Saving Loading Setup Data Specifying the files to display in the File List dialog box You can specify the type of files to display SET Displays only the setup data files e Di
174. From the search start position search for a portion of the waveform containing a pulse which is longer or shorter than a previously defined length of time Expand the retrieved portion of the waveform per the zooming factor and display it in the waveform zoom display window Applicable to DL7100 with software ROM version 1 11 or later See section 15 4 Checking the System Condition V Zoom screen center position v Starting point for next search Conditions Pulse T Pulse the length of time a specified condition is fulfilled T a specified length of time In the example above the search finds a portion of the waveform which satisfies the condition and is longer than the specified length of time Auto Scroll Section 8 9 The zoom box scrolls automatically in a designated direction You can stop the zoom box while checking zoomed waveforms Applicable to DL7100 with software ROM version 1 21 or later See section 15 4 Checking the System Condition Analyzing and Searching SPI Signals Section 8 10 SPI stands for Serial Peripheral Interface It is a serial interface proposed by Motorola Data transmission is carried out using three signal wires clock signal data output and data input By adding a chip select signal CS a master device can control the output of a slave device Data is transmitted in units of bytes 8 bits by synchronizing to the clock signal The DL7100 DL7200 can analyze the SPI signal in 1 b
175. H 2H 3H 4H 6H 8H 12H 24H Information Transmitted from the DL7100 DL7200 Acquisition status Start Stop Trigger Condition Acquisition Count Error information the error number and the English error message text corrective action up to 16 messages GO NOGO Success Fail Information only when GO NO GO is used Measurement information only when measurement is calculated and GO NO GO is used Sample Transmission Comment aaaaaa ACQ Status Stopped 162 GO NOGO Status Success 140 Fail 21 Max C1 4 16667V SDv C2 697 941mV Freq C3 500 0000kHz Wd C4 1 00us ErrNo 004 Exit from GO NO GO mode ErrNo 806 Cannot change settings during GO NO GO Stop the GO NO GO ErrNo 004 Exit from GO NO GO mode ErrNo 806 Cannot change settings during GO NO GO Stop the GO NO GO ErrNo 602 No SCSI device or no media inserted Check the SCSI device connection and the SCSI ID and make sure that the storage medium is inserted if applicable IM 701410 01E 13 11 jeuondo suoneoiunuuuio 19uJ9u13 Ey 13 6 Using the Mail Function Fixed Interval Operating Procedure Press the MISC key Press the Network soft key to display the Network menu Press the Mail Setup soft key to display the mail settings menu 2000 07 13 18 27 10 j Stopped 118 1iok Nornal 200kS s Sms Network User LN TCP IP Setup L User Account Hail Setup N
176. H2 and CH3 can be connected to either the data input signal or the data output signal The DL7100 DL7200 handles the data of the signal connected to CH2 and CH3 as Data1 and Data2 respectively 2 Can be connected on products with the login input option DL7100 DL7200 CH4 PodA CH1CH2CH3 Master O1 eS 1 02 CS2 A line is connected to each slave CS CS3 1 03 SCK Clock spo Data output spl lt Data input gt Each line is connected to all slaves As seen from the master device Setting the Analysis Conditions e Setting the clock signal Clock CH1 Specify the following items Level Set the level used to determine the rising or falling edge of the signal The range is 8 div within the screen The resolution is 0 01 div Hysteresis Set the hysteresis The range is 0 3 div to 4 div Polarity Select the polarity from the following 4 Reads the data input output signal when the signal changes from below the specified level to above the specified level 1 Reads the data input output signal when the signal changes from above the specified level to below the specified level 8 28 IM 701410 01E 8 10 Analyzing and Searching SPI Signals Setting the data signal Data1 CH2 Data2 CH3 Set the level used to determine the signal level 0 1 or indefinite of Data1 and Data2 Thr Upper Signal exceeding this level is determined to be 1 Thr Lower Signa
177. M 701410 01E 6 27 HunebbuL H 6 13 Setting the Window Trigger ENHANCED Correlation with the OR trigger or Width trigger OR and Width are the trigger types on which the window trigger can be used When using the window trigger of a single channel set the window conditions of all other channels to or x Operating Procedure Setting the trigger type 1 Press the ENHANCED key 2 Pressing the Type soft key displays the trigger type menu 3 Pressthe OR or Width soft key 1999 67 65 13 06 00 j Nornal Stopped Cur iMS s insi ENHANCED 3 Type GAN Width Width Type JL Pulse lt Tine Set Pattern L K Level Coupling l Tine L 60 001us Window i 5 OFF pry Ls o00ns 2 000 V dl E 5 000ns CHi 10 1 CHZ 10 1 Edge CH1 Hold Off 20 0 Urdiv 6 500 U diu SingletN DC Full DC Full 7 2 0 08us 4 L Setting the window trigger 4 Press the Window soft key to select ON Set the status and trigger conditions of each channel according to the procedures given in section 6 11 Setting the Width Pulse Time Pulse Time T1 lt Pulse lt T2 Time Out or 6 12 Setting the OR Trigger ENHANCED Setting the center level window width trigger coupling and HF rejection 5 Pressing the Level Coupling soft key displays a dialog box used to set the center level window width trigger coupling an
178. M2 20k 10 M2 800 M 10 M2 800 M 50 k 10M2 50k 10 M2 50 k 10 M2 50 k 10 M2 800 M 10 M2 800 M 100 k 10M 100k 10 M2 100 k 10 M2 100 k 10 M2 800 M 10 M2 800 M Roll mode display 1 2 3 4 For the setting enclosed by the bold line repetitive sampling is active Because acquisition size is 8 MWords the waveform is displayed over 8 divisions of the time axis only Note that the trigger position setting percentage in this case with respect to the 8 division length 100 8 divisions Box average linear average or computation cannot be specified 4 MWord model Record length cannot be set to 8 MWord when interleave mode is OFF Changes to normal mode even when envelope mode has been set App 20 IM 701410 01E Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length Record length 16 M words only for 16 M Word model DL7200 When Mode other than Envelope Mode is Active Rep Repetitive sampling mode When Envelope Mode is Active Interleave mode OFF 3 Setting Interleave Mode ON Rep OFF Rep ON Rep OFF Rep ON Interleave mode OFF Interleave Mode ON Sample Sample Displayed rate rate record len S s S s gth word Displayed record len
179. Pages 5 14 6 8 and 12 1 Trigger output terminal Input terminals Page 3 7 N Used to connect a probe Page 12 2 Power connectors for the probes Page 3 8 Provides power to YOKOGAWA s FET probes SCSI connector Connects to an external hard disk MO disk or other external SCSI storage device PC Card slot Page 11 2 optional Centronics connector or current probes Serial port RS 232 connector For details about communication functions refer to the instrument Communication Interface Manual IM701410 11E Connects to a printer with a Centronics interface Power connector A Page 3 5 RGB VIDEO OUT terminal Page 12 4 Top View GP IB connector For details about communication functions refer to the instrument GP IB Interface Manual Doc IM701410 11E Logic Input connectors Page 3 11 optional A Built in printer optional Handle Use the handle to lift and carry the unit IM 701410 01E 2 2 Operation Keys Jog Shuttle Knobs VERTICAL Group o o CH1 to CH4 keys Section 5 1 to 5 9 Displays a menu used to turn ON OFF the display on each channel set the vertical position coupling probe attenuation offset voltage bandwidth limit expansion
180. SET key resets the level to 0 V Setthe Pattern 14 Press the SELECT key to select the pattern number A to D 15 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the desired bit position 16 Press the SELECT key to select H L or X If you click Clear Pattern all bits are set to X 17 Setother pattern numbers as necessary Setting the Start Point 18 Turn the jog shuttle to set the start position of the search Press the SELECT key You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits Pressing RESET key sets the position to 5 000000 div 19 Press ESC key close the search condition setting dialog box Setting the display position of the search results 20 Press the Result Window soft key to select Z1 or Z2 Executing the search 21 Pressing the Exec soft key starts the search The search results are displayed in the zoomed waveform display position selected in step 20 You can search 10 times using the same conditions Displaying the previous search results 22 Pressthe Searched Pattern soft key 23 Turn the jog shuttle to select the number of the search result to be displayed Newer search results are displayed with higher numbers result 2 is newer than result 1 Changing the zoom rate and position 24 Asinthe zoomed waveform you can change the zoom rate of Z1 and Z2 by pressing the Z1 Mag Z2 Mag soft key and turning the jog shuttle 25 Asinthe
181. SURE key 2 Press the Mode soft key to display the automated measurement mode menu 3 Press the soft key corresponding to ON to set the automated measurement mode Normal MEASURE is MEASURE SOkS s ZnsWi Hode Galen k gt gt T a em l OFF H ON Mo I d u i P Item Setup ON B Iten Setup M SEN es H EETA e Hl Delay Setup EN Statistics E Delay Setup Ht C ul iCycie Mode i iCycie Mode Cycle ry DFF ON Il Statistics NEN History i Statistics HI saree J M I MR Tine Rangei RR Time Rangei f Ul MR Tine Rangei 1 880 iv E 1 880div 5 1 88div 3 y H K Time Range2 Time Range2 npn dei and i Time Range2 L 2 13div BED 2 130div 5l ENTM 2 13div _ Edge CHi Next Next Auto Next 172 ie 7 2 U 172 Selecting the measurement parameter 4 Press the Item Setup soft key to display the measurement parameter dialog box and the measurement channel dialog box 1999 07 06 18 53 42 j gtk Nornal 4337 Stopped 1 50kS s ZnsA Source eH Bio V Ttem Setup CHL l P P s Freq v AugFreg fg Max g Period AvgPeriod Min 5 Rise 5 Intity Avg Fall s IntzTy alll 4 c Rns Width s IntiXY
182. Save Exec soft key changes to Abort Canceling the saving operation 5 Press the Abort soft key to cancel the saving operation The name of the Abort soft key changes to Save Exec Specifying the file to be displayed in the File List dialog box viewing the properties The procedures are the same as steps 30 to 33 in section 11 6 Saving Loading Waveform Data Serer AT AD TE PM EEEE ITET n 49 E WUE AoE OEE WL MOGLIE RETE DC Full DC Full FILE Save Stopped 50kS s 2ns Save File Iten p r SoU lt lt Mainzik gt gt 7 E Il File List 1 Snap m I File List M File Nane Path FDO M File Nane Space 1162848 byte CHAPTS File Nane Size CHAPTS F 1 e TRASH gt 1999 07 07 21 3 CHAPTOOS TIF 1999 67 07 21 36 CHAPTO86 SNP 1999707707 21 35 CHAPTGG4 TIF 1999707707 21 34 Save Il CHAPTOO1 BMP 1999 07 07 21 33 Property CHAPTOOO BMP 1999 07 07 21 27 AC CHAPTO03 TIF 1999 67 07 20 54 rd CHAPT GZ TIF 1999707707 20 53 Filter Load CHAPTOO1 TIF 1999 07 07 20 52 CHAPTOOO TIF 1999 67 07 20 51 SNP Unload CERE Lis tome 20 00 V CHI 10 1 CHZ 10 1 Utility 20 0 Urdiv 5 60 U diu Save Exec Snap Save Exec Snap Loading snap shot waveforms Follow ste
183. Setting the distal mesial and proximal points Distal Mesial Proximal 36 Press the Next 1 2 soft key to display the Next 2 2 menu 37 Press the Distal Mesial or Proximal soft key 38 Turn the jog shuttle to set the distal mesial or proximal point Setting the High Low point 39 Press the Next 1 2 soft key to display the Next 2 2 menu 40 Press the High Low Mode soft key to select Auto or MAX MIN 9 16 IM 701410 01E 9 3 Statistical Processing Function Statistical processing In statistical computation statistics are measured on the data over the number of times automated measurements were made for each item Statistical Processing by Period Applicable to DL7100 with software ROM version 1 21 or later See section 15 4 Checking the System Condition lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 21 gt Carry out statistical processing on current history data Calculate starting from the oldest data then perform the statistical processing on each period range The method for period calculation is the same for that of a normal waveform parameter Depending on the which waveform is used for the period calculation you can select whether to apply the waveform s period to all the waveforms in the calculation or to use each individual waveform s period for its own calculation CH1 CH4 Math1 Math2 Apply the period of the specified
184. Smoothing DEF 1 Hath2 Display M Mathz Setup Edge CH1 F Math2 Label 5 00 U div Mathz nc Full Mathz 9 22 IM 701410 01E 9 4 Adding Subtracting and Multiplying Waveforms 4 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Source Pressing the SELECT key displays the channel menu 6 Turn the jog shuttle to select the channel on which to perform the computation and press the SELECT key Setting the operator 7 Tur the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Operation 8 Pressing the SELECT key displays the operator setting menu a 2000 06 19 02 41 33 fio Normal 36 5HS s 200usAiw MATH Mathi Setup Mathi Display Stopped 19 Sourcet CHT DFF ON Operation Select M Mathi Setup Source2 C1 Cz Scale Mathi Label Upper Mathi Louer Unit Invert Smoothing Diff Hathe Display Integ BFF ON PS M Math 2 Setup Pass Thru C3 C4 Math Label 5 00 Urdiv DC Full Mathz 9 Tur the jog shuttle to select or and press the SELECT key Selecting the channel on which to perform computation 10 Similar to steps 5 to 7 set Source2 Scaling 11 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Scale 12 Press the SELECT key to select Auto or Manual If you select Auto go to step 17 1
185. System Condition 1 2 Press the MEASURE key Press the Mode soft key to display the automatic measurement mode selection menu Press the soft key corresponding to HistoryStatistics to set the automatic measurement mode 4 Press the Item Setup soft key to display the measurement item dialog box and the measuring source channel selection menu 2000 03 03 16 30 29 fio Normal MEASURE_ Stopped 571 J 100MS s 10KS Source Mode a Ttem Setup fEUEHESTEE Jii E History FP s Freq v AugFreg statistics aT Max g Period AvgPeriod HETT 7 AM Min Rise 5 IntiTY R fug 5 Fal Int2TY TE Delay Setup PEN Ens S Width s Intixy 34 Sdeu Width Int2xy zz TI Shou Result pem ll High Duty 3 Lou 5 Bursti EE Measure E Exec Shot Burst2 B Tine Rangel 0Shot Pulse n 5 000d iv Time Rangez AIT Clear_ Copy To All Trace 5 000d iv LJ 3 CH 10 1 Edge CHI a Next 5 80 U div Normal E i2 DC Full 9 00 U Press the soft key corresponding to the measuring source channel to select it Using the jog shuttle move the cursor to the item you wish to turn ON If you select All Clear you can turn OFF all the items at
186. T key to display a menu used to set the number of waveform acquisitions 26 Turn the jog shuttle to set the number of waveform acquisitions and press the SELECT key Selecting the action to take when the condition is not met 27 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Action 28 Press the SELECT key to turn ON OFF the action Setting the determination range 29 Press the Time Range1 Time Range soft key to set the jog shuttle control to Time Range1 30 Turn the jog shuttle to set the start point of the determination range 31 Ina similar fashion set the end point of the determination range with Time Range2 Executing the GO NO GO determination 32 Press the Exec soft key to execute the GO NO GO determination When the determination terminates the waveform acquisition is automatically stopped To forcibly stop the operation press the START STOP key or the Abort soft key to stop the acquisition IM 701410 01E 9 37 sis euy u1J0JOAE AA ol 9 12 GO NO GO Determination Using Zones Function For a description of this function refer to page 1 27 gt Create zones using a standard waveform as a base and from those zones let GO NO GO be determined by whether a waveform extends outside or inside of the zone Applicable to DL7100 with software ROM version 1 21 or later See section 15 4 Checking the System Condition Waveform for GO NO GO Determination Determination Criteria Se
187. Upper and Thr Lower are always determined to be true matches the specified status If such point is included at the time the pattern is checked a message is displayed as a notification High 2 ae Thr Upper Thr Lower A B Always determined as true Low Low Search start point when searching using a serial pattern The search start point is as follows when Clock CH is set to None On the screen the first rising or falling edge to the right of the specified Start Point becomes the reference The search start point is set to 1 2 the specified interval right of the reference point However if the Start Point and the search start point described above are separated by an interval larger than the specified interval the search start point is set back in units of the specified interval to a point so that the interval between the Start Point and the search start point is within the specified interval The search start point must be to the right of the start point in this case Within the hysteresis range of Clock CH the rising or falling edge cannot be checked Edge detection Reference point Thr Upper Thr Lower B IL A AP A sd A Interval A Search start point B Interval 2 Start Point Edge detection Reference point f Thr Upper i Thr Lower B A NR A SI te A lps A EUR IRSE A Interval A B Interval 2 A Search start point C lt Interval Start Point
188. V DIV setting is 2 mV div Setting the hysteresis Assigns a width to the trigger level so that the trigger is not activated on small changes JN Approximately 0 3 div of hysteresis around the trigger level ZZ Approximately 1 div of hysteresis around the trigger level The value above are estimated values They are not strictly guaranteed Setting the trigger coupling Select from the following list of choices AC Uses a signal that is obtained by removing the DC component from the trigger source signal as the trigger signal DC Uses the trigger source signal as the trigger signal Turning ON OFF the HF rejection Select 15 kHz or 20 MHZ when you wish to use a signal source that is obtained by removing the high frequency components frequency components greater than or equal to approximately 15 kHz or 20 MHz from the trigger signal as the trigger source Setting the hold off See section 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time Note the status for condition A and condition B are set to Xs Don t care the trigger will not be activated If you wish to use only one pattern condition to activate the trigger use the pattern trigger If IM 701410 01E 6 11 HunebbuL H 6 8 Setting the A B n Trigger ENHANCED Operating Procedure Setting the trigger type 1 Press the ENHANCED key 2 Pressing the Type soft key to display the trigger type menu 3 Press the A B N soft key 1999 07 05 0
189. a Snap shot waveform Loaded snap shot waveforms Grid Cursor Marker Waveform Snap shot waveform Grid Cursor IM 701410 01E 14 1 suone4edo 19410 B 14 1 Setting the Screen Color Operating Procedure 1 Pressthe MISC key 2 Pressthe Graphic Color soft key to display a menu used to set the display color and brightness With the DL7200 or the DL7100 firmware version 2 01 or later Graphic Color is displayed when you press the Next 1 2 soft key 3 Press the Mode soft key to display a menu used to select the settings jin Normal NISC Graphic Color 20MS s S5ns4 Graphic Color Hode MUSS Node sy Calibration ll itenei iu Meu icst ion TS Menu pa 10 i SCSI ID ER II Waveform 16 anie Color ll mo mp Others RE icons See 16 iu e Grid Eis System Conf ig m Cursor sare Overvieu m ca Edge CHE F mee Next Auto 12 90 0 U Setti 4 c Quo 11 ng the color Press the soft key corresponding to RGB to display the display color setting menu Press the Menu soft key to display a dialog box used to set the display color of the menu items Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the desired item Press the SELECT key to displa
190. a H Load ER Inage Load onan g 2r Unload Unload B i 10000 tus KH 3 Edge CHI 4 Utility M Utility Auto Utility gt IM 701410 01E 11 13 wnipe Buip1o28H oui Speo7 pue saAes epad E 11 6 Saving Loading Waveform Data Saving the waveform data Selecting the data type 4 5 Pressing the Data Type soft key displays the data type menu Press the one of the soft keys corresponding to Binary ASCII or Float to select the data type Data saved in Binary are only the data that can be loaded as described later in this chapter j ooc Normal FILE SHS s ZnsAli FILE File Item E FILE File Item DOK gt gt File Tten lll lll Waveform Waveforn Waveforn Data Type Rr Data Type TL 3 ak ll Binary Binary A ASCII ue Save Float Save es ll an uc Load m Load Load n Unload Unload unload LL AL z li 10000 Ous ye Edge CHI 4 M aay Utility Utility Auto Utility we 7 2 Selecting the waveform to be saved 6 7 8 Pressing the Save soft key displays the save setting menu Pressing the Trace soft key displays the
191. activated in the normal mode regardless of the trigger mode setting Number of operations ACQ Count 1 to 65536 Repeats the operation the specified number of times Infinite Repeats the operation until the waveform acquisition is stopped Save to File Hard Copy operation Operates according to the settings in the FILE or COPY menu File name of the Hard Copy when the copy destination is File or Save to File Saved using AUTO Name For details see section 10 4 Storing Screen Image to the Recording Medium or section 11 6 Saving Loading Waveform Data Precautions to be taken when setting the action on trigger e Action on trigger cannot be used when the action mode is Average or Box Average The settings cannot be changed during action on trigger Trigger mode The trigger mode is set to Single IM 701410 01E 6 35 HunebbuL H 6 16 Setting the Action On Trigger Operating Procedure 1 Press the SHIFT key to set the keys in the shifted condition Functions marked in purple on the panel become active 2 Press the MODE key 2000 07 14 13 29 45 j fio Normal EA Stopped 12 Z00kS s 5msAli ACTION Buzzer pow Save to File EE ow rd Copy pom nd Hail ON ail Count 100 ACQ Count JL L aL Infinite L 4 5 00 Urdiv Exec DC Full n Turning ON OFF the action
192. age to the Recording Storage Medium The screen image can be outputed to storage medium a floppy disk an external SCSI device PC Card optional or Network drive Ethernet PC Card interface optional For details see Section 13 4 Saving Screen Image Data to a Network Drive Function Output data format You can save the output data in the following formats The file extensions and file sizes reference value that are automatically assigned are also listed Output Data Format Extension File Size TIFF TIF 38 574 bytes approx 300 Kbytes BMP BMP 38 462 bytes approx 300 Kbytes Post Script PS 79 061 bytes approx 300 Kbytes When the color is turned OFF reference value The file sizes inside the parentheses are the sizes when the color is ON Color for TIFF and BMP Select ON ON Revers or OFF ON outputs in 256 colors ON Revers Background color is not output ON GRAY outputs in 16 shade greyscale Applicable to DL7100 with software ROM version 1 11 or later See section 15 4 Checking the System Condition OFF outputs in Black amp White Comments You can add a comment string consisting of up to 20 characters on the screen and save the information Data compression For BMP files BMP format can be compressed into LZW and RLE formats respectively and output However if color is OFF data in BMP format cannot be compressed Floppy disk and external SCSI device PC Ca
193. ail Server abc yokogawa co jp Mail Setup Mail Address XYZeyokogawa Co jp Net Drive Setup Comment M NailBaseTine 3 9 98 Interval DFH Net Print Setup Hail Test Net Drive Setup L Net Print Setup 1 2 3 i E a a a a ET Overview IIll 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Note Others Others Connect Log List Move the cursor to Mail Server using the jog shuttle then press the SELECT key to display the keyboard Follow the procedure on page 4 2 of the instruction manual and enter the mail server name If you are using a DNS specify it by name Move the cursor to Mail Address using the jog shuttle then press the SELECT key to display the keyboard Follow the procedure on page 4 2 of the instruction manual and enter the mail address of 40 characters or less If necessary move the cursor to Comment using the jog shuttle then press the SELECT key to display the keyboard Follow the procedure on page 4 2 of the instruction manual to enter a comment Move the cursor to Mail Base Time using the jog shuttle then press the SELECT key to display the keyboard Follow the procedure on page 4 2 of the instruction manual and enter the mail transmission time Move the cursor to Interval using the jog shuttle then pr
194. ailable only if interleave mode is ON For more information about the relationship when roll mode or repetitive samplingmode is active or trigger mode is single or single N refer to Appendix 1 Box Average For details see Section 7 4 IM 701410 01E 7 2 Acquisition Mode Acquisition count The available count settings are indicated below If you set the value to Infinite acquisition will continue until you switch it off with the START STOP key The default count is Infinite The acquisition count cannot be changed during measurement e For Normal Envelope or BoxAverage mode 2 to 65536 in steps of 1 Infinite For Average mode 2 to 65536 in steps of 2 Infinite Important information about the averaging mode e e Average mode is useful when working with repetitive waveforms Correct averaging is not possible if the waveform has imperfect triggering since synchronization will be poor and the displayed waveform will be distorted When working with this type of signal set the trigger mode to Normal so that the waveform display is updated only when the trigger occurs See page 6 1 Roll mode display is disabled during averaging If you stop waveform acquisition by pressing the START STOP key the averaging process also stops Averaging restarts from the beginning when acquisition resumes If you are using simple averaging the DL7100 terminates acquisition automatically when it completes the specified numbe
195. ails Notes about GO NO GO Determination Determination results number of successes failures are displayed on screen Functions other than the START STOP key and Abort soft key are inactive during determination When performing GO NO GO determination trigger mode is automatically set to Single Determination is not possible when acquisition mode is set to Average Note The zone waveform you created is stored as setting information onto the floppy disk etc IM 701410 01E 9 39 sisAjeuy u1J0J9AEAA ol 9 12 GO NO GO Determination Using Zones Operating Procedure Setting the Mode 1 Press the GO NO GO key 2 Pressthe Mode soft key to display the GO NO GO determination mode setting menu 3 Pressthe soft key corresponding to a zone to set the GO NO GO determination mode Creating a Determination Zone 4 Press the ToEditMenu soft key 5 Press the New soft key to display the zone creation reference waveform selection menu 6 Press the soft key corresponding to the reference waveform to display the zone editing menu jok Normal soe n S0 NO 60 5kS s 200ms i GU7N0 GU lode Neu Edit Zune Part A Upper To EditMenu Redraw 9 00diu PI Louer k 0 66aiv i Left Setup 0 00div I Right x xy 0 00div Store as zonet I Tine
196. ained here after is set to Os the trigger point and the trigger position refer to the same location You use this setting to select how much pre trigger area and how much post trigger area to show on the display Display record length lt gt 0 Trigger position 100 Pre trigger range Post trigger range E 7 N M M M 1 12 IM 701410 01E 1 4 Setting the Acquisition and Display Conditions EB Record Length Section 7 1 gt The term record length refers to the number of data points per channel acquired in the acquisition memory Displayed record length refers to the number of these data points that are actually displayed on the screen Note that sampling rate and record length will vary according to the time axis setting see page 1 5 The DL7100 lets you set the record length to any of the following 1 kWord 10 kWord 50 kWord 100 kWord 250 kWord 500 kWord 1 MWord 2 MWord 4 MWord or 8 MWord or even 16 MWord with the DL7200 In most cases the displayed record length is identical to the acquisition record length For certain time axis settings however the lengths become different For details refer to Appendix 1 suonoung Interleave Mode Section 7 5 gt This mode doubles the amount of memory per channel while cutting the number of channels in half If you are using an 8 channel model for example then se
197. an t start while data out Wait a moment Wait until data output is complete Chapter 10 711 Cannot access file while hard copying Wait until the hard copy completes 10 3 Wait a moment 712 Cannot compress this hardcopy image Turn OFF the compression setting 10 9 10 11 Turn off the compression switch 713 Calibration failure Failed CH Servicing is required Disconnect the input and execute again If it fails again servicing is necessary 726 Cannot start when loading waveform data Unload the files 11 17 that have been saved in the history All mode Unload the loaded files from the FILE menu 727 Insufficient output data Increase Mag or widen the Time Range interval 10 4 Increase Mag or widen the Time Range interval 728 Hard copying Pressing the Copy key again aborts the 10 5 Abort or wait until it is complete operation 729 Calibration cannot be performed while Unload the waveform 11 17 waveform data are loaded Unload the loaded files from the FILE menu 730 Pattern is not specified Set at least one search pattern not to X 8 17 731 Cannot start when waveform data that have Unload the waveform 11 17 been acquired in the linear average mode are loaded Unload the loaded files from the FILE menu 732 Cannot be executed while computation is in Aborted when Math Display is turned Off 9 22 progress 733 Failed to measure statistics Check to see that waveform data to be measured Se
198. and close the cover Make sure that the edge of the roll sheet is showing from the opening of the printer cover Push the printer cover down firmly until it clicks into place Note After loading the rool paper the paper feed may be unstable Print out 2 or 3 screen images before using the printer in your work 10 2 IM 701410 01E 10 2 Outputting to the Built in Printer Optional Function Output format In addition to normal size long copy is possible in which the displayed waveform is magnified 2 to 500000 times before printing The magnification ratio varies depending on the T div and record length settings Outputting optional information Outputs the results of the setup information at the same time as the waveform Comments You can output a comment string consisting of up to 20 characters in the lower section Print range Set the range to output to the printer from 5 div to 5 div 4 div to 4 div for the 16 MW CH model Preview The output image can be previewed using the specified output format Precautions to be taken when printing with the built in printer Printing is not possible while the waveform acquisition is in progress When displaying a waveform using the history memory function only the waveform selected for Selected Record No is long copied Long copy is not possible when displaying X Y waveforms Long copy of snapshot waveforms and accumulated waveforms are
199. ange the T div setting the time axis setting is rescaled with respect to the trigger position Operating Procedure 1 Pressthe POSITION key 2 Turn the jog shuttle to set the trigger position You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits If you wish to select 10 50 or 90 you can press the corresponding soft key In addition pressing the RESET key resets the position to 50 1999 07 05 08 54 11 jt fio Normal Stopped 1 iMS s insi POSITION HT S200 E Ig Position 50 0 Set to 107 Set to 507 S 00Ds 2 000 5 000ns CHi 10 1 CHZ 10 1 Edge CHI 20 0 Urdiv 0 500 U diu SingletN IM 701410 01E HunebbuL o 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time Function For a description of this function refer to page 1 12 gt This function prevents a trigger from being activated for a specified time even if the trigger conditions are met during this time The following two methods can be used to prevent the trigger This is useful when you wish to activate the trigger in sync with a signal that is periodic as shown in the figure below Repetitive period T Trigger level lt E E m m eeMeeWFeplepdeeeeReERRep rx ee Trigger source signal Trigger signal during hold off period t when trigger slope is set to rise m 4 Hold off time setting range 80 ns to 10 s default 80 ns The
200. anguage Soft Version Linkage Date Note System Overview 701440 gt Max16MW 8MW CH Yes Yes Yes Yes Invalid 1 24 ROM Sum 00 08 03 Thu 13 27 Backup battery Displays OK if the built in lithium battery is normal Empty if the battery is flat If Empty is 00006 3F43H Calibration SCSI ID 4 823 015 Systen Conf ig Overview displayed contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer as listed on the back cover of this manual IM 701410 01E 15 11 E uonoedsu pue eoueuojure y Punoouso qnou 15 5 Replacing the Power Fuse A WARNING To prevent the possibility of fire use only a fuse having the specified rating voltage current and type Make sure to turn OFF the instrument and unplug the power cord before replacing the fuse Never short the fuse holder Specified Rating The power fuse used on this instrument is specified as follows Maximum rated voltage 250 V Maximum rated current 4A Type Time lag Standard VDE SEMKO UL CSA SEV certified Part number A1352EF Replacement Procedures Follow the procedures below to replace the power fuse 1 Turn OFF the power switch 2 Unplug the power cord from the power outlet 3 Press the dented fuse holder section of the power connector with a Philips screwdriver for example and turn it in the direction of the arrow in ord
201. are met while the input applied to the trigger gate input terminal TRIG GATE IN is active Select High or Low for the active level 1 2 8 4 As measured immediately after calibration under standard operating conditions see page 16 10 with machine warmed up As measured under standard operating conditions see page 16 10 after warmup When set to T1 lt Pulse lt T2 the value of T2 Typical or average value not guaranteed IM 701410 01E 16 3 E suoneoyioodg 16 3 Time Axis Item Specifications Time axis range 1 ns div to 50 s div record length is 10 k Words or more 1 ns div to 5 s div record length is 1 k Words Time base precision x 0 00596 Time axis precision 0 005 500 ps 1 digit EXT CLOCK IN Connector type BNC Maximum input voltage 40 VDC ACpeak or 28Vrms 10 kHz or less Input frequency range 40 Hz to 20 MHz continuous clock only Sampling jitter not above 1 25 ns Minimum input level 0 1 Vp p Threshold level 2 V 5 mV resolution Input impedance Approx 1 MQ 15 pF Minimum pulse width At least 10 ns for both High and Low 1 As measured under standard operating conditions see page 16 10 after warm up 2 1digit may be unreliable depending on the sampling 16 4 Display Item Specifications Display 8 4 inch approx 21 3 cm color TFT liquid crystal display Screen size 170 9 mm width x 129 6 mm height Total pictu
202. arentheses above are available only if interleave mode is ON DL7200 Record length T div 1 kWord 1 ns div to 50 ns div 1 ns div to 20 ns div 10 kWord 1 ns div to 500 ns div 1 ns div to 200 ns div 50 kWord 1 ns div to 2 us div 1 ns div to 1 us div 100 kWord 1 ns div to 5 us div 1 ns div to 2 us div 250 kWord 1 ns div to 10 us div 1 ns div to 5 us div 500 kWord 1 ns div to 20 us div 1 ns div to 10 us div 1 MWord 1 ns div to 50 us div 1 ns div to 20 us div 2 MWord 1 ns div to 100 us div 1 ns div to 50 us div 4 MWord 1 ns div to 200 us div 1 ns div to 100 us div 8 MWord 1 ns div to 500 us div 1 ns div to 200 us div 16 MWord 1 ns div to 5 us div With 4 MW CH model record length is 2 MWord with interleave mode OFF setting range when interleave mode is ON Restriction During repetitive sampling waveform acquisition is not possible when the trigger mode is Single N 7 10 IM 701410 01E 7 6 Setting Repetitive Sampling Mode ON OFF Operating Procedure 1 2 Press the ACQ key Press the Repetitive soft key to select ON or OFF 1999 07 05 21 07 00 jj Stopped CH 20 nc 1 q lt lt Mainzik P gt jik Norna 1 100kS s ins li ACT ICHT GAN Record Lengt 1k Mode Normal v Inter leave pm ow Rep OFF pry Ls 00m5 10 1 0 Uzdiv Full 2 000 CHZ 10 1 0 500 Urdiu nc Full i 5
203. ase B9969ET 1 1roll of printer paper Only on models with B5 suffix 2rubber pads for rear legs Front cover 1 User s manual this manual Operation Guide Communication Interface Manual 16 10 IM 701410 01E 16 15 General Item Specifications Safety standard Complying standard Pollution degree 2 EN61010 1 Overvoltage category Installation category II Emission Complying standard Cable requirement EN61326 Class A C Tick AS NZS 2064 apply for 701410 701420 701430 701440 700988 700939 700985 This product is a Class A for commercial environment product Operation of this product in a residential area may cause radio interference in which case the user is required to correct the interference External trigger input External clock input Trigger gate input terminal Use a BNC cable Attach a ferrite core TDK ZCAT2035 0930A YOKOGAWA A1190MN on each end Trigger output terminal Same as the above external trigger input terminal Video output connector Use a D Sub 15 pin VGA shielded cable 3 and attach a ferrite core TDK ZCAT2035 0930A YOKOGAWA A1190MN on each end RS 232 connector Use an RS 232 shielded cable 3 and attach a ferrite core TDK ZCAT2035 0930A YOKOGAWA A1190MN on each end Centronics interface connector Use a shielded cable 3 for the connection SCSI connector Use a SCSI shielded cable 3 and attach a ferrite core TDK ZCAT2035 0
204. asurement information only when measurement is calculated and GO NO GO is used Sample Transmission Report Comment aaaaaa ACQ Status Stopped 1 Trigger Date and Time 2000 07 17 17 28 59 38 GO NOGO Status Success 9 Fail 1 NOGO Factor Param4 Ch4 tWd Max C1 4 16667V SDv C2 697 941mVv Freq C3 X 500 0000kHz 4Wd C4 1 00us IM 701410 01E 13 13 jeuond o suoneoiunuuuio 19uJ9u13 Ey 13 7 Using the Mail Function Action Mail Function Operating Procedure Press the GO NO GO key Press the MODE soft key then select Zone or Parameter Press the Setup soft key to display the GO NO GO setting menu Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Action and select Send Mail Select Mail Count to set a limit for the number of mails that are sent Press the Exec soft key to start GO NO GO OF OV R ON ya GO NO 6O Mode GO NO 6O Mode 2000 07 06 10 giok Normal Z00kS s 5nsAl 16 55 j Stopped 6734 OFF Parameter Parani Paranz Param3 Parana Mode DN FF __ON__LDFF __0N Trace Setup Iten Upper Louer Condition IN pu __ hoy 1 Logic P cm Sequence ingle Continue Ww Tine Rangel 5 000d iu Time Range2 L 5 000d iv ACQ Count action v Buzzer Save to File Hard Copy Send Mail Mail Count DC Full
205. ated at the specified intervals or is displayed in roll mode Thus to retain the currently displayed waveform acquisition must be stopped Use of the snapshot function allows the currently displayed waveforms to remain temporarily on the screen without acquisition being stopped To activate this function just press the SNAP SHOT key without stopping acquisition The currently displayed waveform will be retained This waveform is called a snapshot waveform The snapshot waveform is displayed in white color unlike the updated waveform making comparison between the two easier Snapshot waveforms are screen image data so they cannot be used for cursor measurement or automated measurement However screen image data output hard copy is possible Snapshot waveform Iu Clear Trace Section 4 5 gt This function clears all waveforms other than the loaded waveforms and restarts the averaging repetitive sampling and accumulation in a signal operation Preset Section 5 6 gt This function automatically sets the V div input coupling trigger level and other parameters to appropriate values for the TTL or ECL signal or any arbitrary value specified The function can also set the parameters to values suitable for the specifications of the 700937 current probe and the 701930 current probe The 700937 current probe is supported by software ROM version 1 21 or later on the DL7100 see section 15 4 Checking the System Con
206. ater The strings that are previously confirmed are sequentially sent to the subsequent memories When the number of confirmed strings exceeds eight the strings are deleted in order starting from the oldest string 0 through 7 symbols do not appear on the screen Symbol indicating the 90 091 O2 uns 07 memory storing the string When string AA is Stores AA confirmed first When string BB is Stores BB Moves and confirmed next stores AA When string CC is Stores CC Moves and Moves and confirmed next stores BB stores AA When string HH is Stores HH Moves and Moves and Moves and confirmed next stores GG stores FF stores AA When string JJ is Stores JJ Moves and Moves and Moves and Deletes AA confirmed next stores HH stores GG stores BB Recall Applicable to DL7200 and DL7100 with firmware version 2 01 or later Note that the string that is displayed in the entry box of the keyboard is overwritten when a string is recalled using the procedure in step 1 below 1 Every time the soft key is pressed strings that are temporary stored strings that have been entered previously appear in order in the input box of the keyboard When the eight strings that are temporarily stored are displayed the most recent string is displayed again 2 Make appropriate corrections to the recalled string and confirm it according to steps 1 to 4 that were described above in Entering a
207. ave Exec Specifying the file to be displayed in the File List dialog box viewing the properties The procedures are the same as steps 30 to 33 in section 11 6 Saving Loading Waveform Data 11 26 IM 701410 01E 11 10 Outputting the Detailed Analysis List of the SPI Signal Function The analysis results of the SPI signal can be output to a file in ASCII format The contents of the detailed analysis list described in section 8 10 Analyzing and Searching SPI Signals can be output to a file as is The extension is txt The file size is shown below File Size number of bytes per data x number of analysis results 44 bytes 1 The number of bytes per data varies depending on the data 40 bytes minimum Data2 For analysis data without CS 44 bytes maximum CS For data under multiple CS analysis with CS set to CH4 2 The data size of the title is 44 bytes Operating Procedure 1 Pressthe FILE key FILE FILE File Item FILE File Item Setup alle Waveforn SPI Bus Data Type Waveform L E Binary Snap Save Measure Save L RUN CAN Bus SPI Bus Image Load le Unload 2 Utility utility Press the File Item soft key to display the File Item menu Press the soft key corresponding to SPI Press the soft key
208. ave mode OFF Interleave Mode ON Rep OFF Rep ON Rep OFF Rep ON Interleave mode OFF Interleave Mode ON Sample Displayed Sample record len rate gth word S s Displayed record len gth word Sample Displayed rate record len S s gth word Sample rate S s Displayed record len gth word Sample rate S s Displayed record len gth word Sample rate S s 500k 1k 500k 1k 500k 1k 500k 800M 500k 800M 400 k 2k 400 k 2k 400 k 2k 400 k 800M 400 k 800M 500k 5k 500k 5k 500k 5k 500k 800M 500k 800M 500k 10k 500k 10k 500k 10k 500k 800M 500k 800M 400 k 20k 400 k 20k 400 k 20k 400 k 800M 400 k 800M 500k 50k 500k 50k 500k 50k 500k 800M 500k 800M Roll mode display 500k 100k 500k 100k 500k 100k 500k 800M 500k 800M 400 k 200k 400 k 200k 400 k 200k 400 k 800 M 400 k 800 M 500 k 500 k 500 k 500 k 500 k 800 M 500 k 800 M 500 k 500 k 500 k 1M 500 k 800 M 500 k 800 M 400 k 400 k 400 k 400 k 800 M 400 k 800 M 500 k 500 k 500 k 500 k 800 M 500 k 800 M 500 k 500 k 500 k 500 k 800 M 500 k 800 M 400 k 400 k 400 k 400 k 800 M 400
209. ave operation The name of the Abort soft key changes to Save Exec Specifying the file to be displayed in the File List dialog box and viewing its properties 22 Inthe File List dialog box press the Filter soft key to select SET or 23 Inthe File List dialog box turn the jog shuttle to select the desired file 24 Pressing the Property soft key displays information regarding the selected file 25 Pressing the ESC key closes the window displaying the information Loading the setup data Display the menu used to save load setup data according to steps 1 to 3 4 Press the Load soft key to display the load setting menu and the file list dialog box 1999 07 67 14 39 23 FILE Stopped 4 toos Normal 13 SMS s nsi Load Chain 100k gt gt File Item ent S0 V Setup File List Path FDO File Name Space 1205760 byte ize FD 1 CHARPT600 SET CHAPTO66 TIF CHRPT685 TIF CHAPTOG4 TIF 1999 07 07 15 06 1999 67 07 15 02 1999 67 67 15 01 1999 07 06 14 59 Save Load Utility CHAPTOOS TIF CHAPTOO2 TIF CHAPTO61 TIF CHAPT6GG TIF 1999 67 07 14 59 1999 07 07 14 53 1999 67 07 14 52 1999 67 67 14 50 3ET Property Filter ES 0 DO v CHZ 10 1 CHI 10 1 20 0 Urdiv 5 00 Udiy DC Full DC Full Load Exec setup
210. aved For waveforms that are loaded using the history memory function you can select whether to save all of the history data or just the current displayed waveform on the Screen You can also save only the search results of the data in the history memory For details regarding data search of the history memory see sections 7 8 to 7 9 Forsnap shot waveforms see section 11 8 Saving the Snap Shot Waveforms Selecting the range of the waveform to be saved Select the range region of the waveform from the following list of choices Only the data that have been saved by selecting Binary in the earlier section Selecting the data type file extension data size can be loaded in this instrument Main The range of the normal Main waveform It is the range defined by the displayed record length range displayed on the screen Zi The range of zoom waveform Z1 Z2 The range of zoom waveform Z2 Z1 amp Z2 The range of zoom waveform Z1 amp Z2 Data compression You can select whether or not to P P compress the waveform data before saving Data that are saved using P P compression cannot be loaded Power spectrum computation data cannot use P P compression Selecting the medium and directory The recording media that can be used to save and load waveform data are displayed in the File List dialog box Display example of recording media FDO Floppy disk SC5 SCSI device with an ID number of 5 SC5
211. averaging count to a value from 2 to 65536 Exponential averaging count Infinite Linear averaging count 2 to 65536 N X Xn An N 1 An 1 Xn An N N An Value obtained after nth averaging Xn nth measured value Xn nth measured value N Number of averaging times N Attenuation constant Acquisition count 2 to 256 in steps of 2 in steps of 2 This averaging process is useful when you want to eliminate random noise IM 701410 01E 1 13 1 4 Setting the Acquisition and Display Conditions Envelope mode In normal mode and averaging mode the sample rate the number of times data is acquired per second in the acquisition memory drops if T div is increased refer to Appendix 1 Relationship between the time axis setting sample rate and record length However in the envelope mode the maximum and minimum values are determined at every time interval from the data sampled at 400 MS s for the DL7100 interleave mode 800 MS s or 1 GS s or 800 MS s for the DL7200 interleave mode ON or OFF The time interval used to determine the values is the twice the sampling interval of the normal mode The maximum and minimum values are paired and acquired in the acquisition memory Envelope mode is useful when you want to avoid aliasing section 1 2 since the sample rate is kept high irrespective of the time axis setting T div Furthermore envelope mode is also useful when you want to detect glitches pulsing
212. ay record length is 25 MWord over 6 4 divisions Note that the trigger position setting percentage in this case with respect to the 8 division length 100 8 divisions or 6 4 division length 100 6 4 divisions 3 Box average linear average or computation cannot be specified 4 4MWord model Record length cannot be set to 16 MWord when interleave mode is OFF IM 701410 01E App 21 H xipueddy Appendix 2 How to Calculate the Area of a Waveform Integ1TY Total area for positive side only S14 S2 77 S2 j 1 Z2 t l Integ2TY Total area for both positive and negative sides S1 83 S2 S3 VS i S2 i L Integ1 XY 1 Multiple loops 2 Non closed curve Area S nxSo WN Area S So n Number of loops v SS Area enclosed by a curve connecting the start and stop Start point WW points Stop point Stop point Waveform 3 Loop tracing the shape of 8 4 Spiral loop Ui Area S So S11 Area S Sox2481 17 Number of overlaps varies according to A the number of loops So Start point SS 7 Stop point Stop point App 22 IM 701410 01E Appendix 2 How to Calculate the Area of a Waveform Integ2XY 1 When only one Y data corresponds to X data 1 3 X axis Y 0 Start point Stop point So Area S So So A Start point Stop point X axis Y 0 2 4 X axis Y 0 Stop point Start point So Area S So So Senec Stop point Start point X axi
213. c LI negative Output delay time 50 ns or less Output hold time 1 us min at low level 100 ns min at high level Output Circuit Diagram 5V 5V L Sos 470 Q 47 Q Timing Chart Output delay time Trigger point Trigger signal 50 ns max H Trigger output L 12 2 IM 701410 01E 12 2 Trigger Output TRIG OUT Low level high level hold time Trigger occurrence Trigger occurrence H Trigger output i gt p i Pre trigger e Internal process tim 2 Post trigger time Internal process time gt Tri ger Trigger CEN Post trigger Pre trigger y Post trigger Acquisition 1 HIGH high level period Indicates the pre trigger and internal processing time 100 ns minimum 2 LOW low level period Indicates the post trigger and internal processing time 1 us minimum IM 701410 01E 12 3 indinogAndu joueg 4eou H 12 3 RGB Video Signal Output RGB VIDEO OUT CAUTION When making a connection turn OFF the DL7100 and the monitor Never short circuit the RGB VIDEO OUT terminal or apply an external voltage This may damage the instrument RGB VIDEO OUT terminal Specifications RGB VIDEO OUT VGA Through RGB output the contents displayed on the instrument can be displayed on an external monitor Monitors that can be connected are VGA monitors or multi synchronous monitors that can display VGA OOOOO 10 OOO 6
214. can be saved The parameters that can be displayed are as follows Auto Measurement Mode Displayed Parameters ON Up to 12 parameters from all traces The parameters of channels having smaller channel numbers have precedence The parameters that appear higher in the parameter setting menu have precedence Statistics The statistics of up to 2 parameters for all traces are displayed Channels having smaller channel numbers have precedence Voltage axis parameters P P Peakto peak value MAX MIN V Oshot Undershoot value Max Maximum voltage V COv LOW MIN HIGH LOW x 100 in Mini 4Oshot Overshoot value Min Minimum voltage V Ov MAX HIGH HIGH LOW x 100 Rms Root mean square value High High level voltage V an V Low Low level voltage V Avg Average voltage 1 n xi V Sdev Standard deviation SDv 1 n Zxi zxi 2 n 2 shows the corresponding name at the measurement item setting screen High Low Time axis parameters Rise Rise time s Width Width s greater than the mesial value Fall Fall time s Wa Freq Frequency Hz 1 PERIOD C Width s smaller than the mesial value alea Period s Duty Duty ratio Width Period x 100 Avg Freq Mean frequency in FR A measuring range Hz Avg Perod Mean period in PR A measuring range s shows the correspond
215. cannot be set to 2 MWord when interleave mode is OFF Changes to normal mode even when envelope mode has been set App 8 IM 701410 01E Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length Record length 4 M words DL7100 Rep Repetitive sampling mode When Mode other than Envelope Mode is Active When Envelope Mode is Active Setting Interleave mode OFF Interleave Mode ON Interleave mode Interleave Mode Rep OFF Rep ON Rep OFF Rep ON OFF ON Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed rate record len rate record len rate record len rate record len rate record len rate S s gth word S s gth word S s gth word S s gth word S s gth word S s 10k 5M 10k 5M 10k 5M 10k 5M 400M 5M 800M 20k 4M 20k 4M 20k 4M 20k 4M 400M 4M 800M 50k 5M 50k 5M 50k 5M 50k 5M 400M 5M 800M 800M 800M 800M 800M 800M 800M 800M 800M 800M 800M 800M 1G Roll mode display Changes to normal mode even when envelope mode has been set 1 For the setting enclosed by the bold line repetitive sampling is active 2 Because aqcquisition size is 4 MWords the waveform is displayed over 8 divisions of the time axis only Note that the trigger
216. cates the value of the nearest sampled data to the right of the cursor For interpolated display the sampled data is highlighted However the marker cursor is always displayed over the sampled data L 9 6 IM 701410 01E 9 1 Measuring Waveforms Using Cursors For V Vertical Cursors when the X Y waveform is displayed Selecting the waveform to be measured Refer to steps 1 3 to set the Type to Vertical 4 5 ur Press the Trace soft key to select the waveform to be measured Proceed to step 12 insi ID CURSOR Type Vertical Trace E e Cursori 3 00diu Cursorz 3 00diu Moving the Cursor Press the Cursor1 Cursor2 soft key to highlight the jog shuttle icon for Cursor1 12 13 14 1933 00 16 11 21 Move Cursor1 using the jog shuttle In the same manner move Cursor2 If you highlight the jog shuttle icon for Cursor1 and Cursor2 you can move them at the same time Stopped 39 g 2 4M Nornal q Chain 1GS s 5usHiw CURSOR 16 655us 16 535us 33 190us 30 12956kHz PSU DP I Do 4 dinbzu 04 o 83 3393nU C Type Vertical Trace CH1 Cursori 3 3310d iv Cursorz 3 30270d iv Cursor Jump ursori to 21 CHI 10 1
217. ccur due to frictional heat Donotallow chemicals or oil to come into contact with the roll chart otherwise color development or loss of information may result IM 701410 01E 10 1 ejeq ue8J2S jo 1ndino H 10 1 Loading Paper Roll in Built in Printer Optional Operating Procedure While pushing the lock release lever towards OPEN lift the handle on the left of the printer cover and open the cover Lock release lever Move the release arm located on the right near the front to the MAN FEED position Have the inner side of the roll paper the side that is not glossy showing on top for the following procedure While pressing the movable holder located on the left of the roll chart storage space to the left set the core of the roll paper to the holder on the right Then release the movable holder Insert the edge of the roll paper evenly in the space between the roller and the black guide then rotate the paper feed knob away from you until about 10 cm of the roll sheet is showing from the top of the roller Rotate the paper MAN FEED feed knob Roll paper Move the release arm to the FREE position and straighten out the roll sheet Then move the release arm to the HOLD position The printing will fail with an error message if the release arm is in the FREE or MAN FEED position during operation Pull the printer cover back to its original position
218. cedure FTLE File Item Waveform Tata Type Binary 1 Pressthe FILE key 2 Pressthe File Item soft key to display the file item setting menu 3 Pressthe soft key corresponding to Setup 1933 07 0 20 53 29 j fico Normal d FILE Stopped 5MS s 2nsHi FILE eH B y _ 88 0 V Maine LOOK 22 H File Tten Setup i i E Setup Waveforn ae L Snap l Save Load Unload Utility Measure JL Inage 10000 nus 20 00 V i 10000 tus CHI 10 1 CHZ 10 1 Edge CHI M 20 0 U div 5 00 U div Auto DC Full DC Full 7 2 V Utility Utility IM 701410 01E uinipejy Buip1o28H oui speo pue saAes epad E 11 7 Saving Loading Setup Data FILE File Item Setup Save Utility Selecting the setup data Selecting the destination medium u A 4 Press the Save soft key to display the save setting menu 19933707707 14 39 23 j 10o Normal Save Stopped J SMSvs 2ZnsA Save eir BOY SOWIE File List Di m File List MM a File Nane Path FDO A File Nang e Il Space 83606 byte zx DL 2106 File Name Size CHAPTS ERTA FDO 1 CHAPTOO3 TIF 38574 1999 07 07 14 59 R U CHAPTOOZ TIF 38574 1999 07 07
219. circuit voltage axis The input coupling method can be chosen from the following Input terminal vertical AC 1 MO control The input signal is sent through a capacitor to the attenuator Circul in the vertical control circuit This method can be used when you just want to observe the amplitude of the alternating current signal eliminating the DC components from the input signal Vertical control circuit Input terminal O DC 1 MQ The input signal is sent directly to the attenuator in the vertical control circuit This method can be used when you want to observe both the DC and AC components of the vertical input signal GND Inputterminal Vertical o control The ground signal not the input signal is connected to the i circuit attenuator in the vertical control circuit This method enables observation of the ground level on the screen DC 500 Input terminal vertical control This is the same as DC 1 MQ described above except the circuit 50 Q input impedance is 50 O Please be aware of the maximum input voltage IM 701410 01E 1 2 Setting the Vertical and Horizontal Axes Probe Attenuation lt Section 5 4 gt A probe is usually used to connect the circuit to be measured to an input terminal Use of a probe provides the following advantages the voltage and current of the circuit to be measured are not disturbed asignal can be input without dis
220. control to Cursor1 Turn the jog shuttle to move Cursor1 Move Cursor2 in a similar fashion If the jog shuttle control is set to both Cursor1 and Cursor2 both cursors are moved Moving the reference cursor 9 10 11 Press the Ref1 Ref2 soft key to set the jog shuttle control to Ref1 Turn the jog shuttle to move Ref1 Move Ref2 in a similar fashion If the jog shuttle control is set to both Ref1 and Ref2 both cursors are moved Setting the reference angle 12 13 Press the Ref Value soft key Turn the jog shuttle to set the reference angle Cursor jump for V Cursor Marker Cursor and Angle Cursor only when the X Y waveform is not displayed Follow stteps 1 3 to set the Type to Vertical Marker or Degree 4 Pressing the Cursor Jump soft key displays a menu used to select the cursor you wish to jump and the jump destination Press the soft key corresponding to the desired jump type and select the cursor to jump and the jump destination Pressing the Jump Exec soft key moves the cursor to the jump destination 1999 07 66 17 13 19 j Nornal Stopped 203032 Cur Bio V q SOkS s Zmsi CURSOR Wane Type Marker Select Se HI M2 M3 Trace Hisis CHL Lin oon Ig Position x 3 00diu Cursor Junp 1781 2500 Loose to Z1 Kaisi 10 00s Note CHi 16 1 Edge CHI F 20 0 Urdiv 5 00 U diu Auto Jump Exec DC Full DC Full cea
221. corresponding to the Selected Record Number will appear brighter than the other waveforms Show Map A list of time stamps You can list the number of the waveform data stored in the acquisition memory and the trigger times One screen displays 75 data points of information You can scroll through the data using the jog shuttle Precautions and Restrictions You cannot use the history function while the acquisition mode is set to Average Displayed history records will be meaningless The history memory function cannot be used in the repetitive sampling mode f you suspend waveform acquisition before the current record has been fully read the record will not be recorded in the history You cannot use the history function while roll mode is selected History records are not lost when waveform acquisition is stopped and then restarted provided that acquisition conditions remain unchanged f you change the acquisition settings history memory is cleared when you restart acquisition using the new settings Ifthe CLEAR TRACE key is pressed during waveform acquisition or after the waveform acquisition is stopped data in the history memory are cleared when the data acquisition is restarted Precautions to be taken when recalling data from the history memory e Acquisition will stop when the history memory menu is displayed It is not possible to recall waveform data from the history memory while acquisition in progress
222. coupling hysteresis and HF rejection The setting also applies to AS B N trigger See page 6 13 When the Window is ON set the window position width trigger coupling and HF rejection The settings are the same as the window trigger See section 6 13 Setting the Window Trigger Note The trigger level hysteresis trigger coupling and HF rejection settings apply to simple trigger and enhanced trigger Setting the window 8 Pressthe Window soft key to select either ON or OFF If OFF is selected triggers are activated on the OR of the channel edge If ON is selected triggers are activated on the OR of the channel s window conditions Setting the hold off 9 Setthe hold off time according to the procedures given in 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time 6 26 IM 701410 01E 6 13 Setting the Window Trigger ENHANCED lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 9 gt Function This function sets up a window trigger for the CH1 to CH4 input signal Trigger condition Width trigger IN The time during the trigger source enters the window is trigger duration OUT The time during the trigger source exits the window is trigger duration ORtrigger IN Trigger is activated when the trigger source enters the window the area between two preset levels OUT Trigger is activated when the trigger source exits the window IN Trigger is activated OR trigger OUT Trigg
223. ction 9 3 The target waveform data exists or the exists and that there is at least one cycle of measured waveform data may not exist waveform within the measurement range If Cycle Statistics is specified the instrument may be configured in a way that fails to detect the cycle 735 The file Item is inappropriate Select Waveform Snap or Measure Section 11 6 11 8 Select Waveform Snap or Measure and 11 9 736 Analyzes data does not exist Execute the analysis 8 29 8 34 Execute the analysis 750 Cannot connect with ftp server Confirm the network settings and connection Chapter 13 751 Has not connect with ftp server yet Confirm the network settings and connection Chapter 13 752 This ftp function in not supported Chapter 13 753 FTP Error Rwd Confirm the network settings and connection Chapter 13 754 FTP Error Cwd Confirm the network settings and connection Chapter 13 755 FTP Error Rm Confirm the network settings and connection Chapter 13 756 FTP Error List Confirm the network settings and connection Chapter 13 757 FTP Error Mkdir Confirm the network settings and connection Chapter 13 15 4 IM 701410 01E 15 2 Error Messages and Corrective Actions Code Message Corrective Action Reference Page 758 FTP Error Rmdir Confirm the network settings and connection Chapter 13 759 FTP Error Get Confirm the network settings and connection Chapter 13 760 FTP Error P
224. cursor measurement value and automated measurement of waveform parameters will show values using the old V div setting even if the V DIV knob is turned IM 701410 01E 5 9 sexy JE UOZHOH pue e9I49A 5 8 Setting V div Setting the V div using the Variable parameter 1 Press one of the keys from CH1 to CH4 to select the channel 2 Press the Next 1 2 soft key 3 Pressthe Variable soft key 4 Turn the jog shuttle to set the V div value 36 06 01 02 33 36 C 20kS s CHIP CHI Stopped 96 E 20kS s Display 3 F J Invert EE lllll lllll OFF pri F A OFF on IB Position f arre 2 Linear Scaling Tras sme MIN LL AD PTT E liil Coupling o F TBAB A ae nche m o cu c 1 0800E 00 Probe aia F joexn B oA lllll 4 lllll 10 1 f 0 0000E 00 Offset EFTA E J Units Ill BURIAL DOE Ill Band Uidth A Define Label 3 w M Illl ed C Next a Offset 2 03 U Trdiv zi EN iz urdiv RectDisp 1kCO Probe 1 1 Acq Mode Nornal e If the V div setting is changed by rotating the V DIV knob the Variable value is set to the modified V div value f Variable is reset with the RESET key the V div setting returns to the value set with the V div knob IM 701410 01E 5 9 Using the Linear Scaling Function Function lt For a descriptio
225. d voltage sensitivity 6 Triggering Explains how to set up and use triggers to control timing of waveform acquisition Includes description of trigger modes trigger types trigger source and trigger level 7 Acquisition and Display Explains acquisition parameters acquisition mode sampling mode record length history and use of overlapping accumulated waveform display 8 Display Explains display format interpolation zoom X Y display graticule and other display related parameters 9 Waveform Analysis Explains cursor based measurements automatic measurements statistical processing mathematical operations and GO NO GO determinations 10 Output of Screen Data Explains how to print screen data to internal printer or to a printer connected through the centronics interface and how to store screen display to the storage medium 11 Data Saves and Loads Explains how to save and reload waveform data and Storage medium settings to floppy disk or external SCSI device Also explains related disk operations including disk formatting file copying and file deletion 12 Rear Panel Input Output Explains external trigger input external clock input trigger output and RGB video output 13 Ethernet Communications Explains saving to a network drive getting files from a Optional floppy disk external SCSI device or PC card optional outputting to a network printer and receiving email transmissions 14 Other Operations Explai
226. d HF rejection 6 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the channel on which to set the window center level Center Press the SELECT key to display the center level menu Turn the jog shuttle to set the center level You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits Pressing the RESET key sets the window center level to 0 V 9 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the channel on which to set the window width 10 Press the SELECT key to display the window width menu 11 Turn the jog shuttle to set the window width You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits Pressing the RESET key resets the value to the initial value oN Setting the trigger coupling and HF rejection 12 The coupling and HF rejection settings also apply to the AB N trigger See page 6 13 6 28 IM 701410 01E 6 14 Setting the TV Trigger ENHANCED lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 9 gt Function This function lets you set a trigger for video signal input into Channel 1 Settings and functions are as follows Broadcasting systems with which the TV trigger can be used NTSC PAL HDTV Selecting the field Number Field 1 Detects a field in which the vertical synchronizing pulse and the line start at the same time 2 Detects a field in which the vertical synchronizing pulse starts 1 2H H horizontal scan time after the line starts X Detects both of the above types of field Selecting
227. d on the data stored in the display memory IM 701410 01E 1 2 Setting the Vertical and Horizontal Axes Offset Voltage lt Section 5 5 gt When observing a voltage riding on top of a predetermined voltage an offset voltage can be applied to eliminate the predetermined voltage so that only the changes in the original signal can be observed with higher voltage sensitivity Normally the offset voltage does not affect the cursor measurement values automated measurement of waveform parameters and computed values However you can turn ON offset to apply offset voltage to them When offset cancel is OFF 1 V div Offset 0 V Position 0 div 1 V div Offset 2 V 500 mV div Offset 2 V When offset cancel is ON Input Coupling Section 5 3 gt When you only want to observe the amplitude of an alternating current signal eliminating the direct current components from the input signal makes observation easier You may also want to check the ground level or observe the input signal waveform with the offset voltage removed In these cases you can change the input coupling setting This will switch the coupling method which determines how the input signal is input to the vertical control
228. d out at the Change the record length 7 1 current record length 852 The operation is not possible when Unload the files 11 17 waveforms are loaded Unload the loaded files from the FILE menu IM 701410 01E 15 5 E uonoedsu pue eoueuojure y Punoouso qnoj 15 2 Error Messages and Corrective Actions Code Message Corrective Action Reference Page 853 Cannot be configured or executed Abort the search 7 14 during the search operation 854 Search pattern does not exist Change the search conditions 8 14 Execute the search 855 Cannot be configured or executed Abort the search 7 14 during the history search operation 856 The record cannot be selected Check the record number using Show Map 7 14 857 History record does not exist History record is not created in the average mode 7 2 repetitive sampling mode or roll mode 7 9 858 Settings cannot be changed or executed Set the history Display Mode to One 7 14 during FFT recalculation Abort the operation by setting the history Display Mode to One 860 Cannot be configured or executed while Set the history Display Mode to One 7 14 updating the history all display Aborted when history display mode is set to One 861 Cannot output color in this format Turn OFF the color Section 10 3 862 Zones cannot be edited in the following cases Display the main window and the target waveform Section 9 12 When the main wi
229. ddition to the error messages listed in this section there are also communication related error messages 0 to 500 912 to 915 These messages are described in the Communication Interface User s Manual IM701410 11E Status Messages Code Message Discription Reference Page 0 Aborted hard copy 10 3 1 Aborted file operation Chapter 11 4 Completed GO NO GO Section 9 11 and 9 12 10 Set to remote mode by communication Press SHIFT CLEAR TRACE to change to commands local mode 11 Local lockout by communication commands To allow key operation release the lockout using communication commands 13 All settings will be initialized Power up with 4 4 the RESET key depressed 21 Completed action on trigger 6 35 22 Executed unload 11 17 11 24 23 Release the Preview mode 10 3 24 Some of the channels are set to 50 O DC input 5 3 To keep the settings press the SELECT key Pressing any other key will change the settings to 1 MQ DC input 25 Aborted the search 7 14 8 14 26 Executed the search but no record was found 7 14 that matched the conditions 27 Executed the search but no record was found 8 14 that matched the pattern 28 Pattern contains points that are between Thr 8 14 Lower and Thr Upper 29 FFT will be performed on all records Abort the operation by setting the history Display Mode to One 30 Aborted the recalculation of the FFT 31 The logic option i
230. display the search method selection menu 4 Press the soft key corresponding to Width to select the search method ick Normal AMS s insAi SEARCH Type Width 2000 04 29 21 01 53z1 Stopped 512 Setup TES Wd 21 Mag x2 4 200ns 1 C1 0 00000U 4 000ns YA C2 0 00000U 8 200ns 1 C3 00000U 0 000diu 21 Position Searched Pattern No Hatch CH 10 1 CH2 10 1 CH3 10 1 CH4 10 1 Width 50 0 U div 50 0 U diuv 50 0 U diu 50 0 U div Auto Exec DC Full DC Full DC Full DC Full T1 lt Pulse lt T2 Setting the Search Criteria 5 When you press the Setup soft key the search criteria settings dialog box is displayed Turn the jog shuttle to select a setting item Press the SELECT key to display the setting menu for the selected item or change the current setting 2000 05 01 20 48 05 po Normal Stopped 16 200MS s ims ij SEARCH Setup Type Level C 194 5 U_ Polarity EJ Hysteresis 7 0 3div Time 9 005us 21 Mag x2 4 200000ns 4 000000ns 8 200000ns 13124 9512Hz Start Point 5 000000div 21 Position 6 000000d iv Searched Pattern No Match CHI 10 1 50 0 Udiv DC Full CH3 10 1 50 0 U di DC Full Width v Auto T1 lt Pulse lt T2 Setting the Type 6 Usethe
231. dit a partial zone or skip to step 22 to quit Editing a Partial Zone 14 Press the Edit soft key to select Part 15 Press the TimeRange1 TimeRange2 soft key to select the right or left cursor 16 Turn the jog shuttle to set the right and left edges of the partial zone 17 Press the Upper Lower soft key to select the direction for setting the zone then use the jog shuttle to create the zone 18 Repeat steps 15 17 to edit the zone 2000 03 04 nae li ink came Stopped IS s i1usMie G N GU Edit Whole NP Upper Louer Time Rangel 1 60diu Time Rangez 1 70diu Store as Zonei Store Exec CHI 10 1 Edge CHI 10 0 Urdiv Normal Quit amp DC Full 9 0 V To TopMenu 19 Press the Store As soft key to open the store as setting menu for the edited zone 20 Press the soft key corresponding to a storage location Zone1 Zone6 to select it 21 Press the Store Exec soft key to save the zone IM 701410 01E 9 41 sisAjeuy u1J0JOAEAA ol 9 12 GO NO GO Determination Using Zones Quit Zone Editing 22 Press the Quit amp To TopMenu soft key to return to the menu in step 3 If you press the Quit amp To TopMenu soft key before pressing the Store Exec soft key the settings made up to that point will be inactive and you will return to the menu in step 3 Editing Existing Zones Edit zones that hav
232. dition The 701930 current probe is supported by products with software ROM version 1 21 or later see section 15 4 Checking the System Condition 1 26 IM 701410 01E 1 6 Other Useful Functions GO NO GO Determination Section 9 11 gt The GO NO GO function is useful when you want to inspect signals and track down abnormal symptoms on a production line making electronic equipment Tow determinations are available with GO NO GO operation using the Measurement of Waveform Parameters and using the zone Applicable to DL7100 with software ROM version 1 21 or later See section 15 4 Checking the System Condition This function detects whether an automatically measured value falls within the specified range and responds accordingly either by sounding the buzzer saving the waveform data to internal memory or disk printing out the screen image option or Sending a mail Ethernet PC Card Interface option Displayed data output functions lt Chapter 10 gt You can use these functions to print the screen image to the optional built in printer an external centronics printer or a network printer to save the image data to the storage medium floppy disk external SCSI device PC Card optional or network drive Ethernet PC Card Interface Optional printer Note The instrument provides a function which enables
233. e 3 9 Failure to do so may result in unstable gain across different frequencies thereby preventing correct measurement Calibration must be performed for each channel fthe object to be measured is connected to the instrument directly without using a probe correct measurement cannot be performed due to the load effect Specifications for the probe 700988 supplied with the instrument after calibration Item Specifications Setting 1 1 Conditions Setting 10 1 Input impedance 10 MO 2 approx 14 pF 1 MQ t1 096 approx 150 pF When used with capacitance this instrument Attenuation ratio 10 1 3 When used with this instrument Frequency band DC to 400 MHz DC to 6 MHz When used with this instrument Rise time 900 ps or less 58 ns or less When used with this instrument Maximum 600 V DC AC peak i input voltage or 424 Vrms Frequency is 100 kHz or lower Connector type BNC BNC Total length 1 5m 1 5m 1 When the probe s attenuation is 1 1 never input voltage exceeding the maximum input voltage of this instrument IM 701410 01E 3 7 esp Buung suonneoaJqd B 3 4 Connecting a Probe When using a probe other than the one supplied with the instrument To measure a signal which contains harmonics of approximately 500 MHz use a probe with a frequency band of 500 MHz or higher Correct measured values cannot be displayed if the probe s attenuation ratio is not 1 z1 10 1 1
234. e Appendix 1 Waveform computation and linear averaging cannot be performed for the following record lengths If 8 M CH model DL7100 4 MW when interleave mode is OFF 8 MW when interleave mode is ON If 16 M CH model DL7200 8 MW when interleave mode is OFF 16 MW when interleave mode is ON Operating Procedure 1 Press the ACQ key 2 Press the Record Length soft key to set the jog shuttle action to Record Length 3 Select the length by turning the jog shuttle Choose 1 k to 8 M or 16 M for the DL7200 1999 07 05 20 58 62 j io Normal Stopped 1 y iMS s insAi ACT CHT 82 0 V x E Record Lengt 16k Mode Normal ley Oui Infinite Inter leave pm ow Repetitive OFF pu ong V 5 080ms 2 000 i 5 H 5 000ns CHI 10 1 CHZ 10 1 Edge CHI Time Base 20 0 Urdiv 6 506 U div SingletN DC Full DC Full 10 2 V nt Ext IM 701410 01E 7 1 Aejdsig pue uonisinboy 7 2 Acquisition Mode Function lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 13 gt You can select any of five acquisition modes as follows The default selection is Normal Normal The instrument writes sample data into acquisition memory without performing special processing Envelope The instrument finds the maximum and minimum sampled values per interval of 400 MS S for the DL7100 1 GS s of 800 MS s interleave mode ON and 1 GS s or 8
235. e Area of a Waveform Delay between channels Delay Setup The time difference between the rising or falling edges of traces waveform or trigger point is called delay between channels Measurement range He l I 1 count N1 count ne Setting example 1 Y o Edge Polarity f rising Mesial line Edge Count N1 1 to 9 1 count Setting example of measurement waveform Edge Polarity falling Edge Count N2 1 to 9 9 12 IM 701410 01E 9 2 Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters If Mode is set to Time or Degree measurements will be made The default setting is OFF Time Display the delay between channels as a time Degree Display the delay between channels as a degree Applicable to DL7100 with software ROM version 1 11 or later See section 15 4 Checking the System Condition Degree Delay s Period s x 360 deg The period is that of a standard waveform Select rising F or falling 4 for the slope of the edge to be detected in Edge Polarity The default setting is rising Setthe number of edges to detect before actually considering it a detection point in Edge Count The range is an integer from 1 to 9 The default setting is 1 The voltage level at the detection point is the mesial point The parameter name when the measured value is displayed is Dly NolQ
236. e ON Interleave mode Interleave Mode Rep OFF Rep ON Rep OFF Rep ON OFF Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample rate record len rate record len rate record len rate record len rate record len rate S s gth word S s gth word S s gth word S s gth word S s gth word S s 2k 1M 2k M 2k 1M 2k M 400 M 1M 800 M 5k 5k 5k 5k 400 M 800 M 10k 10k 10k 10k 400 M 800 M 20k 20 k 20k 20 k 400 M 800 M 50k 50k 50k 50k 400M 800M 100k 100k 100k 100k 400M 800M 200 k 200 k 200 k 200 k 400 M 800 M 500 k 400 M 800 M 1M 400 M 800 M 2M 400 M 800 M 5M 400 M 800 M 400 M 800 M 400 M 800 M 400 M 800 M 400 M 800 M 400 M 800 M 1G Roll mode display SISISISI SISISISISISI SI SI SIFIE SISISISI SISISISISISI SI SI SI TIE SlSISIS SISISISI SISI SI SI SISISIE SISISISI SISI SISISISISI SI SI SISFI E P i i i i Changes to normal mode even when envelope mode has been set SISISISI SISISI SISISISI SI SI SISISI S SI SI SI FEI E SISISISI SISISI SISISISI SISI SISISI SI SI SI SI SFI E 1 For the setting enclosed by the bold line repetitive sampling is active 2 2 MWord model Box average cannot be specified IM 701410 01E App 7 E xipueddy Appendix 1 Relationshi
237. e and terminates Continue Repeats the execution of the Action up to the number of acquisition count specified in ACQ Count until the acquisition is stopped if infinite is specified Number of waveform acquisitions ACQ Count Set the number of waveform acquisitions Infinite Continues until the waveform acquisition is stopped with the START STOP key 1 to 65536 Stops when the specified number of waveforms is acquired Executing Aborting GO NO GO operation The operation starts when the Exec soft key is pressed Waveform acquisition is automatically stopped when the determination is complete To forcibly stop the operation press the START STOP key or press the Abort soft key 9 34 IM 701410 01E 9 11 GO NO GO Operation Using the Measurement of Waveform Parameters Save to File Hard Copy operation Operates according to the settings in the File menu or the Copy menu File name when Action is set to Save to File or Hard Copy The file is saved with AutoName under the File menu or the Copy menu For details see section 10 4 Outputting to Storage Medium or section 11 6 Saving Loading Waveform Data Notes when performing GO NO GO determination The determination results the number of successes and failures are displayed All keys other than the START STOP key and the Abort soft key are disabled during the determination When GO NO GO determinat
238. e axis setting cannot be changed expand the time axis if you want to change the display range For a description of expanding waveforms refer to section 8 8 The trigger delay cannot be set The deskew function cannot be used Itis not possible to set a calibration deskew time The time measured by the cursor measurement or automated measurement function is expressed in the number of pulses of the clock signal No units are displayed 5 14 IM 701410 01E 5 11 Selecting the Timebase Operating Procedure 1 Press the ACQ key 2 Press the Time Base soft key to select Int or Ext 1999 67 63 10 30 41 jj fio Normal Stopped 43 iMS s insAli ACT car 62 0 4 M i E Record Lengt 10k Mode Normal le Count Infinite Inter leave pm ow Rep OFF pry 2 000 V Ls dons i E ENTIS CHI 10 1 CHZ 10 1 Edge CHI Time Base 20 0 Urdiv 0 500 U div Auto DC Full DC Full 7 2 V nt Ext Threshold setting for EXT clock 3 If you have selected use of an external clock you must now set the threshold level This setting is identical to the trigger level setting refer to Section 6 5 Setting the Edge Trigger for the procedure Note that you must set the trigger source to EXT before setting the level IM 701410 01E 5 15 Sexy Je1uozuoH pue e2rnJeA 5 12 Setting T div lt For a description of this f
239. e been previously created 23 n step 5 press the Redraw soft key 24 Repeat steps 6 22 to edit the zones Selecting a Determination Waveform 25 Press the Setup soft key to display the Setup menu 2000 03 02 17 05 53 p Normal ul SkS s 200nsAi G NU G Setup Mode Stopped Mode Condition Zone Zomeis CHD OFF pn po m To EditMenu Zoneztes CH2 Zone3tes CH3 I FF N E IN Zone4 us CH4 FFA N DU IN Zone5tus Mathi PFF N DU I8 1 Zone amp Ces Math2 Logic pu von Sequence Bingle Continue ACQ Count Time Rangel 5 000d iv Action v Buzzer Save to File Hard Copy O Time Range2 5 000d iv CH 10 1 Edge CHI F p 5 00 U div Single Exec DC Full 9 00 U 26 Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Mode in Zone1 27 Press the SELECT key to select On or Off 28 Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the Condition in Zone1 29 Press the SELECT key to select In or Out 30 Set Zone2 Zone6 as necessary Setup Setting the Logic 31 Move the cursor to Logic with the jog shuttle 32 Press the SELECT key to select AND or OR Setting the Sequence 33 Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Sequence 34 Press the SELECT key to select Single or Continue Setting the ACQ
240. e for the DL7100 is 500 MS s or 1 GS s when interleave mode is ON and 1 GS s for the DL7200 or 2 GS s when interleave mode is ON Evenwhen the repetitive sampling is turned OFF there are cases in which the mode automatically changes to the repetitive sampling mode when the T div is changed For the relationship between the T div setting and the sample rate see appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record length 5 16 IM 701410 01E Chapter6 Triggering 6 1 Setting the Trigger Mode lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 10 gt Function Auto mode If the trigger condition is met within the 100 ms timeout period the waveform is updated on each trigger occurrence If the trigger condition is not met after the timeout period elapses the waveform is automatically updated If the time axis setting is in the range in which the display mode is set to roll mode the display is set to roll mode Auto level mode Ifa trigger occurs within the timeout period the waveform is displayed in the same fashion as in the auto mode If a trigger does not occur within the timeout period the center value of the amplitude of the trigger source is detected trigger level is automatically changed to the center value and the trigger is generated to update the displayed waveform The auto level mode is valid only if the trigger is a simple trigger and the trigger source is CH1 to CH4 For al
241. e instrument computes average values for adjacent groups of true sampling data read at 500 MS s and writes the resulting averages into acquisition memory The following drawing illustrates the process eecceo 36 eee 20 A 2 eccce 16 Input signal 1 DL7200 D at 500 MS s S gt V Time axis gt b o Box Averaging data o a o o o o 3 gt o Time axis 2 a Data samples used for averages a Interleave OFF Interleave ON o D 500 MS s 2 points every 2 points of 1 GS s lt 200 MS s 2 points every 2 points of 400 MS s 4 points every 4 points of 800 MS s 100 MS s 4 points every 4 points of 400 MS s 8 points every 8 points of 800 MS s 50 MS s 8 points every 8 points of 400 MS s 16 points every 20 points of 800 MS s 20 MS s 16 points every 20 points of 400 MS s 32 points every 40 points of 800 MS s 10 MS s 32 points every 40 points of 400 MS s 64 points every 80 points of 800 MS s 5 MS s 64 points every 80 points of 400 MS s 128 points every 200 points of 800 MS s 2 MS s 128 points every 200 points of 400 MS s 256 points every 400 points of 800 MS s 1 MS s 256 points every 400 points of 400 MS s 256 points every 800 points of 800 MS s 500 kS s or less 256 points every 800 points of 400 MS s 256 points every 1600 points of 800 MS s Re sampling interval is shifted by the sample rate The maximum number of data points to perform BoxAverage process is 256
242. ebbuL H 6 9 Setting the A Delay B Trigger ENHANCED lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 8 gt Function This function activates a trigger the first time condition B becomes true after condition A becomes true and the specified time elapses Setting Conditions A and B Channel status Select the status of the channel from the following three choices H Above the specified trigger level L Below the specified trigger level X Don t care Condition Enter Trigger is activated when all channels meet the specified status Exit Trigger is activated when at least one channel no longer meets the specified status Delay time 0 to 5 s resolution 1 ns Setting the trigger level Range 8 div within the screen Resolution 0 01 div For example the resolution is 0 02 mV when the V DIV setting is 2 mV div Setting the hysteresis Sets a width to the trigger level so that the trigger is not activated on small changes jN Approximately 0 3 div of hysteresis around the trigger level ZZ Approximately 1 div of hysteresis around the trigger level The value above are estimated values They are not strictly guaranteed Setting the trigger coupling Select from the following list of choices AC Uses a signal that is obtained by removing the DC component from the trigger Source signal as the trigger signal DC Uses the trigger source signal as the trigger signal Turning ON OFF the HF rejection Select 15
243. econd ON g System Conf ig Trigger Gate Overview OFF E 5 000ms 2 000 v 5 00004 eo CHI 10 1 CHZ 10 1 CD Back Light Next 20 0 Udiy 6 506 Urdiu ON 12 DC Full DC Full Brightness IM 701410 01E 3 11 esp Buung suonneoaJqd B 3 7 Connecting the Logic Probe Optional N CAUTION The maximum input voltage is 40 V DC AC peak or 28 Vrms at a frequency of 1 kHz or less Voltage exceeding this limit may cause damage to the logic probe or the instrument When the frequency is above 1 kHz voltages less than this maximum voltage may also cause damage The 8 input lines on each POD have a common ground In addition the ground for the instrument and the ground for each POD are also common Do not connect inputs which differ from the common voltage as doing so may cause damage to the main unit logic probe or to other connected instruments Make sure to turn off the instrument when connecting or removing the 26 pin connector Logic Input Connector Connect the logic probe 700985 to any of the logic probe input connectors 2 connectors indicated POD A through POD D located on the lower left section of the rear panel du Eic About the Logic Probe The logic probe 700985 is a probe for connecting to the logic input connectors of the instrument For connecting to the point of measure
244. ect 1 13 Interpolationh inar terre tege 1 17 8 8 Inverted display seen 1 22 IP AddresSS uite er eee en eene EEEa 13 2 J Jog shuttle i rte eerte epp ex tun 2 1 K Keyboard operation sssseseeeeenenne 4 2 L Label P 8 7 LED SGre c osten tet amended 2 1 LING i2 cnet ertet gd ttc tee e Ed dant Line interpolation linear average Linear Scaling erret 1 20 5 11 Load 11 10 11 11 11 12 11 13 11 14 11 15 11 16 11 17 11 18 11 19 11 20 11 21 Logic l O connectors eseeeneeeneenn 2 1 logic input i LOGIC KEY ordaina aee beer ee 2 2 Logic Probe eese rennen nennen 3 12 Eogic TMG GC xs c ftne Petite e tenet 1 10 6 32 long COPY AEREE 10 3 M MAC Address ceeceecceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeesaeeeeeeaeennenaees 13 17 Mail Function Action Mail Function 13 13 Mail Function Fixed Interval sess 13 11 Main amp ZT iecur wean tenets e de oo ERU 8 12 Main amp Z18 amp Z2 i on Eoo ede E d 8 12 Main amp Z2 s a e eere e ode o UR Eee 8 12 MaIKO eire ote ien ee enda ne eo erdt 9 1 Marker CUISOFS cene nnne rrt tenerent rne n 1 20 MATH Key 52e ei eek 2 3 MAX MIN MEASURE key 3 meten 2 3 Measurement Parameters sse 9 11 Menu Keys sesssssessseeseeeeneneenneee nere remeneennren tenens mesala ze c
245. edem e Cursor JUMP tort edet eee epe tes CURSOR Ky etr eto eee tet e ed Cursor Measurements sseeeeeee GUFISOIS oer pen tt du a c ERE p Oed D Data compression eseeeeeeeeneneeeneennnennnene 11 11 Data searchr aco patere eene te C dade 1 24 IM 701410 01E Index 1 H S Index External Trigger External trigger clock input terminal 2 1 F File Attributes file attributes entrent FIEESKGOy 8 e eterne ders FilGSIZO ECTETUR RENBEON Differentiating serseri rini Differentiation ne ntn tnter etete Display Format ee tre rette e etes Display format DISPLAY RM ati esae hasse qtd Floppy disk drive s 2 1 Display of the Scaling value sssaaa Ee Floppy DISKS o n 11 1 Display position esseeeeennn 2 5 EP 114 Displayed data output functions essssse 1 27 distal DNS G DNS Samar a ute hated alee du 13 3 GO NO GO eseeeeeeeeennnnnennnnnennennnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnn 9 34 Domain Sulle oss te coda sets stie Mi o e UR 13 3 GO NO GO Determination sseee 1 27 Dual coat seb velnt An eR eie 8 1 8 10 GO NO GO key B C PEE ae EE PERC ame SMITH Tl 9 1 GP IB connector ssssssenenennenennnn 2 1 DXSS EE EEEE TEES EOE re 9 1 Grade width 2 a a 8 8 DY EEEE TUI UI URP OT 9 1 Graticule seen 1
246. efer to page 1 4 gt Selectable Timebases The timebase can be selected from the following three types INT Internal clock signal EXT IN Clock signal input to the EXT TRIG IN EXT CLOCK IN TRIG GATE IN terminal When EXT IN is selected Input a clock signal to the EXT TRIG IN EXT CLOCK IN terminal on the rear panel The clock signal must conform to the specifications given below Item Specifications Connector type BNC Maximum permissible input voltage 40 V DC ACpeak or 28 Vrms 10 kHz or less Frequency range 40 Hz to 20 MHz continuous clock only Minimum input level 0 1Vp p Input impedance Approx 1 MO and 15 pF Threshold level 2 V in 5 mV resolution Sampling jitter 1 25 ns or less Minimum pulse width 10 ns or more for both High and Low levels Input terminal EXT CLOCK IN EXT TRIG IN A TRIG GATE IN 40V MAX 1 MO CAUTION If a clock signal exceeding the above maximum permissible input voltage is input to the EXT TRIG IN EXT CLOCK IN TRIG GATE IN terminal damage to the internal circuits of the instrument may result Points to note when sampling using an external clock The clock signal must be continuous No burst signal is allowed Onlyreal time sampling mode is available Envelope mode and Box Average mode cannot be set Display of waveforms is not possible in roll mode No function to divide the clock signal is available Since the tim
247. el 7 Pressing the SELECT key displays a menu used to set the number 8 Turn the jog shuttle to select a number Pressing the ESC key closes the menu 9 Repeat steps 5 to 7 as necessary 8 2 IM 701410 01E 8 2 Setting the Interpolation Method Function lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 17 gt Interpolate Any area along the time axis having less than 500 points per 10 divisions less than 250 points in the Z1 and Z2 window when displaying Main amp Z1 amp Z2 is recognized as an interpolation area If you leave interpolation off these points will appear as discrete dots so that the display will show gaps between dots or vertical lines If you set interpolation on however the DL7100 will connect the points Three interpolation settings are available Sine Interpolates between two dots using a sin x x function Line 4 Interpolates between two dots in a straight line PULSE Draws a horizontal line to a point directly above or below the next data point and then interpolates using two dots so that the end of the horizontal line is connected to the next data point by a vertical line OFF No interpolation Outside the interpolation area If interpolation is set to Sine Line or Pulse the instrument draws lines between points that are aligned vertically Interpolate OFF Sine Line Pulse Within the interpolation area
248. emory per channel while cutting the number of channels in half In particular this mode doubles the maximum settings for history memory sequential store and record length and allows you to set realtime sampling rate to 1 GS s for the DL7100 and 2 GS s with the DL7200 Setting interleave ON however CH2 and CH4 are disabled When using the logic input option POD B cannot be used For details about restrictions on sampling rate and record length while interleave is ON see Appendix 1 Operating Procedure 1 Pressthe ACQ key 2 Pressthe Interleave soft key to select ON or OFF 1999 07 30 20 03 20 j fio Normal Stopped 76 500MS s ZHS divl ACT Record Lengt 10k Mode Normal j fal Count Infinite Inter leave Dn Repetitive m o CHS 10 1 Edge CH F ine Base 16 6 Udiy 26 6 Urdiv Auto DC Full BC Full 0 4 V i Ext IM 701410 01E 7 9 Aejdsig pue uonisinboy 7 6 Setting Repetitive Sampling Mode ON OFF lt For a description of this function refer to pages 1 6 and 1 15 gt Function You can select whether or not to use repetitive sampling However if the record length on the DL7200 is set to 16 MWord you cannot turn ON repetitive sampling mode If the repetitive sampling mode is ON the sampling rate for certain T div settings is set to 1 GS s or above on the DL7100 2 GS s or above when the
249. en nennen 6 8 Generating Triggers on the Power Signal SIMPLE seen 6 10 Setting the AAEB n Trigger ENHANCED essen 6 11 Setting the A Delay B Trigger ENHANCED esseseeneneeeennnnnnenenennnnes 6 14 Setting the Pattern Trigger ENHANCED eseeeeeneennen nennen 6 17 Setting the Width Pulse Time Pulse Time T1 lt Pulse lt T2 Time Out Trigger ENFIANGEBD eio Re reete testet ob Deere e o eet ddp eae 6 21 Setting the OR Triggers uc etre Ret m terr er ineo eevee cose 6 25 Setting the Window Trigger ENHANCED seen 6 27 Setting the TV Trigger ENHANCED esses 6 29 Setting the Logic Trigger ENHANCED Optional eee 6 32 Setting the Action On Trigger sesessssesesseeeeeeeeneenneee nennen nennen nennen 6 35 Chapter 7 Acquisition and Display 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 7 5 7 6 7 7 7 8 7 9 Setting the Record Length sessssssssssseseeeeneeneee nennen nennen nennen 7 1 Acquisition MOCO rr rm ep uH RR 7 2 Using Sequential Store Function essen nnne nennen 7 5 Box Average Mode ettet ihe des p nit tete iii deser 7 7 Using interleave Mode coim tatem dee cr tto eter ee 7 9 Setting Repetitive Sampling Mode ON OFF sssesseseeeeeeeeeeeenenenenenes 7 10 Using the History Memory sess nnne mnn enne nnne nnn 7 12 Search
250. en the time axis setting sample rate and record length Changing the time axis causes corresponding changes in the sampling rate and the acquisition record length For more detailed information refer to Appendix 1 suonoung IM 701410 01E 1 2 Setting the Vertical and Horizontal Axes Relationship between time axis setting and sampling mode The sampling method sampling mode for an input signal changes according to the time axis setting as described hereafter But note that the time axis range over which this feature is actually available will vary according to the maximum displayable record length as shown in Appendix 1 Real time sampling mode Changing the time axis causes a corresponding change in the sampling rate The maximum sampling rate for the DL7100 is 1 GS s or 500 MS s if interleave mode is OFF For details of interleave mode refer to section 1 4 and 2 GS s for the DL7200 or 1 GS s if interleave mode is OFF The input signal is sampled sequentially and data is stored in the acquisition memory In this mode the waveform can only be displayed correctly at frequencies up to half the sample rate due to Nyquist s theorem The sample rate is expressed in S s number of samples per second Thus this mode is suitable for observation of a waveform which fluctuates more slowly than the sample rate If the sample rate is higher than the frequency of the input signal high frequency components will be lost In th
251. ending Screen Image Data to a Network Printer 10 Forthe remaining procedures please refer to 10 3 Outputting Screen Image to g an External Printer Connector However when NetPrint is selected Post Script is added to the Format item jok Normal COPY 200kS s 5ns i Copy to is COPY Copy to Printer File l Net Print Format Centronics TIFF ES Coior File Net Print OFF L Comment Compress ion pm on L File List L Edge CHI Auto Post Script 0 10 U File Nane aL Note Before working with this function enter the TCP IP settings as described in Configuring the Ethernet Interface You can output to any TCP IP compatible printer This function can not be used in conjunction with FTP server function or File operation The Ethernet communication function and the GP IB function cannot be used simultaneously 13 10 IM 701410 01E 13 6 Using the Mail Function Fixed Interval Function lt For a description of this function refter to page 1 28 gt You can transmit DL7100 DL7200 status information to a specified email address at periodic intervals via Ethernet Time of Transmission Set the time at which a transmission will be sent Transmission Interval Off 1
252. ent Note Provides information that is important for proper operation of the instrument Titles Used for Descriptions of Operations The following titles are used in chapters 3 to 14 to distinguish instruction from descriptions Function Describes settings and restrictions relating to the operation A detailed description of the function is not provided For a detailed description of the function refer to Chapter 1 Operating Procedure Carry out steps in the order shown The operating procedures are given with the assumption that you are not familiar with the operation Thus it may not be necessary to carry out all the steps when changing settings viii IM 701410 01E Contents Checking the Contents of the Package sss nennen nennen nene ns ii Safety Precautions eo etti cede o ed tdt teta dud tet ted V How to Use this Manual uoc e ebd i ess vii Chapter 1 Functions 1 1 Block Diagtrar a a e Ree Dent eee aeger i die tes fene 1 1 1 2 Setting the Vertical and Horizontal Axes sssssssssesseeeeeneneneeennenennnenn 1 2 1 3 Setting a Triggers iom ot teet eee dtu bee eet e eee tee 1 7 1 4 Setting the Acquisition and Display Conditions eeee 1 13 1 5 X Analyzing the Waveform seessssessseseeeeeeeneeenneen enne nnne nennen nnne 1 20 1 6 Other Useful Functions ooi teet e a cole enne de re Pe FOE E ER de 1 26 Chapter 2 Name and Use of Each Par
253. ep 4 5 Move the cursor to the IP Address field with the jog shuttle and press the SELECT key to display the settings menu 6 Enter the IP address values from 0 to 255 using the jog shuttle IM 701410 01E 13 3 jeuond o suoneoiunuuuio 19uJ9u13 Ey 13 2 Configuring the Ethernet Interface TCP IP Setting the Subnet Mask Set the subnet mask if you turned DHCP OFF in step 4 7 Move the cursor to the Net Mask field using the jog shuttle and press the SELECT key to display the settings menu 8 Enterthe subnet mask address values from 0 to 255 using the jog shuttle Setting the Default Gateway Set the default gateway if you turned DHCP OFF in step 4 9 Move the cursor to the Gate Way field with the jog shuttle and press the SELECT key to display the settings menu 10 Enter the default gateway address values from 0 to 255 using the jog shuttle Setting the DNS 11 Move the cursor to DNS by turning the jog shuttle 12 Press the SELECT key to display the DNS setting menu 13 Press the SELECT key to set the DNS to ON OFF or AUTO AUTO available only when DHCP is ON DNS is set to AUTO the domain name and DNS server name are automatically set by restarting the instrument If DNS is set to ON the domain name DNS server name and domain suffix are displayed If DNS is set to OFF check the network cable connection and restart the DL7100 DL7200 2000 07 13 18 20 14 j fio Normal Stopped 118
254. epetitive sampling mode The oscillation frequency of the startup oscillator for the pulse width trigger Points for attention Always allow the instrument to warm up for at least 30 minutes after the power is turned ON before starting calibration If calibration is performed immediately after the power is turned ON the calibration may be inaccurate due to drift caused by fluctuation in the temperature of the instrument Calibration must be performed when the temperature of the instrument is stable and is between 5 C and 40 C preferably at 23 C 2 C When performing calibration remove the input signals Otherwise proper calibration may not result Note The above calibration is performed automatically when power is turned ON Ifthe V div knob has been turned perform calibration for all parameters except the time axis for repetitive sampling mode Auto Calibration AUTO Cal After turning ON the power when the T div setting is changed or when waveform acquisition is started calibration is performed automatically after the times shown below elapse After 3 minutes After 10 minutes After 30 minutes Once every hour If DL7100 is auto calibrated while input takes place it is recommended that you disconnect the input and then repeat calibration Deskew Corrects the CH1 to CH4 POD A and POD B delays Deskew Time setting range The correction time is set within the following range 100 ns to 100 ns IM 701410
255. eps 6 to 15 to set Zone1 to Zone4 Setting the logic 17 Press the Logic soft key to select AND or OR 7 16 IM 701410 01E 7 8 Searching the Historical Data Using Zone History Search Function Executing the search 18 Press the Search Exec soft key to execute the search Displaying the waveforms that are found 19 Press the ESC key to return to the HISTORY menu Display the waveform according to the procedures given on page 7 13 Show Map displays a list of waveforms that are found Resetting the search results 20 Turn OFF the Search Mode in the HISTORY menu or turn OFF Zone 1 to Zone 4 and execute the search to reset the search results IM 701410 01E Aejdsig pue uonisinboy 7 9 Searching the Historical Data Using Parameter History Search Function lt For a description of this function refer page 1 24 gt Function Search for waveforms from the history memory function and display only the waveforms that fulfill specified conditions of particular parameters Applicable to the DL7100 with software ROM version 1 21 or later See section 15 4 Checking the System Condition Search Criterion You can store various kinds of search criteria in Param1 Param4 Within those four search criteria you can specify the channel to be searched the search conditions and the searching range Condition IN Search for a waveform entering the specified range of the specified parameter OUT
256. er is activated OR trigger T Width Window Width Window Center Center l Trigger is activated zr OR trigger Trigger duration Width trigger Trigger duration Width trigger Window setting Define the window by its center level and width Center setting range Anywhere within the 8 screen divisions in resolution of 0 01 div Example If the scale is 1 V div resolution is 0 01 V Width setting range Up to 4 div from center in resolution of 0 02 div Example If the scale is 1 V div resolution is 0 02 V Note If you set the window so that the top or bottom is off the screen the trigger will occur at the level for the corresponding screen edge the level at 4 divisions from screen center rather than at the missing top or bottom Therefore it is recommended not to excede 4 div when setting the window Setting the trigger coupling Select from the following list of choices AC Uses a signal that is obtained by removing the DC component from the trigger Source signal as the trigger signal DC Uses the trigger source signal as the trigger signal Turning ON OFF the HF rejection Select 15 kHz or 20 MHz when you wish to use a signal source that is obtained by removing the high frequency components frequency components greater than or equal to approximately 15 kHz or 20 MHz from the trigger signal as the trigger source Setting the hold off See section 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time I
257. er of channel number regardless of whether ON or OFF User Arbitrarily assign the channels to the split screens regardless of wether or nor the channel display is turn ON Graticule Section 8 3 Use this feature to select use of grid frame or cross graticule Scale values Section 8 4 The values at right and left ends of the horizontal axis and the upper and lower limits scale values of the vertical axis of each channel can be displayed Waveform labels Section 8 5 You can assign an arbitrary label up to 8 characters to each waveform Trigger mark 1933 07 12 20 50 53 joe Normal tol Z00MS s 5Hs di DISPLAY Waveform label p 55 V Format ea A EOIN ATA Eo TYAN VS A T Th Selects use of Interpolation 2 waveform windows P a E a T a E Sim y Scale Graticule values B ETE uu 25 06 V 1 E H Scale Ualue i um tue a O OFF BR i i Trace Label l 3 OFF pu H 1 I Accumulate i i OFF l 25 0008 20 00 v H s d bs notus CH 10 1 I Edge CHi 20 0 U div 5 00 U div Auto Next DC Full DC Full 9 2 V ie IM 701410 01E 1 4 Setting the Acquisition and Display Conditions Display Interpolation lt Section 8 2 gt This feature selects the type of interpolation applied in areas where there are less than 500 sample points Less than 250 points in the zoom window when zooming on the waveform using Ma
258. er to remove the fuse holder 4 Remove the burned out fuse from the tip of the fuse holder 5 Placea new fuse in the fuse holder and place the fuse holder back in its original position 15 12 IM 701410 01E 15 6 Recommended Replacement Parts The three year warranty applies only to the main unit of the instrument starting from the day of delivery and does not cover any other items such as expendable items items which wear out Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer for replacement parts Parts Name Limited Life Built in printer Under normal usage 120 rolls of paper part No B9850NX LCD back light Approx 25000 hours when used continuously The following parts are wear out parts We recommend you replace them periodically as indicated below Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer for replacement parts Parts Name Recommended Replacement Period Cooling fan 3 years Backup battery Litium Battery 5 years E uonoedsu pue eoueuojure y Punoouso qnou IM 701410 01E 15 13 Chapter 16 Specification 16 1 Input Section Item Specifications Number of input channels 4 CH1 to CH4 Input coupling settings AC 1 MQ DC 1 MQ DC 50 Q GND Input connector BNC Input impedance 1 MO 1 0 approx 20 pF 50 Q 11 096 V SWR 1 4 or less DC to 500 MHz Voltage axis sensitivity setting 1 MO input 2 mV div to 10 V div 1 2 5 steps 50 Q input 2 mV div to 1 V div 1 2 5 step
259. eraging mode T div setting that has been changed after waveform acquisition Trigger level Display format 1 2 3 4 and 6 windows are possible see page 8 1 Ground level Probe attenuation V div The V div setting after the data are acquired are indicated inside the parentheses input coupling and bandwidth limit settings Soft key menu Trigger level trigger mode trigger type and trigger source settings Note In some cases up to 0 02 of the total number of pixels of the LCD can be defective IM 701410 01E 2 5 Chapter 3 Precations During Use 3 1 Precautions During Use Safety Precautions When you are using this instrument read the Safety Precautions given on page v thoroughly as well as the following points Do not remove the cover from the instrument Some parts of the instrument use high voltages which are extremely dangerous When the instrument needs internal inspection or adjustment contact your dealer or nearest YOKOGAWA representative as listed on the back cover of this manual In case of irregularity If you notice smoke or unusual odors coming from the instrument immediately turn OFF the power and unplug the power cord If such an irregularity occurs contact your dealer or the nearest YOKOGAWA representative as listed on the back cover of this manual Power cord Nothing should be placed on the power cord also it should be kept away from any heat sources When unplugging the power cord
260. erive a time series of the waveform variation The drawings below illustrate how stored data can be displayed assuming sequential storage of 100 waveforms Display example in case count 100 times Displaying all waveforms Displaying newest waveform Displaying oldest waveform ALL Selected Record No 0 Selected Record No 99 fe f A f f p VVV Sampling Mode lt Section 7 6 gt As explained earlier in Relationship between the time axis setting and sampling mode page 1 6 data sampling can be performed either in real time or in repetitive sampling mode depending on the time axis and record length The available time axis range under repetitive mode varies according to the acquisition settings For details refer to Appendix 1 Accumulated Waveform Display lt Section 8 6 gt This mode holds each waveform on the screen for a time that is longer than the update cycle so that multiple waveforms are overlapped The waveform age can be identified by color The following two modes are available Persist Overlaps the display of waveforms using the display color of each channel e Color Overlaps the display of waveforms using 8 colors which signify the frequency of occurrence of the data values This function is useful when you want to observe jitters and temporary turbulence in waveforms IM 701410 01E suonoung 1 4 Setting the Acquisition and Display
261. escription of this function refer to page 1 27 gt Waveform parameters that can be determined using GO NO GO operation Item This function is applicable to all of the waveform parameters 27 items Up to 4 types of parameters can be determined simultaneously Mode OFF Does not perform GO NO GO determination ON Performs GO NO GO determination Upper and lower limits of parameters Upper Lower The upper and lower limits depends on the parameters They can be set in the range 9 9999E 30 to 9 9999E 430 Setting the Condition IN When the value is inside the upper and lower limits OUT When the value is outside the upper or lower limits Setting the Logic AND Executes the Action when all parameter conditions 1 to 4 types are met OR Executes the Action when any one of the parameter conditions 1 to 4 types is met Action to take when the condition is met not met Set Action Buzzer Sounds the buzzer Save to File Saves the waveform data to the storage medium FD SCSI and so on specified in the FILE menu Hard copy Outputs the screen image data to the destination Printer Centronics File Net Print Ethernet PC Card interface optional specified by Copy to in the Copy setting menu Send Mail Sends a mail Ethernet PC Card Interface optional For details see section 13 7 Using the Mail Function Action Mail Function Number of Actions Sequence Single Executes the Action onc
262. ess the SELECT key to select the mail interval If Interval is selected OFF you can not send a mail Move the cursor to Mail Test with the jog shuttle then press the SELECT key to send a test transmission to the specified mail recipient CHI 10 1 5 00 Urdiv DC Full Edge CHI Auto 7 50 V The sender address of the mail is set to the same address as the specified recepient address The most recent items of the error history appear at the top Before using this function refer to 13 2 Configuring the Ethernet Interface TCP IP and enter the TCP IP settings If you set Interval to OFF in the Mail Base Time setting e mail messages cannot be sent The Ethernet communication function and the GP IB function cannot be used simultaneously The mail function is an SMTP client function Mail can be sent or forwarded but not received 13 12 IM 701410 01E 13 7 Using the Mail Function Action Mail Function Function lt For a description of this function refter to page 1 28 gt You can have reports with time and other information sent by email as the result of a GO NO GO action trigger Transmitted Information Acquisition status Start Stop acquisition count Trigger time GO NO GO Success Fail information only when GO NO GO is used Main cause of failure only when GO NO GO is used Me
263. essthe Type soft key to display the cursor type menu 3 Pressthe soft key corresponding to the desired cursor type to select the cursor 9 4 IM 701410 01E 9 1 Measuring Waveforms Using Cursors When the X Y waveform When the X Y waveform is not displayed is displayed CURSOR Type ur IIL Horizontal Vertical Marker For H Horizontal cursors when the X Y waveform is not displayed Selecting the waveform to be measured Refer to steps 1 3 to set the Type to Horizontal 4 Pressing the Trace soft key displays the waveform menu 5 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired waveform ick Normal ick Normal Z00kS s SnsAis CURSOR ZO00kS s Snsdi CURSOR m TUPE Type Horizontal Horizontal Trace CH1 B Cursori i 3 00diu Cursor2 3 060d iv Edge CHi F Auto 0 10 U For H Horizontal Cursors when the X Y waveform is displayed Selecting the waveform to be measured Refer to steps 1 3 to set the Type to Horizontal 4 Press the Trace soft key to select the waveform to be measured 5 Proceed to step 6 ick Normal 200kS s Smsflis CURSOR i Tupe Horizontal Trace xyz Cursori 3 00div M Cursor2 3 006 iv Edge CHT F Auto
264. et the V div value 11 Prees the appropriate soft key to select Offset then turn the jog shuttle to set the Offset value 12 In a similar fashion set the Trigger Level Executing the preset 13 Press the Exec soft key to execute the preset IM 701410 01E 5 7 5 7 Setting the Bandwidth lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 3 gt Function Use this function to remove high frequency components 20 MHz or more or 100 MHz or more from the input signal The bandwidth is set for each channel Bandwidth Two frequency bandwidths 20 MHz and 100 MHZ are available The following figure shows how the bandwidth affects the frequency characteristics When Full is selected the bandwidth is 500 MHz 50 Q input or 400 MHz 1 MQ input 3 dB Approx 20 MHz Approx 100 MHz FULL 500 MHz for 50 Q input 400 MHz for 1 MQ input Operating Procedure 1 Press one of the keys from CH1 to CH4 to select the channel 2 Pressthe Bandwidth soft key to display the bandwidth menu 3 Press a soft key corresponding to 20 MHz 100 MHz or Full to select the bandwidth 4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 as necessary to set other channels 1999 67 63 10 30 41 jt Nornal Stopped CT CH1 1MS s insi CHI Display Display GAN l ll orr N DFF pu Positi
265. eters on the waveform that is acquired using the history memory function and performs statistical processing Statistical processing is performed starting with the oldest waveform IM 701410 01E 1 21 suonoung 1 5 Analyzing the Waveform Waveform Math Chapter 9 gt Addition subtraction and multiplication Section 9 4 Addition subtraction and multiplication can be performed between CH1 and CH1 to CH4 CH2 and CH1 to CH4 CH3 and CH1 to CH4 or Math1 and CH4 and CH1 to CH4 or Math1 The result is displayed as waveform Math1 or Math2 Addition and subtraction are useful for comparing signals with the standard signal checking the signal logic and comparing signal phases Multiplication is useful for checking power signals by applying voltage and current signals Addition Subtraction Multiplication computed waveform computed waveform computed waveform Eri PET eT tT HHHPH Binarization Section 9 5 Converts the selected waveform into a binarized waveform All voltages below the threshold become 0 while voltages above the threshold become 1 This operation is available for CH1 to CH4 and the Math1 waveform Inverted display Section 9 6 By multiplying the measured data by 1 the waveforms are displayed with the voltage axis inverted This operation can be performed
266. etthe lower limit in a similar fashion Setting the unit 16 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Unit 17 Using the keyboard that appears when the SELECT key is pressed enter the unit using four characters or less Smoothing 18 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Smoothing 19 Press the SELECT key to select ON or OFF Note For details regarding smoothing see section 9 9 Smoothing Entering Labels Applicable to DL7100 with software ROM version 1 11 or later See section 15 4 Checking the System Condition 20 Press the Math1 Label soft key to display the keyboard See 8 5 Setting Waveform Labels for information about displaying labels Set Math2 in a similar manner as necessary IM 701410 01E 9 27 sisAjeuy u1J0JOAEAA ol 9 7 Differentiating and Integrating Waveforms lt For a discription of this function refer to page 1 22 gt Function Waveforms to be differentiated or integrated CH1 to CH4 and Math1 waveforms can be differentiated or integrated Scaling Set the upper and lower limits on computations Auto The upper and lower limits are set according to the computed result Manual The upper and lower limits can be set arbitrarily The range is 9 9999E 30 to 9 9999E 30 Units Units can be set arbitrarily using up to four characters The specified characters are reflected in the scale values Smoothing See section 9 9 Smoothing Maximum
267. ey can be pressed twice to turn the channels ON or OFF 1999 67 63 10 30 41 jt fio Normal 3 iMS s insAli CHI E M T f E Display Stopped r DFF pry Id Position 0 00diu Coupling DCiMo Probe 10 1 Offset 0 0 y Bandwidth Full LS o00ns 2 000 V E B d ENTUM CHI 10 1 CHZ 10 1 Edge CHI 20 0 Urdiv 0 500 Urdiv Auto Next DC Full DC Full EAE 12 IM 701410 01E 5 1 sexy Je1uozuoH pue e2rnJeA 5 2 Setting the Vertical Position of a Waveform Function Range of movement lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 4 The vertical position can be moved in the range between 4 div from the center position in the waveform display frame Setting resolution 0 01 div Confirming the vertical position For input waveforms and computed waveforms the ground level and vertical position are marked on the left of the waveform display frame 500 mV div Offset 1 V Offset Cancel OFF Position 0 div Ground level mark Vertical position mark Note handled as overflow data The data which go out of the waveform display frame from moving the vertical position are If the display waveform goes out of the waveform display frame from moving the vertical position during the waveform acquisition is starting a chopped waveform is d
268. for saving loading normal waveform data For explanation and procedures see section 11 6 Saving Loading Waveform Data Clearing the waveform The loaded snap shot waveform is cleared when unload initialize or auto setup is performed Note This function can not be used in conjunction with FTP server function FTP client function or LPR client function Operating Procedure 1 Pressthe FILE key 2 Pressing the File Item soft key displays the file item setting menu 3 Press the soft key corresponding to Snap Normal FILE SHS s ZnsAi File Item FILE i Setup Waveform Setup L CFTE 1 File Item Snap Snap Save Measure Save iu Unload L Load Inage 114000 6us Edge CHI F Auto Utility 7 2 U Utility Utility 11 22 IM 701410 01E 11 8 Saving Snap Shot Waveforms Saving snap shot waveforms Selecting the destination medium directory The procedures are the same as steps 13 to 17 in section 11 6 Saving Loading Waveform Data Setting the file name comment The procedures are the same as steps 18 to 27 in section 11 6 Saving Loading Waveform Data Saving the file 4 Press the Save Exec soft key to save the file to the directory indicated in Path2 The name of the
269. form parameters 13 Press the Fit Measure Range to Z1 or Fit Measure Range to Z2 soft key depending on the display format of the zoom waveform to set the range of the automated measurement of waveform parameters to the zoom range of Z1 or Z2 respectively IM 701410 01E 8 13 8 9 Search Data Using Search and Zoom Function lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 24 gt Function When the data acquisition is stopped a section of the waveform can be searched and displayed expanded Search method Type The following six search methods are available Edge Searches by counting the number of times the waveform goes above rising or below falling a specified level from the starting point Serial pattern Searches sections that have the same waveform pattern High Low Don t care as the specified pattern Parallel Pattern Search using a previously set pattern in CH1 CH4 Math1 Math2 PodA or PodB Search using the pattern of each bit in PodA and PodB Applicable to DL7100 with software ROM version 1 21 or later See section 15 4 Checking the System Condition Pulse Width Search a specific part of the currently displayed waveform From the search start position search for pulses which fulfill certain conditions whose durations are shorter or longer than a previously specified length of time The searched part of the waveform is expanded by a previously set zoom factor and displayed in
270. from the AC outlet never pull the cord itself Always hold the plug and pull it If the power cord is damaged contact your dealer Refer to page ii for the part number to use when placing an order General Handling Precautions Observe the following precautions when handling the instrument Never place anything on top of the instrument Never place other equipment or objects containing water on top of the instrument otherwise a breakdown may occur Do not cause shock to the input connectors or probes Shock to the input connectors or probes may turn into electrical noise and enter the instrument via the signal lines Do not damage the LCD screen Since the LCD screen is very vulnerable and can be easily scratched do not allow any sharp objects near it Also it should not be exposed to vibrations and shocks When the instrument is not going to be used for a long period unplug the power cord from the AC outlet IM 701410 01E esp Buung suonneoaJqd B 3 1 Precautions During Use When carrying the instrument First remove the power cord and other cables When carrying the instrument hold the handle located on the side panel on the right when facing the front of the instrument see below Cleaning When cleaning the case or the operation panel unplug the power cord from the plug first then wipe with a dry soft clean cloth Do not use volatile chemicals such as benzene or thinner for cleaning as this may lead t
271. function or LPR client function IM 701410 01E 11 31 uinipo y Buip1o28H oui speo pue saAes epad E 11 12 Copying Files Operating Procedure Press the FILE key Press the Utility soft key to display the utility setting menu and the file list dialog box Press the Function soft key to display the file function menu Press the soft key corresponding to Copy 1933 07 0 20 53 50 Jj Stopped 49 E cT SoU lt lt Maint Ik gt gt ik Nornal 50kS s 2ns FILE Utility File Item Function Setup L Am Am d Copy File List Path FDO Space 1375232 byte File Nane Size Set Reset l F 1 CHAPTOO1 TIF CHAPTO86 TIF 38574 1999707707 22 03 R U 38574 1999707707 22 02 R U Save Property L Filter SET ES Load Attr 0 0 00 V CHI 10 1 CHZ 10 1 20 0 Urdiv 5 60 U diu DC Full DC Full Utility Dest Dir Selecting the source medium directory 5 The procedures are the same as steps 13 to 17 in section 11 6 Saving Loading Waveform Data Selecting the source file one at a time 6 7 Turn the jog shuttle to select a file Press the Set Reset soft key If an mark is displayed to the left of the file name in the File List dialog box the file will be copied If you press the Set Reset soft key
272. g is 2 mV div Setting the hysteresis Sets a width to the trigger level so that the trigger is not activated on small changes JN Approximately 0 3 div of hysteresis around the trigger level ZZ Approximately 1 div of hysteresis around the trigger level The value above are estimated values They are not strictly guaranteed Setting the trigger coupling Select from the following list of choices AC Uses a signal that is obtained by removing the DC component from the trigger source signal as the trigger signal DC Uses the trigger source signal as the trigger signal Turning ON OFF the HF rejection Select 15 kHz or 20 MHz when you wish to use a signal source that is obtained by removing the high frequency components frequency components greater than or equal to approximately 15 kHz or 20 MHz from the trigger signal as the trigger source Setting the hold off See section 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time 6 22 IM 701410 01E 6 11 Setting the Width Pulse lt Time Pulse gt Time T1 lt Pulse lt T2 Time Out Trigger ENHANCED Operating Procedure Setting the trigger type 1 Press the ENHANCED key 2 Pressing the Type soft key to display the trigger type menu 3 Pressthe Width soft key 1999 67 65 13 06 00 jj Nornal 1 E iMS s insAli ENHANCED Stopped cH Tupe GAN lt lt Maine LOk gt gt Width Width Type Pulse lt Tine M Set Pattern H Levels Co
273. h FDO Space 89600 byte File Nane Size g F 1 CHAPTO03 TIF CHAPTO82 TIF CHAPT G1 TIF CHAPTGG6 TIF CHAPTOOO HDR CHAPTOOO UUF 10080 dus 20 00 V 38574 38574 38574 38574 2924 1208849 1999 07 07 14 59 1999 67 07 14 53 1999707707 14 52 1999 07 07 14 56 1993 07 07 13 19 1999 67 07 13 19 10000 Ou File Nane CHAPTS Property Filter SET 0 Uzdiv 10 1 CHZ 10 1 5 00 U diu Full DC Full Edge CHI Auto Save Exec 70 4 M Setup zm B9 L 11 Turn the jog shuttle to select Auto Naming 12 Press the SELECT key to select ON or OFF 13 Turn the jog shuttle to select File Name 14 Press the SELECT key to display a keyboard 15 Enter the file name according to the procedures given in page 4 2 16 Turn the jog shuttle to select Comment 17 Press the SELECT key to display a keyboard 18 Enter the file comment according to the procedures given in page 4 2 19 Press the ESC key to close the file name setting dialog box 11 20 IM 701410 01E 11 7 Saving Loading Setup Data Saving the file 20 Press the Save Exec soft key to save the file to the directory indicated in Path2 The name of the Save Exec soft key changes to Abort Canceling the saving operation 21 Press the Abort soft key to cancel the s
274. han 3 m 16 12 IM 701410 01E 16 16 External Dimensions Dimensions mm Rear View al T 279 5 DLZz x iJ am i EI E1 Em Fi L E CA O 2 2 2 gt 000 E N Unless othewise specified tolerance is 3 Toleranceis always 0 3mm when the dimension is under 10mm E suoneoyioodg IM 701410 01E 16 13 Appendix Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length Record length 1 k words DL7100 Rep Repetitive sampling mode When Mode other than Envelope Mode is Active When Envelope Mode is Active Interleave mode OFF Interleave Mode ON Interleave mode Interleave Mode Rep OFF Rep ON Rep OFF Rep ON OFF Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample rate record len rate record len rate record len rate record len rate record len rate S s gth word S s gth word S s gth word S s gth word S s gth word S s It is not possible to set these T div 20 50 20 1k 50 1k 1k 1k 1k 1k 1k 1k 1k 1k 1k 1k 1k 1k 1k 1k 1k 1k 1k 1k 1k 1k 1k 1k Roll mode display
275. hase can be shifted in the following range Time value between record length 2 to record length 2 resolution 1 sample rate The sample rate varies depending on the record length or T div setting When the record length is 16 Mword the phase cannot be shifted For details see Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record length Notes when shifting the phase If you change the T div setting after shifting the phase the shift on the screen does not change but the specified time value change in accordance with the T div setting Record length Maximum record length is 8 Mword Operating Procedure Setting the computation mode 1 Press the SHIFT key to set the keys in the shifted condition Functions marked in purple on the panel become active Press the MATH key Press the Mode soft key to select ON or OFF Press the soft key corresponding to the channel whose phase is to be shifted Turn the jog shuttle to set the shifted time e ie 9x 1999 07 66 18 53 42 j tk Nornal Stopped 14332 50kS s 2ns li PHASE CT SUD V B Mode m i oseeeee 10 00pe Edge CHI Lin tons 2BXb v CHI 10 1 CHZ 10 1 20 0 U div 5 00 U div Auto DC Full DC Full TEN IM 701410 01E 9 33 s s jeuy WAOJOAR ol 9 11 GO NO GO Operation Using the Measurement Function of Waveform Parameters lt For a d
276. hat correlates the host domain name to the IP address Given AAA BBBBB co jp AAA is the hostname and BBBBB co jp is the domain name The host domain name can be used instead of the IP address when accessing the network In the case of the DL7100 DL7200 you can also specify the host by name instead of by IP address when using the network drive and printer functions Set the domain name the DNS server address default is 0 0 0 0 and the domain suffix In DHCP environments these settings can be configured automatically 13 2 IM 701410 01E 13 2 Configuring the Ethernet Interface TCP IP DNS Server Up to two DNS servers can be specified primary and secondary If the primary server is down the secondary server is used to search the host name domain name and IP address Domain Suffix If the IP address corresponding to the domain name described in the previous paragraph is not found on the DNS server then there is a system to allow addresses to be searched under a different domain name Set this other domain name as a domain suffix Up to two domain suffixes can be specified Domain Suffix1 primary and Domain Suffix2 secondary Note Tochange this menu setting you must restart the DL7100 DL7200 When the Ethernet cable is not connected if you turn ON the power to the DL7100 DL7200 while DCHP is ON there is a possiblity of malfunction in the communications or file functions Turn DHCP OFF and restar
277. hat has bad sectors access error 604 Media failure may occur in which case no more data can be written When you are using a medium for the first time or if the medium can no longer be read do a Normal format If you want to format a disk that you have been using before do a Quick format This function can not be used in conjunction with FTP server function FTP client function or LPR client function IM 701410 01E uinipojy Buip1o28H oui speo pue saAes ejeq E 11 4 Formatting the Recording Medium Operating Procedure 1 Pressthe FILE key 2 Pressthe Utility soft key to display the utility setting menu and the file list dialog box 1999 07 67 10 00 16 jj tk Nornal FILE Stopped 4 1 50kS s 2msa Utility File Item e BRD SCmumiko Function lllll Setup Delete File List Path FDO Space 1337344 byte Set Reset File Nane Size ras FDO 1 CHAPTOO0 BMP 38462 1999 07 07 11 14 R U All Reset CHAPTOG1 TIF 38574 1999 67 67 11 13 R U ETE LT CHAPTOOO TIF 38574 1999 07 07 11 12 R U Save ll Property ara Filter Load SET EA RN attr Lio ons 20 00 v etes mcm CHI 10 1 CHZ 10 1 Utility 20 0 Urdiv 5 00 U diu Delete Exec DC Full DC Full Selecting the medium to be formatted 3 Press the Function soft key to display the file function menu 4 P
278. he File Attributes Deleting Files Selecting all files to be deleted 9 Turn the jog shuttle to select a file a directory or a medium 10 Press the All Set key to place marks to the left of every file in the directory containing the selected file or directory These files will be deleted The name of the All Set soft key changes to All Reset 11 Pressing the All Set key removes marks to the left of every file in the directory containing the selected file or directory These files will not be deleted The name of the All Reset soft key changes to All Set 1999 07 67 14 39 23 j fico Normal 4 Stopped 1 5SMS s 2ns Utility En LIAE Pam C Maine OOk gt gt File List Function Delete Path FDO Space 972288 byte File Nane Size F 1 CHAPTO12 TIF CHAPTO11 TIF CHAPT 16 TIF CHAPTGG9 TIF CHAPTOOS TIF CHAPTOO TIF CHAPTO60 SET CHAPT G6 TIF CHAPT GS TIF CHAPTOO4 TIF CHAPTOO3 TIF CHAPTO82 TIF 10080 dus 20 00 V 1999 07 67 15 19 Rel 1999 67 67 15 15 R U 1999707707 15 16 R U 1999 07 07 15 10 R U 1999707707 15 09 RU 1999 07 67 15 08 RU 1999 67 67 15 66 Rel 1999707707 15 62 R U 1999 07 07 15 61 1999 67 07 14 59 1999 07 07 14 59 1999 67 07 14 53 10000 ou Set Reset ALL Set Property Filter Re Attr CHI 10 1 CHZ 10 1 20 0 Urdiv 5 60 U diu
279. he Recording Medium Executing Canceling the format operation OK Cancel 9 Pressing the Exec soft key displays the alert dialog box 10 Turn the jog shuttle to select OK or Cancel 11 Select OK and press the SELECT key to start the format operation Selecting Cancel and pressing the SELECT key cancels the format operation 1999 67 67 10 00 16 jj gtk Nornal Stopped 9 1 50kS s 2msa Utility HT 88 0 V lt lt Maine LK gt gt E 3 Function l H Format File List File Nane size Space Media Info L 1457664 1220608 L Format FD Format 2HD 1 44M L L Lin tons 20 00 v CHI 10 1 CHZ 10 1 d 10 0 20 0 Ur div 5 00 U div Exec DC Full DC Full s Viewing the media information Follow steps 1 5 on page 11 6 to Select a media 6 Press the Media Info soft key to display information about the medium that was selected in step 5 J 1999 07 67 19 08 39 j fioo Normal Stopped Qo a ee 5MS s 2nsu Utility HT 80 0 V lt lt Maine LOOK 22 i Function Media Info Format l C File Nane Media Nane FDO i Media Size 1457664 byte Media Info SU Fie Used Space 633344 byte Vacant Space 824320 byte Partition Size JL L Format L L L0000 0us 20 00 V 3 at 10000
280. he message language A message appears when an error occurs You can set whether to display these messages in English or Japanese The message codes are the same for both languages For messages see page 15 2 Turning ON OFF the click sound Set whether or not to make click sounds when the jog shuttle is turned The default setting is ON Operating Procedure 1 Press the MISC key 2 Pressthe System Config soft key to display the system configuration menu 1999 67 69 10 39 18 j ut Nornal 25 20MS s 5msu Sustem Config MISC Stopped Calibration ENG Click Sound OFF pry Communication j B A d SCSI ID i i i Date Tine M Graphic Color M E Offset Cancel System Conf ig Mode oN Trigger Gate Overview OFF L CHi 10 1 CHZ 10 1 Edge CHI Next 20 0 Wdiv 5 60 U diu Auto val DC Full DC Full 0 0 U Selecting the message language 3 Pressthe Message soft key to select ENG or JPN Setting the click sound 3 Pressthe Click Sound soft key to select ON or OFF 14 4 IM 701410 01E 14 3 Turning OFF the Backlight and Setting the Brightness of the Backlight Function Turning ON OFF the backlight LCD OFF Turns ON OFF the LCD backlight If a key is pressed when the backlight is OFF the screen returns to the measurement screen Automatically turning OFF the backlight Auto OFF
281. he patterns Select NONE to check the patterns of all the data Channels Specified as Clock Channels Level Set the level for determining rising and falling The range for the setting is an on screen 8 div and the resolution is 0 01 div Pattern Choose from the following 4 Check the pattern when the waveform changes from above to below the specified level Y Checks the pattern when the waveform changes from below to above the specified level Hysteresis Set the hysteresis The range for the setting is 0 3 0 4 div Channels Other than Clock Channels Pattern Set using the H L or X don t care symbols Set each bit when using logic input H When the value is greater than the level 1 for logic input L When the value is less than the level 0 for logic input X Do not determine Level Set the levels to determine H and L Hysteresis Set the hysteresis The range for this setting is 0 3 div 4 div Start Point Set the starting position for the search The range for this setting is 5 to 5 div IM 701410 01E 8 15 8 9 Search Data Using Search and Zoom Function When the Type is Pulse Width Type Select the relationship between the specified time and the measured waveform Pulse lt Time search the part in which the time that fulfills the conditions below is shorter than a specified time Pulse gt Time search the part in which the time that fulfills the conditions below is longer than a s
282. he trigger mode Pressing the MODE key after pressing the SHIFT key displays a menu related to action on trigger SIMPLE key Section 6 4 to 6 7 Displays the menu for the simple trigger mode which provides normal triggers such as the edge trigger Simple trigger mode is selected when the indicator located above this key is lit ENHANCED key Section 6 4 and 6 8 to 6 15 Displays the menu for enhanced trigger mode which provides complex triggers such as the pattern trigger Enhanced trigger mode is selected when the indicator located above this key is lit SHIFT POSITION key Section 6 2 to 6 3 Used to set the trigger position You can set the trigger delay by pressing the POSITION key after pressing the SHIFT key TRG D indicator Lights up when a trigger is activated 2 2 IM 701410 01E 2 2 Operation Keys Jog Shuttle Knobs Other Menus x Y MENU osar MISC FILE copy PHASE ti SS GO f weasure CURSOR NOGO MATH 4 N o y j AUTO j CAN INTIALZZE Gur ZA aca STARTISTOP CLEAR w DISPLAY key Chapter 8 Displays the screen display menu Press SHIFT DISPLAY to produce the menu for X Y display setup MISC key Section 3 6 and 11 5 Chapter 13 IM701410 11E Displays the menu for selecting GO NO GO determination communication interface System configuration settings system status check screen saver setting and the self diagnostic
283. he waveform label for each bit can be set using up to 8 characters Precautions to be taken when using the logic probe fthe acquisition mode is set to Average or Box Average when using the logic input only the analog waveforms will be averaged or box averaged When the interleave mode is turned ON Pod B cannot be used Operating Procedure Turning ON OFF the logic input 1 Press the LOGIC key 2 Press the Mode soft key to select ON or OFF 1999 67 63 10 30 41 jj Nornal 43 iMS s insAli LOGIC Mode OFF pry Select Pod B E ze g Display aL Level TI ECL User l 1 4 U H Label L L De CHI 10 1 CHZ 10 1 Edge CHI 20 0 Udiy 6 506 Urdiu ti DC Full DC Full n L Selecting the pod to set 3 Pressthe Select soft key to select Pod A or Pod B 5 12 IM 701410 01E 5 10 Turning ON OFF the Logic Input and Setting the Threshold Level Turning each bit ON OFF 4 Pressing the Display soft key displays a dialog box used to turn ON OFF each bit 5 You can select the bit using the jog shuttle and press the SELECT key to select ON or OFF Normal 1MS s insi LOGIC Mode py OFF i Select A11 OFF Baal Biti Leuel ECL User Bitz Bit3 Bit4 BitS B
284. heir respective companies 1st Edition August 1999 2nd Edition August 2000 3rd Edition July 2001 All Rights Reserved Copyright 1999 Yokogawa Electric Corporation IM 701410 01E Checking the Contents of the Package Unpack the box and check the contents before operating the instrument If the wrong instrument or accessories have been delivered if some accessories are missing or if they appear abnormal contact the dealer from which you purchased them DL7100 DL7200 Main Body Check that the model name and suffix code given on the name plate of the rear panel match those on your order Whenever you contact the dealer from which you purchased the instrument tell him your unit s serial No SPECIFICATIONS 1 GS s 2 MW CH model 1 GS s 4 MW CH model 2 GS s 4 MW CH model 2 GS s 16 MW CH model UL CSA standard power cord A1006WD Maximum rated voltage 125 V maximum rated current 7 A VDE standard power cord A1009WD Maximum rated voltage 250 V maximum rated current 10 A BS standard power cord A1054WD Maximum rated voltage 250 V maximum rated current 10 A SAA standard power cord A1024WD Maximum rated voltage 240 V maximum rated current 10 A MODEL SUFFIX NO YOKOGAWA Made in Japan MODEL SUFFIX 701410 701420 701430 701440 Power cord D F Q R Options B5 N1 N2 N3 N4 C9 C10
285. his case the waveforms can be moved in the vertical direction so that they can be observed more easily The vertical position can be set to any value in the range between 4 div Changing the V div setting the vertical axis setting is rescaled with respect to the vertical position Position 2 div i Position 0 div d Position 2 div Time Axis Sections 5 11 and 5 12 Selection of the timebase With the default settings sampling timing is controlled by the clock signal output from the timebase circuit of the instrument refer to the Block Diagram of the instrument section 1 1 The sampling timing can be controlled by an external clock signal instead of the clock signal from the timebase circuit An external clock signal can be input to the EXT CLOCK IN terminal on the rear panel This external clock function is useful when you are observing a signal whose period varies or when you are observing a waveform by synchronizing it with the clock signal to be measured IM 701410 01E 1 2 Setting the Vertical and Horizontal Axes Setting the time axis When using the internal clock set the time axis scale as a time duration per division of the grid The setting range is 1 ns div to 50 s div The time range in which waveform is displayed is time axis setting x 10 as the display range along the horiz
286. history memory for example the following data format is used ASCII format CR LF is inserted between records Header Measured data 1 1 of CH1 Measured data 1 1 of CH2 Measured data 1 1 of CH3 e e CR LF 7 Measured data 1 2 of CH1 Measured data 1 2 of CH2 Measured data 1 2 of CH3 e e e CR LF Bacond d Measured data 1 m of CH1 Measured data 1 m of CH2 Measured data 1 m of CH3 e CR LF CR LF Measured data 2 1 of CH1 Measured data 2 1 of CH2 Measured data 2 1 of CH3 e e CR LF 1 Measured data 2 2 of CH1 Measured data 2 2 of CH2 Measured data 2 2 of CH3 e e CR LF Record 2 Measured data 2 n of CH1 Measured data 2 n of CH1 Measured data 2 n of CH1 CR LF CR LF Float format Stored in blocks of channels Measured data of record 1 of CH1 Measured data of record 2of CH1 Measured data of record N of CH1 Measured data of record 1 of CH2 Measured data of record 2 of CH2 Measured data of record N of CH2 Operating Procedure 1 Pressthe FILE key 2 Pressthe File Item soft key to display the file time setting menu 3 Press the soft key corresponding to Waveform jieck Normal SMS FILE a FILE 1 IS s Znsdi FILE File Item ED EI File Tten Setup Setup Waveforn pe Tata Type reed Waveform Binary zu Snap q K Save Measure Save g aa o
287. hose of normal automated measurements See page 9 10 The display of the results of the statistical processing One parameter per channel is displayed in order from the channel having the smallest channel number that has measurement parameters turned ON A maximum of two parameters from all channels can be displayed Displaying Statistical Processing Results One parameter name is displayed as a heading for each channel item The channels items are displayed in order starting from the lowest channel number which has been Set for statistcal processing A maximum of two items can be displayed on the screen The statistical processing results are displayed in a list Old data and waveforms are assigned a number and the statistical processing results are displayed for each number The maximum and minimum values of each parameter are indicated by an up arrow maximum value or a down arrow minimum value If the same value occurs more than once the oldest data is the one displayed With the statistical processing of history data the number of results that can be listed is 24000 Since the newest history waveform parameters are the ones displayed when the number of data exceeds 24000 there may be maximum and minimum values which lie outside of the displayed range Note about Statistical Processing While executing a statistical process all soft keys other than Measure Abort are inactive Operating Procedure Statistical Processing 1 Pres
288. huttle to set the start point and press the SELECT key Setting the number of FFT points 21 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to FFT Points 22 Pressing the SELECT key displays a menu used to select the number of points on which to take the FFT 23 Turn the jog shuttle to select 1k or 10k and press the SELECT key Selecting the time window 24 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to FFT Window 25 Pressing the SELECT key displays the time window menu 26 Turn the jog shuttle to select Rect Hanning or FlatTop and press the SELECT key Entering Labels Applicable to DL7100 with software ROM version 1 11 or later See section 15 4 Checking the System Condition 27 Pressthe Math1 Label soft key to display the keyboard See section 8 5 Setting the Waveform Labels for information about displaying labels IM 701410 01E 9 31 sisAjeuy u1J0JOAEAA ol 9 9 Smoothing Function The moving average is determined every five data samples and the waveform is displayed based on the results Since this process is performed on the data stored in the acquisition memory it can be executed even when the waveform acquisition is stopped This smoothing process has the following frequency characteristics with respect to the sample rate The 3dB point is at approximately 13 of the sample rate E ER Attenuation f Sample frequency 1 L 1 1 1 I 1 1 1
289. ialog box Executing the Analysis 28 Press the Analyze Exec soft key to execute the analysis The analysis result is listed at the bottom of the screen 2001 06 15 11 02 49z1 ioo Normal i Stopped 111 q 10MS s insfi SEARCH 28 00 XCTeinHESUk gt Type Sr 3 Il 20 00 4 SPI Bus 20 00 V C E j 20 06 v Analyze EN 20 00 Setup 5 z0 00 V 20 00 V Analyze T 14 Exec E5800 bus 20 00 V 5000 Qus TOU TENES s dousAtin E Detail Il ETE E 28 00 V Ld qoe pe su 7 EUTTITE 730 dd V Data Search 20 00 0 z J EINTEI Zi Mag 20 00 V E E23 1us 17 220 00 H i Sus No 9 1 2 4 4 5 6 7 B8 Tw Hii Dti DG 18 21 F8 31 DB 18 21 F8 39 DB 18 21 18 Dt2 D8 18 00 18 00 DG 18 00 18 00 DB 18 00 18 cs H H H H H H H H H H H H H H IM 701410 01E 8 35 8 10 Analyzing and Searching SPI Signals 29 Ifthe jog shuttle control is not set to List press the List soft key 30 Turn the jog shuttle to select an arbitrary byte from the list of analysis results The selected byte appears highlighted Setting the zoom ratio 31 Press the Z1 Mag Z1 Position soft key to set the jog shuttle control Z1 Mag Turn the jog shuttle to set the zoom ratio of the Z1 zoom box Setting the zoom position 32 Press the Z1 Mag Z1 Position soft key to set the jog shuttle control to Z1Position Turn the jog
290. ible Turning file protect ON and OFF on saved files Formatting a network drive Copying between network drives Renaming a file on the network This function can not be used in conjunction with FTP server function Before saving data to a network drive you must configure TCP IP see 13 2 Configuring the Ethernet Interface TCP IP When connected to the network you must disconnect then reconnect for settings to take effect When you are disconnected by the server when using the FTP client you will be automatically reconnected if you perform a file operation save load etc This is the same if NDO is selected for Save to File when using an action trigger or GO NO GO The Ethernet communication function and the GP IB function cannot be used simultaneously TheFTP function cannot be used between two YOKOGAWA digital oscilloscopes For example using one DL7200 as an FTP server and another DL7200 as an FTP client is not possible 13 8 IM 701410 01E 13 5 Sending Screen Image Data to a Network Printer lt For a description of this function refter to page 1 28 gt Function You can send screen images to a network printer via Ethernet Compatible Printer Formats PostScript ESC P BJ LIPS3 PCL5 ESC P2 Operating Procedure 1 Press the MISC key 2 Pressthe Network soft key then press the Net Print Setup soft key to display the settings menu 2000 07 05 17 06 50 j fio Norma
291. ication interface x1 B9969BY B9850NX A1352EF A9088ZM Operation guide x1 SS e SS A roll chart will be supplied only when the instrument is equipped with a built in printer Optional Accessories The following optional accessories are available On receiving these optional accessories make sure that all the items that you ordered have been supplied and that they are undamaged If you have any questions regarding optional accessories or if you wish to place an order contact the dealer from whom you purchased the instrument FET probe Current probe Differential probe Differential probe 700939 700937 700924 700925 Logic probe Front panel protection Mini clip converter Earth lead 700985 cover clear 701481 B9852CR B9852CT B9852EJ SS J A1470JZ Black Current probe Current probe A1471JZ Red 701920 701930 IC clip IM 701410 01E iii Checking the Contents of the Package Optional Spare Parts The following optional spare parts are available On receiving these optional spare parts make sure that all the items that you ordered have been supplied and that they are undamaged If you have any questions regarding optional spare parts or if you wish to place an order contact the dealer from whom you purchased the instrument Part Name Part No Minimum Q ty Remarks Roll chart B9850NX 5 Thermo sensible paper Total length 30 m 400 MHz passive probe 700988 1 Input impedance 10 MQ Length 1 5 m Fu
292. iens ke het ote ee ELLA ee Aer ES Message Language MISG kay hits anisini eta e c ee MODE k y ect nare e to eter gab de egt eee Multiplication eissaurar tarte N name plate rtr teer e metn eiie tren it ii No interpolation erret 1 17 Normalim de 2 2 6 trim tte 1 10 1 13 6 1 gll 6 29 O Offset Cancel Mode sssseeeem 14 7 Offset Volt ge iinis e eia 1 2 Offset voltage One to one Connection to a Personal Computer 13 1 Operation state nsnsi n ae a a e iiaa 2 5 Optional Accessories ssseene iii OR Trigger iret ete tc 6 25 OR trigger hi Output formal m n ri 10 3 Outputting Screen Image see 10 6 P PAL a imminens 6 29 Parallel Pattern iintindi rinsi giay 8 14 Parallel Pattern search sesesseeeeeee 1 25 Pattern Trigger eene 1 8 6 17 PG Gard anmenn n eb elo tae ET 11 2 POISISU MEETS 8 8 Phase shifted addition ssesessessssss 1 22 Phase shifted Display eese 9 33 POSITION Key ideo tired ict Dental 2 2 position marker 2 reete ntt rn t nnns 6 3 power signal uieece tent e e eere x ERE aint ase 6 10 Power Spectrum sese 1 23 power spectrum Power SWIICh 4 ritiene eer m irren IM 701410 01E Index 3 H us
293. if Pulse Time The trigger is activated at points A and C if Pulse Time The trigger is activated at point C if T1 Pulse T2 where Time1 350 ns Time2 450 ns The trigger is activated at point D if Time out is specified where Time 450 ns suonoung OR trigger Enhanced Trigger Section 6 12 A trigger is activated when any of the edge trigger conditions specified on CH1 to CH4 or the window condition is met A trigger can be activated by either the rising edge of CH1 or CH2 CH1 CH2 Tigger Tigger Tigger When CH1 and CH2 Window Trigger Enhanced Trigger Section 6 13 A certain voltage range window is set and a trigger is activated when the trigger source level enters this voltage range IN or exits from this voltage range OUT IN OUT i trigger is activated trigger Is activated Width Window Width Window Center iL trigger is activated TV Trigger Enhanced Trigger Section 6 14 The TV trigger is used when you are observing a video signal and is compatible with NTSC PAL and HDTV broadcasting systems IM 701410 01E 1 9 1 3 Setting a Trigger Logic Trigger ENHANCED Optional Section 6 15 There are 2 input connectors A and B and 8 logic inputs for every POD being connected While the combined condition of H L and Don t care for POD A and B 16 inputs is satisfied a trigger is activated at the rise or fall of the clock cha
294. igger Eype aiu odierna m HE ba ER 1 7 pu m 5 12 TV Trigger ertet trees 1 9 6 29 U USEF 1 52 trit eee e eye daa eet on ead 5 12 8 1 V M CUISOLS 2 eere so cca Ete sos eres e E eire e MPH V DIN KNOB uita ci ttt ce ende tt to td Variable ettet eterne tend nde gn Vertical eerte nene denter den Vertical POSION eret etes Vertical Sensitivity voltage axis sensitivity eseesssceeeeeneene 5 9 W Waiting for Trigger Waveform Labels eene Waveform labels seesseeeeeeeneenene waveform parameters Width i ee een i eS Width trigger Window Trigger erret 1 9 window trigger seeeseeeeeeenennennnnen 6 27 IM 701410 01E Index 5 H E
295. igger level falling fX Activated on either a rising edge or falling edge Setting the trigger coupling Select from the following list of choices AC Uses a signal that is obtained by removing the DC component from the trigger source signal DC Uses the trigger source signal as the trigger signal Setting the HF rejection Set to 15 kHz or 20 MHz when you wish to use a signal source that is obtained by removing the high frequency components frequency components greater than or equal to approximately 15 kHz or 20 MHz from the trigger signal as the trigger source Setting the hysteresis Assigns a width to the trigger level so that the trigger is not activated by small changes in the trigger signal AL Approximately 0 3 div of hysteresis around the trigger level ZV Approximately 1 div of hysteresis around the trigger level The value above are estimated values They are not strictly guaranteed Setting the hold off See section 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time 6 6 IM 701410 01E 6 5 Setting the Edge Trigger SIMPLE Operating Procedure Setting the trigger source 1 Pressthe SIMPLE key 2 Pressing the Source soft key to display the trigger source menu 3 Press the soft key corresponding to the channel to be set as the trigger source 1999 07 05 08 54 11 j fio Normal Stopped eH AMS s insAi SIMPLE E Source GAN CH1 ni 4 Slope E ft Coupling ac HF Reject
296. igger source and trigger status Setthe trigger status of the trigger source from the following three choices lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 8 gt H The trigger source level is greater than or equal to the trigger level L The trigger source level is less than or equal to the trigger level X Do not set as a trigger source Selecting the clock channel Clock CH Select None if the trigger is not to be activated in sync with the signal Select the clock channel from CH1 to CH4 if the trigger is to be activated in sync with the signal Select the trigger slope from the following 4 Rising 1 Falling Selecting the trigger condition When activating the trigger only on the status pattern Select the trigger condition from the following list of choices Enter Trigger is activated when the specified combination pattern is met Exit Trigger is activated when the specified pattern is no longer met CH1 input CH2 input Pattern not matched Pattern matched Le Trigger condition met A CH1 H CH3 X CH2 L CH4 X Condition Enter When activating the trigger in sync with the clock channel Set the trigger condition from the following list of choices True Trigger is activated on the rising or falling edge of the clock channel while the status pattern is being matched False Trigger is activated on the rising or falling edge of the cl
297. image data to the destination specified in the Copy setting menu Printer Centronics File Net Print Ethernet PC Card interface optional Send Mail Senda mail Ethernet PC Card Interface optional For details see section 13 7 Using the Mail Function Action Mail Function Action Count Sequence Single Conclude after one instance of the Action Continue Repeat the Action the number of times specified as the sampling count in ACQ Count if set to Infinite the Action repeats until determination stops 9 38 IM 701410 01E 9 12 GO NO GO Determination Using Zones Waveform Sampling Count ACQ Count Set the waveform sampling count Infinite Sampling continues until determination stops or until the Start Stop key or Abort soft key is pressed 1 65536 Sampling stops after the specified count has been reached Start Stop GO NO GO Determination Press the Exec soft key to execute the determination Determination will stop automatically when finished or you can press the START STOP key or Abort soft key to force a stop Save to File Hard Copy Action The Action is performed based on the FILE menu or Copy settings Filenames When Action is Save to File or Hard Copy The data is saved according to the Auto Name given in the File menu or the Copy menu See 10 4 Storing Screen Image to the Recording Medium and 11 6 Saving and Retrieving Waveform Data for det
298. in amp Z1 amp Z2 per 10 time axis divisions These areas are referred to as interpolation areas Three settings are available Line interpolation Interpolates between two dots using a straight line Sine interpolation Generates interpolation data using the function then interpolates between two dots using the resulting sine curve Sine interpolation is suitable for observation of sine waves sin x Pulse interpolation Interpolates between two dots using a step No interpolation Displays measurements as discrete dots without interpolation IM 701410 01E suonoung 1 4 Setting the Acquisition and Display Conditions X Y Waveform Display Section 8 7 This feature plots the voltage values of one input waveform on the X axis against the voltage values of the others on the Y axis which have their display turned ON The X Y plot lets you view the relationship between the signal voltages The X Y waveforms and normal waveforms a waveform displayed using voltage and time axes can be displayed simultaneously Use of this X Y waveform display function enables measurement of the phase angle between two sine wave signals For example two X Y sine waveforms are displayed to obtain an X Y waveform called a Lissajous waveform from which the phase angle can be obtained Lissajous waveform Expanded Waveform lt Section 8 8 gt Waveforms can be e
299. ing 2000 10 31 12 03 30 Stopped 98 z tok Normal SOOkS S 2nsAiv T Measurement range P P C1 2 187 Max C1 2 208330 2 166670 2 187020 5 93718nU 98 Values of automated measurement statistical processing items Result of statistical processing The following three methods are available in the statistical processing Normal statistical processing Statistical processing is performed on all acquired waveforms while acquiring e waveforms Statistical processing for each period Divides the displayed waveform using a period that is automatically calculated and determined and performs statistical processing on the measured values over the determined period Statistical processing is performed from the oldest measured data of the displayed waveform Example in which CH1 is selected as the waveform for determining the period CH1 CH2 gt Measures the parameters of automated measurement in the ranges a b and c and performs statistical processing of the parameters in the order a b and c The parameters of automated measurement of other channels are also measured in the ranges a b and c The automated measurement can also be performed using the period of each waveform as the range Statistical processing of historical data Performs automated measurement of waveform param
300. ing neme at the measurement item setting screen I Period E Width Width I Sada rs AIG MSIE High 100 fee MOT Distal line 90 H 4 Mesial line 50 ep neec pL Proximal line 10 Low 0 IM 701410 01E sisAjeuy WAOJOAR ol 9 2 Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters Reference waveform Measurement waveform Pulse Pulse Count Set the measurement range PIsN Time Range to match the pulse When Pulse 3 width of the signal being measured rop eas Distal line 90 erum Mesial line 50 xpesepeipeu sine is Proximal line 10 px Mesurement range Burst1 Burst2 Burst width Bst1 Bst2 Set the measurement range Time Range to match the burst width of the signal being measured e a a A a A ee A Distal line Mesial line Proximal line Burst1 L width Burst2 _ width Measurement range T1 cursor T2 cursor Other measurement parameters IntTY The area under the positive amplitude Int2TY The area under the positive amplitude the area under the negative amplitude IntiXY The summation of the triangular area of the X Y waveform Ing2XY The summation of the trapezoidal area of the X Y waveform For details regarding the area calculations see Appendix 2 How to Calculate th
301. ing the Historical Data Using Zone History Search Function 7 15 Searching the Historical Data Using Parameter History Search Function 7 18 IM 701410 01E Contents Chapter 8 Display 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 5 8 6 8 7 8 8 8 9 8 10 Changing the Display Format nennen nennen 8 1 Setting the Interpolation Method sssssseeeeeeeeneneneeenneen nennen 8 3 Changing the Gratic le cic ce rentes chest etis aro de CY c en dto 8 5 Turning Display of the Scaling Value ON OFF seesessseeeeneneneenenenn 8 6 Setting the Waveform Labels ssssssssesseseeeseneeeee nennen nennen nnne 8 7 Accumulated Waveform Display esee emere 8 8 X Y Wavetorm Display pte cech Run HEU e a diab PANE E E DRE UKIS 8 10 ZOOMING the Waveform terree cene x Lie Ce Ub eee Don eR euer e ERE e Rete h ku exi 8 12 Search Data Using Search and Zoom FUNCTION seen 8 14 Analyzing and Searching SPI Signals 8 28 Chapter 9 Waveform Analysis 9 1 9 2 9 3 9 4 9 5 9 6 9 7 9 8 9 9 9 10 9 11 9 12 Measuring Waveforms Using Cursors ssssseeeeeeneeneenneeeneen nennen 9 1 Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters sse 9 10 Statistical Processing in o ee CREER Dra ds 9 17 Adding Subtracting and Multiplying Waveforms seeeeeeen 9 22 Binary Gombputati
302. inistrator whether you can use DHCP When using DHCP you are given a new IP address each time you turn the power ON so you ll need to be careful when using the FTP server on the DL7100 DL7200 IP Address Internet Protocol Address Assign an IP address to the DL7100 DL7200 The default setting is 0 0 0 0 The IP address is used to distinguish between the various devices connected to the internet when communicating using the TCP IP protocol The address is a 32 bit string normally expressed with four values 0 255 each separated by a period for example 192 168 111 24 You must obtain a unique IP address from your network administrator The settings can be automatically configured in environments that use DHCP Subnet Mask Specify the mask that is used to determine the network address from the IP address The default setting is 255 255 255 0 Consult the network administrator for the setting value In some cases this setting may not be necessary The settings can be automatically configured in environments that use DHCP Default Gateway Set the IP address of the gateway default gateway for communicating with machines on different segments network groups The default setting is 0 0 0 0 Consult the network administrator for the setting value In some cases this setting may not be necessary The settings can be automatically configured in environments that can use DHCP DNS Domain Name System The DNS is a system t
303. ion 677 P P compression cannot be used to save Turn OFF the P P compression 11 11 11 14 FFT waveforms 679 Data that have been P P compressed and saved cannot be loaded 680 Illegal printer head position Set the release arm to the HOLD position 10 2 681 Paper empty Load a paper roll 10 2 682 Printer over heat Turn OFF the power immediately E Servicing is required 683 Printer over heat Turn OFF the power immediately Servicing is required 684 Printer is not installed Check that the printer is installed ii 685 Printer time out Servicing is required 686 Centronics printer is error Turn the power of the printer from OFF to On IM 701410 01E 15 3 E uonoedsu pue eoueuojure y Punoouso qnoj 15 2 Error Messages and Corrective Actions Code Message Corrective Action Reference Page 687 Centronics printer is offline 688 Centronics printer is out of paper 689 Centronics printer is in use 690 Cannot detect Centronics printer Turn ON the printer check connectors 691 Printer failure Servicing is required Service is required 701 Cannot be executed while running Press the START STOP key to stop the waveform 4 7 acquisition 703 There is no undo data Cannot undo because the data were cleared 4 4 during initialization or auto setup 4 5 704 Cannot be executed while running Press the START STOP key to stop the waveform 4 7 acquisition 707 C
304. ion lead delay Calculation of the actual display offset of the phase shifted waveform DisplayPointNo PhaseShift Creation of ASCII Header File When waveform data Waveform is stored on a floppy disk the following files will be created automatically in the DL WAVE directory Waveform data file WVF e ASCII header file HDR The waveform data file can be recalled to the instrument using the file menu but the ASCII header file cannot therefore it cannot be viewed on the instrument However it can be used when you analyze the waveform using a personal computer App 26 IM 701410 01E Appendix 3 ASCII Header File Format 1 Endian mode for storage Big Data for Motorola 68000 series Ltl Data for Intel 86 series 2 Binary file storage format Trace Groups into blocks each block for a single waveform Block Groups into blocks each block for a given time interval 3 Binary file start position Offset from the beginning of the file 4 Maximum number of blocks per group Maximum number of blocks applies if the number of blocks varies between waveforms 5 Y axis conversion equation for each waveform Y axis value VResolution x Raw data VOffset 6 Data type ISn n byte signed integer lUn n byte unsigned integer FSn n byte signed real number FUn n byte unsigned real number Bm m byte data 7 X axis conversion equation for each waveform X axis value HResolution x Data No
305. ion is executed the trigger mode is automatically changed to Single Determination is not possible when the acquisition mode is set to Average IM 701410 01E 9 35 sis euy u1J0JOAE AA ol 9 11 GO NO GO Operation Using the Measurement of Waveform Parameters Operating Procedure Setting the mode 1 2 3 Press the GO NO GO key Press the Mode soft key to display a menu used to set the GO NO GO determination mode Press the soft key corresponding to Parameter to set the GO NO GO determination mode Setting Param1 4 GOANO GO Mode Parameter Setup MR Tine Rangel Time Range2 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Pressing the Setup soft key displays the determination criteria menu 1999 07 06 18 53 42 j Nornal Stopped 4337 50kS s 2ns li GO NO GO Mode Parani Param2 Param3 Paran4 Parameter Mode P U8 LEDFI N T Trace L Iten Upper f i Louer i lllll Condition IN Logic L L Sequence ingle Continue ACQ Count Time Rangel 80d iv 5 00div action Buzzer Save to File Hard Copy Time Range2 5 00d iv CHI 10 1 CHZ 10 1 Edge CHI Ir 20 0 U div 5 00 U div Auto Exec DC Full DC Full 7 2 V Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Mode of Param1 Press the
306. ion of each channel is met or not met Setting the hold off 15 Setthe hold off time according to the procedures given in 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time 6 24 IM 701410 01E 6 12 Setting the OR Trigger Function lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 9 gt This function activates a trigger on the OR of each channel s edge trigger Setting the edge trigger of each channel Select from the following 4 Rising q Falling Don t care Setting the trigger level Range 8 div within the screen Resolution 0 01 div For example the resolution is 0 02 mV when the V DIV setting is 2 mV div Setting the hysteresis Sets a width to the trigger level so that the trigger is not activated on small changes JN Approximately 0 3 div of hysteresis around the trigger level ZZ Approximately 1 div of hysteresis around the trigger level The value above are estimated values They are not strictly guaranteed Setting the trigger coupling Select from the following list of choices AC Uses a signal that is obtained by removing the DC component from the trigger Source signal as the trigger signal DC Uses the trigger source signal as the trigger signal Turning ON OFF the HF rejection Select 15 kHz or 20 MHZ when you wish to use a signal source that is obtained by removing the high frequency components frequency components greater than or equal to approximately 15 kHz or 20 MHz from
307. is case a phenomenon in which high frequency components change to lower frequency components occurs due to Nyquist s theorem This phenomenon is called aliasing Aliasing can be avoided by setting the acquisition mode to envelope mode and acquiring the waveform Aliasing signal Input signal Sampling point Repetitive sampling mode To enable this mode you must set the time axis so that the sampling rate is greater than 1 GS s interleave ON 2 GS s for the DL7100 or greater than 2 GS s for the DL7200 interleave ON 5 GS s Under this mode the oscilloscope produces a single waveform by taking samples over several periods of a repetitive signal so that the sampling rate appears higher than it actually is An apparent sample rate of up to 100 GS s can be used Furthermore even in the real time sampling mode if the sample rate exceeds 1 GS s for the DL7100 interleave ON 2 GS s or 2 GS s for the DL7200 interleave ON 5 GS s due to the time axis and the displayed record length settings the sampling mode automatically changes to repetitive sampling There are two repetitive sampling methods sequential sampling in which a signal is sampled sequentially at a fixed interval and random sampling in which a signal is sampled at random to produce a waveform This instrument uses a random sampling method which also enables observation of the waveform up to the trigger point trigger position refer to section 1 3 Time axis setting and ro
308. isplayed as shown in the following figure even if the vertical position is returned to its original position after stopping the acquisition V pa eked 1 3 Operating Procedure If the vertical position is moved the effective data range also changes For details see page 1 Press one of the keys from CH1 to CH4 to select the desired channel 2 Press the Position soft key to set the jog shuttle action to Position 3 Turn the jog shuttle to set the vertical position You can change the setting a digit using the arrow keys located below the jog shuttle 1999 67 63 10 30 41 jt Stopped cir Nornal iMS s insAli CHI 3 8 Display OFF pry Id Position 0 90diu Coupling DCiMo ns 2 000 V Probe 10 1 Offset 0 0 y Bandwidth Full Ls 00 CHI 10 1 CHZ 10 1 20 0 Urdiv 0 500 Urdiu DC Full DC Full d ENTIS Edge CHI Auto vite M Next 12 alll SE L L i 5 2 IM 701410 01E 5 3 Selecting Input Coupling For a description of this function refer to page 1 2 gt Function Input coupling The following three types of input coupling are available AC 1 MQ Acquires and displays only the AC content of the input signal DC 1 MQ Acquires and displays both the DC and the AC content of the input signal 1 MQ DC 50 Q Acquires and displays both
309. it amp Bit Selecting the threshold level 6 Pressthe Level soft key to select TTL ECL or User 7 When User is selected set the threshold level using the jog shuttle Even if TTL or ECL is selected in step 6 if the threshold level is changed with the jog shuttle the level is automatically changed to User Setting the label 8 Pressing the Label soft key displays a label setting dialog box used to set each bit 9 Select the desired bit with the jog shuttle and press the SELECT key to display a keyboard 10 Use the keyboard to enter the waveform label 11 Repeat steps 9 and 10 as necessary 12 Pressing the ESC key closes the dialog box im C2HS s2 CoOOusAdiw 2 iex 2NS s C500ps div 2 Z00kS s Imsi LOGIC TA ZO0kS s 5nsHi LOGIC Hode Pd Hode OFF pry m OFF Dn Selert go Select Pod Pod B Pod 4 Pod B Label Display Display Level frr ECL user Leuel 2 PEMA TL ECL User 1 4 U J 1 4U Label Label Edge CHi F Auto 0 10 U 0 10 U IM 701410 01E 5 13 sexy Je1uozuoH pue e2rnJeA 5 11 Selecting the Timebase Function lt For a description of this function r
310. iv 6 506 Urdiu SingletN DC Full DC Full 10 2 V IM 701410 01E 8 7 8 6 Accumulated Waveform Display Function lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 15 gt During normal operation the display is updated every time the trigger is activated making it difficult to capture transient conditions such as sudden distortion of waveforms By using the accumulate function the waveform display of the acquired data remains on the screen for the specified time Accumulate mode Persist Accumulate using each channel color Displayed for the specified time period by gradually lowering the brightness Color Accumulate using eight colors that indicate the frequency of waveforms in the data Accumulation period during Persist mode When using the persistence mode select the period over which waveforms are accumulated from the list below If you select infinite the accumulation is carried out infinitely The default value is 100 ms 100 ms 200 ms 500 ms 1 s 2 s 5 s 10 s 20 s 50 s and Infinite Grade width for color grade mode In color grade mode the frequency of data value occurrence is indicated in eight colors as illustrated below The grade width can be set within the range given below The default setting is 16 Overlapping display is performed indefinitely in color grade mode 2 to 2048 steps of 2
311. ject button CAUTION Removing the floppy disk while the access indicator is lit can damage the drive s magnetic head or destroy the data on the disk General handling precautions For general handling precautions see the instruction that came with the floppy disk uinipojy Buip1o28H oui speo pue saAes epad E IM 701410 01E 11 1 11 2 PC Card Optional PC Cards that can be Used The following types of cards can be used Flash ATA Cards PC Card TYPEII Compact Flash Using the adapter for PC Card TYPEII For details purchase more from your dealer or YOKOGAWA sales offices listed on the back cover of this manual Note You must use a PC card compatible PC when using a PC card Also the PC cards listed above may not work properly depending on the type of computer you are using Please check compatibility before working with PC cards Inserting the PC Card Insert the PC Card face up into the PC Card slot The PC Card slot is located on the back of the instrument Removing the PC Card After confirming that the PC Card is not being accessed press the PC Card eject button next to the PC Card slot N CAUTION Wait at least 1 second after inserting the card before removing it Removing the card too quickly may cause damage to the instrument Removing the PC Card while this instrument access the PC Card can destroy the data on the disk 11 2 IM 701410 01E 11 3 Connecting MO Disk Drives o
312. jog shuttle to choose either Pulse Time Pulse gt Time T1 Pulse lt T2 or Time Out then press the SELECT key Setting the Source 7 Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the desired source channel then press SELECT Setting the Level 8 Use the jog shuttle to set the level then press the SELECT key Use the arrows to move between the digits Pressing the RESET key restores the value to 0 V IM 701410 01E 8 25 8 9 Search Data Using Search and Zoom Function Setting the Polarity 9 Press the SELECT key to select H or L Setting the Hysteresis 10 Use the jog shuttle to set the hysteresis then press the SELECT key Use the arrow keys to move the arrows between the digits Pressing the RESET key restores the value to 0 3 div Setting the Time 11 Use the jog shuttle to set the count then press the SELECT key Use the arrow keys to move the arrows between the digits Pressing the RESET key restores the value to the minimum resolution 1 sample rate Set Time1 and Time2 if you selected T1 lt Pulse lt T2 in step 6 Setting the Start Point 12 Use the jog shuttle to set the search start position then press the SELECT key Use the arrow keys to move the arrows between the digits Pressing the RESET key restores the value to 5 div 13 Press the ESC key to close the dialog box Setting the Search Results Display Position
313. jog shuttle to select None Press ESC key and turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the channel on which the status is to be set Press the SELECT key several times to H L or X Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Condition Press the SELECT key several times to select Enter or Exit Go to step 14 IM 701410 01E 6 33 HunebbuL o 6 15 Setting the Logic Trigger ENHANCED Optional When activating the trigger in sync with the clock channel Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Clock CH Press the SELECT key to display the clock channel menu Turn the jog shuttle to set the clock channel Press the ESC key and turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the channel that was set as the clock channel Press the SELECT key several times to select f or t 10 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the channel to which the status is to be set 11 Press the SELECT key several times to H L or X 12 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Condition 13 Press the SELECT key several times to select True or False ONAN Setting the level hysteresis trigger coupling and HF rejection of the clock CH 14 Pressing the Level Coupling soft key displays a menu used to set the level coupling hysteresis and HF rejection The setting also applies to A B N trigger See page 6 13
314. k 500 k 100 k 500 k 100 k 500 k 400 M 500 k 800 M 400 k 200 k 400 k 200 k 400 k 200 k 400 k 400 M 400 k 800 M 500 k 500 k 500 k 500 k 400 M 500 k 800 M 500 k 500 k 500 k 500 k 400 M 500 k 800 M 400 k 400 k 400 k 400 k 400 M 400 k 800 M 500 k 500 k 500 k 500 k 400 M 500 k 800 M 500 k 500 k 500 k 500 k 400 M 500 k 800 M 400 k 400 k 400 k 400 k 400 M 400 k 800 M 500 k 500 k 500 k 500 k 400 M 500 k 800 M 500 k 500 k 500 k 500 k 400 M 500 k 800 M 400 k 400 k 400 k 400 k 400 M 400 k 800 M 500 k 250 k 500 k 500 k 500 k 500 k 100 k 200 k 500 k 50 k 100 k 25k 50k 10k 20k 5k 10k 25k 5k 1k 2k 500 250 100 ka For the setting enclosed by the bold line repetitive sampling is active 1G Changes to normal mode even when envelope mode has been set App 6 IM 701410 01E Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length Record length 1 M words DL7100 Rep Repetitive sampling mode When Mode other than Envelope Mode is Active When Envelope Mode is Active Setting Interleave mode OFF Interleave Mod
315. k 800 M 500 k 500 k 500 k 500 k 800 M 500 k 800 M 500 k 500 k 500 k 500 k 800 M 500 k 800 M 400 k 400 k 400 k 400 k 800 M 400 k 800 M 500 k 500 k 500 k 500 k 1G 500 k 1G 500 k 200 k 500 k 500 k 500 k 400 k 100 k 200 k 400 k 50 k 100 k 20k 40k 10k 20k 5k 10k 2k 4k 1k 2k 500 1k 200 400 100 200 For the setting enclosed by the bold line repetitive sampling is active Changes to normal mode even when envelope mode has been set App 16 IM 701410 01E Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length Record length 1 M words DL7200 Rep Repetitive sampling mode When Mode other than Envelope Mode is Active When Envelope Mode is Active Setting Interleave mode OFF Interleave Mode ON Interleave mode Interleave Mode Rep OFF Rep ON Rep OFF Rep ON OFF Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample rate record len rate record len rate record len rate record len rate record len rate S s gth word S s gth word S s gth word S s gth word S s gth word S s 2k 1M 2k M 2k 1M 2k M 800 M 1M 800 M 5k 5k 5k 5k 800 M 1 800 M 10k 10k 10k 10k 800 M 1 800 M 20k 20k 20
316. k 20k 800M 1 800M 50k 50k 50k 50k 800M 1 800M 100k 100k 100k 100k 800M 1 800M 200 k 200 k 200 k 200 k 800 M 1 800 M 500 k 500 k 800 M 1 800 M 1M 1M 800 M 1 800 M 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Roll mode display 2M 800 M 800 M 5M 800 M 800 M 800 M 800 M 800 M 800 M 800 M 800 M 800 M 800 M 800 M 800 M 1G 1G SISISISI SISISISISISI SI SI SI SISFI E SISISISI SISI SISISISI SI SI SI SITIE SlSISISI SISI SISI SISI SI SI SI SISFIE SISISISI SIlSISI SISI SI SI SIl SI SI SISI E P i i i Changes to normal mode even when envelope mode has been set SISISISI SISISI SISISISI SISI SI SISI S SI S SI FI E SISISISISlSIlSI SISISISI SISI SISISIS S SI SISI E For the setting enclosed by the bold line repetitive sampling is active IM 701410 01E App 17 E xipueddy Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length Record length 2 M words DL7200 When Mode other than Envelope Mode is Active Rep Repetitive sampling mode When Envelope Mode is Active Interleave mode OFF 3 Interleave Mode ON Rep OFF Rep ON Rep OFF Rep ON Interleave mode OFF Interleave Mode ON record Sample Displayed Sample Displayed en rate record len gth word S
317. l MISC Network Stopped 646 y Z00kS s Sms Network a i in 7 Calibration mM ll TCP IP E TCP IP Setup B Er i Setup R i 3 E Communication User User Account 7 H Account fanaa H Net Print Setup SCSI ID Mail nail Setup LPR Server 10 0 111 222 Setup LPR Name PASSTHRU Netuork E Net Drive Net Drive Setup y Setup aa R E 3 System Conf ig MN Net Print Net Print Setup H H Setup Others B B E Others Overview L ro 66 az 5 oo EB E A 5 00 U div Connect DC Full Log List 3 Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to LPR Server then press the SELECT key to display the keyboard 4 Follow the procedures on page 4 2 to enter the printer server address If you are using a DNS specify it by name 5 Usethe jog shuttle to move the cursor to LPR Name then press the SELECT key to display the keyboard 6 Follow the procedure on page 4 2 to enter the printer name 7 Press the SHIFT key to set the keys in the shifted condition Functions marked in purple on the panel become active 8 Press the COPY key 9 Press the Copy to soft key to select Net Print IM 701410 01E 13 9 jeuond o suoneoiunuuuio 19uJ89u13 Ey 13 5 S
318. l Bite Na PALA end Mai mormanon OF ACQ Count infinite App 28 IM 701410 01E A Delay B Trigger A EB n Trigger eene accumulate weeded denied Hr debe ee eere dead Acquisition count niesen Acquisition Mode eeseeeeeeeeenenenennn Acquisition Modes eesseseeeeneenenen 1 13 Action On Trigger eceeseeeceeseeeceeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeetaeeeseeaeeeaeeatees 1 11 Action On Trigger sese 6 35 Active High Active Low Addition iini nmn ipee AllSet Jordi E Allocatio Mas eoo e rtt et etr rt ere Analyzing and Searching SPI Signals Analyzing SPI Signals eee Angle Cursors esses Auto level mode eene Auto measurement mode eeseeeeeene Auto mode otii tete e erede Auto OFF 4i ERE eT nee tie re ttg Auto Scroll Auto Setup ene nente ete elei ene tie auto Setup aseo nen eee eine nin nen AUTO SETUP KEY nennti eite Auto level mode eene automated measurement Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters 9 10 Automated Measurements sssssseseeeeee 1 20 nV M 7 2 Averaging mode ere rendre tendens 1 13 B Backliglit ciet tte gu ene d eR o odes 14 5 Bandwidth nitet eet tcd ce deae 5 8 Bandwidth Limit BiriarlZatloni crore n nennen idee diee Biliaty ic
319. l below this level is determined to be 0 Thr Lower lt data signal lt Thr Upper Determined as indefinite data If indefinite data is found is displayed in the Data1 or Data2 display box at the byte where the indefinite data exists on the display screen of analysis results Setting the chip select signal CS You can select the chip select signal from CH4 or Bit 0 through Bit 7 of logic input option PodA You can also select the state of the selected signal when analysis is to be performed Selecting the chip select signal CH Selects CH4 You must set the level used to determine H or L of the CH4 signal PodA Can be selected on products with the login input option Select from Bit 0 Bit EN 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 and Bit 7 Selecting the signal state Enable State Enable State Select from H L X and When the chip select signal is in the selected state the DL7100 DL7200 analyzes the data input output signal This condition is called the enabled state e H Analyzes the data input output signal when the chip select signal is H e L Analyzes the data input output signal when the chip select signal is L e X This can be used only when a single chip select signal is selected All data input output signals are analyzed The byte boundary of the analyzed signal is the point where the chip select signal changes from H to L or L to H Ae dsiq This can be used when the
320. l other cases the operation is the same as the auto mode If the time axis setting is in the range in which the display mode is set to roll mode the display is set to roll mode Normal mode The display is updated only when the trigger conditions are met The display will not be updated if no trigger is caused Therefore to check the waveform or ground level when no trigger is detected use auto mode Single Mode The display is updated once when the trigger conditions are met and the waveform acquisition stops In the time axis setting range in which the display mode is set to roll mode the display is set to roll mode When a trigger occurs the specified record length of data is acquired and the displayed waveform stops Single N mode The display is updated according to the number of times specified when the trigger conditions are met and the waveform acquisition stops This mode is used when acquiring a waveform using the sequential store function If the repetitive mode turn ON this mode is automatically changed to single mode Note The trigger mode setting applies to both simple and enhanced triggers Operating Procedure 1 Press the MODE key 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired mode to set the trigger mode 3 If Single N is selected turn the jog shuttle to set the number of times to acquire the waveform 1999 07 05 08 54 11 jt fio Normal iMS s insAli MODE Stopped eH GAN Auto
321. l that you wish to set as the source channel for the parameter search 10 Use the jog shuttle to highlight the parameter to be used in the search then press the SELECT key to assign the parameter to the channel IM 701410 01E 7 19 Aejdsig pue uonisinboy 7 9 Searching the Historical Data Using Parameter History Search Function 2000 03 02 21 05 05 j fio Normal Stopped 1 5kS s 200m Source Ttem Setup CH1 pr Freq aAugFreq g Max Period AvgPer iod L Min Rise 5 Intity 8 avg Fall s IntzTy L 5 Rns c width Intixy Sdev 5 Width Intzxy High fc Duty Lou Bursti aL Shot s Burst2 OShot c Pulse 5 Delay L CHI 10 1 Edge CH1 5 00 U div Single DC Full 9 00 U L Set the Condition Range 11 Press the Upper Lower soft key to highlight the Upper jog shuttle icon 12 Turn the jog shuttle to set the upper edge of the condition range Use the arrow keys to move between the digits Press the RESET key to return to the initial value XXX 13 Press the Upper Lower soft key to highlight the Lower jog shuttle icon 14 Turn the jog shuttle to set the lower edge of the condition range Use the arrow keys to move between the digits Press the RESET key to return to the initial value XXX 15 Repeat steps 6 14 to
322. l to which the signal is to be applied 3 Touch the probe s tip against the probe compensation signal output terminal and connect the grounding wire to the functional earth terminal 4 Perform auto set up using the procedure described on page 4 5 5 Insert a screwdriver into the trimmer adjusting hole in the probe and turn the trimmer so that the displayed waveform becomes square probe compensation COMP Functional earth terminal signal output terminal Reason for probe compensation If the probe s input capacitance is outside the specified range the gain will not be constant across different frequencies preventing display of the correct waveforms The input capacitance varies depending on the probe used so the variable capacitor trimmer provided on the probe must be adjusted Probe compensation must be performed when the probe is to be used for the first time Moreover the appropriate input capacitance varies according to which channel is used So probe compensation is required when the probe is switched from one channel to another Calibration signal A probe compensation signal square waveform of the following characteristics is output from the CAL terminal on the front panel Frequency approx 1 kHz Amplitude approx 1 V Waveform differences Correct waveform Over compensated Under compensated gain is too high at high gain is too low at high frequency frequency EE
323. lay 1 ms Pattern trigger Section 6 10 Multiple trigger sources are selected and a trigger is activated when all of the trigger conditions set for each trigger source become true or false Trigger conditions are established by setting combinations of the state High or Low of each trigger source Furthermore one of the trigger sources can be used as the clock signal and triggering is synchronized with this clock signal Example a trigger is activated when CH1 L CH2 L CH3 L and CH4 L of LAF L fA A f 1 I CHiL H L H L H L cH2 L H t u t H v jHjt CH3 L H L H CH4 L H L L Low level H High level Trigger is activated Pulse Width Trigger Section 6 11 The time period during which the specified condition is met or not met is compared with the specified time period The trigger condition is set with the AND of the signal state of each channel High Low or Don t Care or the AND of the window conditions of each channel IN OUT or Don t Care e lj X fX fX c Y fX fX fi CH1 H L H L H L H L CH2 H L H L H L H L 500 ns 300 ns 400 ns lt _ lt _ gt gt lt _ 450 ns at ia A A DA B C IM 701410 01E 1 3 Setting a Trigger The description of the figure above is as follows If CH1 H CH2 L CH3 X CH4 X Condition True Time 350 ns The trigger is activated at point B
324. layed waveform 16 4 IM 701410 01E 16 5 Functions Vertical horizontal axis setting functions Item Specifications Channel ON OFF Independent ON OFF for each channel CH1 to CH4 Vertical axis Expand reduce Axis can be expanded or reduced while acquisition is suspended Input filter Set 20 MHz or 100 MHz band limit ON OFF independently for each channel CH1 to CH4 Vertical position setting Waveforms can be moved vertically in the range 4 div from the center of the waveform display frame Linear scaling Set scaling coefficient offset and unit separately for each channel CH1 to CH4 Roll mode The roll display mode is enabled when the trigger mode is auto auto level or single and the time axis is as follows 1 MW or less 50 ms div to 50 s div except 50 ms div to 5 s div for 1 kW 2MW 100 ms div to 50 s div At 4 MW 200 ms div to 50 s div At 8 MW 500 ms div to 50 s div At 16 MW only 701440 1 s div to 50 s div Analysis Functions Item Specifications SPI Signal Analysis Search Function Analyze and search the data by inputting CLOCK to CH1 DATA1 to CH2 DATA2 to CH3 and CS signal to CH4 or bit 0 to 7 of the logic input option PodA Analysis Function Display the conditions of DATA1 DATA2 and CS through serial data in units of bytes 8 bits The result of the analysis can be output to a file Search Function Search indefinite da
325. le List soft key to display the output destination setting menu 1999 07 67 10 00 16 tk Nornal Stopped 94 y SOkS s ZnsAli COPY cH Bio 0 V lt lt Maint ik gt gt Copy to File File List Path FDO Format L Space 1224192 byte File Mane Size BMP Fpe 1 CHAPTOOO TIF 1999 67 67 10 32 CHAPTOO BHP 1999 67 07 10 31 ON CHAPTO 3 BMP 199970770 10 23 CHAPTOOZ BMP 1999707707 10 22 K CHRPT601 BHP 1999 67 67 10 00 Comment CHAPTO000 BMP 1999 67 67 09 59 Compression ON M File List Lin tons 20 00 V 16 0 ns CHI 10 1 CHZ 10 1 Edge CHI F M File Nane 20 0 Urdiv 5 00 Urdiv Auto DC Full DC Full 2 2 y CHAPTS 12 Turn the jog shuttle to select the save destination The floppy disk inserted in the built in drive or external SCSI devices are displayed in brackets Directories are displayed in angle brankets lt gt 13 Pressing the SELECT key displays the contents of the selected recording medium or the directory For details related to setting the output destination see page 11 15 Selecting the file name 14 Press the File Name soft key to display the file name setting menu 1999 07 67 10 00 16 Nornal Stopped 94 Hi SOkS s ZnsAli COPY car 88 0 V lain Copy to File Format BMP OFF Comment File Nane Compression Auto Naning on
326. le only while power stays on IM 701410 01E 4 3 Performing Auto Setup Function The key settings such as V div T div and trigger levels are automatically set to optimum values for the input signal Norn OOKS s Snsfdi nsi AUTO SETUP CHE Auto Setup 1999 02 03 10 30 41 al 1999 02 03 10 30 41 p Normal Stopped 124 x L Stopped 43 q ANS Hr TTS Hr T 7 Cem WAAAY TO kae ENTM l 5 oons 2 000 v 5 coore Eae xt B Tage CHi F futo Auto 9 000 V 1 E Before auto setup After auto setup The center position after auto setup The center position after auto setup is set to 0 V Target channels Auto setup is performed on all channels Canceling auto setup By pressing the Undo soft key the settings can be set back to the values that existed immediately before auto setup was performed However settings which existed before auto setup are erased when the power is turned OFF In this case the Undo operation will have no effect If you intialize the settings after auto setup settings which existed before auto setup are erased Waveforms that can be automatically set up Frequency Approx 50 Hz or more Maximum absolute input value Approx 20 mV or more assuming 1 1 probe attenuation Type Repetitive waveforms that are not complex When the input coupling is set to
327. lect the changes Do not delete the header file only or the waveform data file only as this may cause a system malfunction ASCII The sampled data in the acquisition memory are saved in ASCII format The data can be used to analyze the waveform on a PC Datain this format cannot be loaded on this instrument The file extension is CSV Float The sampled data in the acquisition memory are saved in 32 bit floating point format The data can be used to analyze the waveform on a PC Datain this format cannot be loaded on this instrument The file extension is FLD Data size The following list shows the data size when the record length is set to 100 kword waveform data of CH1 to CH4 are saved and MATH1 and MATH are turned OFF Data Type Extension Data Size Bytes Binary WVF Approx 800 K 100 kWord 32 x 4 channels x number of history waveform x 2 HDR Approx 2 K approx 3 K if Math1 and Math2 are ON ASCII CSV Approx 6 M depends on the input signal condition It takes more than 10 minutes to save the file Float FLD Approx 1 6 M 100 kWord 32 x 4 channels x number of history waveform x 4 11 10 IM 701410 01E 11 6 Saving Loading Waveform Data Selecting the waveform to be saved You can save all waveforms or the specified waveforms from CH1 to CH4 Math1 Math2 Pod A and Pod B The vertical and horizontal axes and trigger settings of the waveform being saved are also s
328. ll mode display If the time axis is set within a certain range refer to Appendix 1 then the display will not be updated by trigger anymore update mode but the mode will switch to roll mode when new data is acquired In roll mode the oldest data is deleted and the waveform shifts from right to left on the screen A waveform can be observed in the same way as it is recorded on a pen recorder This mode is useful when you are observing a signal which repeats or which fluctuates slowly This mode is also useful when you want to detect glitches fast spikes on a waveform which occur intermittently Rolling display also operates during single start acquisition although trigger occurrence causes the waveform to stop 1 6 IM 701410 01E 1 3 Setting a Trigger Trigger Type Chapter 6 gt There are two principal trigger types which you can use with the instrument Simple trigger Enhanced trigger Simple trigger Sections 6 5 to 6 7 This is an edge trigger and the one which is used normally Enhanced trigger Sections 6 8 to 6 15 This is a complex trigger The following eight types of enhanced trigger are available AB n trigger A Delay B trigger Pattern trigger Width trigger OR Trigger Window trigger TV trigger Logic trigger Optional Edge trigger Section 6 5 The edge trigger is the simplest type of trigger and uses a single trigger source to activate a trigger A t
329. m Marker Horiz Vert H amp V and degree Automatic measurement of waveform parameters function Measures the following waveform parameters automatically For parameters P P to Int2XY the Cycle mode can be specified in which the measurement is made over 1 cycle P P Max Min Ave Rms Sdev High Low OShot OShot Int1TY Int2TY Int1XY Int2XY Freq Period Rise Fall Width Width Duty Duty Burst Burst2 pulse Aug Period Delay The following statistical processing operations are also available Parameters Above parameters Statistical items Min Max Avg Cnt Sdv Limited to products with software ROM version 3 01 or later IM 701410 01E 16 5 E suoneoyioodg 16 5 Functions Item Specifications Computing functions X binary computation differentiation integration power spectrum inversion The maximum record length that can be computed is as follows 701410 Possible at all record lengths 701420 When the interleave mode is ON 4 MWords When the interleave mode is OFF 2 MWords 701430 Possible at all record lengths 701440 When the interleave mode is ON 8 MWords When the interleave mode is OFF 4 MWords However select the range for the power spectrum 1 kWords 10 kWords Phase shift The phase of CH1 to CH4 can be shifted for monitoring Computation is performed using the phase shifted result Maximum record length 8 MWords GO NO GO function Judgment is
330. m Position moves to that point and displays the searched waveform in the Zoom window You can also search indefinite data Pattern search and indefinite data search cannot be executed simultaneously Setting Type Specify the type of data to be searched Data Pattern Search a data pattern of Data1 or Data2 Indefinite State Search for indefinite data If you selected Data Pattern set the following item Pattern Format Specify the pattern display format Hex Hexadecimal display Bin Binary display Source Set the target waveform to perform the pattern search to Data1 or Data2 Data Byte Set the number of data bytes from 1 to 8 Data Pattern You can set the search pattern using hexadecimal or binary format The bit order is set to the format that was specified for the analysis If the specified bit contains an X it is displayed as in hexadecimal format Note Indefinite data is always considered to be matched to the specified status If analysis is performed on a channel of which a CS is selected the data is considered to be delimited at the point where the state of the CS signal changes In this case data search is also performed by considering the data to be delimited at that point For example when a 5 byte data shown in the following figure is analyzed the search operation varies depending on the CS channel specification during the analysis When analysis is performed by specifying a CS channel where Enable State
331. made on the automatically measured value of waveform parameters and the results are output to the printeror to a floppy disk external SCSI device or buzzer send a mail bi Ethernet PC Card interface optional Screen Data Output Functions Item Specifications Built in printer optional Outputs hard copy of screen External printer Print the screen image to an external parallel printer via Centronics interface or Ethernet Supports ESC P SC P2 LIPS3 PCL5 BJ commands and PostScript Eternet optional Floppy disk SCSI Output data formats PostScript TIFF BMP Network drive PC Card 1 Ethernet PC Card interface optional 2 PC Card optional Data Storage Functions Item Specifications History memory Interleave mode ON Retain max 2048 DL7100 or 4096 DL7200 waveforms recorded Interleave mode OFF Retain max 1028 waveforms recorded Floppy SCSI Save and restore waveform data settings other data Network drive PC Card 1 Ethernet PC Card interface optional 2 PC Card optional 16 6 IM 701410 01E 16 5 Functions 16 6 Rear Panel Input Output Other Functions Item Specifications Initialization function Automatically resets key settings to the factory settings Auto set up function Automatically sets key settings to the optimum values for the input signals Preset function Sets V div and trigger level etc to
332. ment use the accessory connecting leads B9852EJ A1470JZ A1471JZ Also do not alter the connecting leads Doing so may cause the leads from satisfying the specification There are 8 logic inputs for every POD The threshold level is selected from TTL ECL User in the instrument menu refer to section 5 11 Specifications Items Specifications Conditions Maximum toggle frequency 80 MHz When use with this instrument Number of inputs 8 When use with this instrument Maximum input voltage 40 V DC AC peak or 28 Vrms Frequency is 1 kHz or lower Maximum sampling rate 1 GS s DL7100 2 GS s DL7200 When use with this instrument Threshold level 10 V with 0 1 V resolution When use with this instrument Threshold accuracy 100 mV 3 of the setting When use with this instrument Minimum input voltage 500 mVp p When use with this instrument Input resistance approx 1 MQ Input capacitance approx 15 pF Preset threshold TTL 1 4 V ECL 1 3 V When use with this instrument As measured under standard operating conditions see page 16 10 after warm up 3 12 IM 701410 01E 3 7 Connecting the Logic Probe Optional Operating Procedure 1 Attach the accessory connecting lead B9852EJ A1470JZ A1471JZ to the logic probe and lock the connector by clamping the lever inwards To release the connecting lead pull both levers outwards 2 Turn OFF the instrument 3 Connect the 26 pin
333. n 7 SCSI ID Graphic Color System Conf ig Overview L E l Lio 00s 20 00 V 10 000 20 0 Urdiv 5 00 U div Initialize DC Full DC Full P SCSI IM 701410 01E 11 9 uinipojy Buip1o28H y speo pue saAes ejeq E 11 6 Saving Loading Waveform Data Function CAUTION Never remove the medium disk or turn OFF the power while the access indicator or the floppy disk icon is blinking This can damage the medium or destroy the data on the medium Selecting the data type file extension data size Binary The sampled data in the acquisition memory are saved in binary format The data that are saved can be loaded to display the waveform and compute numerical data A header file is automatically created The header file is used when analyzing the waveform on a PC The header file cannot be opened using this instrument For the header file format see Appendix 3 ASCII Header File Format The file extension is WVF The file extension of the header file is HDR When saving waveform data in binary format a header file is automatically created with the extension HDR When the DL7200 is used to copy delete change filenames or change file ownership of waveform data files files with the extension WVF the header files are automatically updated to ref
334. n 1 of the SCSI device with an ID number of 5 CAO PC Card CAO 1 Partition 1 of PC Card Selecting the file attributes Select the attributes for each file from the following choices R W Read and write possible R Read only Cannot write to the file or delete the file Changing the recording medium directory file name Number and types of characters that can be used Item Number of characters Characters that can be used File name 1 to 8 chars 0 to 9 Ato Z _ parenthesis minus sign Comment 0 to 25 chars All characters including spaces Creating a directory A new directory can be created on a medium See above for the assignment of the directory name when creating a new directory Specifying the file to be displayed in the File List dialog box You can specify the type of files to display extension Displays only the data file that was selected in the File Item setting menu and the data type menu e Displays all the files on the medium Properties Lists the file name extension file size the date it was saved the attributes and the comment for the selected file 11 34 IM 701410 01E 11 13 Changing the Recording Medium Directory Name and File Name and Creating a Directory Note Operating Procedure 1 2 You cannot rename a medium directory file or create a new directory while the data acquisition is in progress START STOP indicator is ON Directory attributes
335. n of this function refer to page 1 20 gt This function lets you apply linear scaling to the measurement values If you set this feature ON the screen displays the scaled results rather than the original measurements The scaling relationship is Y AX B where X is the measurement value and Y is the scaled value Note that you can select the dimensional unit for the scaled display Scaling coefficient A and offset B Range for A B 9 9999E 30 to 9 9999E 30 Default A 1 0000E 00 B 0 0000E 00 Dimensional unit Unit identifier alphanumeric string of up to four characters Displaying the scale value The linearly scaled values of the upper and lower limits of the vertical axis of each channel can be displayed See section 8 4 Turning ON OFF the Scale Value Display Operating Procedure Press one of the keys from CH1 to CH4 to select the channel Press the Next 1 2 soft key Press the Linear Scale AX B soft key to select ON Press the A B soft key Turn the jog shuttle to set the value of A You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits In a similar fashion set the value B If necessary press the Units soft key to display the keyboard and enter the unit gv ds om ct No CH1 Display 1999 67 63 10 30 41 jj fio Normal Stopped 43 ANSys insi CHT cui 62 OOE O0 M d H B Variable l DFF DN 20 0 U Ig Position L 0 06diu Linear Scale RX
336. n record len rate record len rate record len rate record len rate S s gth word gth word S s gth word S s gth word S s gth word S s 100 50k 50k 100 50 k 100 50k 800 M 50 k 800 M 200 40k 40k 200 40 k 200 40k 800M 40k 800M 500 50k 50k 500 50k 500 50k 800M 50k 800M 1k 50k 50k 1k 50 k 1k 50k 800 M 50 k 800 M 2k 40k 40k 40k 2k 40k 800M 40k 800M 5k 50k 50k 50 k 5k 50k 800 M 50 k 800 M 50k 50k 50 k 50k 800 M 50 k 800 M 40k 40k 40k 40k 800M 40k 800M 50k 50k 50 k 50k 800 M 50 k 800 M 50k 50k 50 k 50k 800 M 50 k 800 M 40k 40k 40k 40k 800M 40k 800M 50k 50k 50 k 50k 800 M 50 k 800 M 50k 50k 50 k 50 k 800 M 50k 800M 40k 40k 40k 40k 800M 40k 800M 50k 50k 50 k 50k 800M 50k 800M 50k 50k 50 k 50k 800 M 50 k 800 M 40k 40k 40k 40k 800M 40k 800M 50k 50k 50 k 50 k 800 M 50k 800M 50k 50k 50 k 50 k 800 M 50 k 800 M 40k 40k 40k 40k 800M 40k 800M 50k 50k 50 k 50 k 1G 50k 1G 50k 50k 50 k 50k 20 k 40k 40k Roll mode display Changes to normal mode even 10k 20k when envelope mode has been set 5k 10k 2k 4k 1k 2k 500 1k 200 400 100 200 For the setting enclosed by the bold line repetitive sampling is active IM 701410 01E App 13 E xipueddy Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length Record length 100 k words DL7200 When Mode other than
337. n the power to the DL7100 DL7200 OFF then back ON again 13 4 IM 701410 01E 13 3 Saving Waveform and Setting Data to a Network Drive Function lt For a description of this function refter to page 1 28 gt You can save data such as waveform and settings files to network drives via Ethernet in the same manner as with floppy disks or PC Card optional Saving time to Network drive UNIX work starion OS Solaris 2 6 not corresponding to seek command Waveform 500 kW 1 MByte 4 08 s Waveform 8 MW 16 MByte 30 76 s Tiny FTPD 0 52a corresponding to seek command Waveform 500 kW 1 MByte 10 53 s Waveform 8 MW 16 MByte 61 98 s Serv U 2 5e corresponding to seek command Waveform 500 kW 1 MByte 4 89 s Waveform 8 MW 16 MByte 26 13 s Operating Procedure Queruieu 1 Press the MISC key 2 Pressthe Network soft key and press the Net Drive Setup soft key to display the settings menu 3 Usethe jog shuttle to move the cursor to FTP Server then press the SELECT key to display the keyboard 4 Follow the procedure on page 4 2 to enter an FTP address When using DNS you can specify it by name 5 Usethe jog shuttle to move the cursor to Login Name then press the SELECT key to display the keyboard 6 Follow the procedure on page 4 2 to enter a login name of 15 characters or less 7 Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Password then press the SEL
338. nctions that are marked in purple on the panel operative Pressing this key activates shift mode and pressing it again releases shift mode While the indicator above this key is lit shift mode is active HISTORY key Section 7 7 to 7 9 Displays a menu used to recall data using the history memory function IM 701410 01E 2 3 Hed u9e3 Jo esf pue euieN 2 2 Operation Keys Jog Shuttle Knobs ACQ key Section 7 1 to 7 5 Displays the acquisition method menu START STOP key Section 4 4 Starts or stops acquisition according to the selected trigger mode The indicator above this key is lit during acquisition Jog and shuttle dials jog shuttle You use these dials to set numerical values move the measurement cursors select items from menus and perform other such selection operations The jog dial changes the value in fixed steps as you rotate it With the shuttle dial the Step size increases as you turn the dial further RESET key Resets values that you have changed using the jog or shuttle dial SELECT key Activates the menu item that you have highlighted using the jog or shuttle dial Arrow keys keys Use these keys to shift the column position of the numerical value to be set by the jog or shuttle dial SNAP SHOT key Section 4 5 Repeats acquisition while retaining the currently displayed waveform on the screen CLEAR TRACE key Section 4 5 Deletes the currently displayed waveform
339. nd Waveform 500 kW 1 MByte 11 93 s Waveform 8 MW 16 MByte 268 55 s Serv U 2 5e corresponding to seek command Waveform 500 kW 1 MByte 4 06 s Waveform 8 MW 16 MByte 169 17 s Surveyed value of History All roading time Tiny FTPD 0 52a corresponding to seek command Waveform 1024 sheets 3 604 09 s Serv U 2 5e corresponding to seek command Waveform 1024 sheets 1 639 87 s Operating Procedure 1 Press the MISC key 2 Pressthe Network soft key to display the Network menu 3 Pressthe User Account soft key to display the account settings menu 2000 07 06 10 34 25 j fio Normal Netuork Stopped 16234 y 200kS s 5msA Network K ll TCP IP TCP IP Setup Setup Calibration SCSI ID User E a 3 User Account i Account ay L User Account Mail Setup User Name Setup g Passuord Network e Net Drive Net Drive Setup Time Out sec Setup Net Print Net Print Setup Setup L System Conf ig Quervieu Next 12 Others E Others L co 38 4s oB art LE A CH tod Edge CHI 5 00 Urdiv Auto Connect DC Full 0 10 V Log List 4 Move the cursor to User Name using the jog shuttle then press the SELECT key to display the keyboard 5 Follow the pr
340. ndows Triad 3 waveform windows Mapping Auto Windows are arranged from top to bottom in order CH1 CH2 Math1 Math2 But no windows are shown for channels for which display is set OFF Fixed Channels are displayed regardless of whether display is set ON or OFF in order of channel number The Math2 window is at the bottom with the Math window directly above it 1 User Assign numbers from 0 to 5 to CH1 CH2 Math1 and Math2 The display position varies depending on the assigned numbers CH1 02a CH2 Fixed If CH3 OFF Auto If CH3 OFF User The number of points that can be displayed vertically for each channel varies as follows according to the display format However the vertical resolution remains unchanged Single 384 240 points Quad 96 60 points Dual E3 192 120 points Hexa El 64 40 points Triad E 128 80 points The value inside the parentheses applies when logic inputs are being displayed The display area of the login input is as follows When either POD A or POD B is ON 144 points When both POD A and POD B are ON 72 points x 2 IM 701410 01E 8 1 8 1 Changing the Display Format Operating Procedure 1 Pressthe DISPLAY key 2 Pressing the Format soft key displays the format menu 3 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired format 19
341. ndows is not displayed When the target waveform is not displayed 863 The zone waveform does not exist Display the zone waveform Section 9 12 864 The zone is being edited To perform other Select Quit to exit zone editing Section 9 12 operations select Quit to exit zone editing 865 Zones determination is not possible in the Display the main window and the target window Section 9 12 following cases and create the zone waveform When the main window is not displayed When the target waveform is not displayed When the zone waveform does not exist 868 Processing statistics To perform other Abort statistical processing Section 9 3 operations abort the statistical processing 869 Cannot be specified Increase the number of data bytes 8 32 8 37 Invalid byte or bit 870 Cannot be set when CS channels are not Select a CS channel 8 29 to 8 31 specified 8 35 System Operation Errors 900 to 908 912 to 914 Code Message Corrective Action Reference Page 901 Backup failure Check the condition of the built in lithium battery using the overview screen Servicing is required 906 Fan stopped Turn OFF the power immediately Turn off immediately Servicing is required 907 Backup battery is flat Servicing is required to replace the battery 912 Fatal error in Communication driver Servicing is required Note When servicing is required double check by initializing the instrument 15 6 IM 701410 01E 1
342. ng the T Y amp X Y format are displayed in accordance with the Format setting specified with the DISPLAY key The zoom function applies only to T Y waveforms In addition Main Z1 or Z2 can be selected for the T Y waveform display When expanding the X Y waveform change the Variable parameter of each channel The waveform can be expanded or reduced artificially 8 10 IM 701410 01E 8 7 X Y Waveform Display Operating Procedure 1 Press the SHIFT key to set the keys in the shifted condition Functions marked in purple on the panel become active 2 Press the DISPLAY key Selecting the display format 3 Press the Mode soft key to display the mode selection menu 4 Prees the T Y X Y or T Y amp X Y soft key to set the mode 1999 67 66 11 19 43 j Nornal Stopped 695 B5 kS s 2ns4i X Y iv cur Bao 0 Mode a ingie Select Em e Display OFF pry X Trace CH1 10 1 CHZ 10 1 Edge CH1 4 Start Point Auto 20 0 U div 5 00 Wdiv 5 00d iu DC Full DC Full 7 2 V End Point L 5 00d iu Continve with steps 5 12 below if you selected X Y or T Y amp X Y Selecting the X axis mode 5 Press the X Axis soft key to select Single or Dual Selecting the X Y waveform 6 Pressthe Select soft key to
343. ng the selected file or directory iem marks on every file in Specifying the file to be displayed in the File List dialog box You can specify the type of files to display e extension Displays only the data file that was selected in the File Item setting menu and the data type menu e Displays all the files on the medium 11 28 IM 701410 01E 11 11 Changing the File Attributes Deleting Files Properties Lists the file name extension file size the date it was saved the attributes and the comment for the selected file Note You cannot delete files while data acquisition is in progress Deleted data cannot be recovered Make sure not to erase the wrong files Directories can be deleted if there are no files in them e If an error occurs while deleting multiple files the files after the error will not be deleted Directory attributes cannot be changed This function can not be used in conjunction with FTP server function FTP client function or LPR client function Operating Procedure 1 Pressthe FILE key 2 Pressthe Utility soft key to display the utility setting menu and the file list dialog box Selecting the destination medium directory The procedures are the same as steps 13 to 17 in section 11 6 Saving Loading Waveform Data Changing the file attributes 3 Turn the jog shuttle to select a file 4 Pressing the Attr soft key changes the attribution of the selected file 5 Pressing
344. nit can be set arbitrarily using up to four characters The specified characters are reflected in the scale values Smoothing See section 9 9 Smoothing Maximum record length DL7100 2 MWord 4 MWord interleave mode ON DL7200 4 MWord 8 MWord interleave mode ON Operating Procedure Turning the display ON OFF 1 Pressthe MATH key 2 Pressthe Math1 Display soft key and select ON to display Math1 and OFF to not display Math1 Setting the operator 3 Pressthe Math1 Setup soft key to display the computation dialog box 2000 06 19 15 49 00 fio Normal Stopped 1346 5HS s 200usAiw MATH 1 Mathi Setup Mathi Display pom Operation Bin M Mathi Setup l alll Source CH1 BintC1 Scale Puto Manual Mathi Label Upper Mathi Louer 0000E 00 unit Smoothing N Hathe Display Thr Upper _ 6 00 U_ DFF ON E GUS Thr Lower 6 60 U M Math Setup XZ 880 0us eo8X oso 1 6000NS C3 C4 14x 625 0000Hz aE 4 CHI 10 1 Edge CHI MathZ Label 5 00 Urdiv Auto DC Full Hathz amp 9 24 IM 701410 01E 9 5 Binary Computation 4 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Operation 5 Pressing the SELECT key displays the operator setting menu 6 Turn the jog shuttle to select Bin and press the SELECT key Selecting the channel on which to perform comp
345. nnector type Output level Output logic Output delay time Output hold time BNC TTL negative logic 50 ns max 1 us min for low level 100 ns min for high level RGB video signal output RGB VIDEO OUT Connector type Output type D Sub 15 pin socket VGA compatible Logic input optional Logic probe Connector type Maximum toggle frequency Number of inputs Maximum input voltage Maximum sampling rate 700985 8 bits input Half pitch 26 pin 80 MHz 16 Using two logic probes 40 V DC AC peak or 28 Vrms 1 kHz or less When the interleave mode is ON 1 GS s DL7100 2 GS s DL7200 When the interleave mode is OFF 500 MS s DL7100 Threshold level Threshold accuracy Minimum input voltage Input resistance Preset threshold 1 GS s DL7200 10 V 0 1 V setting resolution 0 1 V 3 of the setting 500 mVp p approx 1 MQ approx 15 pF TTL 1 4 V ECL 1 3V Power connectors for the probes Number of output Output voltage Usable probe 4 12 V FET probe 700939 Current probe 700937 701930 Differental probe 701920 1 The EXT TRIG IN terminal also operates as an EXT CLOCK IN terminal Specifications for external clock input appear on page 16 3 2 The input frequency range when used as a trigger gate is DC to 50 MHz 8 As measured under standard operating conditions see page 16 10 after warm up IM 7
346. nnel If the clock channel is not specified a trigger is activated depending on whether or not the combined conditions of the logic input are met POD A bito kJ yA is map ft fX fX j t povata f Lf POD A bit 3 cH SD AU a Trigger PODAbitoL H L H L H fL PODAbiti L H L H L H L H t PODAbit2 L H L H POD A bit 3 L H cH A A 45 E dE 45 544 When POD A bit 0 L POD A bit 1 L POD A bit2 H POD A bit 3 L True Clock CH1T Trigger Mode lt Section 6 1 gt Conditions for updating displayed waveforms are set The following five types of trigger mode are available Auto mode Displayed waveforms are updated each time a trigger is activated within a specified time approximately 100 ms referred to as the time out period and are updated automatically after each time out period Auto level mode Waveforms are displayed in the same way as in Auto mode if a trigger is activated within the time out period If no trigger is activated the center value of the amplitude of the trigger source page 1 7 is detected and the trigger level is changed automatically to this center value then a edge trigger is activated to update the displayed waveforms Half the amplitude Trigger level Amplitude Half the amplitude Normal mode Displayed waveforms are updated only when a trigger is activated Displayed waveforms will not be updated if no trigger is activated
347. noedsu pue eoueuojure y Punoouso qnoj 15 3 Self Diagnostic Test Self Test Operating Procedure Displaying the self test menu 1 Pressthe MISC key 2 Pressthe Next 1 2 soft key to display the self test soft key menu 3 Pressthe Self test soft key to display the self test menu Go to step 4 for a memory test step 9 for a key test step 13 for a printer test and step 16 for a floppy disk drive test a SCSI test or a accuracy test MISC Self Test Test Item NISC LCD Setup Information M Self Test ajl Self Test Calibration Key Board FDD Memory Communicat ion K SCSI ID M Graphic Color SCSI M System Config Printer Overview Accuracy L Test Exec Next 12 Next 272 PC CARD Execute the memory test 4 Press the Test Item soft key to display the test item menu 5 Press the soft key corresponding to the memory to be tested 6 Pressing the Test Exec soft key executes the memory test 1339 07 10 10 57 50 nok Normal L self Test seoesx Memory Test menea Test Item System Memory Main pat Pass ned Pass L Backup pat Pass med Pass ROM Pass Sun L Battery Pass Test Conpleted L Test Exec 4
348. ns how to set the display colors display language click sound and back light 15 Troubleshooting Gives troubleshooting advice explains screen Maintenance and messages and self test operation Inspection 16 Specifications Lists the unit s main specifications Appendix Appendix 1 shows the relationships between time axis sampling rate and record length Appendix 2 explains waveform area calculation Appendix 3 gives the format for ASCII file headers Appendix 4 presents a list of default settings Index Index of contents IM 701410 01E vii How to Use this Manual Conventions Used in this Manual Unit Kisses Denotes 1000 Example 100 kS s Kasesssiciass Denotes 1024 Example 720 KB storage capacity of a floppy disk Used Characters Alphanumerics enclosed in double quotation marks usually refer to characters and set values that appear on the screen and panel The SHIFT xxx key refers to first pressing the SHIFT key the indicator above the SHIFT key lights and then pressing the xxx key to obtain another specified function Note The following symbol marks are used to attract the operator s attention Affixed to the instrument indicating that for safety the operator N should refer to the User s Manual Describes precautions that should be observed to prevent the danger of injury or death to the user CAUTION Describes precautions that should be observed to prevent damage to the instrum
349. nt value X of cursor or automated measurements Linear scaling is useful when applying a voltage divider ratio to the measurement values Linear scaling is also handy when you want to your scope to automatically convert the measured voltage results into the for example current or temperature measurement unit of your signal Source Y UNIT AX B Y result of linear scaling Cursor Measurements lt Section 9 1 gt You can use the following cursor types to analyze the waveform data V cursors Vertical Two vertical broken lines V cursors are displayed The time from the trigger position to each V cursor and the time difference between the V cursors are measured In addition the voltage of the signal at each cursor position and the voltage difference between the cursors are measured H cursors Horizontal Two horizontal broken lines H cursors are displayed The values in the vertical direction of each H cursor and the difference between the two are measured Marker cursors Markers Use this feature to place one or two markers onto the waveform You can then read the voltage value and time value relative to trigger position at each marker and the voltage difference and time span between the markers Angle Cursors Degree Set the measurement zero point and the end point and then using the angle corresponding to the width between the two as a reference measure the angle of the two angle cursors For V cursors Curs
350. ntering customized labels You can use the Define Label feature to enter customized labels for each channel Each label is a character string of up to eight alphanumerics You can set the label display ON OFF using the Trace Label function the label appears in the scale value display and with measurement results Operating Procedure Setting the waveform label 1 Press one of the keys from CH1 to CH4 or TLOG to select the desired channel 2 Pressthe Next 1 2 soft key to display the Next 2 2 menu 3 Press the Label soft key to display a keyboard and enter the waveform label according to the procedures described in page 4 2 2000 07 28 09 30 24 pio Normal Stopped 2873 F 200kS s 5nmsAi MP Position O1 IQ Variable 5 00 U Linear Scale AX B on L Coupling DciMo i Probe 10 1 L Offset L CHi 10 1 5 00 U diu DC Full aL Turning ON OFF the waveform label 4 Press DISPLAY key 5 Pressthe Trace Label soft key to select ON or OFF 1999 07 66 11 19 15 j gtk Normal Stopped 50kS s 2ns li DISPLAY et E Format SET Dual Interpolation Sine Ay Graticule El Scale Ualue OFF pn Trace Label OFF pn Accumulate 2 000 V E H H 10 00ns CHI 10 1 CHZ 10 1 Edge CHI 20 0 Urd
351. nts from the specified Start point an FFT is performed and the power spectrum is displayed Selecting the time window Window Select from the following windows Rect rectangular Best suited to transient signals that attenuate completely within the time window Hanning Hanning Best suited to continuous and non periodic signals Flattop flat top Best suited when you wish to improve the accuracy of the level even if the frequency resolution is to be compromised Notes when displaying power spectrums Cannot be executed if the displayed record length is less than number of computation points Point Maximum record length DL7100 2 MWord 4 MWord interleave mode ON DL7200 4 MWord 8 MWord interleave mode ON Operating Procedure Turning ON OFF the display 1 Pressthe MATH key 2 Pressthe Math1 Display soft key and select ON to display Math1 and OFF to not display Math1 Setting the operator 3 Pressthe Math1 Setup soft key to display the computation dialog box 2000 06 19 09 47 1424 fio Normal 36 5HS s 200usAiw MATH Mathi Setup Mathi Display Stopped 19 l m o Operation PS K Mathi Setup Source CH1 Invert C1 diL Scale Lauto Hanual Mathi Label Upper Mathi Louer L 2 0800E 01 unit L l Hathe Display Start Point L 5 000div DFF ON FFT Points M Math Setup i amp FFT
352. nu CHI 10 1 CHZ 10 1 Edge CH1 20 0 U div 5 00 U div Auto DC Full DC Full eM L IM 701410 01E 11 5 Changing the SCSI ID Number Function The SCSI ID number is used to distinguish between the various devices connected to the SCSI chain Make sure not to use duplicate ID numbers on any of the connected devices Range of SCSI ID numbers Select this instrument s ID Own ID from the range 0 to 7 The default ID is 7 Note e Assign numbers that are different from the ID numbers of the external SCSI devices attached to the instrument When changing the SCSI ID number make sure to press the Initialize SCSI soft key The SCSI ID numbers of external SCSI devices are automatically detected at power up e Ifan ID number is changed make sure to execute Initialize SCSI in order to detect the new ID number Operating Procedure Press the MISC key Pressing the SCSI ID soft key displays the SCSI number setting menu Press the Own ID soft key Turn the jog shuttle to select a value from 0 to 7 Press the Initialize SCSI soft key The ID number is changed to the new number An icon blinks at the upper right of the screen while the change is being made When the change is complete the icon disappears 9v Rog m vt 1999 07 67 10 00 16 Nornal Stopped 94 y BOkS s ZnsA SCSI ID n BEY Ti B oun ID JL Calibration Communicatio
353. numbers result 2 is newer than result 1 8 20 IM 701410 01E 8 9 Search Data Using Search and Zoom Function When searching using a serial pattern 1 Press the SHIFT key to set the keys in the shifted condition Functions marked in purple on the panel become active 2 Press the ZOOM key Selecting the search method Type 3 Pressing the Type soft key displays the search method menu 4 Press the soft key corresponding to SerialPattern to select the search method Setting the search conditions 5 Pressing the Setup soft key displays the search condition setting dialog box Turn the jog shuttle to select the parameter Pressing the SELECT key displays a menu used to set the item or changes the selected item 1999 07 66 11 19 43zq tk Nornal Stopped y ZkS s 50nsAi SEARCH eRT EX Setup Type M Clock CH SerialPattern Interval Setup Result Window Source Ev zz Thr Upper O 21 Mag xo Thr Lower Pattern a 5 c n Z1 Position 9 00diu a 8 16 24 ZZ Position HXXXXXXX XXXNXXXX XXXXKXXX XXXXXXXX 9 00d iv 3 Searched XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX Pattern No Match Clear Pattern i5 tne 20 00 v 20 0 Urdiv 5 00 Urdiv Start Point 5 00div Exec DC Full DC Full Setting the Clock CH 6 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the clock channel and press the
354. o 1 k V div 0 2 V div to 0 1 kV div 1000 1 2 V div to 10 k V div 2 Vidiv to 1 kV div Setting the V div using the Variable parameter in the CH menu You can set the V div using a resolution that is finer than the resolution provided by the V div knob and vertically expand or reduce the displayed waveform The waveform acquisition can be started with the changed V div setting Range The following table shows the range when the probe attenuation setting is 10 1 V div setting with V div knob Setting range of variable Setting resolution 20 mV 2 0 mV to 50 0 mV 0 2 mV 50 mV 5 0 mV to 100 0 mV 0 5 mV 100 mV 10 mV to 200 mV 1mV 200 mV 20 mV to 500 mV 2 mV 500 mV 50 mV to 1000 mV 5 mV 1V 0 10 V to 2 00 V 0 01 V 2V 0 20 V to 5 00 V 0 02 V 5V 0 50 V to 10 00 V 0 05 V 10V 1 0 V to 20 0 V 01V 20 V 2 0 V to 50 0 V 0 2 V 50V 5 0 V to 100 0 V 0 5 V 100V 10 V to 200 V 1V When the probe attenuation is 1 1 100 1 and 1000 1 the values are 1 10 10 and 100 times respectively Operating Procedure Setting the V div using the V div knob 1 Press one of the keys from CH1 to CH4 to select the channel 2 Turn the V DIV knob to set the V div value Note Changing the V DIV setting while the waveform acquisition is stopped will not change the displayed waveform The new V div value takes effect the next time waveform acquisition is started When the waveform acquisition is stopped the
355. o Don t care then the trigger occurs only on the True False condition Enter Exit of the parallel pattern The parallel pattern is the AND of the channel states of each channel Trigger occurs on the width of the True False condition of the parallel pattern that is specified on multiple trigger sources The parallel pattern is the AND of the channel states of each channel or the AND of the window conditions of each channel Pulse Time Triggers when the width above is greater than Time Pulse Time Triggers when the width above is less than Time T1 Pulse T2 Triggers when the width above is greater than T1 and less than T2 Time Out Triggers when the width above exceeds Time Time range 1nsto1s Time accuracy 0 5 of setting 1 ms Minimum detectable time 2 ns typical value Trigger for video signal in NTSC PAL or HDTV studio high vision format Input channel must be CH1 User can select field no and line no Trigger occurs when the logic condition is met or on Edge OR condition of the analog inputs while the logic condition is being met The logic condition is the parallel pattern set using High Low and Don t care across POD A and B 16 inputs Conditions A and B are parallel pattern conditions that are set separately to High Low or Don t care for each channel CH1 to CH4 and for EXT input Trigger gate The trigger is activated only when the trigger conditions
356. o End Record 4 Press the Display Mode soft key to select One or All Go to step 5 if you selected All Otherwise go to step 8 Setting the accumulation range when Display Mode is ALL 5 Press the Start Record soft key 6 Turn the jog shuttle to set the first record number to be accumulated 7 In a similar fashion set the End Record 1999 07 05 21 07 00 gtk Normal Stopped 1 q 100kS s ins li HISTORY cr 82 0 V KC Maine gt gt E Select Recors l o Display Mode One j Start Record a L End Record Show Map Search Mode L OFF L 2 000 V d 5 00s CHI 10 1 CHZ 10 1 Edge CHI 20 0 Udiy 6 506 Urdiu SingletN DC Full DC Full 10 2 V L Display a list of time stamps 8 Pressing the Show Map soft key displays a list of acquired data numbers and the trigger time 1999 07 05 21 07 00 St History Memory Map t 0000 21 16 13 92 1 060025 21 16 13 64 x 91 14 0026 21 16 13 63 l 0027 21 16 13 62 0028 21 16 13 61 Display Mode pne ALL 0031 21 16 13 5 0032 21 16 13 56 eStart Record 3 0033 21 16 13 55 14 0034 21 16 13 54 14 0035 21 16 13 53 L L Show Map 14 0039 21 16 13 48 1 004060 21 16 13 4 Search Mode 0041 21 16 13 46 0042 21 16 13 45 0043 21 16 13 44 1 15 0044 21 16 13 11 0045 21 16 13 11 0046 21 16 13 41 8 4 004 21 16 13 40
357. o change without prior notice as a result of improvements in the instrument s performance and functions Display contents illustrated in this manual may differ slightly from what actually appears on your screen Every effort has been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure the accuracy of its contents However should you have any questions or find any errors please contact your nearest YOKOGAWA representative listed on the back cover of this manual Copying or reproduction of all or any part of the contents of this manual without YOKOGAWA s permission is strictly prohibited A guarantee card is attached to the instrument The card will not be reissued so please read it carefully and keep it in a safe place The TCP IP software of this product and the document concerning the TCP IP software have been developed created by YOKOGAWA based on the BSD Networking Software Release 1 that has been licensed from California University Microsoft MS DOS Windows and Windows NT are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Adobe Adobe Acrobat and PostScript are trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated For purposes of this manual the TM and symbols do not accompany their respective trademark names or registered trademark names All other company and product names used in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of t
358. o discoloration or deformation 3 2 IM 701410 01E 3 2 Installation A WARNING Do not place the oscilloscope on its back T D C L O x Installation Conditions The instrument must be installed in a place where the following conditions are met Flat horizontal location Set the oscilloscope in the proper direction and in a level and stable place If placed in an uneven or unstable place printing quality decreases Note that the oscilloscope can be tilted forwards on the stand Well ventilated location Vent holes are situated on the bottom In addition vent holes for the cooling fans are also situated on the left sides To prevent a rise in the internal temperature the vent holes should not be blocked and sufficient clearance should be maintained around them If your unit includes an internal printer leave additional space 5 cm or more 10 cm or more CN IM 701410 01E 3 3 esp Buung suonneoaJqd B 3 2 Installing Ambient temperature and humidity Ambient temperature 5 to 40 C Ambient humidity 20 to 8096 RH when not using the printer 35 to 8096 RH when using the printer No condensation should be allowed Note To ensure high measurement accuracy the instrument should only be used under the following conditions Ambient temperature 23 2 C Ambient humidity 55
359. o display the output command type menu 6 Press the soft key corresponding to the type of command to be selected 1999 08 62 16 03 29 j fio Normal Stopped 291 q 100MS s 1OHsiw COPY car 4 00 V i d Copy to CUPY Copy to Centronics amp E Centronics Fornat B S a d s ESC P ESC P H i Color ESC PZ Comment Ls0 dus 80 0 V CHI 1 1 CHZ 10 1 1 00 Udiy 26 6 Udi DC Full DC Full Setting the color 7 Press the Color soft key to select ON or OFF Setting comments 8 Press the Comment soft key to display a keyboard 9 Enter comments according to the procedures described in page 4 2 IM 701410 01E 10 7 ejeq ueaJ2S jo 1ndino H 10 3 Outputting Screen Image to an External Printer Connector Setting the Resolution 10 Prees the Resolution soft key to display the resolution setting menu 11 Set the resolution by pressing the soft key for 180 dpi 300 dpi or 360 dpi About 300 dpi applicable to DL7100 with software ROM version 1 21 or later See section 15 4 Checking the System Condition Note If you select NDO in File List you can output Network Executing the printout 12 Pressing the COPY key outputs a hard copy of the screen Pressing the COPY key again aborts the output 10 8 IM 701410 01E 10 4 Storing Screen Im
360. o the measurement screen IM 701410 01E 14 5 suone4edo 19410 B Function TRIG GATE IN Terminal 14 4 Setting the Trigger Gate The trigger gate is used to set the timing to enable the specified trigger conditions OFF Active High Active Low Waveforms are acquired when the trigger conditions are met When the external signal is Low waveforms are not acquired even if the trigger conditions are met When the external signal is High waveforms are acquired when the trigger conditions are met When the external signal is High waveforms are not acquired even if the trigger conditions are met When the external signal is Low waveforms are acquired when the trigger conditions are met When trigger gate is active AB N trigger and A delay B trigger can not be specified Level High and low are determined based on the external trigger level See page 6 8 The external signal is applied to the terminal on the rear panel that is shared between external triggers external clock and trigger gate EXT CLOCK IN EXT TRIG IN A TRIG GATE IN 40 V MAX 1M2 The EXT TRIG IN terminal or EXT CLOCK IN terminal is also used as a trigger gate terminal If you wish to enable the trigger using an external signal apply an external signal to this terminal Specifications Connector type BNC Maximum input voltage 40 V DC ACpeak or 28 Vrms when the frequency is less Frequency range Input im
361. ocedure on page 4 2 of the instruction manual and enter the user name If you do not wish to limit access use the anonymous setting If access is to be limited enter a user name of 15 characters or less 6 Move the cursor to Password using the jog shuttle then press the SELECT key to display the keyboard IM 701410 01E 13 15 jeuond o suoneoiunuuuio 19uJ9u13 H 13 8 Accessing DL7100 DL7200 Drives from a Personal computer or Workstation 7 Follow the procedure on page 4 2 of the user s manual and enter the password Enter the same password again If the user name is set to anonymous it is not necessary to enter a password 8 Move the cursor to Timeout using the jog shuttle then press the SELECT key 9 Enterthe Timeout time using the jog shuttle If the DL7100 DL7200 is not being accessed at the Timeout time the connection to the network will be automatically closed 10 Execute the FTP client software from a Personal computer or workstation Perform file operations using the username specified in step 5 11 When you press the Connection Logging List soft key the 25 most recent access times user names and IP addresses are displayed 2000 07 06 19 12 38 p Normal 642 zo Network Stopped OkS s 5nsAL Network E Connection Logging List TCP IP Setup TCP IP tm onmnection Logging List Test Char Setup User Account User Account ale Mail Setup
362. ock channel while the status pattern match condition is not satisfied CH1 input i i CH2 input l l l i CH3 input F f IPattern not Pattern not Pattern matched Pattern matched matehed gt lt matched Trigger condition met CH1 H CH2 L CH4 X CH3 Clock CH Condition True IM 701410 01E HunebbuL H 6 10 Setting the Pattern Trigger ENHANCED Setting the trigger level Range 8 div within the screen Resolution 0 01 div For example the resolution is 0 02 mV when the V DIV setting is 2 mV div Sets a width to the trigger level so that the trigger is not activated on small changes JN Approximately 0 3 div of hysteresis around the trigger level ZZ Approximately 1 div of hysteresis around the trigger level The value above are estimated values They are not strictly guaranteed Setting the trigger coupling Select from the following list of choices AC Uses a signal that is obtained by removing the DC component from the trigger Source signal as the trigger signal DC Uses the trigger source signal as the trigger signal Turning the HF rejection ON OFF Select 15 kHz or 20 MHz when you wish to use a signal source that is obtained by removing the high frequency components frequency components greater than or equal to approximately 15 kHz or 20 MHz from the trigger signal as the trigger source Setting
363. od is most suitable for measuring square waves and pulse waves MAX MIN The maximum and minimum values within the measurement range are set to High and Low respectively This method is most suitable for measuring sine waves and saw waves It is not suited to the measurement of waveforms that have ringing and spikes Setting the distal proximal and mesial values Distal Prox Mode Select the appropriate method to set the two levels that are to be used as reference for such measurements as rise and fall times 96 The distal mesial and proximal values are set in terms of percentages when High of any trace CH1 to CH4 Math1 Math2 and Low are taken to be 100 and 0 respectively Unit Set the distal mesial and proximal values of any trace CH1 to CH4 Math1 Math2 to arbitrary voltage values Setting the measurement range Time Range With the default setting the 5 div of the time axis display frame is the measurement range However this range can be shortened The measurement range is set using two vertical cursors The position of the fine dashed line is the measurement start point and the position of the coarse dashed line is the end point 9 10 IM 701410 01E 9 2 Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters Measurement Parameters Items You can select among the 26 types of measurement parameters shown below and delay between channel Up to 24000 combinations of parameters of all traces CH1 to CH4 Math1 Math2
364. ogic Logic AND Searches for waveforms that meet all search conditions from Zone1 to Zone4 OR Searches for waveforms that meet any one of the search conditions from Zone to Zone4 Search order The search is carried out from the newest waveform to the oldest waveform Show Map A list of time stamps Only the waveforms that are found are displayed in Show Map If the Search Mode is turned OFF all waveforms are displayed IM 701410 01E 7 15 Aejdsig pue uonisinboy 7 8 Searching the Historical Data Using Zone History Search Function Operating Procedure Selecting the search mode 1 Pressthe HISTORY key 2 Pressing the Search Mode soft key displays the search mode selection menu 3 Press the soft key corresponding to Zone f HISTORY Select Record e Display Mode One Ald HISTORY i HISTORY Select Recori Select Record Display Mode Display Mode Search Setup Select Zune Zonei Conditian l OFF OUT Start Record eStart Record Start Record n a 0 End Record End Record MP End Record cu 47 47 a Ae Upper Show Map Shou Map Show Map P 0 20m iu D Louer Search Mode _ Search Mode i 2 ae 2 20div OFF Zone M Right 9 90d iu Search Se
365. ombine data from PodA and PodB and treat it as 16 bit data If there is an OFF bit it is displayed as for data that was originally binary and omitted for data that was originally base 16 Applicable to DL7100 with software ROM version 1 11 or later See section 15 4 Checking the System Condition 9 2 IM 701410 01E 9 1 Measuring Waveforms Using Cursors An Example of Cursor Measurement V Cursor Cursor 1 Cursor 2 2 7 a 3 eal 4 l l 5 EN h In the above example when the arrangement of the data is A0 A7 BO B7 Binary Y1 01001010 Y2 10110010 Hexadecimal Y1 4A Y2 B2 When the arrangement is B7 BO A7 AO Binary Y1 01010010 Y2 01001101 Hexadecimal Y1 52 Y2 4D The following is an example with the occurrence of an OFF bit Cursor 1 Cursor 2 0 1 3 4 i E 7 When the arrangement is AO A7 BO B7 Binary Y1 01 01 10 Y2 10 10 10 Hexa Y1 16 Y2 2A When the arrangement is B7 BO A7 A0 Binary Y1 01 10 10 Y2 01 01 01 Hexa Y1 1A Y2 15 9 3 sisAjeuy u1J0JOAEAA jo 9 1 Measuring Waveforms Using Cursors The following is an example showing combined data Cursor
366. omment You can output a comment string consisting of up to 20 characters at the bottom section of the screen 10 6 IM 701410 01E 10 3 Outputting Screen Image to an External Printer Connector Color Select the color mode ON Outputs using the same image color as the screen except no background grids are output in black OFF Outputs using the same image as printing with the built in printer Notes when outputting screen images to external printers Proper printing may not be possible on some printers If printing does not work after checking and adjusting the printer settings contact the printer manufacturer You can also print to an external printer connected to a PC To do so save the screen image data to a floppy disk as described in section 10 4 Storing Screen Image to the Recording Medium Then load the data on the PC and print the information Note The DL7100 DL7200 does not recognize paper shortages and printer errors of the external printer If you print in such conditions press the COPY key to abort the printing Operating Procedure Selecting the Centronics 1 Press the SHIFT key to set the keys in the shifted condition Functions marked in purple on the panel become active 2 Press the COPY key Press the Copy to soft key to display the output medium menu 4 Press the soft key corresponding to Centronics e Selecting the type 5 Press the Format soft key t
367. on Position L ae 9 90diu 0 90diu Coupling Coupling pcino DCiMo zenHz EE 160HHz 3 E Full i n 2 000 V 5 0009 pes CHI 10 1 CHZ 10 1 Edge CH1 20 0 Urdiv 0 500 U diu Auto Next DC Full DC Full EN 12 1 Banduidth l Full L l Note The bandwidth is set for each channel Set the bandwidth on all necessary channels 5 8 IM 701410 01E 5 8 Setting V div Function lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 3 gt The V div voltage axis sensitivity setting is used to adjust the amplitude of the displayed waveform so that the waveform can be observed easily The V div setting is made by setting the voltage value per division on the screen grid There are two methods available in setting the V div Setting the V div using the V div knob The settings are 1 V div 2 V div 5 V div and their tenfold multiples This setting will become the reference for the range that can be set using the Variable parameter described next and the resolution Vidiv setting range The V div setting range for each probe attenuation value is shown in the table below Probe attenuation Setting range DC 1 MQ Setting range DC 50 1 1 2 mV div to 10 V div 2 mV div to 1 V div 10 1 20 mV div to 0 1 kV div 20 mV div to 10 V div 100 1 0 2 V div t
368. on s n i Eo eo Pene RE MADRE 9 24 Inverting the Waveform Display eseenneenm emen 9 26 Differentiating and Integrating Waveforms sse 9 28 Displaying the Power Spectrum sesssseeeeeneeeeeneee nennen nennen 9 30 Smoothibig s coe race eet e URL ovo LS Motus MEUS cte Eh ee 9 32 Phase Shifted Display 2 cte ei i tee Eee ta rea tte e etd Po tod 9 33 GO NO GO Operation Using the Measurement of Waveform Parameters 9 34 GO NO GO Determination Using Zones ssseeeeneneeene 9 38 Chapter 10 Output of Screen Data 10 1 Loading Paper Roll in Built in Printer Optional eene 10 1 10 2 Outputting to the Built in Printer Optional esee 10 3 AN 10 3 Outputting Screen Image to an External Printer Connector sssssssssss 10 6 10 4 Storing Screen Image to the Recording Storage Medium sseesssss 10 9 Chapter 11 Data Saves and Loads the Recording Medium Ti CFPloppy BIsks uii en Reve Rer UR RPER 11 1 A 11 2 PC Card Optional sss ennt nennen rnnt 11 2 11 8 Connecting MO Disk Drives or Hard Disks to the SCSI Port sssssss 11 3 AN 11 4 Formatting the Recording Medium ssssssssssssseeeeeeeeennen enne 11 4 11 5 Changing the SCSI ID Number sse 11 9 AN 11 6 Saving Loading Waveform Data ccsccecce
369. on means resetting parameters to their factory setting values For details on factory settings refer to the Appendix Settings which cannot be initialized Date and time Communication interface related settings SCSI ID number except when initializing at power up or initializing with the SHIFT INITIALIZE keys Cancelling initialization If you have performed initialization by mistake press the Undo soft key This will restore the previous settings used before the initialization was performed Initialization at power ON Turning the power switch ON while holding down the RESET key will start initialization This also initializes settings relating to the communication interface and SCSI ID number setting If settings are initialized using this method you will not be able to restore the previous settings Operating Procedure Performing initialization 1 Pressthe INITIALIZE key 2 Press the Initialize soft key to start initialization 1999 67 63 10 30 41 j fio Normal 55 iMS s Insfliv__ INITIALIZE Initialize Stopped ICHT LIAE L Z L LS 000s 2 000 V i d 5 000m CHI 10 1 CHZ 10 1 Edge Ext 20 0 Urdiv 0 500 U diu Auto DC Full DC Full 0 000 V 4 Canceling initialization 3 Pressthe Undo soft key This will restore the previous settings that were in effect before initialization Note The Undo operation remains availab
370. on the medium Selecting the copy source files You can copy all files that have a mark to the left of the file name There are two methods available to select the files that are to be copied iem Selecting the files one at a time Place marks to the left of the file names one at a time using the Set Reset soft key Selecting all files at once Selecting a file or directory and pressing the All Set key places the directory containing the selected file or directory ien marks on every file in Specifying the file to be displayed in the File List dialog box You can specify the type of files to display e extension Displays only the data file that was selected in the File Item setting menu and the data type menu e Displays all the files on the medium Properties Lists the file name extension file size the date it was saved the attributes and the comment for the selected file Note You cannot copy files while the data acquisition is in progress e If an error occurs while copying multiple files the files after the error will not be copied Directory attributes cannot be changed Ifa file with the same name exists at the destination copying is not allowed You cannot copy the same files to another directory immediately after copying those files You must again select the files you wish to copy This function can not be used in conjunction with FTP server function FTP client
371. once If you select Copy to All Trace you can copy the current settings to all of the traces Press the SELECT key to turn ON the item 9 20 IM 701410 01E 9 3 Statistical Processing 8 Repeat steps 5 7 as many times as necessary Press the ESC key to return to the automatic measurement mode selection menu The other settings are the same as for normal automatic measurement 9 Press the Measure Exec soft key to execute the statistical processing Press the key again to stop the statistical processing 10 Press the Show Result soft key to list the statistical processing results Use the arrow keys to scroll the list horizontally and the jog shuttle to scroll it vertically Press the Max Min Item1 Max Min Item4 soft keys to move the cursor to the maximum and minimum values of each parameter From the left side of the displayed parameter is Item1 Item2 Item3 and Item4 Press the SELECT key to list the history waveform indicated by the cursor IM 701410 01E 9 21 sisAjeuy u1J0JOAEAA ol 9 4 Adding Subtracting and Multiplying Function Waveforms lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 22 gt Addition subtraction and multiplication can be performed between the following channels Math1 CH1 CH1 to CH4 CH2 CH1 to CH4 Math2 CH3 CH1 to CH4 Math1 CH4 CH1 to CH4 Math1 Math1 and Math2 can be computed simultaneously computed wavefo
372. ontal axis is 10 divisions 1 div 500 us 1 div 1 ms lt w lt 10 div Note Display of time axis direction The sampled data is read into the acquisition memory and a waveform is displayed based on this data The number of data stored into the acquisition memory differs depending on settings such as time axis settings trigger mode and acquisition mode The number of display lines in the time axis direction on a 10 div screen is 500 lines Processing therefore varies according to record length as described immediately below for more details on the relation between time axis acquisition mode record length of acquisition memory and displayed record length refer to Appendix 1 If displayed record length exceeds number of screen display points multiple data points are connected with a line and displayed at the same time axis position If displayed record length is less than number of screen display points the oscilloscope interpolates the data to generate the display See section 1 4 Sampling data Record length of acquisition memory uM n o _ Display record length E o o o o S gt x 500 lines Time axis 500 Relationship betwe
373. operly after taking the following corrective actions contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer as listed on the back cover of this manual Problem Possible Cause Corrective Action Reference Page The power cannot be turned ON The source voltage is outside the rated range Use a correct power supply 3 5 Nothing is displayed The backlight is turned OFF Press any key 14 5 The screen colors are not Select appropriate colors for the screen 14 1 appropriate The display is abnormal The system is not operating Turn ON the power again 3 6 correctly The waveform display is Loaded waveform data from an Unload the loaded waveform 11 16 not updated external storage medium Keys do not work The instrument is in the remote Press the SHIFT CLEAR TRACE key mode activate local mode Other causes Execute a key test If the test fails 15 7 servicing is required Triggering does not occur The trigger gate is enabled Turn OFF the trigger gate 14 6 The trigger settings are not Set correct trigger settings Chapter 6 appropriate The measured values are Did not allow adequate warm up Allow at least 30 minutes for the odd time instrument to warm up after turning ON the power The instrument has not been Perform calibration 4 9 calibrated The probe s phase has not been Correct the phase properly 3 7 corrected The probe attenuation is not Set to the correct value 5 4 correct An
374. or1 Cursor2 For Markers __Markert Marker3 1999 07 12 21 33 17 1 236 Ni 1 pa a ugue eom A ub ur ap Zoot lt lt Mains 10k gt gt nc CH ol Boao 7 lt lt Main 10k gt gt Marker4 Loo ee 18 BOQUS eB us AAK 100 00kHz 10 000us 5 66dous ER 8 B 3 E g 8 19 280095 W3 ue 0 0000U 12 800us py4 720 6250 10 0000 Full nic oome BNS v CHZ 10 1 Edge CHI CHI 18 1 CH2 10 1 Edge CHI 5 00 Urdiv Normal 5 00 Urdiu 5 00 Urdiv Normal DC Full 9 20 U DC Full DC Full 9 20 U Measurement value Measurement value of coursor of coursor Automated Measurements lt Sections 9 2 and 9 3 gt Automatic measurement of waveform parameters Section 9 2 This feature automatically measures selected waveform parameters such as rise time and pulse width You can select parameters separately for each channel although you are limited to a total of 12 parameters to display There are 27 parameters available for selection 1 20 IM 701410 01E 1 5 Analyzing the Waveform Statistical Processing Section 9 3 Statistical processing is performed on the automated measured values described above The following five statistics are determined on the two measured values of automated measurement parameters Maximum valu e Minimum value Average value Standard deviation Number of measured values used in the statistical process
375. ou stop waveform acquisition by pressing the START STOP key sequential storage also stops It then restarts again from the beginning when acquisition resumes IM 701410 01E 7 5 7 3 Using Sequential Store Function Operating Procedure Setting the trigger mode Press the MODE key Press the Single N soft key to set the trigger mode to Single N Turn the jog shuttle to set the Single N Count 1 2 3 1999 67 65 21 07 00 jj Stopped cT ik Nornal 100kS s ins li MODE GA Auto futo Level Norma1 v Single Singlet Ls o0ms CHI 10 1 2 000 CHZ 10 1 20 0 Urdiv 6 506 Urdiu DC Full DC Full H 5 00ns Edge CHI SinglecN 10 2 V da Singlet Count l J 3E L L 7 6 IM 701410 01E 7 4 Box Average Mode Function lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 14 gt Under most conditions the instrument samples the input signal at a true internal sampling rate of 400 MS s for the DL7100 1GS s or 800 MS s during interleave mode or 1 GS s or 800 MS s for the DL7200 interleave mode ON or OFF extracts values from this sample stream at the effective sample rate required by the T div setting and writes the extracted values into the acquisition memory When you use box average mode however the operation is different Instead of pulling values from the sample stream th
376. ows you to make settings for a selected channel or for all channels at the same time Settings made by a preset TTL ECL Input coupling DC1MO DC1MQ Trigger coupling DC DC Probe 1 1 10 1 100 1 or 1000 1 is available Vidiv 1 V div 200 mV div Offset voltage 2 5V 1 3V Trigger level 1 4V 1 3V 1 2 Vidiv when probe setting is 1000 1 2 For details about the setting ranges see Sections 5 5 5 8 and 6 5 Current 700937 Current 701930 Input coupling DC 1MQ DC 1MQ Probe 1 1 1 1 Linear Scaling ON ON Linear Scaling Coefficient ValueA 1 0000E 01 ValueB 0 0000E 00 Units A Scale Value Display ON ValueA 1 0000E 02 ValueB 0 0000E 00 A ON 3 Supported by products with software ROM version 3 01 or later See section 15 4 Checking the System Condition Operating Procedure Selecting the channel 1 Press the PRESET key 2 Press the Select soft key to display the channel menu 3 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired channel Pressing All will select all the channels 1999 67 63 10 30 41 jj PRESET Stopped cat ick Normal iMS s insi PRESET Select S20 a L L L L 5 0nDms 2 000 V L L CHi 10 1 CHZ 10 1 20 0 Urdiv 0 500 U diu DC Full DC Full LL H ENTM Edge CHi Auto WEN L 5 6 IM
377. p between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length Record length 2 M words DL7100 When Mode other than Envelope Mode is Active Rep Repetitive sampling mode When Envelope Mode is Active Interleave mode OFF Interleave Mode ON Rep OFF Rep ON Rep OFF Rep ON Interleave mode OFF Interleave Mode ON Sample rate S s Displayed record len gth word Sample rate S s Displayed Sample record len rate gth word S s Displayed Sample record len rate gth word S s Displayed Sample record len rate gth word S s Displayed Sample record len rate gth word S s 5k 2 5 M 2 5k 2 5 M 5k 2 5 M 2 5k 2 5 M 2 400 M 2 5 M2 800 M 10k 2M 10k 2M 10k 2M 10k 2M 400 M 2M 800 M 20k 2M 20k 2M 20k 2M 20k 2M 400M 2M 800M Roll mode display 1 2 3 4 For the setting enclosed by the bold line repetitive sampling is active Because aqcquisition size is 2 MWords the waveform is displayed over 8 divisions of the time axis only Note that the trigger position setting percentage in this case with respect to the 8 division length 100 8 divisions 2 MWord model Box average cannot be specified 2 MWord model Record length
378. pe T WC I Vertical 2 Trace I vede 1 Pod A amp Pod B j o Normal ZO0kS s SMSi CURSOR Type I Vertical me 1 Trace Pod amp amp Pod B L Cursori 4 000div Cursorz 4 000div Cursori 4 000div Cursor2 4 000d iv 4 Logic Setup Format pimay Hea Order A0 gt A7 B0 B2 Logic Setup Logic Setup L XE BEBSBSSBE Cursor Jump XI HOO Cursor Jump L TOE Cursori to 21 Cursori to 21 ASEH HE Edge CHI Edge CHi F fiuta Jump Exec Auto Junp Exec 0 10 V 0 10 U 7 Move the cursor to Format using the jog shuttle 8 Pressthe SELECT key to choose either Binary or Hexa 9 Move the cursor to Order using the jog shuttle 10 Press the SELECT key to display the data order selection menu 11 Use the jog shuttle to choose a data order then press the SELECT key Note When the T div is not set to repetitive sampling mode and the averaging mode is not set to averaging mode the sampled data may not appear on the V cursor on the interpolated display area when less than 500 points of data exist within 10 divisions horizontally or when less than 250 points of data exist in the Z1Z2 display area for Main amp Z1 amp Z2 waveform zoom In this case the V cursor value indi
379. pecified time T1 Pulse T2 search the part in which the time that fulfills the conditions below lies between two specified times Timeout search the part in which the time that fulfills the conditions below lies outside of a specified time The portion shown in the zoom display is different than Pulse Time Source Select the source channel for the search You can also select Math1 and Math2 Level Set the level for determining High and Low The setting range is an on Screen 8 div and the resolution is 0 01 div Polarity Choose from the following High When the waveform is higher than the specified level Low When the waveform is lower than the specified level Hysteresis Set the hysteresis The range for this setting is 0 3 div 4 div Time Set the determination time T The range for this setting is 1 sample rate display range Start Point Set the starting position for the search The range for this setting is 5 to 5 div Display position of the searched waveform Result Window When the zoom mode is set to Z1 amp Z2 or Main amp Z1 amp Z2 you can select whether to display the searched waveform in the Z1 or Z2 window Search count The search can be carried out up to 1000 times When the type is edge the rising or falling edge is counted from the previous search position In addition the past search results can also be displayed Changing the zoom rate and position The search results are dis
380. pedance Input range than or equal to 10 kHz DC to 50 MHz Approx 1 MQ approx 15 pF 2 V Minimum input amplitude 0 1 Vp p Minimum pulse width At least 10 ns for both High and Low Operating Procedure 1 Pressthe MISC key 2 Pressthe System Config soft key to display the system configuration menu 3 Pressthe Trigger Gate soft key to select Active High Active Low or OFF The default setting is OFF MISC Calibration Communication SCSI ID M Graphic Color M System Conf ig systen Conf ig Message ENG Click Sound OFF pry Leys ven vum ig Message GRR ENG Click Sound OFF pj l L Date Time Date Tine L l Offset Cancel Mode BFF ON Trigger Gate E 4 Active High or p eee si Edge CH1 futo Active Lou 0 0 U Gate Actiuj a 14 6 IM 701410 01E 14 5 Canceling the Offset Function You can select whether or not the offset voltage that is specified for each channel is reflected in the results of computations and automated measurement of waveform parameters OFF Does not reflect the offset voltages in the results of computations and automated measurement of waveform parameters The vertical position of the display screen corresponds to the offset voltage ON Reflect
381. play the newly acquired waveforms loaded data must be unloaded from the appropriate channels Note You cannot save or load while the data acquisition is in progress f you change the file extension on a PC for an example you will not be able to load that file Amaximum of 36 characters can be displayed in Path File names are not case sensitive Comments are case sensitive In addition the following file names cannot be used due to limitations of MS DOS AUX CON PRN NUL CLOCK When using the GP IB or serial interface RS 232 commands to enter a file name the following symbols that do not exist on the keyboard of this instrument can be used l The waveform data loaded from a file overwrites the data in the acquisition memory Once the memory is overwritten the old data cannot be recovered It is recommended that the current waveform data be saved before loading data from a file Loaded waveforms are cleared only if Unload Initialize or Auto Setup is executed or the data acquisition conditions are changed When the total number of files and directories in one directory exceeds 2400 the file list will no longer be displayed This function can not be used in conjunction with FTP server function FTP client function or LPR client function 11 12 IM 701410 01E 11 6 Saving Loading Waveform Data Data format when storing multiple records When multiple records are stored
382. played in the zoomed waveform display area As in the zoomed waveform the zoom rate and position can be changed Precautions to be taken when searching Searching is not possible while the data acquisition is in progress Searching is not possible on the computed results of the power spectrum The search result is void if the following operation are carried out Starting data acquisition Changing the Search Setup setting Shifting the phase of the source or the clock Searching is not possible when setting CH2 or CH4 as the clock channel while in interleave mode Searching is not possible when all patterns are set to X Patterns from undisplayed waveforms will not be referenced during searcles IM 701410 01E 8 9 Search Data Using Search and Zoom Function Determination when Using the Edge for the Search When the peak immediately after the rising edge of the waveform is less than or equal to the upper limit of the hysteresis or when the peak immediately after the falling edge is greater than or equal to the lower limit of the hysteresis it is determined as false not counted as a specified edge Determined as False Detected Position The Upper Value of Hysteresis l The Lower Value A of Hysteresis gt Specified Level Start Point of the Search When the Edge is Set to Rising and the Count is Set to 2 Determination when searching using a serial pattern The points between the Thr
383. ponding to the desired accumulate mode Proceed to step 4 if you have selected Persist or to step 5 if you have selected Color Setting the accumulative time when Persist has been selected 4 Turn the jog shuttle to set the desired accumulative time 1999 07 66 11 19 43 j Nornal 1202 Z00kS s 560usktiwl DISPLAY a E Format Dual Interpolation Sine Ay Graticule Ej Scale Value or m Trace Label OFF pry Accumulate Persist Tine Infinite L2 500ns 2 000 V i H E 2 500 CHi 10 1 CHZ 10 1 Edge CHI 20 0 Udiv 0 500 U div Auto Next DC Full DC Full 10 2 V 12 Setting the grade width when Color has been selected 5 Turn the jog shuttle to set the desired color width 1999 07 66 11 19 43 j gtk Normal 200kS s 560usAwl DISPLAY Stopped 1043 eH SES Format q lt lt Mainzik gt gt Dual Interpolation Sine Ay Graticule E Scale Value FF W Trace Label FF N Accumulate Color lg Grade Width 16 L2 Sa0ns _ 2 000 V B d B 2 5008 Edge CHI CHI 10 1 CHZ 10 1 20 0 Urdiv 6 506 Urdiu DC Full DC Full Auto Next 10 2 V 12 IM 701410 01E 8 7 X Y Waveform Display Function For a description of this function refer to page 1 18 gt Selecting the X axis mode
384. position setting percentage in this case with respect to the 8 division length 100 8 divisions 3 Box average linear average or computation cannot be specified 4 2 MWord model Record length cannot be set to 4 MWord when interleave mode is OFF IM 701410 01E App 9 E xipueddy Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length Record length 8 M words only for 8 M Word model DL7100 Box average linear averaging or computation cannot be specified Setting When Mode other than Envelope Mode is Active Rep Repetitive sampling mode When Envelope Mode is Active Interleave mode OFF 3 Interleave Mode ON Rep OFF Rep ON Rep OFF Rep ON Interleave mode OFF Interleave Mode ON Sample rate S s Displayed record len gth word Sam rate S s ple Displayed record len gth word Sample rate S s Displayed record len gth word Sample rate S s Displayed record len gth word Sample rate S s Displayed record len gth word Sample rate S s Displayed record len gth word Roll mode display 1 2 3 4 This record length cannot be used when interleave is ON 20k 10M 20k 10 M2 50 k 10M2 50k 10 M2 100 k 10 M2 100 k 10 M2 200 k 10M2 200k 10 M2 500 k 10M 500k 10 M2 1M 10 M2 1M 10
385. preadsheet and database applications The data that are saved are the measurement results of the parameters that are specified in the automated measurement of waveform parameters Notes when saving the results of the automated measurement of waveform parameters The restrictions are as follows Upto 24000 the number of items that are turned ON data points before the point at which the save operation is executed are saved However the data points that are saved are limited to those that are acquired after fixing Time div Volt div and Measure settings Output example DL7100 CH1 P P CH1 Max CH1 Min CH2 P P y v v V 0 199E 00 0 199E 00 0 000E 00 0 02E 06 Oldest data 0 207E 00 0 207E 00 0 000E 00 0 02E 06 0 377E 00 0 152E 00 0 125E 00 0 02E 06 Jj Newest data For information related to the automated measurement of waveform parameters see section 9 2 Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters Data size Data size Number of item x 15 x number of history waveform File name extension The file name extension is CSV The selection of the medium and directory file name comments auto naming function specification of the files to be displayed in the File List dialog box and properties are the same as those for saving loading normal waveform data For explanation and procedures see section 11 6 Saving Loading Waveform Data IM 7014
386. process also stops When the waveform acquisition is restarted a new averaging process starts START STOP operation while accumulation is in progress When the waveform acquisition is stopped accumulation is temporarily suspended When the waveform acquisition is restarted accumulation resumes Conditions in which the START STOP key is disabled When the instrument is in the remote mode controlled via communication When the instrument is printing or auto setup is in progress Note Pressing the FILE or HISTORY key while the waveform acquisition is in progress stops the waveform acquisition Ifthe waveform acquisition conditions are changed and the acquisition is restarted previously acquired data are cleared The snapshot function can also be used to retain the waveforms that are currently displayed on the screen The display can be updated without having to stop the waveform acquisition see next page Operating Procedure 1 Pressing the START STOP key starts or stops the waveform acquisition Waveform acquisition is in progress when the indicator above the key is lit IM 701410 01E suonejedo uouiuio5 gt 4 5 The Snapshot and Clear Trace Functions Function lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 26 gt Snapshot This function retains the waveforms currently displayed on the screen It also enables update of the display without stopping acquisition Hence it is very useful when you
387. ps 1 3 on page 11 22 to select snapshot data waveforms 4 Pressing the Load soft key displays the load setting menu and the file list dialog box 1999 07 67 20 53 50 Jj gtk Normal FILE Stopped q 50kS7s Zm Load File Item cur SoU XCMeimik gt gt B H Snap M File List Path FDO Space 1142784 byte File Nare ize LFDO 1 Dest ination CHAPTOO00 SNP 1999 67 07 21 35 CHAPTOO4 TIF 1999 67 07 21 34 Snapi CHAPTO 1 BMP 1999 07 07 21 33 H CHAPTOGO BMP 1999 07 07 21 27 Save CHAPT903 TIF 1999 02 07 20 54 Property CHAPTOOZ TIF 1999 67 07 20 53 CHAPTOO1 TIF 1999 67 07 20 52 lq CHAPTOOO TIF 1999 67 07 20 51 Filter Load SNP K Unload 10 tons 20 00 V iis ir CHi 10 1 CHZ 10 1 Utility 20 0 U diuv 5 09 U div Load Exec DC Full DC Full Snap IM 701410 01E 11 23 uinipojy Buip1o28H oui speo pue saAes ejeq E 11 8 Saving Snap Shot Waveforms Selecting the source medium directory The procedures are the same as steps 13 to 17 in section 11 6 Saving Loading Waveform Data Selecting the file to be loaded 5 Turn the jog shuttle to select a file Selecting the snap shot waveform to be loaded 6 Pressthe Destination soft key to display a menu used to select the snapshot waveform 7 Press the soft key cor
388. r Hard Disks to the SCSI Port SCSI Specifications Item Specification Interface standard Connector type Connector pin assignments SCSI Small Computer System Interface ANSI X3 131 1986 50 pin half pitch pin type Unbalanced single ended see below 321 Pin No Ooo0p00p000000000000000000 naoanannonoaaaananonananonon 5049 48 28 27 26 Pin No Signal Pin No Signal 1to 12 GND 38 TERMPWR 13 NC 39 40 GND 14 to 25 GND 41 ATN 26 DBO 42 GND 27 DB1 43 BSY 28 DB2 44 ACK 29 DB3 45 RST 30 DB4 46 MSG 31 DB5 47 SEL 32 DB6 48 C D 33 DB7 49 REQ 34 DBP 50 I O 35 to 37 GND Items necessary for connection Cable Use a commercially sold cable that is 3 m or less in length that has a ferrite core on each end of the cable and that has a characteristic impedance between 90 and 132 Q Connection procedure 1 Connect the SCSI cable to the SCSI connector on the rear panel of the instrument Turn ON the SCSI device and the instrument in that order If you need to format the medium follow the procedures given in the next section 11 4 Formatting the Recording Medium SCSI devices that can be connected Most SCSI devices MO disk drive and hard disk can be connected to the instrument but there are some exceptions For details on which devices can be connected please ask your YOKOGAWA dealer For general handling precautions for the connected SCSI device see the instr
389. r of acquisitions as set by the acquisition count For the logic input option the operation is the same as in the normal mode During repetitive sampling mode only the exponential averaging is performed IM 701410 01E Aejdsig pue uonisinboy 7 2 Acquisition Mode Operating Procedure Setting the acquisition mode 1 Pressthe ACQ key 2 Press the Mode soft key to display the acquisition mode menu 3 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired mode ranging from Normal to Box Average You may not be able to select some modes depending on the record length and sample rate settings Setting the acquisition count 4 Press the Count soft key This is not available when the trigger mode is Single or Single N 5 Turn the jog shuttle to set the acquisition count You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits In addition pressing the RESET key sets the count to Infinite When the acquisition mode is Average and you have selected Infinite go to step 6 1933 07 05 20 58 35 E Nornal Stopped 1 1 iMS s insfi AC nu R 4 Record Lengt aaa CRT Snowy lt lt Maine LOk gt gt Record Lengt 1k E 10k Mode E H Nornal a Count d d i i Envelope Infinite E 3 RE TER Inter leave Box Average ON Repetiti Repetitive OFF pry Time Base ve ON LS 000ms 2 000 v d E 5 000s Tine Base CHL 10 1 CHa 10 1 Edge CHI
390. r source See page 6 2 Specifications Connector type BNC Maximum input voltage 40 V DC ACpeak or 28 Vrms when the frequency is less than or equal to 10 kHz Frequency range DC to 100 MHz Input impedance Approx 1 MO approx 15 pF Input range 2V Trigger sensitivity 0 1 Vp p Trigger level 2 V 5 mV resolution EXT CLOCK IN Terminal EXT CLOCK IN EXT TRIG IN A TRIG GATE IN 40 V MAX 1 MO The EXT TRIG IN terminal can also be used as an external clock input terminal If you wish to drive the instrument with an external clock connect a clock signal to this terminal Specifications Connector type BNC Maximum input voltage 40 V DC ACpeak or 28 Vrms when the frequency is less than or equal to 10 kHz Frequency range 40 Hz to 20 MHz Input impedance Approx 1 MQ approx 15 pF Input range 2V Threshold level 2 V 5 mV resolution Minimum input amplitude 0 1 Vp p Minimum pulse width Atleast 10 ns for both High and Low IM 701410 01E 12 1 indinogAndu joueg 4eou H 12 2 Trigger Output TRIG OUT CAUTION Never apply an external voltage to the TRIG OUT terminal This may damage the instrument TRIG OUT Terminal TRIG OUT TTL 1T This trigger outputs a TTL level signal when a trigger occurs The signal level is normally high but goes low when a trigger occurs Specifications Connector type BNC Output level TTL Output logi
391. r supply signal can also be used a trigger source Trigger level Sets the voltage level used to judge trigger conditions such as trigger slope rise fall of a signal IM 701410 01E 1 11 1 3 Setting a Trigger Trigger Hold off Section 6 4 gt The trigger hold off function temporarily stops detection of the next trigger once a trigger has been activated For example when observing a pulse train signal such as a PCM code display of the waveform can be synchronized with repetitive cycles or when using the history memory function you may want to change the repetitive period as shown below Repetitive period T Trigger level lt Input signal Trigger source signal Trigger signal restricted by hold off time t when Rise is selected as the trigger slope Trigger Delay lt Section 6 2 gt Normally the waveform around the trigger point is displayed However the trigger delay function enables display of a waveform which has been acquired after a specified time called the delay time has elapsed following activation of a trigger T trigger position Delay time Coal tii Trigger point Trigger Position lt Section 6 3 gt The trigger position indicates which position of the waveform in the acquisition memory will actually be displayed on the screen The trigger point refers to the point at which a trigger is activated In case the trigger delay to be expl
392. r switch is OFF Always use protective ground to prevent electric shock Connect the instrument power cord to the 3 pin power outlet with grounding terminal Do not use non grounding extension cords or other measures that defect the protective grounding Never use an extension cord that does not have a protective grounding otherwise the protection feature will be invalidated gt yII oo E gt A Connecting the Power Cord 1 Make sure that POWER switch is OFF 2 Plug the power cord into the power connector socket on the rear panel of the instrument 3 Plug the other end of the power cord into an AC outlet that meets the following conditions The AC outlet must be of 3 pin type with a protective grounding terminal Rated supply voltage 100 to 120 VAC 220 to 240 VAC Permitted supply voltage range 90 to 132 VAC 198 to 264 VAC Rated supply voltage frequency 50 60 Hz Permitted supply voltage frequency range 48 to 63 Hz Maximum power consumption when the built in printer is used 290 VA 3 pin AC outlet Power cord Supplied with instrument IM 701410 01E 3 5 esp Buung suonneoaJqd B 3 3 Connecting the Power Cord Turning the Power ON or OFF Items to be checked before turning ON the power Check that the instrument is installed correctly as instructed in Section 3 2 Installing page 3 3 Check that the power cord is connected correctly as sown in Section 3 3 Connecting the Power Co
393. rch method 1999 07 66 11 19 43zq Normal ZkS s 50nsAi SEARCH 4 oan pe Stopped cH Edge Setup Os jw Zi Mag x 10 Z1 Position Z 00div Searched Pattern No Hatch Li2s tne 20 00 w ENT CHI 10 1 CHZ 10 1 Edge CHI 20 0 Urdiv 5 00 U div Auto Exec DC Full DC Full FP Setting the search condition 5 Pressing the Setup soft key displays the search condition setting dialog box Turn the jog shuttle to select the parameter Pressing the SELECT key displays a menu used to set the item or changes the selected item 1999 07 14 22 11 38zyl tk Nornal Stopped 24 SHS s ZOHSfliv SEARCH Setup Tupe Source CHT Edge Level g Polarity 3 1 Hysteresis Result Window Count 1 Zi zz Start Point 21 Mag x 10 22 Mag x4 Setup 21 Position 2 16div 22 Position 1 10diu Searched Pattern No Match CHL 18 1 CHZ 10 1 Edge CHI 5 00 Uediv 5 00 Urdiv Auto Exec DC Full DC Full gb ug Setting the Source 6 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the channel to be searched and press the SELECT key Setting the Level 7 Turn the jog shuttle to set the level and press the SELECT key You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits Pressing
394. rd page 3 5 Turning the power ON OFF POWER switch The power is turned ON and OFF alternately as the switch is pressed S c bs d Response at Power ON Self test and calibration start automatically when the power switch is turned ON if the check results are satisfactory the normal waveform display screen will appear Note Wait at least 10 seconds after turning the power OFF before turning it back ON again If calibration does not start when the power is turned ON or if the normal waveform display screen does not appear check the following points Check that the power cord is plugged in properly Check that the correct voltage is being supplied from the AC outlet Refer to page 3 5 Check that the fuse is not blown Refer to page 15 12 If there is still no power even after the above points have been checked contact your nearest YOKOGAWA representative as listed on the back cover of this manual For Accurate Measurement Turn the power switches ON and allow the unit to warm up for at least 30 minutes After warm up is complete perform calibration Refer to Page 4 9 Response at Power OFF Settings made prior to turning OFF the power are retained even if the power cord is removed This allows display of waveforms using those saved settings the next time the power is turned ON Note The settings are backed up by a lithium battery The battery lasts for approximately 5 years if it is used at an
395. rd optional Floppy disk and external SCSI device PC Card optional are described in chapter 11 For the procedures related to formatting see chapter 11 Auto naming function If you use Auto Naming files are automatically created with three digit numbers from 000 to 999 in their file name You can place a common name in front of the numbers up to 5 characters specified in File Name Note SSS You can enter up to eight characters for the common name but the last three characters are discarded Notes when outputting the file The maximum number of files that can be saved using the auto naming function is 1000 When the total number of files and directories in one directory exceeds 2400 the file list will no longer be displayed IM 701410 01E 10 9 ejeq ue8J2S jo 1ndino H 10 4 Storing Screen Image to the Recording Storage Medium Operating Procedure Selecting the File 1 Press the SHIFT key to set the keys in the shifted condition Functions marked in purple on the panel become active 2 Pressthe COPY key 3 Pressthe Copy to soft key to display the output medium menu Net Print is displayed with DL7200 and DL7100 of firmware version 2 01 or later 4 Press the soft key corresponding to File Normal SOkS s Znsffi CUPY Copy to Copy to Tg feed ee Eile Format BMP i i E or N a OFF dis File List 10 One Edge CHI F File Nane Auto erg CHAPTS Printer
396. re elements Waveform picture elements 640 x 480 dots 500 x 384 dots Liquid crystal display may include defects of about 0 02 of all picture elements 16 5 Functions Acquisition display functions Item Specifications Acquisition mode Select from five modes Normal Averaging Sequential Store Envelope Box Average Sampling mode Select realtime or repetitive sampling Availability depends on time axis settings Record length DL7100 1 kWords 10 kWords 50 kWords 100 kWords 250 kWords 500 kWords 1 MWords 2 MWords 4 MWords 701420 8 MWords 701420 DL7200 1 kWords 10 kWords 50 kWords 100 kWords 250 kWords 500 kWords 1 MWords 2 MWords 4 MWords 8 MWords 701440 16 MWords 701440 Zoom Can zoom up to 2 time axis ranges of displayed waveform s Display format 1 2 8 4 or 6 waveform windows Interpolation Display samples using dot display sine interpolation linear interpolation or pulse interpolation Graticule Select from three graticule types Auxiliary display items Select display or nondisplay of scale values waveform labels X Y display Display two X Y waveforms Accumulation Displays multiple iterations of waveform in either persistence mode or color grade mode Snapshot Freezes current waveform on screen Saves or loads the snapshot waveforms in bitmap format Trace clear Removes currently disp
397. responding to the desired snapshot waveform to make the selection Loading the file 8 Press the Load Exec soft key to load the file from the directory indicated in Path The name of the Load Exec soft key changes to Abort Canceling the loading operation 9 Press the Abort soft key to cancel the loading operation The name of the Abort soft key changes to Load Exec Specifying the file to be displayed in the File List dialog box viewing the properties The procedures are the same as steps 30 to 33 in section 11 6 Saving Loading Waveform Data Clearing the waveform 4 Press the Unload soft key to display a menu used to select the waveform to be cleared 5 Press the Trace soft key and press the soft key corresponding to the waveform to be cleared 6 Pressing the Unload Exec soft key clears the selected waveform 11 24 IM 701410 01E 11 9 Saving the Results of the Automated Function Measurement of Waveform Parameters CAUTION Never remove the medium disk or turn OFF the power while the access indicator or the floppy disk icon is blinking This can damage the medium or destroy the data on the medium The results of the automated measurement of waveform parameters can be saved in CSV format CSV file extension to a floppy disk or external SCSI device A CSV file is a comma separated format file The CSV file is one of the common file formats used to exchange data between s
398. ress the Format soft key to display a list of media in the file list dialog box Net Drive cannot be formatted 5 Turn the jog shuttle to select the medium to be formatted If no external SCSI devices are detected and only the floppy disk is inserted in the drive only FDO is displayed L 199393707707 10 00 16 j gtk Normal Utility aL UHT Stopped 94 1 S kS s 2ms4 Utility Function aaa eH 860 V lt lt Mains gt Function ll Delete Delete Format i a File List File Nane Size Set Reset Copy Media Info 1457664 1220608 All Reset Renane K Property a Make Dir Format Filter mr Format SET E3 Attr Attr L Lin tons 20 5 L 00 V CHi 10 1 CHZ 10 1 Delete Exec 20 0 Urdiv 5 00 U diu Delete Exec L DC Full DC Full LE EE e IM 701410 01E 11 4 Formatting the Recording Medium Selecting the FD format 6 Press the Format soft key to display the format menu 7 Turn the jog shuttle to select a format from 2DD 640K to 2HD 1 44M Go to step 9 1999 07 67 10 00 16 tk Nornal Utility Stopped 94 y BOkS s ZnsA Utili
399. rigger is activated when the trigger source exceeds rises above or drops falls below the preset trigger level In addition to input signals CH1 to CH4 the external trigger input signal the commercial power supply signal that is used by the instrument can be used as a trigger Source Atrigger is activated refers to the condition in which trigger conditions are satisfied and a waveform is displayed x E M E EE Trigger level Trigger source A trigger is activated at this point if Rise 4 is selected A B n trigger Enhanced Trigger Section 6 8 This function activates a trigger the nth time condition B becomes true after condition A has become true on Y f e Mu cas Trigger CH1 HL H L H CH2 LHLHILIHILIHLHILHIL A B 1 B 2 B 3 Pattern A is true When pattern A CH1 L CH2 L Enter When patternB CH1 H CH2 H Enter nz 3 IM 701410 01E 1 7 suonoung 1 3 Setting a Trigger A delay B trigger Enhanced Trigger Section 6 9 This function activates a trigger the first time condition B becomes true after condition A becomes true and the specified time elapses on Y f T Ce a a Trigger CH1 HIL H L H CH2 LH LH LIHLLIHLHILHIL 1us Pattern A is true Pattern B is true When pattern A CH1 L CH2 L Enter When patternB CH1 H CH2 H Enter De
400. rigger source signal is used as the trigger source after the DC content has been removed from it A trigger can always be activated if the trigger level is set to 0 V as long as the signal s amplitude is one division or more HF Rejection lt Sections 6 5 and 6 8 to 6 13 gt Set HF rejection to ON when you want to remove high frequencies exceeding 15 kHz or 20 MHz from the trigger source This prevents a trigger from being activated unexpectedly due to high frequency noise Trigger Hysteresis lt Sections 6 5 and 6 8 to 6 13 gt If the trigger level width is not sufficient the trigger point fluctuates each time a trigger is E Hysteresis activated if noise is present in the trigger n i width source thereby resulting in unstable AG displayed waveforms To solve this problem d A trigger is activated a specified margin hysteresis can be added to the selected trigger level The hysteresis level can be chosen from ZZ and A If A is selected a wide hysteresis level is provided to eliminate fluctuation in the trigger point thereby resulting in a stable displayed waveform However in this case the trigger points become uncertain Thus select 4 if you want to activate a trigger to detect small fluctuations in a waveform Trigger Source and Trigger Level Sections 6 5 to 6 13 gt Trigger source Selects the signal for the selected trigger type The external trigger signal or the commercial powe
401. rm computed waveform SECES spes XE E HL Waveform addition Waveform subtraction Scaling Set the upper and lower limits on computations Auto The upper and lower limits are set according to the computed result Manual The upper and lower limits can be set arbitrarily The range is 9 9999E 30 to 9 9999E 30 Unit Unit can be set arbitrarily using up to four characters The specified characters are reflected in the scale values Smoothing See section 9 9 Smoothing About linear scaling When performing computation on a channel that has linear scaling set the computation is performed on the scaled value Maximum record length DL7100 2 MWord 4 MWord interleave mode ON DL7200 4 MWord 8 MWord interleave mode ON Operating Procedure Turn ON OFF the display 1 Pressthe MATH key 2 Pressthe Math1 Display soft key and select ON to display Math1 and OFF to not display Math1 Selecting the channel on which to perform computation 3 Pressthe Math1 Setup soft key to display the computation dialog box 2000 06 19 02 33 34z1 fio Normal E mm Stopped 1936 5MS s 200usfw MATH Mathi Display EH Mathi Setup Mathi Display Operation M Mathi Setup Sourcez C1 CZ Mathi Label SUM Au Scale Mathi Label Mathi Upper C 4 0000E 01_ Hathi 1 F7 mm puer
402. rm data Set the data type to Binary For the procedures see steps 4 and 5 in the section Saving the Waveform Data on page 11 14 6 Pressing the Load soft key displays the load setting menu and the file list dialog box 1392 07707 14 39 23 j fico Normal Stopped 4 E 5MS s 2ZnsA Load cnr BELOW Maine 100k gt gt H d FTLE File Item Waveform PR j File List Tata Type Path FDO Space 245248 byte Binary File Name Size FDO 1 CHAPTOOO HDR 2924 1999 02 07 13 19 R U CHAPTO86 WUF 1208849 1999 67 67 13 19 R U Save Property M Filter Load A Eo Unload 10000 dus 20 00 V Al 10000 Ouf 4 CHI 10 1 CHZ 10 1 Edge CH1 Utility 20 0 Urdiv 5 60 U diu Auto Load Exec DC Full DC Full 22NM Binary Selecting the source medium directory 7 Select the directory according to steps 13 to 17 on page 11 15 Selecting the file to be loaded 8 Turn the jog shuttle to select a file Loading the file 9 Pressthe Load Exec soft key to load the file from the directory indicated in Path ___ The name of the Load Exec soft key changes to Abort Canceling the loading operation 10 Press the Abort soft key to cancel the loading operation The name of the Abort soft key changes to Load Exec Specifying the file to be displayed
403. rnal controller Personal Computer Communication interface zz 8 9 002020 1 29 IM 701410 01E suonoung Chapter 2 Name and Use of Each Part 2 1 Menu keys Page 2 3 Front Panel Rear Panel Floppy disk drive Chapter 11 Press a key to display the corresponding menu ESC key Closes pop up menu or soft key menu YOKOGAWA TEPHALDSOHLOSCOPE DU7100 E aa LCD screen Ground connector Ground connection used for probe calibration COMP output Page 3 9 N Outputs probe compesation signal Power switch Page 3 6 Ethernet connector amp Jog shuttle Changes the selected value or moves the cursor The more the shuttle ring outer 3 Lu o ring is turned the more the M setting increment increases a m VERTICAL group S Page 2 2 D Menu group used to make 9 settings for the vertical axis m HORIZONTAL group S Page 2 2 y Aa Menu group used to make settings for the horizontal E EE i Ei eQ E Chapter 13 optional axis TRIGGER group Page 2 2 Menu group used to make trigger settings Menu keys Page 2 3 Press a key to display the corresponding menu External trigger clock trigger gate input terminal A
404. s Maximum input voltage 1 MQ input at 1 kHz or less 400 V DC AC peak 282 Vrms CATII 50 Q input 5 Vrms or less and 10 Vpeak or less DC offset range max 2 mV div to 50 mV div 1 V At 1 1 probe attenuation 100 mV div to 500 mV div 10 V 1 V div to 10 V div 100 V Vertical voltage axis precision DC precision ve Offset axis precision 2 mV div to 50 mV div it 100 mV div to 500 mV div 1 V div to 10 V div LE Frequency characteristics 50 Q input 3dB point when sine wave 1 V div to 10 mV div DC to 500 MHz of amplitude 4 div is input 5 mV div to 2 mV div DC to 400 MHz 1 MQ input defined at the tip of the probe when using the passive probe 700988 10 V div to 10 mV div DC to 400 MHz 5 mV div to 2 mV div DC to 300 MHz 3dB point for AC coupling used Not above 10 Hz When using the 10 1 probe standard accessory 1 Hz or less 1 5 of 8 div offset voltage precision 1 of set value 0 2 mV 196 of set value 2 mV 1 of set value 20 mV PREND EUN Interchannel skew above 1 ns with identical settings Residual noise Larger of 1 25 mV or 0 15 div typical Interchannel isolation 34 dB typical at identical voltage sensitivity DC to 500 MHz A D conversion resolution 8 bits 24 LSB div Probe attenuation settings 1 1 10 1 100 1 1000 1 Bandwidth 100 MHz or 20 MHz band limit ON OFF Maximum sample rate Realtime sampling mode Wi
405. s Y 0 2 When the waveform extends into the negative side Start point Si X axis Y 0 Area S So S1 Stop point 2 When two or more Y data correspond to X data Start point Area S So Start point So Area SzSo 2xS14S2 Stop point X axis Y 0 X axis Y 0 App 23 IM 701410 01E E xipueddy Appendix 3 ASCII Header File Format Y OKOGAWA ASCII FILE FORMAT Publicinfo FormatVersion Model Endian DataFormat GroupNumber TraceTotalNumber DataOffset Group1 TraceNumber BlockNumber TraceName BlockSize VResolution VOffset VDataType VUnit VPlusOverData VMinusOverData VillegalData VMaxData VMinData HResolution HOffset HUnit Date Time Group2 TraceNumber BlockNumber TraceName BlockSize VResolution VOffset VDataType VUnit VPlusOverData VMinusOverData VillegalData VMaxData VMinData HResolution HOffset HUnit 1 01 DL7100 Big TRACE 3 10 0 4 1 CH1 1002 1 5625000E 00 0 0000000E 00 IS2 V 32768 32769 32769 32767 32768 5 0000000E 09 2 5000000E 06 S 2000 07 25 01 45 00 00 2 4 MATH1 1002 6 1035156E 03 7 7000000E 01 IS2 DB 32768 32769 32769 32767 32768 2 0000000E 01 0 0000000E 00 Hz CH2 1002 1 5625000E 00 0 0000000E 00 IS2 V 32768 32769 32769 32767 32768 5 0000000E 09 2 5000000E 06 S 2000 07 25 01 45 00 00 MATH2 1002 1 2207031E 00 2 0000000E 04 IS2 V 32768 32769 32769
406. s gth word Sample Displayed rate S s record len gth word Sample Displayed rate record len S s gth word Sample rate S s Displayed record len gth word Sample rate S s Displayed 2 5M 5k 2 5 M 2 5k 2 5 M 2 5k 2 5M 800M 2 5 M 2 800 M 2M 10k 2M 10k 2M 10k 2M 800 M 2M 800 M 2M 20k 2M 20k 2M 20k 2M 800M 2M 800M 2 5M 50k 2 5 M 2 50k 2 5 M 2 50k 2 5M 800M 2 5 M 2 800 M 2M 100 k 2M 100 k 2M 100 k 2M 800 M 2M 800 M 2M 200 k 2M 200 k 2M 200 k 2M 800 M 2M 800 M 2 5 M 2 Roll mode display 500 k 2 5 M 2 500 k 2 5 M 2 500 k 2 5M 800M 2 5 M 2 800 M 2M 1M 2M 1M 2M 1M 2M 800 M 2M 800 M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 800 M 2M 800 M 2 5 M 2 2 5 M 2 2 5 M 2 5M 2 5M 800M 2 5 M 2 800 M 2M 2M 2M 10 M 2M 800 M 2M 800 M 2M 2M 2M 20 M 2M 800 M 2M 800 M 2 5 M 2 2 5 M2 2 5 M 2 50 M 2 5M 800M 2 5 M2 800 M 2M 2M 2M 100 M 2M 800 M 2M 800 M 2M 2M 2M 200 M 2M 800 M 2M 800 M 2 5 M2 2 5M2 2 5M2 2 5 M2 1G 2 5 M2 1G 2M 2M 1M 2M 2M 2M 500 k 1M 2M 200 k 100 k 50 k 20k 10k
407. s 13 to 17 in section 11 6 Saving Loading Waveform Data Creating the directory 6 Turn the jog shuttle to select a medium or a directory 7 Press the Dir Name soft key to display a keyboard 8 Enterthe recording medium directory file name according to the procedures given on page 4 2 Specifying the file to be displayed in the File List dialog box viewing the properties The procedures are the same as steps 30 to 33 in section 11 6 Saving Loading Waveform Data 2000 08 03 17 27 37 ick Normal 2 Stopped 60 du 200kS s 5nsA Utility T lt lt Mainz 10k gt gt Ful tility Function l Make Dir File List Path FDONTHEVOL 1 Space 1296896 byte File Name Dir Nane sil L Property l M L CHi 10 1 Edge CH1 F 5 00 U diuv Auto DC Full 0 10 U L 11 36 IM 701410 01E Chapter 12 Rear Panel Input Output 12 1 External Trigger Input EXT TRIG IN External Clock Input EXT CLOCK IN CAUTION Never apply signals that do not meet the following specifications as this may damage the instrument due to overvoltage for example EXT TRIG IN terminal EXT CLOCK IN EXT TRIG IN A TRIG GATE IN 40 V MAX 1 MO This terminal is used when an external signal is used as a trigge
408. s not installed on this model 32 Aborted statistical measurement processing 9 17 33 Aborted the analysis 34 Data not detected Execute again after changing the settings or reacquiring the waveform 35 The corresponding field was not found 8 29 8 34 36 The frame contains indefinite data greater than Thr Lower but less than Thr Upper 15 2 IM 701410 01E 15 2 Error Messages and Corrective Actions Error in Execution 600 to 799 Code Message Corrective Action Reference Page 601 Invalid file name or SCSI ID Check the file name and the SCSI ID 11 9 11 11 602 603 No SCSI device or no media inserted Check the SCSI device connection the SCSIID 11 3 11 9 number and the existence of a medium in the drive 604 Media failure Check the medium 605 File not found Check the filename and the medium Chapter 11 606 Media is protected Set the disk s write protect switch to OFF 607 Media failure Check the medium 608 to 610 Invalid file name or SCSI ID Check the file name and the SCSI ID 11 9 611 612 Media full Delete unnecessary files or use another disk 11 28 The number of bytes necessary is given in the pages indicated on the right 613 Cannot delete a directory if there are files Delete all files in the directory before deleting the 11 28 in the directory directory 614 File i
409. s of condition A will be set Press the SELECT key several times to select H L or X Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the Condition position of condition A Press the SELECT key several times to select Enter or Exit In a similar fashion set condition B fo CON IM 701410 01E Hunebbu H 6 9 Setting the A Delay B Trigger ENHANCED Setting the level hysteresis trigger coupling and HF rejection 10 Pressing the Level Coupling soft key displays a menu used to set the level coupling hysteresis and HF rejection The setting also applies to AS B N trigger See page 6 13 Setting the delay time 11 If the jog shuttle control is not set to Delay press the Delay soft key 12 Turn the jog shuttle to set the delay time You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits Pressing the RESET key resets the value to 0 003 us Setting the hold off 13 Setthe hold off time according to the procedures given in 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time Note The status setting of condition A and B applies to all trigger types The trigger level hysteresis trigger coupling and HF rejection settings apply to simple trigger and enhanced trigger 6 16 IM 701410 01E 6 10 Setting the Pattern Trigger ENHANCED Function This function activates the trigger when all conditions set to multiple trigger sources become true or when all conditions become false Setting the tr
410. s point the confirmed string is temporarily stored If the RESET key is pressed before confirming the character string the entire string is cleared ick Normal AMSes insAli COPY EINE Main x a Copy to File Format L iin zppsplerlp pr EEA EA A AMEA amp CI C EA LEA EA Ea i A EA AAA amp LATT ELN Comment L File List L A cut 10 1 20 0 Urdiv 0 500 U diu Auto DC Full 2 OR 10 1 F ge Ext F File Nane Lh DC Full 0 0060 V DL 2100 Applicable to DL7100 prior to firmware version 2 01 CAPS a capital letter ick Normal 200kS s 5nsAi COPY Moves up and down CAPS J Deletes the character before the cursor zm Operates in the same fashion as the key on the keyboard Recall the temporary ADDON r mn a stored character string See Recall below 1 m 0 10 U EDU TSEUL DERE Jelalblelalele Tale Ti libe ol GN TET ISELELI penis E Ha KEE BIDE CAPS a small letter Applicable to DL7200 and DL7100 with firmware version 2 01 or later 4 2 IM 701410 01E 4 1 Entering Values and Character Strings Operation to temporarily store character strings Applicable to DL7200 and DL7100 with firmware version 2 01 or l
411. s protected Clear the write disable mark 11 28 615 Physical format error Reformat the medium If the same error occurs 11 4 this instrument cannot format the medium 616 to 620 File system failure Check using another medium If the same message still appears servicing is required 621 File is damaged Check the file 622 to 641 File system failure Check using another medium If the same 656 to 663 message still appears servicing is required 642 No media exists in SCSI device Check that the medium is correctly inserted into the SCSI device 646 to 653 Media failure Check the medium 654 Media failure Check the floppy disk s format type 11 4 665 Cannot load this file format Files stored on other models DL AG series cannot be loaded 666 File is now being accessed Wait a moment Execute after accessing is finished 667 Cannot be executed while running Press the START STOP key to stop the 4 7 waveform acquisition 668 Cannot find HDR file Check the file 11 10 669 The specified file cannot be loaded on this Upgrade the ROM version upper compatible ROM version or this model Data saved on the 8 MWord CH model cannot be loaded by the 2 MWord CH model 671 Save data not found Check the presence of data to be stored 673 SCSI controller failure Check the built in MO or terminator connection 676 Unknown file format Check whether the data file in a format that is 11 34 supported Change the file extens
412. s the MEASURE key 2 Pressthe Mode soft key to display the automated measurement mode menu 3 Pressthe soft key corresponding to Statistics to set the automated measurement mode 4 Press the Item Setup soft key to display the measurement parameter menu and the measurement channel menu 1999 07 66 18 53 42 j gtk Normal 4337 MEASURE Stopped 1 50kS s 2ns Source eRT B00 Mode Ttem Setup CHL Statistics o P P s Freq 5 hugFreq L M fg Max g Period 5 AvgPer iod Iten Setup fc Min Rise 5 IntiTY H tug Fall Int2TY Delay Setup Rns width s IntiXY iCycie Mode Sdeu S Width Intzxy DFE ON 5 High 3 Duty fc Low 5 Bursti 5 Shot Burst2 MR Tine Rangei fc Shot c Pulse 2 13div Time Range2 L 13div All Clear_ Copy To Ali Trace ns 20 00 V CHI 10 1 CHZ 10 1 Edge CH1 Next 20 0 Wdiv 5 00 Urdiv Auto 1 2 DC Full DC Full Py 5 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired measurement channel 6 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the parameter you wish to turn ON You can turn OFF all parameters at once by selecting All Clear You can copy the current parameter settings to all traces by selecting Copy to All Trace 9 18 IM 701410 01E 9 3 S
413. sccesceseceeeeeeceseseeeaeeeecaeeeeecaeeeaeteeeeeeeereeaeens 11 10 AN 11 7 Saving Loading Setup Data sess 11 18 AN 11 8 Saving Snap Shot Waveforms cccsccecceseeeccececeeeeseseceeeeceeecaeecaeseesaeeeeeseeteeeseeeeteneees 11 22 A 11 9 Saving the Results of the Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters 11 25 A 11 10 Outputting the Detailed Analysis List of the SPI Signal sesseeeeee 11 27 AN 11 11 Changing the File Attributes Deleting Files sssseeeeeee 11 28 AN 11 12 Copying Files Rie e ene ne no dede eee aus 11 31 11 13 Changing the Recording Medium Directory Name and File Name and Creating a Directoy ascent ee Sh i es 11 34 IM 701410 01E xi Contents Chapter 12 Rear Panel Input Output A 124 AN 122 A 12 3 External Trigger Input EXT TRIG IN External Clock Input EXT CLOCK IN 12 1 Trigger Output TRIG OUT idt Re ree te REDE P a eee esae 12 2 RGB Video Signal Output RGB VIDEO OUT seen 12 4 Chapter 13 Ethernet Communications Optional 13 1 13 2 13 8 13 4 13 5 13 6 13 7 13 8 13 9 13 10 Connecting the DL7100 DL7200 to a Personal Computer sees 13 1 Configuring the Ethernet Interface TCP IP sesssseeennene 13 2 Saving Waveform and Setting Data to a Network Drive ssssssssess 13 5 Saving Screen Image Data to a Network Drive
414. se A1352EF 2 4 A 250 V IM 701410 01E Safety Precautions This instrument is an IEC safety class instrument provided with terminal for protective grounding The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation service and repair of this instrument If this instrument is used in a manner not specified in this manual the protection provided by this instrument may be impaired Also YOKOGAWA Electric Corporation assumes no liability for the customer s failure to comply with these requirements The following symbols are used on this instrument A To avoid injury death of personnel or damage to the instrument the operator must refer to an explanation in the User s Manual or Service Manual IE Function grounding terminal This terminal should not be used as a Protective grounding terminal Alternating current ON power OFF power In position of a bistable push control H gr Out position of a bistable push control IM 701410 01E Safety Precautions Make sure to comply with the following safety precautions Not complying might result in injury death of personnel or damage to the instrument Power Supply Ensure the source voltage matches the voltage of the power supply before turning ON the power Power Cord and Plug To prevent an electric shock or fire be sure to use the power cord supplied by YOKOGAWA The main power plug must be plugged in an outle
415. select the desired X Y waveform 7 Press the Display soft key to select whether or not to display the X Y waveform that was selected in step 4 Setting the X and Y axes 8 Pressing the X Trace soft key displays the channel menu 9 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired channel that you wish to set to the X axis 10 Ina similar fashion set the Y axis by pressing the Y Trace soft key Setting the display range 11 Press the Start Point End Point soft key Turn the jog shuttle to set the display start position 12 In a similar fashion press the Start Point End Point soft key to set the display end position IM 701410 01E 8 11 8 8 Zooming the Waveform Function lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 18 gt The zoomed waveform of two locations can be displayed simultaneously dual zoom You can also select which channel to zoom Note that if the number of displayed points is less than or equal to 50 or 40 zooming is not possible Selecting the display mode of zoomed waveforms Mode Main Displays only the main unzoomed waveform Z1 Only Displays only the zoomed waveform of zoom box Z1 Z2 Only Displays only the zoomed waveform of zoom box Z2 Main amp Z1 Displays the main waveform in the top window and zoomed waveform of zoom box 1 in the bottom window Main amp Z2 Displays the main waveform in the top window and zoomed waveform of zoom box 2 in the bottom window
416. set Param1 through Param4 Setting the Logic 16 Press the Logic soft key to select AND or OR Setting the Parameter Measuring Range 17 Press the Time Range1 Time Range2 soft key to highlight Time Rangel 18 Turn the jog shuttle to set the left edge of the measuring range Use the arrow keys to move between the digits Press the RESET key to return to the initial value XXX 19 Press the Time Tange1 Time Range2 soft key to highlight Time Range2 20 Turn the jog shuttle to set the right edge of the measuring range Use the arrow keys to move between the digits Press the RESET key to return to the initial value XXX Executing the Search 21 Press the Searchexaec soft key to execute the search Displaying the Searched Waveform 22 Press the ESC key to return to the HISTORY menu Display the waveform using the procedure on page 7 14 The waveforms indexed in Show Map are displayed in a list Resetting the Search Results 23 If you set the Search Mode to OFF in the HISTORY menu or if you perform a search with all of the parameters Param1 Param4 set to OFF the search results will be reset 7 20 IM 701410 01E Chapter8 Display 8 1 Function Changing the Display Format lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 24 gt Main Format Single 1 waveform window Quad 4 waveform windows Dual 2 waveform windows Hexa 6 waveform wi
417. shuttle to set the zoom position of the Z1 zoom box The highlighted display of the list at the bottom of the screen moves to the zoom position frame Displaying the Detailed Analysis List 33 Press the Detail soft key to display the analysis result dialog box At this point the highlighted display is located at the same position as the highlighted byte of the list of analysis results in step 30 SEARCH Type SPI Bus 4 Analyze Setup Analyze Exec Detail Data Search 2001 06 15 11 03 342 100 Normal 220 01 20 00 V do D0 V 20 00 V 726 Ud V 20 00 V 5060 dus 720 00 v ENS ED 20 00 V EN E 20 00 V ECTE 20 00 V Ior 00 0 No 0 1 2 3 Dti D8 18 21 F8 Dt2 D8 18 00 18 cs H H H H Time ms 0 02 0 207 0 247 0 382 0 422 0 22 Datai Data2 CS D8 DB H 18 18 H 21 00 H FB 18 H x31 00 H Da DB H 18 18 H 21 00 H xF8 18 H x39 00 H Da DB H 18 18 H 21 00 H 18 18 H 21 00 H Da DB H 18 18 H 21 00 H xna 18 H 21 00 H Da DB H 18 18 H x31 00 H x18 18 H x21 oo H 34 Press the Hex or Bin soft key to select the data format Data1 and Data2 are displayed using the selected format Note If indefinite data is present x is displayed in the Data1 and Data2 columns 35 Press the ESC key to close the dialog box 8 36 IM 701410
418. signals which rise very fast or display an envelope of a modulating signal Py I zx i 1 ray Envelope I I I I 1 Box average Taking the data sampled at 400 MS s for the DL7100 interleave mode 800 MS s or 800 MS s with the DL7200 interleave mode ON or OFF the moving averages of certain number of data points are determined as shown in the following figure These data are acquired in the acquisition memory and displayed Box averaging is useful for eliminating the small amount of noise on the input signal It is also effective in removing the noise from a signal acquired only once 21 20 2 eeccc 16 box Input signal b at 50 MS s gt DL7200 gt V Time axis b Box Averaging data EN a o S gt gt Time axis 1 14 IM 701410 01E 1 4 Setting the Acquisition and Display Conditions Sequential Store lt Section 7 3 gt In the real time sampling mode waveform data will be stored in the acquisition memory only a set number of times and all waveforms can be displayed This stops automatically after acquisition The maximum acquisition count available with the feature varies depending on the instrument and the record length The range for the DL7100 is 2 to 2048 times or 2 to 4096 times for the DL7200 Once the specified number of waveforms have been stored you can display any of the waveforms individually or all of them together so that it is possible to d
419. splay l DFF DN i OFF m I Position sls 0 06diu amp DpCiMo L Banduidth Bandwidth L Full Full 5 000s 2 000 V d B d 5 000m CHi 10 1 CHZ 10 1 Edge CHI 20 0 Uvdiv 6 500 U div Auto Next DC Full DC Full 7 2 V 12 L IM 701410 01E sexy Je1uozuoH pue e2rnJeA 5 4 Selecting Probe Attenuation lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 3 gt Function Probe attenuation for each channel can be selected from the following 1 1 10 1 100 1 or 1000 1 Note If an incorrect attenuation has been selected V div will also be incorrect If you set the attenuation to 1 1 when using a 10 1 probe for example the displayed value for automatically measured amplitude will be 1 10 the true value Operating Procedure 1 Press one of the keys CH1 to CH4 to select the desired channel 2 Pressthe Probe soft key to display the menu used to select the attenuation 3 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired attenuation 1999 67 63 10 30 41 jt Nornal Stopped 43 iMS s insi CHI n SUY B Display CH1 Display l ll DFF py OFF pu Position IB Position 0 06diu aL lL 6 90diu Coupling DpCiMo Probe JL l 10 1 Band Uidth 1600 1 l Full 2 000 V LS dons B d
420. splays all files on the medium Properties Lists the file name extension file size the date it was saved the attributes and the comment for the selected file Note You cannot save or load while the data acquisition is in progress e If you change the file extension on a PC for an example you will not be able to load that file Amaximum of 36 characters can be displayed in Path File names are not case sensitive Comments are case sensitive In addition the following file names cannot be used due to limitations of MS DOS AUX CON PRN NUL CLOCK When using the GP IB or serial interface RS 232 commands to enter a file name the following symbols that do not exist on the keyboard of this instrument can be used 1 When the setup parameters are loaded from a file the setup parameters of each key are overwritten with the loaded settings and cannot be set back to their previous settings It is recommended that the current setup parameters be saved before loading setup parameters from a file The date and time communication parameters and SCSI ID numbers are not saved Therefore when setup parameters are loaded from a file these parameters do not change When the total number of files and directories in one directory exceeds 2400 the file list will no longer be displayed This function can not be used in conjunction with FTP server function FTP client function or LPR client function Operating Pro
421. t 2 1 Front Panel Rear Panel 2 e tnnt neat tede rre Petri nderit 2 1 2 2 Operation Keys Jog Shuttle Knobs sssseeeeeeeneennee nennen 2 2 2 9 Screerns cos coin e n n o tihedenteiad e iii ite 2 5 Chapter 3 Precations During Use 3 1 Precautions During Use 5 12 de oe a e etm deett 3 1 AN 3 2 Installatioriz c cott te Re o et ho d te eidem 3 3 AN 33 Connecting the Power Cord deco seo pere edet o dii deeem ess 3 5 AX 33 4 Cornectingya Probe cat ee e e dete ied euh 3 7 A 3 5 Compensating the Probe Phase Correction cc cceceesceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereetreeeeeaes 3 10 3 6 Setting the Date and Time 0 eee ee eee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeaeeeeeeseaeeeeeeseaeeseaeeeaeeseaeeneeeteatens 3 11 A 3 7 Connecting the Logic Probe Optional 3 12 Chapter 4 Common Operations 4 1 Entering Values and Character Strings seen 4 1 42 lnitializing Settings aid aiid enda eet e eer cede eec de 4 4 4 3 Performing AUto Setup z ioo ERR HERRERA MARBRE 4 5 4 4 Starting Stopping Waveform Acquisition essessseeeeenenenennns 4 7 4 5 The Snapshot and Clear Trace Functions esseeneneneenene 4 8 46 Galibrationi i oO REID ODER HEN RU saseaae 4 9 4 7 Using the Helps FUNCOM rises nd oerte cott dr c tee nee t pcc cte etg eoa 4 11 IM 701410 01E Contents Chapter 5 Vertical and Horizontal Axes 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5
422. t the instrument Operating Procedure 1 Press the MISC key 2 Press the Network soft key to display the Network menu 3 Pressthe TCP IP Setup soft key to display the TCP IP settings menu 2000 07 05 15 55 40 j fio Normal 8515 Network Stopped y 00k3 s 5msA Network a M TCP IP Setup Calibration no ll TCP IP TCP IP setup EM Setup A IP Address User User Account Net Mask E Account SCSI ID sac System Conf ig Overview Next 12 H dee Gate Way L Mail Setup INS OFF Setup Net Drive Setup Net Drive Setup l Net Print Net Print Setup Setup L Others AST UR Others CHi 10 1 Edge CH1 5 00 U div Auto connect Log List DC Full 0 10 U Log List DHCP ON OFF 4 Move the cursor to DHCP using the jog shuttle and press the SELECT key to turn DHCP ON or OFF If you select ON then it is not necessary to the set the IP address subnet mask and default gateway If you wish to set up the DNS please skip to step 11 If you do not wish to set up the DNS check the network cable connection and restart the DL7100 DL7200 The IP address subnet mask and default gateway are automatically set L o 5 3 Fl fl zl A k Setting the IP Address Set the IP address if you turned DHCP OFF in st
423. t with protective grounding terminal Do not invalidate protection by using an extension cord without protective grounding Protective Grounding The protective grounding terminal must be connected to ground to prevent an electric shock before turning ON the power Necessity of Protective Grounding Never cut off the internal or external protective grounding wire or disconnect the wiring of protective grounding terminal Doing so poses a potential shock hazard Defect of Protective Grounding and Fuse Do not operate the instrument when protective grounding or fuse might be defective Fuse To prevent a fire make sure to use fuses with specified standard voltage current type Before replacing the fuses turn off the power and disconnect the power source Do not use a different fuse or short circuit the fuse holder Do not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere Do not operate the instrument in the presence of flammable liquids or vapors Operation of any electrical instrument in such an environment constitutes a safety hazard Do not Remove Any Covers There are some areas with high voltages Do not remove any cover if the power supply is connected The cover should be removed by qualified personnel only External Connection To ground securely connect the protective grounding before connecting to measurement or control unit Also when touching the circuit turn off the power to the circuit and check that there is no voltage being generated
424. ta or a specified data pattern based on the analysis result Search and Zoom Function Search for then expand and display a portion of the displayed waveform Choose from the following five search methods Edge count the rising or falling edges and automatically search either edge Serial Pattern automatically search a serial pattern up to 64 bits with a synchronized or unsynchronized clock Parallel Pattern automatically search a parallel pattern from CH1 CH4 MATH1 MATH2 or 16 bit logic optional Supported by DL7100 software ROM version 1 21 and later Pulse Width automatically search for parts where a pulse width meets specified conditions Supported by DL7100 software ROM version 1 11 and later Auto Scroll automatically scroll the zoom position Supported by DL7100 software ROM version 1 21 and later History Search Function You can search for and display waveforms from the history memory that satisfy specified conditions Choose from the following two search methods Zone Set an area on the screen then extract and display only those waveforms that pass through the area Pass mode or do not pass through the area Bypass mode Parameter Extract and display only the automatic measurement results of the waveform parameters which meet the specified conditions Supported by DL7100 software ROM version 1 21 and later Cursor measurement function Allows selection of cursor type fro
425. tal current consumption of A through D x 600 mA EXT CLOCK IN B PROBE POWER TRIG OUT EXT TRIG TTL 1 TRIG GATE 12V 40V MAX IN IN 1M When using the current probe 700937 or 701930 the number of probes that can be used is limited by the current generated by the device under measurement Examples of current consumption measurement of an active probes that can be connected to the DL1740 are shown below Current probe 700937 a ae Positive current t T Negative current 1 150 E DC 200 AC f 50 Hz 2 15 10 5 0 I 10 15 Current generated A 3 8 IM 701410 01E 3 4 Connecting a Probe Current probe 701930 400 300 200 100 Positive current t 0 Y 100 F Negative current 200 DC 300 AC f 50 Hz Current consumption mA 400 E 150 100 50 0 50 100 150 Current generated A The positive and negative power supply of the FET probe 700939 or the differential probe 701920 is 125 mA at the maximum IM 701410 01E 3 9 esp Buung suonneoaJqd B 3 5 Compensating the Probe Phase Correction AN CAUTION Never apply an external voltage to the COMP terminal as damage to the instrument may result Operating Procedure Explanation 1 Turn ON the power switch 2 Connect the probe to the input termina
426. tatistical Processing 7 Press the SELECT key to select ON 8 Repeat steps 5 to 7 as necessary The setting of other parameters is the same as that of normal automated measurements See pages 9 14 to 9 16 Statistical Processing by Period Applicable to DL7100 with software ROM version 1 21 or later See section 15 4 Checking the System Condition 1 Press the MEASURE key 2 Press the Mode soft key to display the automatic measurement mode selection menu 3 Press the soft key corresponding to Cycle Statistics to set the automatic measurement mode 4 Press the Item Setup soft key to display the measuring item dialog box and the measurement source channel selection menu 2000 03 03 16 30 29 ick Normal Stopped 571 J 160HS s 10usAi Source Ttem Setup MEASURE Mode CHL l Cycle PP Freq v AvgFreq Statistics Max c Period 5 amp ugPer iod Iten Setup JL nin s Rise IntiTY Cycle Trace Aug Fali s Int2Ty L CHL mns 5 Width s ImtiXY Sdev Width Int2XY High s Duty Lou g Bursti Shou Result Measure Exec L 5 OShot Burstz n IQ Tine Rangel 5 000d iu Time Range2 L 5 000div 0Shot Pulse L All Clear Copy To AlI Trace CHi 10 1 Edge CH1 5 00 Urdiv Normal DC Full 9 00 V Next 12 L
427. tem Waveform Data Type Binary Save Load Unload Utility Compressing the data and saving 12 not compress and save Compressed data cannot be loaded If P P Comp is turned ON when saving waveform data only the maximum and minimum values of the multiple data points existing at the same time position are saved In this way the file size can be reduced 13 14 parentheses Selecting the destination medium directory Press the File List soft key to display the file list dialog box Turn the jog shuttle to select the save destination medium displayed with 15 Press the SELECT key to confirm the selection d C Mainz 100k gt gt p om Norm SMS al Ses ZnsA Save File List Size 1999 07 07 14 47 1999 67 07 14 46 1999707707 14 45 1999 07 07 14 46 1999 67 07 14 39 1999 07 07 14 39 1999 67 67 11 35 1999707707 11 34 1999707707 11 29 1999 67 07 11 28 1999 07 07 11 19 1999 67 07 11 18 M File Nane CHAPTS M Property Filter AUF ES 1999 07 67 14 39 23 j Save Stopped 4 i r EIEN D File List Ln 4S 4 File Nane Path FDO Space 831488 byte CHAPTS File Name ee Trace FDO 1 CHAPTO14 TIF All CHAPTO13 TIF RT CHAPTO12 TIF Range CHAPTO11 TIF CHAPTO10 TIF Main CHAPTOOS TIF Eq CHAPTOOS
428. th interleave ON 1 GS s With interleave OFF 500 MS s Repetitive sampling mode 100 GS s Maximum record length 701410 With interleave ON 2 MWords CH With interleave OFF 1 MWords CH 701420 With interleave ON 8 MWords CH With interleave OFF 4 MWords CH 701430 With interleave ON 4 MWords CH With interleave OFF 2 MWords CH 701440 With interleave ON 16 MWords CH With interleave OFF 8 MWords CH 1 As measured following calibration after 30 minute warmup with internal clock timebase under standard operating conditions as described on page 16 10 2 For repetitive events The frequency region for single shot is DC to sampling frequency 2 5 or the frequency region for the repetitive event whichever is less 3 Measured under following conditions input block shorted 10 kWord record length Normal acquisition mode accumulation OFF 1 1 probe attenuation 4 Typical or average value not guaranteed IM 701410 01E 16 1 E suoneoyioodg 16 2 Trigger Section Item Specifications Trigger mode Auto auto level normal single single N Trigger source CH1 to CH4 EXT LINE Trigger coupling CH1 to CH4 DC AC EXT DC HF rejection 20 kHz or 15 kHz band limit ON OFF for trigger source CH1 to CH4 Trigger hysteresys Select the trigger hysteresys width CH1 to CH4 Trigger level setting range CH1to CH4 4 div from screen center 0 01 div resol
429. the mark to the left of the file name disappears This file will not be copied Go to step 11 Selecting all copy source files at once 8 9 Turn the jog shuttle to select a file a directory or a medium Pressing the All Set soft key places mark to the left of every file in the directory containing the selected file or directory These directories and files will be copied The name of the All Set soft key changes to All Reset Resetting all selected copy source 10 Pressing the All Set soft key removes marks to the left of every file in the directory containing the selected file or directory The directories and files will not be copied The name of the All Reset soft key changes to All Set Selecting the copy destination 11 Press the Dest Dir soft key The copy execution menu and the copy destination file list dialog box appear Selecting the destination medium directory 12 The procedures are the same as steps 13 to 17 in section 11 6 Saving Loading Waveform Data 11 32 IM 701410 01E 11 12 Copying Files Executing the copy operation 13 Press the Copy Exec soft key to copy all source files that have sows marks Specifying the file to be displayed in the File List dialog box and viewing its properties The procedures are the same as steps 30 to 33 in section 11 6 Saving Loading Waveform Data Utility Function Copy Set Reset
430. the Function soft key displays the file function menu 6 Pressthe soft key corresponding to Delete 1999 07 67 14 39 23 ico Normal FILE 4 y ans Utility File Item 80 lt lt Maint 100k gt gt Function Setup Delete File List Path FD Space 972288 byte Set Reset File Nane Size CHAPT 12 TIF 199970770 15 19 All Set CHAPTO11 TIF 1999 02 90 15 15 es CHAPTO16 TIF 1999 67 07 15 10 M CHAPTO69 TIF 1999 07 07 15 10 Save CHAPT908 TIF 199970770 15 09 Property CHAPTOO TIF 1999 07 07 15 08 CHAPTOOO SET 1999 67 07 15 06 iu CHAPTO06 TIF 1999707707 15 02 Filter Load CHAPTO6S TIF 1999707707 15 01 CHAPT804 TIF 1999 02 07 14 59 CSU fea CHAPTOO3 TIF 1999 07 07 14 59 CHAPTOO2 TIF 1999 07 07 14 53 hd Attr 10000 Dus 20 00 V 10000 ou CHi 18 1 CHZ 10 1 Edge CH1 Utility 20 0 Urdiv 5 00 Uzdiv Auto Delete Exec DC Full DC Full 7 2 VU Selecting the files to be deleted one at a time 7 Turn the jog shuttle to select a file 8 Pressing the Set Reset key places marks to the left of the selected file The file will be deleted Then pressing the Set Reset key again removes marks to the left of the selected file The file will not be deleted IM 701410 01E 11 29 uinipojy Buip1o28H oui speo pue saAes ejeq E 11 11 Changing t
431. the DC and the AC content of the input signal 50 Q GND Checks the ground level Input coupling and frequency characteristic The frequency characteristic when AC or DC is selected is shown below Note that low frequency signals and low frequency contents are not acquired if AC 1 MQ is selected When AC is selected When DC 50 Q is selected Attenuation Attenuation 0 dB 0 dB 3 dB f 3 dB gt gt 400 MHz 500 MHz 400 MHz Input frequency Input frequency less than 10 Hz when using 1 1 probe DC 1 MQ less than 1 Hz when using 10 1 probe N CAUTION The maximum input voltage when the frequency is less than or equal to 1 kHz is 400 V DC ACpeak when using 1 MQ input and 5 Vrms or 10 Vpeak when using 50 Q input Applying a voltage that exceeds these values can damage the input section When the frequency exceeds 1 kHz voltages below these values can also sometimes damage the input section Operating Procedure 1 Press one of the keys from CH1 to CH4 to select the channel 2 Pressthe Coupling soft key to display the menu used to select the coupling 3 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired coupling If DC 50 Q is selected a confirmation menu is displayed Press the Set to DC 50 Q or Cancel soft key CH1 Display 1999 67 63 10 30 41 j fio Normal 43 Stopped iHS s insi Cur EEUU Di
432. the DL7200 to the DL7100 When loading waveform data from the DL7100 to the DL7200 13 16 IM 701410 01E 13 9 Viewing the Ether Option and MAC Address Function You can check for the factory default MAC address and the inclusion of the Ethernet option Operating Procedure 1 Press the MISC key 2 Press the Overview soft key Ether Yes No indicates the inclusion or omission of the Ethernet option MAC 000064 823 015 as in the figure below shows you the MAC address 2000 07 06 11 08 47 po Normal System Overview MISC g Calibration Model 1 701440 Calibration EE SCSI ID odi System Config Overview Record Length Max16MW 8MW CH g Communication L Option Printer Ves Logic Yes H PC CARD IVF Yes SCSI ID Ether Yes 600064 823 015 L Default Language Invalid Network Soft Version 9 99 ROM Sum 64B4H Linkage Date TEST 66 67 03 Mon 21 48 H System Conf ig L Overview 4 L Note These are only displayed if the Ethernet option is installed f your MAC address is displayed XXXXXX_XXX_XXX contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer IM 701410 01E 13 17 jeuond o suoneoiunuuuio 19uJ89u13 H 13 10 Other Settings Function Enter various settings specific to FTP client LPR and SMTP Normally it is not necessary to enter these setting s
433. the cursor to Condition 10 Press the SELECT key several times to select True or False Setting the level hysteresis trigger coupling and HF rejection 11 Pressing the Level Coupling soft key displays a menu used to set the level coupling hysteresis and HF rejection The setting also applies to AB N trigger See page 6 2 to 6 13 When the Window is ON set the window position width trigger coupling and HF rejection The settings are the same as the window trigger See section 6 13 Setting the Window Trigger Note The trigger level hysteresis trigger coupling and HF rejection settings apply to simple trigger and enhanced trigger Setting the pulse width 12 Ifthe jog shuttle control is not set to Time press the Time soft key If the Width Type is T1 lt Pulse lt T2 press the Time1 Time2 soft key 13 Turn the jog shuttle to set the pulse width You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits Pressing the RESET key resets the pulse width to 0 001 us Time2 is reset to 0 002 us Setting the window 14 Press the Window soft key to select either ON or OFF When the Window is turned OFF a trigger is activated on the time period over which the parallel pattern of the channel state H L and X is met or not met When the Window is turned ON a trigger is activated on the time period over which the parallel pattern of the window condit
434. the hold off See section 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time Precautions to be taken when setting the pattern trigger When the trigger type setting is changed the pattern trigger setting is no longer valid However if the pattern trigger is selected again the previous settings are enabled Evenifthe trigger mode is set to auto level mode the operation will be in auto mode Setthe trigger status on all trigger sources If the channel selected is a clock channel select the trigger slope When activating the trigger in sync with the clock signal specify at least 1 ns for the pattern to setup and at least 1 ns for the hold time IM 701410 01E 6 10 Setting the Pattern Trigger ENHANCED Operating Procedure Setting the trigger type 1 Press the ENHANCED key 2 Press the Type soft key to display the trigger type menu 3 Pressthe Pattern soft key 1999 07 05 08 54 11 jt Nornal Stopped AMS s insAli ENHANCED n H Type 3 85 Pattern M Set Pattern H Levels Coupling a 2 000 V H H CHI 10 1 CHZ 10 1 Edge CHI j Hold Off 20 0 Urdiv 0 500 Urdiu SingletN DC Full DC Full EM 0 08us Setting the status and condition 4 Pressing the Set Pattern soft key to display a menu used to set the status and condition Set Pattern Clock CH 3 Condition When activating the trigger only on the status pattern 5 T
435. the line Number Line A trigger is activated at the beginning of the selected line NTSC 5 to 1054 Field 1 starts at line No 5 Field 2 starts at line No 268 Line Nos in cannot be set Field 1 rmm uuu unmmmorrmrm T dH IRSESER inm mmm nm elelelwelslelzlsleltltlt2ltil 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Line No gt 524525526 gt 548 1049 1050 1051 gt 1054 a o Filed 2 j PNE Line No gt Ea aeoloesloeaoosiacobe7leslaeolerobr le72e7alerde7sle76e77e7se7ekesoes tlesclessiesdees PAL 2 to 1251 Field 1 starts at line No 2 Field 2 starts at line No 315 Line Nos in cannot be set Filed 1 FAA nan nnm nr ar 1 2 4 5 7 Line No 621 622 623 624 625 n DM Lm en 1246 1250 1251 A Fied2 U U UUUUU CUE U U 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 Line No gt 535 gt 945 HDTV 2 to 2251 Field 1 starts at line No 2 Field 2 starts at line No 565 Line Nos in cannot be set 45H 517H 5H 5H 35H A 2245 2250 2251 Line No 1120 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 1130 1181 1132 1166 0 2 3 4 7 M midi AAA Atau j Line N ger 1687 1688 1169 1170 1171 up up 1174 1728 Ine No 557 562 563 564 565 566 568 569
436. the offset to go out of range the offset moves to the nearest range limit If you then return to the original sensitivity the offset returns to its original setting as well provided that you have not explicitly changed the value in the meantime Setting the offset value 1 Press one of the keys from CH1 to CH4 to select the channel 2 Press the Offset soft key 3 Turn the jog shuttle to set the offset value 1999 67 63 10 30 41 j Nornal Stopped Cur iMS s insi CHI E Display EEUU jor N Position 90 90diu Coupling nDCciMo Probe 10 1 Ig Offset 0 0 U Banduidth Full Ls 000s 2 000 V B d E 5 000ms CHi 10 1 CHZ 10 1 Edge CHI 20 0 Wdiv 0 500 U div Auto Next DC Full DC Full TEY 12 Canceling the offset value set to 0 V Press the RESET key to set the offset value to 0 V IM 701410 01E 5 5 sexy Je1uozuoH pue e93rJeA 5 6 The Preset Function Function The preset function automatically sets each key setting such as the V div input coupling and trigger level to the optimum value for measurement of TTL or ECL signals or to an arbitrary value Also you can automatically set the appropriate values for use with the current probe 700937 sold separately Applicable to DL7100 with software ROM version 1 21 or later See section 15 4 Checking the System Condition This function all
437. the offset voltages in the results of computations and automated measurement of waveform parameters The waveform that has unneeded offset voltage DC voltage removed from the input signal can be observed In this case the vertical position becomes 0 V Note Offset cancel applies to all channels To set whether or not to cancel the offset for each channel use linear scaling Operating Procedure 1 Press the MISC key 2 Pressthe System Config soft key to display the system configuration menu 3 Pressthe Offset Cancel Mode soft key to select ON or OFF The default value is OFF 1999 07 69 14 41 54 j ut Nornal MIST Stopped 253 20HS s 5ms Sustem Config 7 Message Calibration ENG Click Sound Communication OFF pry A 2 4 SCSI ID E A Date Time M Graphic Color M B B i Offset Cancel System Conf ig Mode on A Trigger Gate Overview z H i active High CHi 10 1 CHZ 10 1 Edge CHI Next 20 0 U div 5 00 Urdiv Auto wa DC Full DC Full 0 0 U Gate Active suone4edo 19410 B IM 701410 01E 14 7 Chapter 15 Troubleshooting Maintenance and Inspection 15 1 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting For corrective actions when a message appears on the screen read the following pages If servicing is required or if the instrument does not operate pr
438. the optimum values for TTL or ECL signal measurement for the user settings and the current probe 700937 sold separately Applicable to DL7100 with software ROM version 1 21 or later See section 15 4 Checking the System Condition Action on Trigger Hard Copy Save to File Buzzer and Send Mail are performed every time a trigger is activated Send Mail Sending mails for DL7100 DL7200 condition via Ethernet Calibration Auto calibration and manual calibration are possible Environment setting function Allows setting of screen color date time message language click sound ON OFF Probe Compensation signal output function Outputs a square calibration waveform signal approx 1 Vp p approx 1 kHz from the Probe compensation signal output terminal on the front panel Overview function Shows system configuration Self test function Allows memory test key test and printer test Help function Displays help about settings Ethernet PC Card interface optional 16 6 Rear Panel Input Output Item Specifications External trigger input EXT TRIG IN Trigger Gate input TRIG GATE IN Connector type Input bandwidth Input impedance Input range Maximum input voltage Trigger level BNC DC to 100 MHz Approx 1 MO 15 pF 1V 40 V DC AC peak or 28Vrms 10 kHz or less 2 V 5 mV measurement resolution Trigger output TRIG OUT Co
439. the waveform zoom window Applicable to DL7100 with software ROM version 1 11 or later See section 15 4 Checking the System Condition Auto Scroll The zoom box automatically scrolls in a specified direction You can stop the zoom box while checking the zoomed waveform in the bottom window Applicable to DL7100 with software ROM version 1 21 or later See section 15 4 Checking the System Condition SPI See section 8 10 Analyzing and Searching SPI Signals Search condition Setup When the type is edge Source Select the channel to be searched You can also select Math1 and Math2 Level Set the level used to determine the rising or falling edge The range is 8 div within the screen The resolution is 0 01 div Polarity Select the polarity from the following list 4 Search by the number of times the waveform passes from below the specified level to above the specified level 3 Search by the number of times the waveform passes from above the specified level to below the specified level Hys Set the hysteresis The range is 0 3 div to 4 div Count Set the number of times f or Y is to be met The range is 1 to 1000000 Start Point Set the starting position of the search The range is from 5 to 5 div When the type is serial pattern Clock CH Select the clock channel from CH1 to CH4 that is used as a timing reference in checking the pattern When None is selected the pattern is checked at a predetermined
440. tion you must carry out these procedures with a PC or workstation running the FTP server function DL7100 File retrieval from the DL7100 DL7200 floppy or hard drive FTP server function You can download files from the internal floppy disk or hard disk of the DL7100 DL7200 using a networked PC or workstation Since the DL is acting as the FTP server in this situation the PC must be acting as the client DL7100 DL7200 Outputting to a network printer LPR client function You can print screen images to a network printer just as you would to the DL7100 DL7200 s built in printer or to a printer with a Centronics interface DL7100 DL7200 Mail transmission SMTP client function You can send transmissions to a given email address at specified intervals Using this function you can periodically transmit such information as GO NO GO results and the measurement rate DL7100 DL7200 1 28 IM 701410 01E 1 6 Other Useful Functions Communications Interface User s Manual IM701410 11E gt The instrument is equipped with a GP IB interface as standard The interface enables you to send waveform data to a personal computer for analysis as well as to perform waveform measurement while controlling the instrument using an exte
441. tive Change the timebase to Internal 5 14 829 Cannot change when all bits of Logic Display Turn ON the bits you wish to display 5 12 are OFF 836 Settings cannot be changed during Select Abort or press the START STOP key 4 7 action on trigger 6 35 Abort action on trigger 840 Cannot set the acquisition mode is Average Change the acquisition mode or the trigger mode 6 1 when the trigger mode is set to Single or 7 2 Single N 841 It is not possible to make a setting that will Setting or set the trigger mode 5 16 result in the repetitive mode when the trigger to a different mode 2 mode is set to Single N 842 A B N and A Delay B cannot be specified Turn OFF the trigger gate 14 6 when the Trigger Gate is active 843 The trigger mode cannot be set to Single or Change the acquisition mode or the trigger mode 6 1 Single N when the acquisition mode is set 7 2 to Average 846 The trigger mode cannot be set to Single N Turn OFF the repetitive sampling mode lower the 5 16 7 1 during repetitive sampling mode T div setting or shorten the record length 7 9 847 Cannot be set during repetitive sampling Turn OFF the repetitive sampling mode lower the 5 16 7 1 mode T div setting or shorten the record length 7 9 848 Not possible during the interleave mode Turn OFF the interleave mode 7 9 850 The acquisition mode cannot be set in the Change the record length 7 1 current aquisition mode 851 Computation cannot be carrie
442. tle to set the line You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits Pressing the RESET key sets the line to 5 NTSC or 2 PAL HDTV Selecting frame skip 12 Press the Frame Skip soft key several times to select frame skip IM 701410 01E 6 31 HunebbuL H 6 15 Setting the Logic Trigger ENHANCED Optional lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 10 gt Function While the combined condition of H L and Don t care of POD A and B 16 inputs is satisfied a trigger is activated on the edge of clock channel Setting the logic condition Condition of each POD H Above the specified threshold level L Below the specified threshold level X Don t care For the threshold level see section 5 10 Turning ON OFF the Logic Input and Setting the Threshold Level Selecting the clock channel Clock CH Select None if the trigger is not to be activated in sync with the signal Select the clock channel from CH1 to CH4 if the trigger is to be activated in sync with the signal Select the trigger slope from the following 4 Rising Y Falling Selecting the trigger condition When activating the trigger only on the status pattern Select the trigger condition from the following list of choices Enter Trigger is activated when the specified combination pattern is met Exit Trigger is activated when the specified pattern is no longer met When activating the
443. to be the same value as the previous bit for the analysis If the first data is indefinite it is considered to be 0 CS Displays the state of the chip select signal When the chip select signal is not set Displays blank When a single chip select signal is set Displays H or L When multiple chip select signals are set Displays the channel number of the highest priority among the enabled chip select signals The order of priority is CHA Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 and Bit 7 Note Youcan select highlight an arbitrary byte in the list of analysis results and move the Zoom Position to the head of that byte In addition if you move the Zoom Position the highlighting moves to the corresponding byte in the list of analysis results If one or more chip select signals are set and the chip select signal waveform on the Main screen does not contain points of change from H to L or L to H the data input output signal is not analyzed Displaying the detailed analysis list The analysis result can be listed on the entire screen The detail display also shows the time from the trigger position to the head of each byte IM 701410 01E 8 31 8 10 Analyzing and Searching SPI Signals Searching SPI Signals Performing a Pattern Search Search Setup You can specify a data pattern of Data1 or Data2 in units of bytes and search the waveform When a waveform that matches the pattern is found the Zoo
444. torage conditions Temperature 20 to 60 C Humidity 20 to 8096 RH no condensation allowed Operating conditions Temperature 5to 40 C Humidity 20 to 80 RH without a printer 35 to 80 RH with a printer Storage altitude 3000 m or below Operating altitude 2000 m or below Rated supply voltage 100 to 120 VAC 220 to 240 VAC Permissible supply voltage range 90 to 132 VAC 198 to 264 VAC Rated supply voltage frequency 50 60 Hz Permissible supply voltage 48 to 63 Hz frequency Fuse 250 V 4A time lag VDE SEMKO UL CSA SEV approved Maximum power consumption 290 VA Withstand voltage between power supply and case 1 5 k VAC for 1 minute Insulation resistance between power supply and case 10 MQ or more at 500 VDC External dimensions details on next page 373 W x 211 H x 306 D mm with printer cover closed handles and projections excluded Weight including printer Approx 9 kg Cooling method Forced air cooling air discharged from side Installation position Horizontal when a stand is used Battery back up Battery life Set up data and internal clock are backed up by a built in lithium battery Approx 5 years at ambient temperature of 23 C Accessories 1 power cord 400 MHz passive probes 1 probe for each channel on model Electrical fuses 2 fuses including spare mounted in fuse holder Softc
445. tortion the measurement voltage range of the oscilloscope can be widened A 400 MHz passive probe is supplied with the instrument The probe attenuates the input signal by 1 10 When a probe is used the probe attenuation must match the instrument s attenuation setting so that the input voltage can be measured directly Set the instrument s attenuation to 10 1 if the supplied probe is to be used In addition to 10 1 attenuations of 1 1 100 1 and 1000 1 are provided When you use a probe other than the one supplied with the instrument set the instrument s attenuation so that it matches the probe s attenuation Bandwidth Limit lt Section 5 7 gt High frequency noise of 20 MHz or higher or 100 MHz or higher can be eliminated from the input signal Vertical Sensitivity Section 5 8 gt The V div vertical sensitivity setting is used to adjust the amplitude of the displayed waveform so that the waveform can be observed easily The V div setting is made by setting the voltage value per division on the screen grid The vertical sensitivity setting operates by switching to a different attenuator attenuation rate The setting changes in steps 1 V div gt 2 V div gt 5 V div In addition by performing computations on the digital data acquired using the voltage sensitivity above the waveform can be displayed at a sensitivity of 0 4 or 0 5 to 10 times the voltage sensitivity that was used to acquire the data Variable
446. trigger in sync with the clock channel Set the trigger condition from the following list of choices True Trigger is activated on the rising or falling edge of the clock channel while the status pattern is being satisfied False Trigger is activated on the rising or falling edge of the clock channel while the status pattern is not being satisfied 6 32 IM 701410 01E 6 15 Setting the Logic Trigger ENHANCED Optional Operating Procedure Setting the trigger type 1 2 3 Press the ENHANCED key Pressing the Type soft key displays the trigger type menu Press the Logic soft key 1999 07 65 13 06 00 j fio Normal Stopped cH iMS s insAli ENHANCED GAN Type Logic K Set Pattern H Levels Coupling CH 20 nc M 2 000 V d i B 10 1 CHZ 10 1 Edge CHI Hold Off 0 Udiy 0 500 U diu SinglecN Full DC Full 7 2 V 9 08us Setting the status and condition 4 Pressing the Set Pattern soft key displays a menu used to set the status and condition Clock CH CHi Slope CF Pod Pod B nite Rx Bu CXCLX Me LXX Bt XT s XDI nits Xx Bte XIX se OXI Condition True When activating the trigger only on the status pattern 5 6 7 8 10 11 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Clock CH Press the SELECT key to display the clock channel menu Turn the
447. tting range when interleave mode is ON When performing box averaging the available setting range is 2 MWord or less for 8 MW CH models or 4 MWord or less with interleave mode ON and 500 kWord or less for 2 MW CH models or 1 MWord or less with interleave mode ON DL7200 Record length Count 16 MW CH model Count 4 MW CH model 1 kWord 1 to 2048 4096 1 to 2048 4096 10 kWord 1 to 256 512 1 to 256 512 50 kWord 1 to 64 128 1 to 64 128 100 kWord 1 to 32 64 1 to 32 64 250 kWord 1 to 16 32 1 to 16 32 500 kWord 1 to 8 16 1 to 8 16 1 MWord 1 to 4 8 1 to 4 8 2 MWord 1 to 2 4 1 to 2 4 4 MWord 1 2 2 8 MWord 1 1 16 MWord 1 For each count of the trigger only the displayed waveform is preserved past waveform data is not preserred The setting range when interleave mode is ON When performing box averaging the available setting range is 4 MWord or less for 16 MW CH models or 8 MWord or less with interleave mode ON and 1 MWord or less for 4 MW CH models or 2 MWord or less with interleave mode ON 7 12 IM 701410 01E 7 7 Using the History Memory Display Setto One to display the selected record only Select the waveform to be displayed using Select Record from the specified range between Start Record and End Record Setto All to generate overlapped display of all history records from the Start Record Number to the End Record Number The waveform
448. tting this mode ON will disable use of CH2 and CH4 while reassigning the memory for those channels to CH1 and CH3 This mode doubles the maximum settings for history memory sequential store and record length Furthermore because the maximum sample rate can be increased by sampling the input signal using two A D converters real time sampling at a rate of 1 GS s for the DL7100 or 2 GS s for the DL7200 becomes possible For the relationship between the interleave mode time axis record length and sample rate see appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record length Acquisition Modes lt Sections 7 2 and 7 4 gt When storing sampled data in the acquisition memory refer to Signal flow in section 1 1 itis possible to perform processing on specified data and display the resultant waveform The following data processing methods are available Normal mode In this mode sampled data are stored in the acquisition memory without processing Averaging mode Averaging is a process in which waveforms are acquired repeatedly to obtain the average of waveform data of the same timing the same time in relation to the trigger point If this mode is active the instrument takes the linear or exponential average of incoming data and writes the results into acquisition memory The averaged data is then used to generate the display You can set the attenuation constant to a value from 2 to 256 in 2n steps and the
449. tup You can select a waveform from input signals CH1 CH4 and from math waveforms Math1 Math2 You can use multiple waveforms for GO NO GO determination Select from the following determination standards for each waveform IN When the specified waveform enters the zone OUT When the specified waveform is outside the zone OFF Do not determine Selecting the Reference Waveform Target Trace Select a reference waveform for creating a zone The basic waveform will be displayed as a trace and you can select from the following types Input signal waveform Math waveform Creating a Determination Zone Redraw New You can set up to six determination zones The following are the setting ranges Up down setting range 8 div from the reference waveform Left right setting range 5 div from the center of the screen Zones are assigned to waveforms in the following manner Zonei CH1 Zone2 CH2 Zone3 CH3 Zone4 CH4 Zone5 Mathi Zone6 Math2 The screen displays the active zones depending on the settings in Setup Setting Logic AND when all parameter conditions 1 through 6 are met the GO NO GO Action is performed OR when at least one parameter condition from 1 6 are met the GO NO GO Action is performed Action when Conditions are Met Set Action Buzzer Alarm beep sound Save to File Save waveform data to the storage media specified in the storage FILE menu FD SCSI and so on Hard copy Output screen
450. tup Logic m E Search Exec Search Exec Selecting the search zone Select Zone 4 Pressing the Search Setup soft key to displays the search condition setting menu 5 Pressthe Select Zone soft key to display the search condition selection menu 6 Press one of the soft keys from to Zone1 to Zone4 Setting the search conditions Condition 7 Press the Condition soft key several times to select OFF IN or OUT Selecting IN or OUT displays a search window in the area displaying the Source channel Setting the source channel Source 8 Pressing the Source soft key displays the source channel selection menu 9 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired channel to select the source channel Setting the search window 10 Press the Upper Lower soft key 11 Turn the jog shuttle to set the top of the search range You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits Pressing the RESET key resets the value to the default value 12 Press the Upper Lower soft key 13 Turn the jog shuttle to set the end of the search range You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits Pressing the RESET key resets the value to the default value 14 By controlling both Upper and Lower using the jog shuttle you can move the search window up and down without changing the vertical width 15 Ina similar fashion set the horizontal range of the search window 16 Repeat st
451. ty Function e WFT lt Hain Tie gt gt Function lllll Fornat Format gato seed File List r Seance File Name Size Media Info Media Info 1457664 1220608 L m Format P FD Format Fornat 2HD 1 44M L Lin aons 00 v 10 0 CHI 10 1 CHZ 10 1 20 0 Urdiv 5 00 Udiy Exec DC Full DC Full Selecting the format type for the SCSI device PC Card optional 6 Press the Format soft key to display the format menu a Selecting the number of partitions 7 Turn the jog shuttle to select a value from 1 to 5 Selecting the format type 8 Press the Format Type soft key to select Normal or Quick 1999 07 67 10 00 16 Nornal Utility Stopped 94 y BOkS s ZnsA Utility Function r SN lt Maimik gt gt Function lllll Fornat Format Be raT mai File List ia rm File Name Size Media Info Media Info 1457664 1220608 21460609088 2012315648 L Furnat gj Partition Fornat 1 Format Tupe formal Quick L 4 Lin tons 00 v 10 0 CHI 10 1 CHZ 10 1 20 0 Urdiv 5 00 Udiy Format Exec DC Full DC Full L IM 701410 01E wnipam Buip1o28H y speo pue saAes ejeq E 11 4 Formatting t
452. ub or router LE UOO g BEL g 10BASE T staraight cable PC DL7100 r rd X DL7200 E EE S20 9 0 O2O02O02O0 OO0 Ethernet Pd interface cable One to one Connection to a Personal Computer Make the connection using a hub as shown below 10BASE T compatible adapter hub or router 10BASE T staraight DL7100 DL7200 Ethernet interface cable Note When making a one to one connection to a Personal Computer the network card in the Personal Computer should be a 10BASE T or a 10BASE T 100BASE T auto switching card RJ 45 modular jack 10BASE T port IM 701410 01E 13 1 jeuondo suoneoiunuuuio 19uJ9u13 Ey 13 2 Configuring the Ethernet Interface TCP IP Function For a description of this function refter to page 1 28 gt The following configurations must be made in order to use the Ethernet functions of the DL7100 DL7200 Setting the IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway DHCP and DNS Confirm these settings with the administrator of the system or network on which the DL7100 DL7200 will be used DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol When using DHCP you can automatically make the following settings IP address subnet mask default gateway and DNS To use DHCP you must have DHCP Server installed on the network Please ask your network adm
453. uction manual that is provided with the device Note When connecting multiple SCSI devices in a chain attach a SCSI terminator to the device at the other end of the chain Hard disks including the internal hard disk that are formatted with the instrument cannot be read using the NEC PC 9800 Series computers IM 701410 01E uinipojy Buipsosey oui speo pue saAes ejeq E 11 4 Formatting the Recording Medium Function CAUTION Never remove the medium disk or turn OFF the power while the access indicator or the floppy disk icon is blinking This can damage the medium or destroy the data on the medium When the instrument cannot read a pre formatted medium reformat the formatting the medium All data will be erased Formatting a floppy disk When using a new floppy disk you must format it first Select the appropriate format for the floppy disk from the following choices 2DD 640K Formats the 2DD floppy disk to 640 KB 8 sectors 2DD 720K Formats the 2DD floppy disk to 720 KB 9 sectors 2HD 1 2M Formats the 2HD floppy disk to 1 2 MB 8 sectors 2HD 1 44M Formats the 2HD floppy disk to 1 44 MB 18 sectors Formatting PC Card optional Use IBM compatible formatting Formatting a disk The formats of media connected via SCSI option are as follows MO PD Semi IBM format Handled as removable disk Zip JAZ Hard disk format Handled as fixed disk Hard disk format The hard disk format is IBM compatible
454. ue at Cursor1 Y2 The Y axis value at Cursor2 DY The difference between the Y axis values at Cursor1 and Cursor2 Angle cursor Degree Set the measurement zero point position of reference cursor Ref1 and the end point position of the reference cursor Ref2 on the X axis within the screen and assign an angle corresponding to the width of Ref1 and Ref2 Using this angle as a reference this function measures the angle of the two angle cursors Cursor1 and Cursor2 DX1 The angle of Cursor1 from Ref1 DX2 The angle of Cursor2 from Ref1 DDX The angle difference between Cursor1 and Cursor2 DY1 The Y axis value of Cursor1 DY2 The Y axis value of Cursor2 DDY The difference between the Y axis values of Cursor1 and Cursor2 Range of reference width 1 to 720 IM 701410 01E 9 1 sisAjeuy u1J0JOAE AA ol 9 1 Measuring Waveforms Using Cursors When the X Y waveform is displayed H Horizontal cursor Measures the Y axis value at the cursor Y1 The Y axis value at Cursor1 Y2 The Y axis value at Cursor2 DY The difference between the Y axis values of Cursor1 and Cursor2 V Vertical cursor Measures the X axis value at the cursor X1 The X axis value at Cursor1 X2 The X axis value at Cursor2 DX The difference between the X axis values of Cursor1 and Cursor2 Marker cursors Move the cursor on the waveform data and measure the waveform data values Y1to YA The Y axis values of M1 to M4 T
455. unction refer to page 1 5 gt Function The T div setting is made by setting the time per division on the screen grid Setting range Record Length is 10 kW or more 1 ns div to 50 s div 1 2 5 steps Record Length is 1 kW 1 ns div to 5 s div 1 2 5 steps T div and sampling mode Use of repetitive sampling mode lets you get the sample rate of 1 GS s and above with the DL7100 or 100 GS s and above if interleave is also ON or 2 GS s and above with the DL7200 or 5 GS s if interleave is ON But note that the allowable time scale Settings vary according to record length machine model and other factors For details see Appendix 1 T div and roll mode When acquisition count is infinite acquisition mode is not average or the trigger mode is auto auto level or single roll mode display is enabled at the following T div settings Record Length T div 1 kW 50 ms div to 5 s div 10 kW to 1 MW 50 ms div to 50 s div 2MW 100 ms div to 50 s div 4MW 200 ms div to 50 s div 8MW 500 ms div to 50 s div 16 MW 701440 DL7200 only 1 s div to 50 s div Operating Procedure 1 Turn the TIME DIV knob to set the desired T div Note Turning the TIME DIV knob while acquisition is stopped displays the new T div value in parentheses on the upper right of the screen The new setting will come into effect the next time the acquisition is started When repetieive sampling mode is OFF see Section 7 6 the maximum sampling rat
456. unt is set to 3 Serial Pattern search Section 8 9 Searches for a particular section of the current displayed waveform Searches sections of the waveform with the same pattern as the specified waveform pattern High Low Don t Care The waveform patterns are detected using the rising and falling edges of the channel specified as the clock channel or over a certain time interval The section of the waveform that is found is displayed in the zoom window using the zoom rate PR PYAR CA AA Status pattern of CH2 H Hl E H L L Specified status pattern t t H E TERES H x L E L J Conditions Searches sections of the waveform with the same status Clock channel CH1 up to 64 patterns as the specified waveform pattern Timing to check the status Rising Channel on which to perform the search CH2 1 24 IM 701410 01E 1 5 Analyzing the Waveform Parallel Pattern search Section 8 9 Search for specific portions of the currently displayed waveform Search for parts of waveform patterns identical to those previously set in CH1 CH4 Math1 Math2 PodA PodB High Low Don t Care Search by the pattern of each bit in PodA and PodB Applicable to DL7100 with software ROM version 1 21 or later See section 15 4 Checking the System Condition Pulse Width search Section 8 9 Search for specific portions of the currently displayed waveform
457. upling O Tine 0 00lus Window pom 5 000ns 2 000 V H H CHI 10 1 CHZ 10 1 Edge CHI j Hold Off 20 0 Udiy 6 506 Urdiu SingletN DC Full DC Full 7 2 N 0 08us Setting the width type 4 Pressing the Width Type soft key displays a menu used to select the width type 1999 67 05 13 06 00 jj Nornal Stopped 1 iMS s insAli ENHANCED n H Type Width Pulse lt Tine Pulse Tine q xam lt lt Mainz LOk gt gt 1 Ti lt Pulse lt T2 Time Out Window pom Ls came _ 2 000 v d Edge CHi Hold OFF CHI 10 1 CHZ 10 1 20 0 Urdiv 6 506 Urdiu SingletN TZN 0 08us DC Full DC Full 5 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired type from Pulse gt Time Pulse lt Time T1 lt Pulse lt T2 or Time Out 6 23 IM 701410 01E HunebbuL H 6 11 Setting the Width Pulse Time Pulse gt Time T1 lt Pulse lt T2 Time Out Trigger ENHANCED Setting the conditions of each channel 6 Pressthe Set Pattern soft key to display the trigger setting menu Set Pattern Condition 7 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the channel to be set 8 Press the SELECT key several times to select H L or X when the Window is ON IN OUT or X 9 Turn the jog shuttle to move
458. ur the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Clock CH 6 Press the SELECT key to display the clock channel setting menu 7 Turn the jog shuttle to select None 8 Press ESC and turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the channel on which the status is to be set 9 Press the SELECT key several times to select H L X 10 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Condition 11 Press the SELECT key several times to select Enter or Exit Go to step 14 When activating the trigger in sync with the clock channel 5 Tur the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Clock CH 6 Press the SELECT key to display the clock channel setting menu 7 Turn the jog shuttle to set the clock channel 8 Press ESC and turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the channel that was set as the clock channel Press the SELECT key several times to select f or q 10 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the channel to which the status to be set 11 Press the SELECT key several times to select H L or X 12 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Condition 13 Press the SELECT key several times to select True or False IM 701410 01E 6 19 HunebbuL H 6 10 Setting the Pattern Trigger ENHANCED Setting the level hysteresis trigger coupling and HF rejection of the clock CH 14 Pressing the Level Coupling soft key displays a menu
459. ures are the same as steps 6 and 7 in section 11 10 Changing the File Attributes Deleting Files Changing the recording medium directory file name except Net Drive 7 8 Turn the jog shuttle to select the recording medium directory or file Press the File Name soft key to display a keyboard The name of the recording medium directory file is displayed in the entry box of the keyboard Enter the recording medium directory file name according to the procedures given in page 4 2 IM 701410 01E 11 35 wnipe Buip1o28H oui speo pue saAes ejeq E 11 13 Changing the Recording Medium Directory Name and File Name and Creating a Directory Specifying the file to be displayed in the File List dialog box viewing the properties The procedures are the same as steps 30 to 33 in section 11 6 Saving Loading Waveform Data 2000 08 03 12 03 42 jy Dio Normal Stopped 602 d 200kS s 5nsq Utility lt lt Main 10k gt gt n File List Path Fo Space 0 byte i File Name DL 200 m INSERT aL M L CHI 10 1 5 00 U diuv DC Full L Creating a Directory Follow steps 1 3 on page 11 34 to display the file function selection menu 4 Press the soft key corresponding to Make Dir Selecting the medium directory 5 The procedures are the same as step
460. ut Confirm the network settings and connection Chapter 13 761 FTP Error GetData Confirm the network settings and connection Chapter 13 762 FTP Error PutData Confirm the network settings connection and Chapter 13 disk capacity 763 FTP Error AppendData Confirm the network settings connection and Chapter 13 disk capacity 764 FTP Error Client Handle Confirm the network settings and connection Chapter 13 765 FTP Error Others Confirm the network settings and connection Chapter 13 785 Cannot send data to a network printer Confirm the network settings and connection Chapter 13 786 Cannot send a mail Confirm the network settings and connection Chapter 13 Error in Setting 800 to 899 Code Message Corrective Action Reference Page 800 Illegal date time Set a correct date and time 3 10 4 2 801 Illegal file name The file name contains characters that are not 4 2 allowed or the file name is restricted in MS DOS 804 Cannot change this parameter while running Press the START STOP key to the waveform 4 7 acquisition 806 GO NO GO executing Please press All keys other than the START STOP key are 9 34 stop key disabled during GO NO GO determination 814 Duplicated Name Set a different label 8 7 819 Cannot change when Channel Display is OFF Turn ON the channel display or set Math operation 5 1 or Math settings are invalid Sections 9 4 to 9 9 821 Cannot change when ExtClock is ac
461. utation 7 Tur the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Source 8 Pressing the SELECT key displays the channel setting menu 9 Turn the jog shuttle to select the channel on which to perform computation and press the SELECT key 2000 06 19 15 49 41z fio Normal MO 5HS s 200usAiw MATH Mathi Setup Mathi Display Stopped 13 m o Operation i M Mathi Setup Source Bint Cc1 Scale Mathi Label Upper Mathi Louer Unit Smoothing Hathe Display Thr Upper _ 6 00 U_ DFF ON BBtf bus Thr Lower M Nath2 Setup X2 600 0us eed 1 6OBOMS C3 C4 14x 625 0000Hz CHI 10 1 MathZ Label 5 00 Urdiv DC Full Mathz Scaling The upper limit and lower limit of scaling are fixed to 2 and 2 respectively Setting the units 10 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Unit 11 Using the keyboard that appears when the SELECT key is pressed enter the unit using four characters or less Smoothing 12 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Smoothing 13 Press the SELECT key to select ON or OFF Note For details regarding smoothing see section 9 9 Smoothing Entering Labels Applicable to DL7100 with software ROM version 1 21 or later See section 15 4 Checking the System Condition 14 Paess the Math Label 1 soft key to display the keyboard then enter a label See 8 5 Setting the Wa
462. ution EXT 2 V 5 mV resolution Trigger level precision CH1 to CH4 amp 1 div 1096 of trigger level EXT 50 mV 10 of trigger level External trigger probe attenuation 1 1 10 1 Trigger sensitivity CH1to CH4 1 divp p at DC to 500 MHz EXT 100 mVp p at DC to 100 MHz Trigger position Can be set in 196 increments of record length Trigger delay setting range 0to4s Holdoff time range 80 ns to 10s Trigger slope Rise Fall Rise Fall with edge trigger 16 2 IM 701410 01E 16 2 Trigger Section Trigger type Edge A 2 B N A Delay B OR Pattern Pulse Width TV Logic Activate the trigger on the edge of a single trigger source Trigger occurs Nth time condition B becomes true after condition A becomes true Count 1 to 108 Condition A Enter Exit Condition B Enter Exit Trigger occurs first time condition B becomes true after specified delay following condition A true Delay 3nsto5s Condition A Enter Exit Condition B Enter Exit Trigger occurs on the OR of trigger conditions that are specified on multiple trigger sources The trigger condition can either be edge or window Rise IN Fall OUT or Don t care can be specified on each channel from CH1 to CH4 Trigger occurs on the edge of the clock channel based on the True False condition of the parallel pattern that is specified on multiple trigger sources If the clock channel is set t
463. ve the cursor to Pattern Format 40 Press the SELECT key to select Hex or Bin Data The pattern display changes to the selected format Setting the source 41 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Source 42 Press the SELECT key to select Data1 or Data2 Setting the data byte 43 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Data Byte and press the SELECT key 44 Turn the jog shuttle to select a value from 1 to 8 Pressing the RESET key will reset the value to 8 Setting the data pattern 45 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the desired bit of Data Pattern and press the SELECT key 46 f you selected Hex for Pattern Format turn the jog shuttle to select a value from 0 to F and X and press the SELECT key Pressing the RESET key will reset the value to X If you selected Bin for Pattern Format press the SELECT key the appropriate number of times to select 0 1 or X 47 Press the ESC key to close the dialog box e Executing the pattern search 48 Press the Next or Previous soft key The Zoom Position moves to the head of the byte containing the specified pattern and the waveform is displayed in the Zoom screen IM 701410 01E 8 37 Chapter 9 Waveform Analysis 9 1 Measuring Waveforms Using Cursors lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 20 gt Function Restrictions Cursor
464. veform Labels for in formation on displaying Labels Setting the threshold level 15 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Thr Upper 16 Pressing the SELECT key displays the threshold level setting menu 17 Turn the jog shuttle to select the threshold level and press the SELECT key 18 Set Thr Lower in a similar fashion Set Math2 in a similar manner as necessary IM 701410 01E 9 25 sisAjeuy u1J0JOAE AA ol 9 6 Inverting the Waveform Display lt For a discription of this function refer to page 1 22 gt Function Waveforms that can be inverted The waveform is inverted by multiplying CH1 to CH4 and Math1 by 1 Scaling Set the upper and lower limits on computations Auto The upper and lower limits are set according to the computed result Manual The upper and lower limits can be set arbitrarily The range is 9 9999E 30 to 9 9999E 30 Units Units can be set arbitrarily using up to four characters The specified characters are reflected in the scale values Smoothing See section 9 9 Smoothing Maximum record length DL7100 2 MWord 4 MWord interleave mode ON DL7200 4 MWord 8 MWord interleave mode ON Operating Procedure Turning ON OFF the display 1 Pressthe MATH key 2 Pressthe Math1 Display soft key and select ON to display Math1 and OFF to not display Math1 Setting the operator 3 Pressthe Math1 Setup soft key to display the computation dialog box
465. window is effective for transient signals such as an impulse wave which attenuate completely within the time window The Hanning window allows continuity of the signal by gradually attenuating the parts of the signal located near the ends of the time window down to the 0 level Hence it is effective for continuous signals The frequency resolution of the Hanning window is higher than that of the flat top window However the level accuracy of the spectrum of the flat top window is higher than that of the Hanning window When the waveform being analyzed is a continuous type signal select the appropriate window that suits the application FFT computation generates 1000 or 10000 measurement data points but only half points are displayed on the screen Window Integral Power spectrum Rectangular window lt T EA l gt gt T gt K AL fv Hanning window Sine wave ANM TR f k T AU t Flattop window x T a PA n X X gt B KT YU dih Rectangular window W t u t u t T U t Step function Hanning window W t 0 5 0 5c0s 2n t ina wi t 4 sin 2n 1 2t T H T oe anning window W t 0 54 0 46 cos 2rx 2x 1 BUT FFT function When the complex result of FFT computation is G R jl the power spectrum can be expressed as follows Power spectrum re seas waveform
466. xpanded in the time axis direction This function is useful when you want to change the T div setting after the waveform has been displayed in single mode or when you want to extend the acquisition time to observe a particular part of the waveform thoroughly Zooming is not available on areas with less than 11 data points You set the zoom position according to it s time axis location Zoom display arrangement You can display one or two zoom windows on the screen Four display arrangements are available as follows Main Main area Z1 Z2 Zoom area lt Z2 gt lt Z1 gt or lt Z2 gt or lt Z2 gt IM 701410 01E 1 4 Setting the Acquisition and Display Conditions If you display the main area normal waveform display together with one or both zoom windows the main area will include vertical lines or zoom boxes indicating the zoom area s The center of the zoom area corresponds to the center of the zoom box Z1 Box Z2 Box 1999 07 12 20 56 55zl pan Nornal a y 200HS s 20 00 N X Main 4N 2 Main waveform I Z2 waveform Z1 waveform 5000 obtus f 5000 odus 20 00 V 5000 0 dus l 5050 obus 20 00 v CHI 10 1 5 00 U diu Normal DC Full IM 701410 01E suonounj 1 5 Analyzing the Waveform Linear Scaling lt Section 5 9 gt It is possible to append a scaling constant A an offset value B and a unit to the measureme
467. y 14 Press the Preview soft key to display the output image on the screen 15 Turning the jog shuttle changes the displayed page 16 Pressing the Quit soft key to returns to the original screen Executing print out 17 Pressing the COPY key outputs a hard copy of the screen Pressing the COPY key again aborts the output Output Example when Mag is set to Long LIVIOK OZ 15 47 5z 10k Nurnal Si 291 OaS 1 topped r oneee AnA e ore l SNS es a TT RT Lx seii oes n pia EE Pin as Enden f l rj f d gza LiELI LILL LE Ed LK ETE LES tosh ona 3 3L bal HITI CHZ 19 1 Tdgc CHi 1 00 Uzdtu 20 0 Urdiv Auto nc Ful n Pull asu IM 701410 01E 10 5 ejeq ueaJoS Jo nd no H 10 3 Outputting Screen Image to an External Printer Connector Function The screen image data can be printed to an external printer via the Centronics connector on this instrument and can be printed to a Network printer via Ethernet interface Ethernet PC Card interface optional For details see Section 13 5 Sending Screen Image to a Network Printer CAUTION To connect the external printer and the instrument use a 25 pin DSUB cable compatible to the IBM PC An improper connection can damage the instrument or other instruments that are connected Centronics Interface Specifications Pin configuration of Centronics connector DSUB 25 pin connector 13 12 11 aire aes 3 2 1
468. y the color setting menu Turn the jog shuttle to set the color Press the SELECT key to close the color setting menu O Press the ESC key to close the dialog box used to set the display color of the menu items In a similar fashion set the colors for the Waveform and Others items Graphic Color Mode Waveform Others Edge CHi Auto 9 0U 14 2 IM 701410 01E 14 1 Setting the Screen Color Setting the brightness 4 Press the soft key corresponding to Intensity to display the brightness setting menu 1999 67 69 10 38 45 j it Nornal 25 Z0HS s 5msA Graphic Color g Mode Stopped l Intensity Menu EIN 18 Waveforn 4 4 Cursor 16 L CHl 10 1 CHZ 10 1 f Edge CHI 20 0 Urdiv 5 60 U diu Auto DC Full DC Ful 0 0 U L 5 Pressthe Menu soft key 6 Turn the jog shuttle to set the brightness of the menu screen 7 Ina similar fashion set the brightness for Waveform Snap Grid and Cursor items IM 701410 01E 14 3 suone4edo 19410 B 14 2 Changing the Message Language and Click Sound Function Selecting t
469. y to select Z1 or Z2 Changing the Zooming Factor and Position 7 As you did with the zoomed waveform press the Z1 Mag Z2 Mag soft key then turn the jog shuttle to change the part which is expanded and displayed in Z1 and Z2 8 As you did with the zoomed waveform press the Z1 Position Z2 Position soft key then turn the jog shuttle to change the part which is expanded and displayed in Z1 and Z2 Setting the Scroll Speed 9 Pressthe Speed soft key then use the jog shuttle to set the scroll speed from 4 47 Executing the Scroll 10 Press the Exec soft key to perform the Scroll Press the key again to stop the Scroll IM 701410 01E 8 27 8 10 Analyzing and Searching SPI Signals lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 25 gt Function The analysis and search functions of the SPI signal can be used on products with software ROM version 3 01 or later See section 15 4 Checking the System Condition Analyzing SPI Signals Input Channel for SPI Signals Connect the signal wires of the SPI to the following terminals on the DL7100 DL7200 e CH1 Clock signal e CH2 and CH3 Data input output signal Data1 and Data2 CH4 and PodA Chip select signal The chip select signal is used to specify the section of the data input output signal to be analyzed and the target slave device For details on the settings see the next section Setting the Analysis Conditions 1 C
470. yte unit and search patterns Supported by products with software ROM version 3 01 or later See section 15 4 Checking the System Condition Overview r SS SCK gt SI SO O1 CS1 Slave 1 1 02 CS2 gt SS SCK Clock 1 SCK SDO Data output gt SI SDI Data input SO Master Slave 2 Clock signal 12345678 Data output signal Data input signal 1 i Lu Chip select signal CS zr CN NEN P l l Analysis start point Input and output as seen from the master device Analysis result Byte number 0 Data output signal 08 Data input signal C4 Chip select signal L level IM 701410 01E 1 25 suonoung 1 6 Other Useful Functions Initialization Section 4 2 This function resets the key settings to the factory settings default settings and is useful when complex settings have been made and you want to cancel all of them at once However settings related to communications and the SCSI ID are not reset Auto Set up lt Section 4 3 gt This function makes settings automatically such as vertical sensitivity time axis and trigger settings to suit the signal to be measured This is useful when the signal to be measured is unknown However there might be particular signals for which the auto set up function may not work properly Snapshot lt Section 4 5 gt If single start is not selected a waveform is upd

Yokogawa DL7100 Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents